JP2020112829A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can safely project a high-quality picture with a high visual effect.SOLUTION: A projector device 3300 is controlled to be shut down forcibly on the basis of the temperature detected by a temperature sensor 3341d of a DMD 3333 and a reference temperature. The reference temperature and whether a forcible shut-down control is to be executed are set from a sub-control substrate 3200. The projector device 3300 also initiates setting of the reference temperature and of whether a forcible shut-down control is to be executed, when a power source is input.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 181

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine or a pachinko machine.

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.

JP-A-6-35066 JP, 2009-240459, A

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high image visual effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) provided with a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) capable of projecting an image and a control means (for example, a sub-control board 3200) for performing control related to an effect,
The projection device is
Temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors 3341a, 3341b, 3341c) for detecting the temperature of a predetermined location,
The temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is a first temperature (for example, the previous detected temperature+(x% of the current detected temperature)), or a second temperature higher than the first temperature (for example, the previous detected temperature). And ((x+α)% of the detected temperature at this time) or more, a transmission unit that transmits error information that is information indicating an abnormality to the control unit,
When the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit receives error information when the temperature is the second temperature, the control unit makes a response to the error information to the projection device,
When receiving a response to the error information, the projection device transmits a rotation stop command to stop the operation in operation (for example, FAN4, FAN5, a DLP control circuit 3313, and an LED light source 3331R, (Means for sending a drive stop command to the LED driver 3314 for driving the 3331G, 3331B),
The operation stopping means is configured to stop the operation in operation when a predetermined time elapses without a response to the error information from the control means after the transmitting means transmits the error information.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to separate the correspondence between the temperature detected at a predetermined position in the projection device based on two criteria, and control is performed to stop the operation of the projection device under operation under predetermined conditions. be able to. Error information is transmitted to the control means in response to various abnormalities of the projection device, and when there is a response from the control means at that time, the respective parts (for example, circuits and fans) of the projection device are stopped in accordance with the abnormalities that have occurred. (Forced shutdown is performed), malfunctions due to heat buildup in the projection device are avoided, discomfort of images that lasts for a long time is eliminated, and high-quality images with high visual effects are displayed. It is possible to project safely. Further, even if there is no response from the control means, the operation of the projection device is automatically shut down after a predetermined time such as 30 seconds elapses, so that the malfunction of the projection device is reliably avoided and a high-quality image is obtained. A safe projection of is ensured.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high image visual effect.

It is a front perspective view of a game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a game machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is an upper perspective view of a projector apparatus. It is a perspective view when a display unit is attached to a cabinet. It is a lower perspective view of a projector device. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a left exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a right exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is a rear perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a reel screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the projector device. FIG. 1 is an overall perspective view of a projector device. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. It is a figure which shows the lens unit of a projector apparatus. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal for fixing the projector device. FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal taken along line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. 25. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of an upper side pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the attitude|position adjustment method of a lower pedestal. It is a figure which shows the connection form of a projector apparatus and adjustment PC. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a case of the projector device. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state where a heat sink and an optical element are arranged in the case of the projector device. It is a figure for explaining an air channel formed in a case of a projector device. It is a front view which shows the inside of a cabinet. It is a side view of a cabinet in a state where an upper door mechanism and a lower door mechanism are opened. It is an exploded perspective view of a lower door mechanism. It is a block diagram showing a system configuration of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a main control board. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a sub-control board. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a reel drive substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a door relay substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a sub relay board. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a scaler substrate. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a multi-output scaler LSI. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a sub liquid crystal I/F substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the split display pattern of a projector apparatus and a sub liquid crystal display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 1 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 2 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 3 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 4 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 5 of a division display pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the modification 6 of a division display pattern. It is an explanatory view for explaining communication specifications of a game machine. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a scaler board|substrate and a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a sub liquid crystal I/F board|substrate and a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged between a projector control board-sub control board. It is a figure which shows the error information transmitted as a command from each board|substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of adjustment PC. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of power supply supply of a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the interruption processing of the main control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a sub-control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a sub-control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a process when the sub control board is powered on. It is a flowchart which shows the LED control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the screen accessory control process of a sub-control board. 7 is a flowchart showing focus change request processing of the sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main board communication task of a sub-control board. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the subdevice task of a subcontrol board. It is a flow chart which shows subdevice reception interruption processing of a subcontrol board. It is a flow chart which shows subdevice initialization processing of a subcontrol board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler control process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of scaler control reception of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a scaler start-up parameter request reception of a subcontrol board. It is a flowchart which shows the scaler setting change process of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a scaler status command reception of a subcontrol board. It is a flow chart which shows a scaler reception confirmation reception time process of a sub-control board. It is a flow chart which shows sub liquid crystal control processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub-liquid crystal control reception of a sub-control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a sub liquid crystal starting parameter request reception of a sub control board. It is a flow chart which shows sub liquid crystal setting change processing of a sub control board. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of receiving a sub liquid crystal status command of a sub control board. It is a flow chart which shows a sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception processing of a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control process of a sub-control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a process upon receiving a projector control of the sub control board. 9 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a projector start-up parameter request of the sub control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector setting change process of the sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the projector reception confirmation reception time process of a sub-control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a projector error notification of the sub control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a projector status of the sub control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector drift correction process of the sub control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 1 of a scaler board|substrate. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map 2 of a scaler board|substrate. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a scaler board. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st serial line reception interruption processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process of a scaler board|substrate. It is a flow chart which shows sub device bypass transmission processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of sub-control between a scaler board-scaler reception. It is a flow chart which shows self-diagnosis processing of a scaler board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of transmission between the sub-control of a scaler board and a scaler. It is a flow chart which shows sub-control bypass transmission processing of a scaler board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of a projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector control main process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a serial line reception interrupt process of the projector control board. 6 is a flowchart showing an initialization process of a projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of reception between the sub-control of the projector control board and the projector. 7 is a flowchart showing an internal setting change process of the projector control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a projector setting value storage process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a process of transmission between the sub-control of the projector control board and the projector. 7 is a flowchart showing a status transmission data creation process of the projector control board. It is a schematic diagram which shows the memory map of a sub liquid crystal I/F substrate. It is a flow chart which shows sub liquid crystal control main processing of a sub liquid crystal I/F board. It is a flow chart which shows a serial line reception interruption processing of a sub liquid crystal I/F substrate. It is a flow chart which shows initialization processing of a sub liquid crystal I/F board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the sub-control between the sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate and the sub-liquid crystal. It is a flow chart which shows self-diagnosis processing of a sub liquid crystal I/F board. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate sub-control-sub liquid crystal transmission processing. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment of a projector apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view showing the 1st modification of a projector device. It is an exploded perspective view showing the 2nd modification of a projector device. It is a front view which shows the arrangement form of the projector apparatus which concerns on a 3rd modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the projector apparatus applied to the 4th modification to the 20th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector control main process of the projector control board which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the self-diagnosis process of the projector control board which concerns on a 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the LED temperature control table and FAN temperature control table with which the projector control board which concerns on a 4th modification was equipped. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature control table with which the projector control board which concerns on a 5th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the projector error notification reception of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 6th modification. It is a figure which shows the FAN temperature rotation speed control table with which the projector control board which concerns on a 7th modification was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of transmission between the sub-control of a projector control board concerning a 8th modification, and a projector. It is a flowchart which shows the projector initialization process of the projector control board which concerns on an 8th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the projector control processing of the sub-control board concerning the 9th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of projector control reception of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector drift correction process of the sub-control board which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the projector setting change process of the sub-control board which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment instruction|indication transmission process of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the projector control processing of the sub-control board concerning the 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 10th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process of the sub-control board which concerns on an 11th modification. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image projected by the projector apparatus which concerns on an 11th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub-control board concerning the 12th modification. It is a flow chart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub-control board concerning the 13th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table with which the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on a 14th modification is equipped. It is a flow chart which shows projector drift amendment processing of a sub-control board concerning the 14th modification. It is a figure which shows the drift correction temperature table with which the sub-control board which concerns on a 15th modification was equipped. It is a flow chart which shows the demo command transmission processing of the main control board concerning the 15th modification. It is a figure for explaining the change of the game state concerning the 16th modification. It is a figure which shows the focus adjustment frequency setting table with which the sub-control board which concerns on a 17th modification was equipped. It is a flow chart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub-control board concerning the 17th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the focus origin adjustment determination process of the sub-control board|substrate which concerns on an 18th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of starting of the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of starting of the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of the normal operation of the projector apparatus and the sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of the normal operation of the projector apparatus and the sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of screen switching of the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a figure which shows the command exchanged in the communication sequence at the time of screen switching of the projector apparatus and sub CPU which concern on a 19th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main processing performed in the main control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on a 20th modification. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed in the main control board of the pachinko machine which concerns on a 20th modification. It is a front perspective view of the game machine according to the second embodiment. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the gaming machine when the display of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism is omitted. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a top view of a display unit. It is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit which shows the irradiation state to a front screen mechanism. It is an upper perspective view showing a projector device and a projector cover. It is a block diagram showing a system configuration of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a sub-control board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the projector device. It is an upper perspective view of a projector apparatus. It is a top view of a projector apparatus. It is a rear view of a projector device. It is a bottom view showing a state where a projector device is arranged in an irradiation unit. It is an exploded perspective view of an irradiation unit. It is an upper perspective view of a projector apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector control main process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. It is a figure which shows the relationship between DMD temperature and the output data of a temperature sensor. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector setting change process of the sub control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector setting change process of the sub control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector initialization process of the projector control board. It is a figure which shows a FAN rotation speed control table. It is a figure which shows a lens temperature control table. It is a figure which shows the pattern of the image projection by a projector apparatus. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing a part of the projector device. It is a figure which shows the cross section of the optical case in a projector apparatus. It is a figure which expands and shows the cross section of the optical case in a projector apparatus. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. It is a perspective view of a projector device. 7 is a flowchart showing a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. It is a flow chart which shows LED temperature diagnostic processing of a projector control board. It is a flow chart which shows LED temperature diagnostic processing of a projector control board. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the present LED temperature and reference temperature. 7 is a flowchart showing a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a self-diagnosis process of the projector control board. It is a flowchart which shows the FAN rotation speed diagnosis process of a projector control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a projector initialization process of the projector control board. It is a figure showing a grace rotation speed until a warning before and after deterioration over time. It is a side view of a game machine provided with a plurality of projector devices. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which implement|achieves a screen inversion function. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which implement|achieves a screen inversion function. It is a figure which shows a pachinko machine which implements another screen inversion function. It is the flowchart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub control board. It is sectional drawing of the irradiation unit which can rotate a mirror mechanism. It is sectional drawing of the irradiation unit which can rotate a mirror mechanism. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which implements another screen reversal function. It is a figure which shows the pachinko machine which implements another screen reversal function. It is the flowchart which shows the production contents decision processing of the sub control board. It is a figure which shows the warning screen displayed by the instruction|indication of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the conditions regarding the display of a warning screen. It is a figure which shows the transition of DMD temperature and the display mode of a warning screen. It is a graph which shows transition of DMD temperature. It is a figure which shows the transition of DMD temperature and the display mode of a warning screen. It is a figure which shows the transition of DMD temperature and the display mode of a warning screen. 8 is a flowchart showing a projector temperature warning screen determination process of the sub control board. It is a flow chart which shows the display control processing of the warning screen of a sub-control board. 7 is a flowchart showing a status transmission data creation process of the projector control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a projector status of the sub control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a process of receiving a projector status of the sub control board. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence at the time of normal operation between the sub CPU of a sub control board and a projector apparatus. It is a figure which shows the command used by the communication sequence at the time of normal operation. It is a flow chart which shows the brightness adjustment processing of a sub-control board. It is a graph which shows the example of the brightness adjustment of an LED light source. It is a figure which shows the conditions regarding the display of a warning screen. It is a flow chart which shows the display control processing of the warning screen of a sub-control board. It is a flow chart which shows the display control processing of the warning screen of a sub-control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the warning screen displayed according to the transition of DMD temperature. 8 is a flowchart showing a projector temperature warning screen determination process of the sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the error history determination process of a sub-control board. It is a flow chart which shows the display control processing of the warning screen of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the transition of DMD temperature and the display mode of a warning screen. It is a flow chart which shows the brightness adjustment processing of a sub-control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a projector temperature warning screen determination process of the sub control board. 8 is a flowchart showing a projector temperature warning screen determination process of the sub control board. It is a figure which shows the warning screen displayed by the instruction|indication of a sub-control board. It is a figure which shows the conditions regarding the display of a warning screen. 7 is a flowchart showing an intake fan warning screen determination process of the sub control board. It is a figure which shows the outline of the game system containing the display device for games. It is sectional drawing of the display device for games. It is an exploded perspective view of a game display device.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the gaming machine 1 is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The gaming machine 1 can be played by using a game medium such as a coin, a medal, a game ball, or a token, and a card or the like which is given to or given to the player and which stores information on the game value. In the following description, it is assumed that a medal is used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 1 to the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction), The right side and the left side as viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1, respectively. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-back direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the external appearance of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 is a gaming machine main body having a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged on the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower part arranged on the lower front part of the cabinet G. And a door mechanism DD.

Further, in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction are formed at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper part and the lower part of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) each having a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (in one horizontal row) so that they can rotate in the vertical direction at a constant speed. The reels RL, RC, RR allow the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR to be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c that are substantially horizontal are formed. The first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening through which a player inserts a medal. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as an effective line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of inserted medals.

A sub display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front surface side of the main display window DD4. The sub display device DD20 displays, for example, the number of paid-out medals at the time of winning a prize or the number of credited remaining medals. Since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is usually 50, the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed on the sub display device DD20. It should be noted that when the maximum number of medals is 50, the inserted medals are paid out from the medal payout opening DD14 as they are.

On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, there is provided a start lever DD6 for rotating and driving the reels RL, RC, RR by the operation of the player and for starting the variable display of the symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the sub display device DD20, three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation), respectively. , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

A C/P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C/P button DD13 is for switching the credit/payout of medals that the player has won in the game by pressing a button. In the state where the payout is selected by switching the C/P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are paid out from the medal payout opening DD14 (cancel chute) provided in the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out and paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion DD15.

A waist panel DD18 (a waist light guide plate) is arranged below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a makeup panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, names representing various models of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side thereof. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information regarding the game by voices, sounds such as music, and the like. A sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is arranged on the right side of the main display window DD4. The sub liquid crystal display device DD19 is a so-called touch panel DD19T in which a touch sensor panel DD10T as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). Note that the touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitance type that detects a part of the human body (fingertip, etc.) or contact with an electrostatic pen, and outputs the detection signal, or It may be of a type that detects the contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs the detection signal, or of another type or structure (in-cell structure or the like). In the present embodiment, the sub-liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T can be used to perform optical adjustment of the projector device B2 described later.

The sub liquid crystal display device DD19 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and displays game information such as the number of games as the game progresses on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, depending on the player. A message or an input key for requesting selection or input is displayed.

It should be noted that in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, it is also possible to display, on the display screen thereof, the content (effect information) corresponding to the effect related to the game as the game progresses. Further, as the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, for example, an attachment having a function as a performance accessory or a dedicated attachment such as a jog dial or a push button may be mounted. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can be omitted by allocating its function to the display unit A and the like described later. A sub liquid crystal display device different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 may be arranged on the left side of the main display window DD4. As such another sub liquid crystal display device, an LED substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided on the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device, and the display surface is formed by a panel that is transparent and decorated so that it can be performed. May be formed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the interior of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display and a screen device C that displays an image by irradiation with the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object, and for example, its position (projection distance or angle Etc.) and an image generated based on the shape according to the effect information is projected, thereby enabling an advanced and powerful effect.

The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening formed in the front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming the upper part of the irradiation unit B, and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C (see FIG. 12, FIG. 13 and the like). Although details will be described later, the screen housing C10 has a box shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light to the front, and a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 and arranged so that the irradiation light from the projector device B2 is obliquely downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being externally covered by the case B22, and is arranged in the rear part of the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a flat plate-shaped upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221 that are horizontally arranged. The case B22 has an entire upper surface opened. As a result, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 21) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 forwards the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B (see FIG. 33) of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by the DMD 241 (Digital Micromirror Device: see FIG. 33) via a lens or the like. It is arranged so as to emit toward the mirror mechanism B3. Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (direction of emission of irradiation light). The mirror mechanism B3 holds an optical mirror B32 by a mirror holder B31. The mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holder B11 is formed in the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The mirror mechanism B3 is attached to the reflector holding portion B11 so that its interval can be adjusted. Thereby, the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 7, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 that inclines upward from the rear toward the front at the front portion thereof. As shown in FIG. 8, the projector cover B1 has a horizontally arranged upper wall portion B12, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged in front of the upper wall portion B12, and symmetrically arranged in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And side walls B13 and B13 that are formed. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects further forward than the cabinet G (see FIG. 5). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to project forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the projection so that the angle can be adjusted. There is.

In addition, the side wall portions B13, B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding horizontally from the lower end portion. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protruding portion B131a is located so as to correspond to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the first protruding portions B131a protruding from the side wall portions B13, B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the opening of the cabinet G in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second projecting portion B131b is located so as to correspond to the space behind the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet G. The distance along the left-right direction between the tips of the second protruding portions B131b protruding from the side wall portions B13, B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width of the space portion of the cabinet G. That is, the side wall portions B13 and B13 are formed such that the distance between the tips of the second protrusions B131b in the left-right direction is larger than the distance between the tips of the first protrusions B131a in the left-right direction. .. This allows the projector cover B1 to cover most of the internal space of the cabinet G.

Further, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip of the second protrusion B131b. When fixing the projector cover B1 to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 5), screws are respectively screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 via the screw holes B131C. Further, the protruding portions B131 horizontally project from the lower end portions of the respective side wall portions B13 and B13, so that the protruding portion B131 and the side wall portion B13 are provided at both side end portions of the projector cover B1, and the concave portion B132 is formed from the front end thereof. Are formed continuously toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the recess B132 and the cabinet G define a space BS. Further, the shapes of the upper wall portion B12 and the side wall portion B13 of the projector cover B1 are such that the distance between the lower end portion of each side wall portion B13 and the tip end portion of the second protruding portion B131b protruding from this lower end portion is the second protruding portion. The front portion of the B131b is configured to be larger than the rear portion thereof (see FIG. 8). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes larger than the rear space. When the display unit A is mounted in the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the front space of the space BS at least partially overlap each other in a top view. This space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the game machine 1 in the island facility.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 10, a perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a metal plate (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed on the entire surface of the perforated plate B15 in a substantially evenly dispersed manner. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow through the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and allows air to flow from the lower side to the upper side or from the upper side to the lower side of the projector device B2. The size and the number of the holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be seen from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower side position. The perforated plate B15 has an upper part B15a on the front side, an inclined part B15b on the middle side, and a lower part B15c on the rear side. The upper part B15a is horizontally arranged. The inclined portion B15b is formed so as to be bent obliquely downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower portion B15c is formed so as to be bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper part B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall parts B13, B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so as to cover the front part of the projector cover B1 from below with the upper part B15a and cover it from below with the inclined part B15b and the lower part B15c from the middle part to the rear part of the projector cover B1. There is. Further, the inclined portion B15b is arranged so as to surround the inclined surface B2a1 on the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 in a top view. Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the inclination angle of the inclined portion B15b (the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane) is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined surface B2a1. A front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

The front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position which is arranged in an upper position which is a standby position for prohibiting appearance of an image by irradiation light, and a front exposure position which is arranged in a lower position which is an exposure position for allowing appearance of an image by irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is pivotable between the position and the front position. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space portion reaches the perforated plate B15 without any flow resistance, and a plurality of air holes exist. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and enhance the cooling effect.

Further, since the perforated plate B15 is provided so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, the eye position of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if the irradiation unit B exists on the horizontal line of the part and looks up at the irradiation unit B from this line of sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation unit B from being viewed.

(Display unit A: screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 12, the irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, as described above, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes B131C formed in the projecting portion B131 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the display unit A can handle the irradiation unit B and the screen device C as a unit and integrally handle them.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms that cause an image to appear by the irradiation of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation targets can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as the plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes in order to diversify the image expression. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are relatively displaced with respect to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. (See FIG. 20). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are larger and heavier than the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, driving the front screen mechanism E1 requires a larger driving force than driving the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10)
As described above, the screen device C has the box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 13, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 standing on the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 standing on the left end of the bottom plate C1. , And a back plate C4 provided upright on the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side where the player is located and the top side where the irradiation unit B is located are open. A box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are separately molded into predetermined shapes, and predetermined functional components such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. As a result, even if the entire unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized, it is possible to standardize the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 for each plate member. Further, since it is possible to partially replace each plate member, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape in a top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central placing portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right placing portion C12 and a left placing portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction around the central placing portion C11. .. These mounting portions C11, C12, C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D into the central mounting portion C11. The right mounting portion C12 mounts the right movable body base C5 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable body base C5. The left mounting portion C13 mounts the left movable body base C6 in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. The right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 each have a three-dimensional pattern formed on the side surfaces on the inner side in the left-right direction. That is, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 also function as decorative members. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

Further, the front portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward, so that the front end portion is located below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front portion C14. The front portion C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 when the display unit A is installed while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 5) of the cabinet G, so that the front portion C14 can be moved backward in the cabinet G. It is possible to perform positioning. The display unit A can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet G by being screwed to the front surface of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front portion C14. It has become.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are arranged beside the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. .. Specifically, an operator located on the front surface side of the cabinet G releases the screw of the display unit A from the cabinet G and removes the screw. Then, the user extends his/her hand into the cabinet G, holds the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A with both hands, and takes the display unit A out of the cabinet G. After that, by reaching into the screen device C through one of the operation openings C21 of the removed display unit A and rotating the crank gear E21 which is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C21, the front screen in the locked state is rotated. The mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

In the state where the upper door mechanism UD is opened, the operator reaches from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C to open the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A from the cabinet G.

Further, a motor housing portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. A drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 (see FIG. 20) is positioned and arranged by the motor housing portion C22. The right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 each have a first support portion C23 that rotatably supports a gear shaft E21a of a crank gear E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2, and an intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The second support portion C24 that rotatably supports the shaft member E3 that serves as the gear shaft is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are arranged between the right movable body base C5 and the right side plate C2 in the left-right direction. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A is arranged between the left movable body base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 15, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a concave portion CO for positioning and arranging the relay board CK is formed in the lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK includes various functional parts in the display unit A (for example, the projector device B2, the front screen drive mechanism E2, the reel screen drive mechanism F2, etc.) and various functional parts other than the display unit A (sub-control board SS described later). ) Is a relay board for relaying a wiring (not shown) with the wiring board. The relay board CK includes a screen drive control board CS (see FIGS. 37 and 42) for exchanging signals and the like with the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2.

An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged on the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. Accordingly, when the front screen mechanism E1 at the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G. After that, by extending the hand from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C and rotating the intermediate gear E23 which is seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the front screen mechanism E1 in the locked state can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

The back plate C4 is arranged in front of the rear ends of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. Accordingly, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the space GS is formed by the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 of the screen device C. Will be defined. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. Accordingly, even if the relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, it is possible to prevent the relay board CK from interfering with the back wall G3 of the cabinet G due to the space GS.

Further, a through hole G11 is formed in the intermediate support plate G1 at a position facing the space GS (see FIG. 5). The through hole G11 is formed such that its opening surrounds the relay substrate CK in a top view. Then, the relay board CK is arranged so that the connector CK1 to which wiring from a device (a sub-control board SS or the like described later) housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected to the through hole G11. .. As a result, the electrical connection between the relay board CK of the display unit A and the device housed in the lower space of the cabinet G is performed by inserting the wiring from the device housed in the lower space into the through hole G11. This can be done by connecting to CK1.

By thus arranging the relay substrate CK on the outside of the screen device C, the wiring work is facilitated, and it is not necessary to secure an installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C, The degree of freedom in designing the screen device C is expanded. Further, the heat generated from the relay board CK can be easily discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole G3a (see FIG. 2) formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

The wiring connecting the relay board CK arranged in the upper space of the cabinet G and the equipment housed in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear portion of the intermediate support plate G1. Therefore, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind the various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, the degree of freedom in wiring arrangement can be increased.

Since the relay board CK is arranged in the rear part of the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. In some cases, Therefore, in order to facilitate the connection of the wiring from the device housed in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes through the through hole G11 and is located below the intermediate support plate G1. It may be configured so as to project. The color of the connector CK1 may be a color having a high light reflectance (for example, white).

As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2, and the gear shaft E21a and the shaft member E3 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 are positioned and arranged on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay board CK is positioned and arranged with respect to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the screen drive mechanisms F2, E2, and the relay board CK are positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2, C3, and the back plate C4, respectively, and The plates are positioned and arranged on different plates. Therefore, even if the display unit A as a whole cannot be shared between the models of the gaming machine 1, it can be shared among the models in the unit of board. As a result, it becomes possible to manufacture the display unit at a lower cost than when manufacturing the display unit for each model.

Further, since the plates C1 to C4 of the screen housing C10 are connected by screw fastening, the plates C1 to C4 can be released from the connection by loosening the screws. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled so that the plates C1 to C4 can be replaced. As a result, the functional components of the display unit can be replaced on a plate-by-plate basis, and the specifications of the display unit A can be changed while reusing the functional components that are not the replacement target of the display unit A. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 20, the right movable body base C5 is arranged on the left inside of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. The left movable body base C6 is arranged on the right inside of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, which are decorative members, make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the drive mechanisms E2 and F2. As a result, the aesthetics of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with a recess for arranging the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, these can be easily positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between a front exposed position and a front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and is present in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes the projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is placed at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes the projection target of the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image by the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes the projection target of the projector device B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes the projection target of the projector device B2.

(Display unit A: screen device C: fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed to the bottom plate C1 of the screen casing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflection part D1, a right surface reflection part D2, a left surface reflection part D3, and a bottom surface reflection part D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces onto which the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflective portions as long as the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of reflective surfaces at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, a reflecting portion having a curved or arcuate reflecting surface whose center of curvature is located on the front surface side and which has continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis may be provided.

The front reflection part D1 has a reflection surface arranged to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation unit B arranged in the upper front part of the fixed screen mechanism D to the front. Is set. The right surface reflection part D2 and the left surface reflection part D3 are joined to the right side part and the left side part of the front reflection part D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front reflection part D1. The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width of the front reflection portion D1 in the left-right direction. As a result, in the right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3, the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflecting surface is easily directed toward the front reflecting portion D1. The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, also in the lower surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of the irradiation light reflected on the reflecting surface is easily directed toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed toward the front reflecting portion D1 while an image by the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the reflection surface is set lower than the lightness of each reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected from the reflection surface of the irradiation light is smaller than the amount of light reflected from the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents white blur due to light mixing due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In addition, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, the reflection of the irradiation light on the other reflecting portions D2, D3, D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, so that the white blur can be reduced while the image is strongly appearing on the front reflecting portion D1.

As the lightness, the brightness in the L*a*b* color system (L*a*b* color space) or the L*u*v* color system (L*u*v* color space) is adopted. However, any other color can be defined as long as it can express other colors with relative values with respect to white.

The lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflection surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. There is no particular limitation as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value that is about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the lightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be made black. For example, a white paint is used as the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the same as that of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. What added the black pigment to the coating material applied to a base material may be used.

In such a coating, the brightness of the reflection surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only white pigments among white pigments and black pigments, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white pigments and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of black pigment to white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is higher than that in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or It may be about 10 to 20%). As the coating material to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known coating materials for screens can be appropriately adopted and can be adjusted according to the type of the screen (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

The black pigment is not included in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, but the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored to reduce the brightness of the base material itself.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10. It is desirable to reduce the brightness of the other members (members other than the screen) arranged in the. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, as for the surrounding wall, it is not necessary to consider that an image is projected as a screen. The lower the better. That is, it is preferable that the color of the surrounding wall be closer to black.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 19, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both surfaces. Have The front screen member E11 is formed by applying screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has a flat projection surface E11a.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. In addition, the holding recess E121 is set to have two depths, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly across both ends in the lateral direction passing through the center portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the peripheral step E121a and the linear step E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, the deformation of the front screen support E12 in the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing the projection surface E11a to be distorted.

The front screen support E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front exposure position. Further, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is located at the front standby position. The first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness, for example, a pattern related to a game effect.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are formed separately and then integrated by being bonded with an adhesive. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 is in a state where the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11 even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, but any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material for the flat panel forming the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed is appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit A: screen device C: front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the front screen drive mechanism E2 includes a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right front screen drive mechanism E2 connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIG. 17, the front screen mechanism E1 is configured so as to incline upward from the rear end toward the front end when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in the front standby position (in the standby posture). ing. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the perforated plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 of the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2.

As described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is placed in the front standby position, the posture of the front screen mechanism E1 is changed from the rear end of the front screen mechanism E1 to the front end of the front screen mechanism E1. Compared to the case where the posture is set, it is possible to suppress the irradiation light emitted by the irradiation unit B from being blocked by the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when it is located at the front standby position can be brought closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be upsized even within the limited space of the display unit A. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when it is placed at the front standby position is set to the projector device B2. Can be brought closer together. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further increased in size.

As shown in FIG. 14, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is positioned such that the upper end portion (one end portion) of the crank member E22 is an upper portion when the front end position of the front end of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the front exposure position (in the exposure position). Is linked to.

The crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 (see FIG. 13) at an intermediate position. As a result, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end and the lower end (the other end) about the intermediate position as the center of rotation. Note that this intermediate position coincides with the central axis of rotation of the front screen mechanism E1.

As described above, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 arranged at the front exposure position. Further, the crank member E22 is connected at its upper end portion (one end portion) to a position on the rear surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 which is an upper portion when the crank member E22 is disposed at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture). .. With the above configuration, the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position can be reduced, so that the front screen mechanism E1 can be upsized.

A slide groove (not shown) is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove is formed to have a U-shape when viewed from the side. A slide member E26 (see FIG. 14) is movably engaged with the slide groove. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the slide groove. The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position of the crank gear E21. As shown in FIG. 13, the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2. The gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 has a line segment that connects the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, and is located between the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. It is set so as to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the and.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction in which the lower region of the crank member E22 is rotated, the gear shaft E21a moves in the direction in which all components of this force are applied. Exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure having a three-degree link with 0 degrees of freedom, in which the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends and the slide member E26 is a free end, is formed. The front screen mechanism E1 does not move even when is pushed by hand because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the second support portion C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposed position, the line segment connecting the gear shaft E21a and the eccentric position of the slide member E26 connects the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the center point of the slide member E26. The tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the slide groove of the crank member E22 because it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture and the rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, since the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position is movable along the slide groove, the intermediate position of the crank member E22 and the gear shaft of the crank gear E21. A one-degree-of-freedom two-joint link is formed in which E21a is a fixed end and the slide member E26 is a free end that is movable along the slide groove. When the slide member E26 rotates, the slide member E26 slides along the slide groove, whereby the crank member E22 rotates about the intermediate position as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 rotates. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor E25 is a stepping motor and is electrically connected to the sub control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor E25 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and drive-controlled by the main control board MS.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is gradually accelerated from 0 in the stopped state in the standby posture or the exposed posture, reaches the maximum velocity in the intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture, and then is gradually reduced, When the exposure posture or the standby posture is reached, the stopped state becomes 0 again. As a result, the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped with a small angular acceleration (inertia moment), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce breakdown and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

The right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3 (see FIG. 13).

In the above structure, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the shaft member E3 rotate integrally. Then, as the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the front standby position and the front It will move to and from the exposed position.

As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is applied to the two crank members E22. It is possible to transmit evenly. Therefore, as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3, it is possible to prevent the driving load from being concentrated on one of the two crank members E22. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B arranged to the right of the fixed screen mechanism D, it does not hinder the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D.

In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as the rotating shaft of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, the degree of freedom in disposing the shaft member E3 is increased, and the shaft member E3 can be arranged so as not to obstruct the disposition of another accessory such as the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging another accessory while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 to a desired degree.

Further, since the shaft member E3 is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected on the fixed screen mechanism D is not blocked by the shaft member E3. Further, since the center axis of rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, compared with the case where it is arranged behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length (the length of the crank member E22) between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis can be shortened. Therefore, even when the space inside the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A cannot be upsized, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained at a desired level.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 18, the reel screen mechanism F1 is composed of a curved flat plate. The reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape when viewed from the side, which is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction. On the surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, a pattern is formed on the peripheral portion, and the inner peripheral area of the peripheral portion serves as the projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that is convex on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of light from the projector device B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is arranged at the reel exposure position. Further, a pattern is formed on the rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 that is on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel standby position.

The reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposed position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is located at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a can display an image by irradiation of irradiation light.

(Display unit A: screen device C: reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIG. 20, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 has two arm members F21 (not shown on the right side), an arc gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One ends of the two arm members F21 are connected to the right end rear surface and the left end rear surface of the reel screen mechanism F1. A support shaft F21a (not shown on the left side) is formed on the outer surface of the other end of the two arm members F21 so as to project outward in the left-right direction. The support shafts F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6. This allows the two arm members F21 to rotate about the support shaft F21a. The support shafts F21a coincide with the rotation center shaft of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a arranged on the right side. A motor shaft gear F23 is meshed with the arcuate gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. In the present embodiment, the drive motor F24 is a stepping motor and is electrically connected to the sub control board SS via the relay board CK and the sub relay board SN (see FIG. 34). Drive controlled. The drive motor F24 may be connected to the main control board MS via the relay board CK and driven and controlled by the main control board MS.

In the above configuration, when the drive motor F24 is driven under the control of the sub control board SS, the motor shaft gear F23 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear F23, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, as the arm member F21 is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the arcuate gear F22, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated around the rotation center axis, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position are reached. Will work between.

(Display unit A: screen device C: sensor mechanism)
As described above, the operating ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIGS. 17 and 18). The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms E2 and F2. That is, the drive of the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive of the reel screen mechanism F1 are not linked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to know the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub control board SS (see FIG. 34) uses the front standby position as the origin position and grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from this origin position. ing. Similarly, with the reel standby position as the origin position, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position.

However, when the operation of the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not normally performed, or when the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved during the power-off, the sub control board SS Cannot grasp the accurate positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. If the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, they may interfere with each other.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism (not shown) for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, the sub control board SS executes a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the origin position (standby position) based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism.

For example, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are arranged in the overlapping range in the operation range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is arranged at the front exposure position, The reel screen mechanism F1 is not arranged at the reel exposure position. Therefore, when the sensor mechanism detects that the front screen is at the front exposed position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not present at the reel exposed position.

(Screen surface treatment)
Next, the surface processing of the screen will be described. A projection target screen such as the front reflection part D1, the right reflection part D2, the left reflection part D3, the bottom reflection part D4 of the fixed screen mechanism D, the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11, and the projection surface F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1. Is textured to achieve appropriate performance. The embossing is a process in which a texture (wrinkle pattern) is formed on the surface. The projection target screen or the like is molded by using a metal mold having a textured finish, and thereby a wrinkle pattern is formed on the surface of the projection target screen or the like. With such a wrinkle pattern on the surface, it is possible to effectively prevent the reflection of the light source, and further it is possible to realize a good projection image.

The texture processing includes a pattern called “matte finish”, and in the present embodiment, for example, a matte pattern having an average depth of about 25 μm to 30 μm and a draft of 3% or more (matte finish No. 5). Is preferred.

In addition, as a surface treatment of a screen or the like, two-layer coating is applied in order to realize appropriate performance. Two-layer coating means that coatings with different properties are respectively coated on top and bottom (in two layers). For example, a high-brightness paint having a high reflectivity (for example, 2P-600 silver which is “super-brightness silver” of metallic tone paint) is used for the undercoat, and a matte paint (for example, “matte paint” is used for the topcoat. HG-650 white) which is "white" can be used. It is also possible to add about 5% of a matting agent (silica) to HG-650 white.

In such coating, the film thickness of the topcoat is, for example, 22 to 23 μm, and the film thickness of the undercoat is, for example, about 1 μm. By such coating, the glossiness at a gloss of 60° becomes 4 to 5.

2P-600 Silver uses vapor-deposited aluminum as the aluminum pigment, and the weight concentration (PWC) of the aluminum pigment in the coating film is set to 20 to 30%, which is set higher than that of general silver paint, resulting in higher gloss. A value (reflection performance) is shown. In addition, the composition of HG-650 white is that resin is 20 to 30%, titanium oxide is 30 to 40%, silica as a matting agent is 5 to 10%, additive is 0.5 to 2%, and solvent is 30-40%.

In addition to this, as the top coat paint, a paint in which glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent are added in a predetermined ratio to HG-650 white, or a coating in which silica is added in addition to the beads is used. It can also be used. It is also possible to use HG-650F clear paint or a paint in which beads having various average particle diameters are added to the HG-650F clear at a predetermined ratio as a matting agent. The film thickness can be adjusted variously, for example, from 16 to 23 μm. The composition of HG-650F clear resin is 20 to 30%, silica as a matting agent is 2 to 5%, additive is 0.5 to 2%, and solvent is 60 to 70%.

Further, as another undercoat paint, HG-650 white or a paint in which glass-based or resin-based beads having various average particle diameters as a matting agent are added in a predetermined ratio to HG-650 white can also be used. Further, the film thickness can be adjusted variously, for example, from 1 to 21 μm.

As described above, it is possible to effectively prevent the reflection of the light source by forming the screen or the like to be projected by the embossing or applying the two-layer coating, and to further improve the projection image projection. Can be realized. Further, the above-mentioned two-layer coating can be applied to the textured screen, accessory, or the like. The material of the screen or the like to be projected is, for example, black or white ABS resin or transparent polycarbonate resin, but is not limited to these.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 21, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. A sub-control board SS, which will be described later, is connected to the projector device B2 via a relay board CK. Although not shown in FIG. 21, the relay substrate CK and the sub control substrate SS are connected via a scaler substrate SK (see FIGS. 37 and 43) described later. The sub-control board SS controls the projector control board B23 in accordance with the rendering operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24 to provide a visual effect. Display the image. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A and the like, the adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the projector control board B23 (see FIGS. 30 and 37) of the projector device B2. The adjustment PC 1000 is used to adjust the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and perform focus initialization (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is adopted as the adjustment device of the projector device B2, but the adjustment device of the projector device B2 is a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone in which the adjustment program (application software) is installed. Alternatively, it may be a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. As shown in FIG. 33, the optical mechanism B24 includes LED light sources 240R and 240G, which emit R (red), G (green), and B (blue) light as constituent elements arranged around the lens unit B21. 240B, DMD 241, and a focus mechanism 242 for performing focus adjustment for the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21.

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 so as to project the irradiation light based on the command from the sub-control board SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 to move the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control board SS, thereby performing focus adjustment when the irradiation light is projected. The EEPROM 231 stores data relating to the setting/adjustment of the projector device B2 by the control LSI 230. Although not shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 has a ROM in which a control program and the like are stored, and a DRAM used in a work area related to setting/adjustment of the projector device B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly configured by the DLP control circuit 232, the LED driver 233, and the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the DMD 241 of the optical mechanism B24.

The DMD 241 is one in which mirrors corresponding to pixels corresponding to display resolution are integrated on the main surface of a semiconductor chip. The DMD 241 is configured such that each mirror is tilted +10° or −10° around an axis along a diagonal line with respect to the main surface by the electrostatic field action of the memory element immediately below each mirror. With such a configuration, each mirror of the DMD 241 is switched between an ON state (a state that reflects light in a predetermined direction) and an OFF state (a state that reflects light outside the predetermined direction). That is, when each mirror of the DMD 241 is in the ON state, it guides the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B via the dichroic mirror or the like (not shown) to the lens unit B21 via the dichroic mirror or the like, while turning it off. In the state, the light incident from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B via the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected toward a direction other than the lens unit B21.

The DLP control circuit 232 controls the LED driver 233 that drives the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B, and outputs the lights of the RGB colors from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B in a time-division manner to the DMD 241 via a dichroic mirror (not shown). Incident on. At this time, the DLP control circuit 232 turns the mirror corresponding to which pixel into the ON state or the OFF state at which timing according to the projected image, that is, which color of the light of each color of RGB, which timing. Determines whether to reflect in a predetermined direction by controlling the ON/OFF state of each mirror of the DMD 241.

By the control of the DLP control circuit 232 as described above, the light reflected in the predetermined direction by the DMD 241 advances to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and finally the mirror mechanism B3. By being reflected, it is guided to the projection target. As a result, the irradiation light is projected on the screen or accessory that is the projection target, and an image according to the effect is formed.

In the present embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. In addition, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and shortens the projection distance of the irradiation light as much as possible by setting the contrast ratio to 1000:1, for example. ing. As a result, the display unit A including the projector device B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mechanical structure of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an under cover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as constituent elements that serve as an exterior. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An under cover B223 is arranged on the lower surface of the case B22 so as to cover it. The under cover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 8) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall B12, and the lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end of the case B22 so as to cover the upper surface opening of the case B22. The lower pedestal B221 is connected. A procedure for mounting and adjusting the projector device B2 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 23, 24, and 33, the projector device B2 includes a lens unit B21, LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B, and LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, and a DMD 241 as internal components. The DMD board 241a, the plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, the intake fans 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), and the projector control board B23. In the case B22, the lens unit B21 is accommodated while the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 is covered by the lens unit cover B222, and the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, the DMD board 241a, and the plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B. , 243D, intake fans 244A and 244B, and exhaust fan 245 are housed. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22. Although not particularly shown in FIG. 33 and the like, a temperature sensor B25 (see FIGS. 21 and 37) including, for example, a thermistor is mounted on the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD board 241a. These temperature sensors B25 detect temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and near the lens unit B21, and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23.

The lens unit B21 includes an optical case B21a that houses a dichroic mirror, a reflection plate, and the like (not shown), a lens group 210A that includes the projection lens 210, a lens holder B21b that is provided at the front of the optical case B21a while holding the lens group 210A, and A focus mechanism 242 is provided on the front right side of the optical case B21a so that a part of the lens holder B21b can be moved in the optical axis direction (front-back direction). The optical case B21a is provided with openings for exposing the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the DMD 241 from the outside to the inside. The rear part of the lens holder B21b is fixed to the front part of the optical case B21a, while the front part is relatively moved in the front-rear direction (optical axis direction) by the focus mechanism 242 with respect to the rear part. The projection lens 210 is held in the. A so-called lens shift mechanism (not shown) is provided in the lens unit B21, and a horizontal or vertical position (horizontal image position or vertical direction) of an image projected by using the lens shift mechanism is provided. Image position) can be finely adjusted.

The focus mechanism 242 is for focusing on the reflection surfaces of the reflection portions D1 to D4 and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a that are displaced with respect to the projector device B2 while changing the focal length of the projection lens 210. The focus mechanism 242 is arranged along the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 and a rack member 242A that is movable integrally with the front side portion of the lens holder B21b that holds the projection lens 210, and is screwed to the rack member 242A. It has a lead screw 242B that is rotatable while rotating, and a focus motor 242C that rotates the lead screw 242B. The focus motor 242C is connected to the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23.

For example, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in a predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the front side by the feed screw operation, and the projection lens 210 also moves to the front side together with the rack member 242A. Since the focal length is relatively long, the focal point (focus position) can be adjusted to a distance. On the other hand, when the focus motor 242C rotates the lead screw 242B in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the rack member 242A moves to the rear side by the operation of the feed screw, and the projection lens 210 becomes the front side together with the rack member 242A. As a result of moving to, the focal length becomes relatively short, so that the focus (focus position) is adjusted to the closer one.

With such a focus mechanism 242, the focal length can be dynamically changed in association with the movement of the projection planes E11a and F1a. Further, for example, when the projection target is changed from the projection surface E11a to the projection surface F1a, or vice versa, the optical path lengths from the projection lens 210 to the respective projection targets are different to some extent, so that the respective optical paths are changed. It is possible to statically change the focus (focus position) so that the focal length becomes appropriate according to the length.

The front part of the lens holder B21b and the projection lens 210 are covered with a lens unit cover B222. The lens unit cover B222 is provided with a light-transmitting surface B222a that transmits the irradiation light from the projection lens 210, and the light emitted from the projection lens 210 passes through the light-transmitting surface B222a and proceeds to the mirror mechanism B3. ..

The LED substrate 240Ra is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear right side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240R is exposed inside the optical case B21a. The LED substrate 240Ga is disposed inside the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear rear side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240G is exposed inside the optical case B21a. The LED substrate 240Ba is arranged inside the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the rear left side of the optical case B21a, and the LED light source 240B is exposed inside the optical case B21a. The DMD substrate 241a is arranged in the case B22 so as to be adjacent to the left side surface of the optical case B21a, and the DMD 241 is exposed inside the optical case B21a. Here, in the present embodiment, as the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the DMD 241, the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, while the LED light source 240R and the DMD 241 are relatively high. It tends to be low.

As shown in FIG. 24A, the focus mechanism 242 is arranged on the right side of the lens holder B21b, and the projection lens 210 is arranged on the front part of the lens holder B21b. The front part of the lens holder B21b is movable in the optical axis direction of the projection lens 210 by the focus mechanism 242. Although not described in detail, the focus mechanism 242 includes a stepping motor, a lead screw, a carriage, and the like, and is configured to be movable in the optical axis direction in the front portion of the lens holder B21b.

That is, the projection lens 210 can be moved by the focus mechanism 242 integrally with the front part of the lens holder B21b, and as shown in FIG. 24A, from the rear side to the front side along the optical axis direction. Or, it moves from the front side to the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the light from the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B reaches the DMD 241 via a collimator, a dichroic mirror or the like (not shown), is reflected by the DMD 241, and then is reflected by the dichroic mirror or the like to a lens group 210A. And is finally emitted through the projection lens 210.

The projection lens 210 is configured to move in the optical axis direction as described above. As a result, focus adjustment is performed, and a clear and focused image is displayed on the screen or the accessory whose position is changed by movement.

The projector device B2 is controlled by the sub-control board SS so that the sub-control board SS transmits video data relating to an image such as an effect and projects the video on a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub control board SS moves the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the effect contents by controlling the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2.

Here, the sub-control board SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the effect, and the projection surfaces E11a and F1a of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D are controlled. , Adjust the focus so that the image is projected clearly.

The heat sink 243R is arranged on the right side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ra. The heat sink 243G is arranged on the rear side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ga. The heat sink 243B is arranged in the center of the case B22 and is in partial contact with the back surface of the LED substrate 240Ba. The heat sink 243D is arranged on the left side in the case B22 and partially contacts the back surface of the DMD substrate 241a. Here, in the present embodiment, regarding the fin outer size of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, the heat sinks 243R and 243G are relatively large, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D dissipate the heat generated in each of the LED substrates 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD substrate 241a into the air, thereby changing the temperature of the optical element or the substrate until the optical characteristics are largely changed. Dissipate heat efficiently so as not to raise. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat radiation members, are made of an aluminum material having high heat conductivity in order to enhance the heat radiation effect, and have a plurality of heat radiation fins to increase the contact area with air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged close to the back surface of the right front portion of the case B22 and close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged close to the back surface of the left side portion of the case B22 and close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged close to the back surface of the rear part of the case B22 and close to the heat sink 243G.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, an intake port B22A is provided in the right front part of the case B22 with which the intake fan 244A is in close proximity, and the heat sink 243R is close to face the intake port B22A. An exhaust port B22E is provided on the right rear portion of the case B22. An intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side portion of the case B22, which is adjacent to the intake fan 244B, and the other portion of the left side portion of the case B22 is aligned with the intake port B22B. The intake port B22C is provided so that the air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space S. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22, which is close to the exhaust fan 245.

That is, as shown in FIG. 33, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after being forcibly taken in by the intake fan 244A from the intake port B22A, it is exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while removing heat from the heat sink 243R. An air flow path P1 is formed as a flow of air. Further, in the case B22, after being forcibly sucked by the intake fan 244B from the intake port B22B, the heat is removed from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G while being forced by the exhaust fan 45 from the exhaust port B22D. An air flow path P2 is formed as a flow of air exhausted to the. Further, in the case B22, the air flow path is a flow of air that is forcibly exhausted by the exhaust fan 45 from the exhaust port B22D while absorbing heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B after being sucked from the intake port B22C. P3 is formed.

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with the under cover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, etc. are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba and the DMD board 241a arranged in the case B22, and the focus mechanism 242.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: position/orientation adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 is a metal plate member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIGS. 6 and 8) of the projector cover B1, and includes the rectangular main body portion 2200 and the main body portion 2200. Left and right ends 2201a and 2201b, which are formed by bending the left and right sides downward and outward and extend to the left and right sides with a step difference with the main body 2200, and a partial portion from the rear side to the rear of the main body 2200. Has a rear end portion 2202 extending therethrough. The main body 2200 and the rear end 2202 are provided with three connection holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the main body 2200. Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screw fastening. In this embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged at each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameters of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 28) inserted and fastened therein.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that substantially corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. Three connecting screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the lower pedestal B221 so as to project upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line within a plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 inserts the coil spring 2211 into each of the connecting screw portions 2210, inserts the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A, and sandwiches the coil spring 2211 between the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. In this state, the nut 2213 is fastened from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 via the washer 2212, whereby the upper pedestal B220 is connected while being suspended from the lower surface thereof. As shown in FIG. 23, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the under cover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIG. 23 and FIGS. 25 to 27, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 such that their intervals can be adjusted. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 includes a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

By using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so as to be positionally adjustable and the optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 28 shows how the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower diagram of FIG. 28(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and fastened in the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper diagram of FIG. 28(a) is the upper diagram of FIG. 28(a). It is sectional drawing which follows the BB' line shown in the following figure. 28 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, the periphery of the remaining square hole 2201c in the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b is the same.

As shown in FIG. 28A, the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to a nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged so as to follow the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 by screws. The right end 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 by the same screwing.

Here, in FIG. 28A, a hatched portion indicated by a symbol A is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 28A, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed at substantially the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion of the symbol A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

28B shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is displaced in the direction of arrow E with respect to FIG. The upper diagram of FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D′ shown in the lower diagram of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 28B, the screw axis of the mounting screw T is relatively displaced to the left within the opening range of the rectangular hole 2201c, and is within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion indicated by the symbol C. It is possible to move with.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, in the projector device B2, the attachment position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. Thereby, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted as the reference direction so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-back direction.

FIG. 29 shows a connecting structure of the lower pedestal B221 to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is coupled to the upper pedestal B220 by the coupling hole 2200A, the coupling screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the coupling portion R2. Note that FIG. 29 shows the connecting portion R2 at one place, but the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3 are also the same.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. It A coil spring 2211 is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge portion of the connecting hole 2200A. By such a coil spring 2211, the portion near the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is urged in the direction (vertical direction) away from each other, so that the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 are screwed together. Preventing looseness at the mating part.

In such a connecting portion R2, the gap between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is changed while being urged by the coil spring 2211 by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening direction or the loosening direction. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the interval between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 29). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in a direction closer to the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a higher position. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connection R2 is increased. That is, the portion near the connecting portion R2 of the lower pedestal B221 is displaced in a direction away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted to a lower position.

Also in the other connecting portions R1 and R3, the height position near the connecting portions R1 and R3 of the lower pedestal B221 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the tightening amount of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are not connected on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. Specifically, the connecting lines form a triangle. Are arranged as follows. That is, since the height of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by the tightening amount of the nut 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-back direction. It is possible to adjust the degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space with respect to either the horizontal direction or the vertical direction.

Such attitude adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221 with light. At that time, an image is projected on the screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the posture of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. Thereby, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is displayed on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the optical axis direction can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the attitude of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur in the image display mode.

As shown in FIG. 30, adjustment in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector device B2 via the sub-control board SS or the like. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is not only adjusted in the optical axis direction but also checked for a display image on a screen or the like at the time of inspection at the factory. , Various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying an image are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the projector control board B23 of the projector device B2 during the adjustment work (see FIG. 37). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000 changes optical parameters relating to the projection position of the irradiation light in the projector device B2, focus adjustment, and the like. The projection position and the optical parameter adjusted appropriately in this way are adjusted value data (horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E adjustment values, vertical position (vertical direction) The image position) AE adjustment value and the focus position AE adjustment value) are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 (see FIG. 106). When the adjustment value data of the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, and the focus position stored in the EEPROM 231 is not supplied to the projector device B2 for transportation after shipment from the factory, and the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall. But you can use it as is. Such horizontal position adjustment data and vertical adjustment data are acquired to control the lens shift mechanism of the lens unit B21, and focus position adjustment value data are acquired to control the focus mechanism 242. .. The horizontal position A to E adjustment values, the vertical position A to E adjustment values, the focus position A to E adjustment values, and the horizontal position (horizontal image position) A to E offsets described below, and the vertical position ( Vertical image position) AE offset, focus position AE offset, and focus drift correction values AE of "AE" are, for example, "A" is the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and "B" is The projection planes E11a and “C” of the front screen member E11 correspond to the adjustment value data corresponding to the projection plane F1a of the reel screen mechanism F1, and “D” and “E” indicate future expandability (projection plane is It is a backup that takes into consideration (when it increases).

As is clear from what has been described above with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the projector device B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction mainly in accordance with the mounting position with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the upper pedestal B220, and at the same time, The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture of the side pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 to each other are provided at three locations, but if at least three locations are not on the same straight line, four locations are provided. You may make it provide a connection part above. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210. However, these connecting holes and connecting screw portions may be provided upside down. The connecting screw portion is not limited to the one formed integrally with the pedestal as in the present embodiment, but may be any one that can be fixed to one pedestal. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that is fixed by penetrating the lower pedestal.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: intake/exhaust structure of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the case B22 of the projector device B2 is provided with three intake ports B22A, B22B, B22C and two exhaust ports B22D, B22E. Of the three intake ports B22A, B22B, B22C, two intake ports B22A, B22B are provided with intake fans 244A, 244B, while one intake port B22C is not provided with an intake fan. Further, one of the two exhaust ports B22D and B22E is provided with an exhaust fan 245, while the other exhaust port B22E is not provided with an exhaust fan.

In the intake port B22A, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244A, and the flow of this air passes through the heat sink 243R as the air flow path P1 to remove heat from the heat sink 243R. After that, the air flow path P1 linearly flows from the heat sink 243R to the exhaust port B22E, and is naturally discharged (exhausted heat) from the exhaust port B22E to the outside of the case B22.

Also at the intake port B22B, air is forcibly taken into the case B22 by the intake fan 244B. The flow of air passes through the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G while passing through a part of the empty space S as the air flow path P2, thereby removing heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G. After that, the air flow path P2 is drawn into the exhaust fan 245 and flows so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D, and is forcibly discharged (exhausted heat) from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22.

At the intake port B22C, air is semi-forcedly taken into the case B22 mainly by the pulling force of the exhaust fan 245. This air flow mainly passes through the heat sinks 243B and 243G while passing through a considerable portion of the empty space S as the air flow path P3, thereby taking heat from the plurality of heat sinks 243B and 243G. After that, the air flow path P3 also flows so as to bend toward the exhaust port B22D by being drawn into the exhaust fan 245, and merges with the air flow path P2 and is forcibly discharged from the exhaust port B22D to the outside of the case B22. (Exhaust heat). The intake fans 244A and 244B and the exhaust fan 245 function as a cooling device for the projector device B2.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED light sources 240G and 240B have relatively high heat generation characteristics, while the LED light sources 240R and DMD 241 have relatively low heat generation characteristics. The LED substrates 240Ga and 240Ba on which the LED light sources 240G and 240B having high heat generation characteristics are mounted are in thermal contact with the heat sinks 243G and 243B through which the plurality of air flow paths P2 and P3 pass.

Here, the plurality of air flow paths P2, P3 flow in from separate intake ports B22B, B22C, but merge at one exhaust port B22D, so that the exhaust ports B22D serve as a common ventilation port and flow out from the exhaust port B22D. It has become. As a result, the plurality of air flow paths P2, P3 are merged and forcibly discharged to form a smooth flow, and the plurality of heat sinks 243G, 243B can also efficiently take heat and cool. ..

Further, since the plurality of air flow paths P2, P3 are efficiently and forcibly discharged by the exhaust fan 245, heat accumulation by the plurality of optical elements such as the LED light sources 240G, 240B and the DMD 241 in the projector device B2 is effective. Therefore, overheating of optical components such as lenses can be prevented.

Further, the three air flow paths P2, P3 leading to the one exhaust port B22D cool three heat sinks 243D, 243B, 243G, which are larger than the two air flow paths P2, P3. The plurality of optical elements such as the DMD 241 and the LED light sources 240B and 240G can be cooled more efficiently.

In the present embodiment, the two air flow paths P2 and P3 are merged at the one exhaust port 245. The air flow paths may be collectively discharged from one exhaust port.

(Cabinet G)
As shown in FIG. 34, a display unit A is provided in the upper space of the cabinet G. Further, the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet G, and the sub-control board SS is provided on the back side of the power supply device DE and the hopper mechanism HP (the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G). Is provided. That is, the hopper mechanism HP is arranged on the front side of the sub control board SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub control board SS. Further, a sub relay board SN is provided between the sub control board SS and the intermediate support plate G1. A medal replenishing mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishing port) for replenishing metal medals from the outside is provided above the hopper mechanism HP, and medals are dropped from the medal replenishing mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP. A scaler substrate SK for connecting the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and the touch panel DD19T to the sub control substrate SS is provided above the medal supply mechanism MH.

In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub control board SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub control board SS. Further, the thin plate-like sub relay substrate SN detachably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin plate-like sub control substrate SS detachably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are seen from a side view. It is arranged so that the L shape is upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if a medal is dropped on the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the side of the sub control board SS, the sheet metal BK causes It is possible to prevent the medal from physically contacting the sub control board SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub-control board SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the sheet metal BK can also prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to contact between metal medals in the hopper mechanism HP. Further, since the sub control board SS is provided on the inner side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched by the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub control board SS is removed from the cabinet G unless the sheet metal BK is removed. I can't. This improves the security of the sub control board SS.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Lower door lock mechanism G51)
As shown in FIG. 35, the lower door locking mechanism G51 includes a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the lower door mechanism DD, a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G, and It has a cylinder lock G513.

The locked portion G511 has two locked rods G511a and G511b formed on both ends of a concave frame G511c at the upper and lower portions.

The locking portion G512 includes a long cylinder G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 that is arranged so as to be vertically slidable in the cylinder G5122.

The locking plate G5121 has claw-shaped claw portions G5121a and G5121b that are locked to the locked bars G511a and G511b. The claws G5121a and G5121b slide vertically in the cylinder G5122 as the locking plate G5121 slides, and thus the locked rods inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the cylinder G5122. It is locked or unlocked with respect to G511a and G511b. The locking plate G5121 has a spring that is biased upward.

The claws G5121a and G5121b are locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b when the locking plate G5121 is at the height position where the locking plate G5121 locks the lower door mechanism DD, while the locking plate G5121 is locked to the lower door mechanism DD. It is set so that the locking with respect to the locked rods G511a and G511b is released when the lock bar is lowered from the locking height position to the unlocking height position. Further, the claw portions G5121a, G5121b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward, and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G511a, G511b.

Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle portion. The pulling down portion allows the locking plate G5121 to be pulled down as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and rotated. As a result, when the locking plate G5121 is lowered, the locking plates G5121a and G5121b and the locked rods G511a and G511b can be unlocked. The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a door relay board DS for connecting electronic components and the like on the door side and the cabinet G side.

(Upper door mechanism DU: Upper door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 35, the upper door lock mechanism G52 includes a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have

The locked portion G521 has two rod-shaped locked rods G521a and G521b formed on both ends of a frame G521c having a concave shape in an upper portion and a lower portion.

The locking portion G522 includes a long tube G5222 and a long locking plate G5221 that is arranged so as to be vertically slidable in the tube G5222.

The locking plate G5221 has claw portions G5221a and G5221b having a claw shape that locks with the locked rods G521a and G521b. The claws G5221a and G5221b slide vertically in the cylinder G5222 as the locking plate G5221 slides, and thus the locked rods inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222. It is locked or unlocked with respect to G521a and G521b.

The claws G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position where the locking plate G5221 locks the upper door mechanism DU, while the locking plate G5221 is locked to the upper door mechanism DU. The lock with respect to the locked rods G521a and G521b is set to be released when the lock bar is lowered from the lock height position to the lock release height position. Further, the claw portions G5221a and G5221b have their tip surfaces inclined obliquely downward and are pushed down by contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

An opening (not shown) is formed below the upper door mechanism DU in the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, and a protrusion (not shown) provided on the locking plate G5221 is inserted through the opening. It projects inside the cabinet G. By pulling this projection downward, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and the locking between the claws G5221a, G5221b and the locked rods G521a, G521b can be released accordingly.

Here, the protrusion is arranged so as to abut on the upper part of the lower door mechanism DD when the locking plate G5221 is at a height position where it locks the upper door mechanism DU by sliding upward.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper portion of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the protrusion to prevent the locking plate G5221 from sliding, and the claw portion G5221a. , G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b cannot be unlocked, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so that it cannot be opened.

On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the physical interference with the upper protrusion of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the locking plate G5221 can slide in the tube G5222 and the claw portion G5221a. , G5221b is released from the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU can be unlocked from the cabinet G.

Accordingly, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to first perform the unlocking operation of the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door lock mechanism G51. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, it is necessary to perform an unlocking operation for the lower door lock mechanism G51, and after opening the lower door mechanism DD, an unlocking operation for the upper door lock mechanism G52 is required. Security for the upper space of the cabinet G can be enhanced. Further, the upper space of the cabinet G can be made more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. Can be in place.

Further, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. For the administrator of the gaming machine 1, the key has a merit that it is easy to manage because it is compact and suitable for carrying.

Further, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw portions G5221a and G5221b to be caught or released from the locked bars G521a and G521b. Accordingly, it is possible to lock the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU, which is interlocked with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

Further, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end and is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD widely. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, it is not necessary to unnecessarily expose the lower space of the cabinet G to the outside, and security can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a one-way hinge that applies a predetermined torque in the closing direction of the lower door mechanism DD is used between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G. Accordingly, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed with respect to the cabinet G without applying a sudden load. As a result, it is possible to prevent a sudden load from being applied to the protruding portion B131 that is physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 36, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 is configured to include a lower door DD1, a reel unit RU, and a main control board MS.

The lower door DD1 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet G (corresponding to a casing). As shown in FIG. 36, the reel unit RU is detachably provided on the rear surface side of the lower door DD1 (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)). In addition to the reels RL, RC, and RR, the reel unit RU is provided with a reel drive board RD that controls a reel motor. The main control board MS is detachably provided on the rear surface side of the reel unit RU (inside the cabinet G (lower space side)).

The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on the command signal output from the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R and the like (see FIG. 3). By stopping, the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR are stopped and displayed.

According to the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated to provide the gaming machine 1 You can easily perform the work when assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling.

Further, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal, but since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, its removal Can be difficult.

The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided inside the lower door DD1. As a result, the main control board MS can be arranged on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. For this reason, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if an unauthorized entry is made through the gap of the lower door DD1, the arrival at the main control board MS. It becomes difficult to improve the security.

Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine 1, the exterior of the lower door DD1 is changed, and the reel pattern of the reel unit RU is changed. Can be changed and the game contents can be changed collectively.

(System configuration of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 37, the gaming machine 1 includes, as main boards included in the system, a main control board MS, a sub control board SS, a reel drive board RD, a door relay board DS, a sub relay board SN, and a scaler board SK. The projector control board B23, the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL, and the screen drive control board CS are provided. Power is supplied to the main control board MS, the sub-control board SS, and the like from the power supply board DE1 of the power supply device DE when the power supply switch DE2 is on. In addition to the above-described components included in the system, the gaming machine 1 also includes, as known components, a 7-segment display unit 30 for digital display, an external centralized terminal board 31 for connecting an external display unit, a graphic board 40, Sub RAM board 41, sub ROM board 42, selector 50 for medal identification, door opening/closing monitoring switch 51, BET switch 52, settlement switch 53, start switch 54, stop switch board 55, setting key type switch 56, LED board 60. An LED group 61 for presentation and decoration, a speaker group 62 for presentation, a 24h door monitoring unit 63, and a door monitoring switch 64 are provided. Descriptions of these known components will be omitted.

A general harness and an optical fiber cable are used to connect the respective boards and the like. For example, the main control board MS is connected to the reel drive board RD and the 7-segment display 30 via harness H so as to output control signals in one direction to the respective boards. The reel drive substrate RD is connected to the door relay substrate DS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 so as to optically transmit various signals to the door relay substrate DS in one direction. The door relay board DS is connected to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2 so as to optically transmit various signals to the main control board MS in one direction. As a result, the main control board MS, the reel drive board RD, and the door relay board DS are loop-connected through the harness H and the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2 so that commands and the like are simply transmitted in one direction. The sub relay board SN is connected to a security IC 306 of the main control board MS, which will be described later, via an optical fiber cable (not shown), and the external centralized terminal board 31 is connected to a security IC 307 of the main control board MS, which will be described later, by an optical fiber cable (not shown). ) Is connected through. The security ICs 306 and 307 of the main control board MS conceal communication data by, for example, encrypting a plaintext transmission command by the AES method.

The main control board MS is a board for controlling the main game operation of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 38, the main control board MS includes a main CPU 300, a main RAM 301, a main ROM 302, a clock pulse generation circuit 303, a frequency divider 304, a master I/O communication LSI 305, and security ICs 306 and 307. For example, the main CPU 300 transmits a command for controlling the reel rotation operation and the medal payout operation to the reel drive board RD through the I/O communication LSI 305. Further, the main CPU 300 optically receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) connected to the door relay board DS through the I/O communication LSI 305, and performs predetermined processing based on these signals. .. Specific processing of the main control board MS (main CPU 300) will be described later.

The sub-control board SS is a board for mainly controlling the effects accompanying the game of the gaming machine 1. The sub-control board SS is connected to the sub-relay board SN via a connector (BtoB: board-to-board), and the sub-relay board SN is connected to the scaler board SK via a harness H. Various signals are bidirectionally exchanged with these.

As shown in FIG. 39, the sub control board SS has a sub CPU 400, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 401 having a backup function, and a real time clock (RTC: Real Time Clock) 402, which is a time and date counting circuit, and is replaced. As a possible expansion card, a graphic board 40, a sub RAM board 41, and a sub ROM board 42 are mounted by bus connection. The graphic board 40 includes a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 440 and a VRAM (video memory) 441. For example, the sub CPU 400 transmits a signal for displacing the projection planes E11a, F1a to the front screen drive mechanism E2 or the reel screen drive mechanism F2 through the sub relay substrate SN and the screen drive control substrate CS (see FIG. 42). .. Further, the sub CPU 400 transmits a video signal for displaying a video on the projector device B2, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, etc. to the projector control board B23 and the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL through the scaler board SK (FIG. 43). reference). Specific processing of such a sub control board SS (sub CPU 400) will be described later.

The reel drive substrate RD is a substrate for controlling the rotating operation of the reels RL, RC, RR in the reel unit RU and controlling the medal payout operation by the hopper mechanism HP. As shown in FIG. 40, the reel drive board RD includes an I/O communication LSI 310 that is a slave of the master I/O communication LSI 305 of the main control board MS, a reel motor driver 311, and a hopper motor driver 312. For example, the I/O communication LSI 305 outputs a payout signal from the hopper mechanism HP, a detection signal from a medal replenishment mechanism switch MHS that detects the dropping of medals to the hopper mechanism HP, a signal from the reel unit RU indicating the reel rotation state, and the like. Are converted into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication system, and these optical signals are transmitted to the main control board MS via the first optical fiber cable FC1 and the door relay board DS. Further, the I/O communication LSI 305 inputs a control signal from the main control board MS for instructing start and stop of reel rotation, payout of medals, etc. via the harness H, and outputs control signals corresponding to these control signals. , To the reel unit RU and the hopper mechanism HP through the reel motor driver 311 and the hopper motor driver 312. In this way, the main control board MS outputs a control signal by an electric signal, and the input to the main control board MS is performed by communication via the optical fiber cables FC1 and FC2, which is the reel unit RU and This is because there is a problem of responsiveness with the hopper mechanism HP (a problem of transmission time due to command transmission). In short, for example, the main control board M and the reel drive board RD are not connected via an optical fiber cable in order to prevent a large deviation from occurring in the stop position of the symbol due to a delay when the reel is stopped after the stop button is pressed. It is like this.

The door relay board DS is for unidirectionally relaying various signals from the reel drive board RD and various switches (50 to 56) provided on the door side to the main control board MS provided on the cabinet G side. The substrate of. As shown in FIG. 41, the door relay board DS has an I/O communication LSI 500 that is a slave to the master I/O communication LSI 305 of the main control board MS, and an external input driver 501. For example, the I/O communication LSI 500 receives signals from various switches (50 to 56) through the external input driver 501, converts them into optical signals according to a predetermined optical communication system, and converts these optical signals. It is transmitted to the main control board MS via the second optical fiber cable FC2. The I/O communication LSI 500 also receives a signal from the reel driver board RD and converts it into an optical signal according to a predetermined optical communication system, and the optical signal is transmitted via the second optical fiber cable FC2 to the main control board. Send to MS.

The sub relay board SN is a board for mainly relaying commands from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS, and also for relaying various signals between the production mechanism and the sub control board SS. .. As shown in FIG. 42, the sub relay board SN has a security IC 600, a sound IC 601, a digital amplifier 602, and an I2C controller 603. For example, the sub relay board SN transmits the video signal from the sub control board SS as a bypass signal to the scaler board SK, and sends the screen drive signal from the sub control board SS via the I2C controller 603 to the screen drive control board CS. And the detection signal of the door monitoring switch 64 and the like are exchanged with the 24h door monitoring unit 63. The security IC 600 receives a security command (various commands from the encrypted main control board MS, etc.) from the main control board MS, converts this security command into plain text (decrypts the encrypted command), and then It is transmitted to the sub control board SS. The sound IC 601 receives the effect sound signal from the sub-control board SS and sends a signal corresponding to the sound signal to the speaker group 62 through the digital amplifier 602. The I2C controller 603 receives a lighting signal for effect from the sub-control board SS, transmits a signal corresponding to the lighting signal to the LED board 60, and between the sub-control board SS and the screen drive control board CS. Exchange control signals and sensor signals.

The scaler board SK mainly receives a video signal for rendering from the sub-control board SS, divides the video signal to generate video signals according to a plurality of video display numbers, and outputs these video signals to the projector device B2. And a substrate for transmitting to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As shown in FIG. 43, the scaler substrate SK includes an MCU (Micro Control Unit) (control LSI) 700, a multi-output scaler LSI (also referred to as resolution conversion LSI) 710, a V-by-one (registered trademark) HS transmitter 711, And SDRAM (DDR SDRAM/DDR2 SDRAM/DDR3 SDRAM etc.) 712. In the MCU 700, the sub relay board SN and the multi-output scaler LSI 710 are connected, and the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL and the projector control board B23 are connected. The multi-output scaler LSI 710 is connected with the sub-control board SS as an input source, and is also connected with the MCU 700, the V-by-one HS transmitter 711, the SDRAM 712, and the projector control board B23. The sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate SL is connected to the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 as an output destination.

As shown in FIG. 44, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 constitutes an MCU interface (for example, PCI Express) 800 and an SDRAM interface (for example, PCI Express) 820 connected to an MCU 700 and an SDRAM 712 (not shown), and a resolution conversion output block. , Select Areas A to D801 to 804, LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) (1) and (2) 811, 812 as differential interfaces, and LVTTL (Low Voltage Transistor Transistor) as input/output interfaces. (1), (2) 813, 814, and a DSF (Double Scaling Filter) (α) 821 and a DSF (β) 822 which form a video division block.

The multi-output scaler LSI 710 divides the LVDS signal as a video signal, converts the resolution, and outputs the divided LVDS signal. Specifically, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 divides a pair of LVDS signals (LDVS Dual: InPutA, InPutB) by differential transmission from the sub-control board SS into two with DSF(α)821 and DSF(β)822. Further, each of the four select areas A to D 801 to 804 converts into a predetermined resolution. After that, the multi-output scaler LSI 710 mainly outputs the LVDS signal for projector display (single signal of LVDS1 and LVDS2) through LVDS(1), (2) 811 and 812, and at the same time, LVTTL(1), (2) 813. , 814 to output LVTTL signals for sub liquid crystal display (RGB signals of LVTTL1 and LVTTL2). The LVDS signal output from the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 directly or through the MCU 700, and the LVTTL signal is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 or MCU 700. To be done. Specific processing of such a scaler substrate SK (MCU 700, multi-output scaler LSI 710) will be described later.

The sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL mainly relays a video signal (LVTTL signal) from the scaler substrate SK to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and also between the sub control substrate SS and the touch panel DD19T via the scaler substrate SK. It is a substrate for relaying various signals. As shown in FIG. 45, the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL has an MCU 900, a V-by-one HS receiver 901, a liquid crystal driver IC 902, and an LED driver IC 903. For example, the sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate SL receives the video signal from the scaler substrate SK with the V-by-one HS receiver 901 and the MCU 900, and the liquid crystal driver IC 902 outputs a control signal for liquid crystal drive based on the video signal. The LED driver IC 903 transmits the control signal for driving the liquid crystal display backlight to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 while transmitting the control signal to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image with a predetermined resolution based on the image signal. Further, the MCU 900 receives an operation signal from the touch panel DD19T, and transmits a signal corresponding to the operation signal to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. As a result, the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS recognizes the input operation according to the operation signal from the touch panel DD19T. Although not particularly shown, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 includes a temperature sensor such as a thermistor, and the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL, so that the sub liquid crystal display device can be operated. The MCU 900 of the I/F substrate SL can recognize the temperature during operation. Specific processing of such a sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate SL (MCU900) will be described later. Specific processing of the projector control board B23 (control LSI 230) shown in FIG. 21 will also be described later.

(Pattern display pattern of video)
In the present embodiment, the sub-control board SS or the sub-control board SS is formed so as to form a divided display pattern as shown in FIG. 46 when displaying an image for presentation on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or when performing optical adjustment of the projector device B2. An image is displayed by the scaler substrate SK performing signal processing. That is, as shown in FIG. 46, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” of resolution 1280×800) and video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution of 480×800). (Data block indicated by “β”) to transmit the LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal to the scaler substrate SK.

The scaler substrate SK generates two video data α, β from the LVDS dual-in signal by DSF(α), (β) 821, 822 of the multi-output scaler LSI 710, and buffers these video data α, β to the SDRAM 712. Temporarily store in. The video data α and β are expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 in an array image as shown on the left side of FIG.

After that, the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK converts the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 into a LVDS 1 signal (video signal indicated by “A” of resolution 1280×800) for projector display through the select area A 801 and LVDS(1) 811. Then, the LVDS1 signal A is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 also converts the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 into the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display (video signal indicated by “C” with a resolution of 480×800) through the select area C803 and LVTTL(1) 813. The LVTTL1 signal C is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVTTL1 signal C are transmitted at the resolution designated by the sub-control board SS without the resolution being converted. As a result, the projector device B2 can project an image with a resolution equivalent to 1280×800 pixels, and the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can display an image on the screen with a resolution equivalent to 480×800 pixels.

It should be noted that, as the split display pattern, modifications such as those shown in FIGS. 47 to 52 can also be realized according to the change of the display mode such as the number of screens (the number of display devices) for displaying the image and the enlargement ratio regarding the resolution. ing.

(Modification 1)
For example, as shown in FIG. 47, the sub-control board SS has video data for projector display (data block indicated by “α” of resolution 1280×800) and video data for sub liquid crystal display (resolution of 1024×768). (Data block indicated by “β”) to transmit the LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal to the scaler substrate SK.

At this time, the scaler substrate SK inputs the two video data α and β divided by the DSFs (α) and (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal as shown in the left side of FIG. The array image of the pattern 1 or the input pattern 2 is developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

If the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 to the select areas A, B 801, 802 and LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. (1) and (2) 811 and 812 are used to convert to an LVDS1+2 signal for projector display (a video signal indicated by “A+B” with a resolution of 1280×800), and this LVDS1+2 signal A+B is transmitted to the projector control board. At the same time, the MCU 700 sends the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803, 804 and LVTTL(1), (2) 813, 814 to the LVTTL1+2 signal for sub liquid crystal display (“C+D of resolution 1024×768”). Image signal), and transmits this LVTTL1+2 signal C+D to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1+2 signal A+B and the LVTTL1 signal C+D are transmitted at the resolution designated by the sub-control board SS without resolution conversion. As a result, the projector device (for example, WXGA: Abbreviation for Wide-XGA) projects an image at a resolution corresponding to the number of pixels of 1280×800, and the sub display device DD20 is operated by the sub liquid crystal display device (for example, XGA: eXtended Graphics Array). The image can be displayed on the screen with a resolution equivalent to 1024×768 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 to the select areas A, B 801, 802, and as shown in the lower right part of FIG. Through the LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, it is converted into, for example, an LVDS1+2 signal A+B having a resolution of 1920×1080 according to the set value for changing the enlargement ratio, and this LVDS1+2 signal A+B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 passes the video data β read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803, 804 and LVTTL(1), (2) 813, 814, for example, at a resolution of 1280×800 according to the set value for changing the enlargement ratio. Of the LVTTL1+2 signal C+D, and the LVTTL1+2 signal C+D is transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. In this case, the LVDS1+2 signal A+B and the LVTTL1 signal C+D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and in the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device, the resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to each device is appropriate. Video can be displayed on.

(Modification 2)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 48, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data block of resolution 1280×800 indicated by “α”) and two video data for sub-liquid crystal display (resolution). An LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal is generated by synthesizing an 800×480 data block indicated by “β-1” and a resolution 800×480 data block indicated by “β-2”). Send to.

At this time, the scaler substrate SK outputs the three video data α, β-1, and β-2 divided by the DSFs (α) and (β) 821 and 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal as shown in FIG. The array image of any one of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side is developed in the memory space of the SDRAM 712.

If the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is not set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 to the select areas A, B 801, 802 and LVDS as shown in the upper right of FIG. (1) and (2) 811 and 812 are used to convert to an LVDS1+2 signal for projector display (a video signal indicated by “A+B” with a resolution of 1280×800), and this LVDS1+2 signal A+B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sends the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803, 804 and LVTTL(1), (2) 813, 814 to the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals indicated by “C” and “D” with a resolution of 800×480), and these LVTTL1 signals C and LVTTL2 signals D are transmitted through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1+2 signal A+B, the LVTTL1 signal C, and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution specified by the sub-control board SS without the resolution being converted. As a result, the projector device (for example, FHD: Abbreviation of Full-HD) projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 1280×800 pixels, and also serves as a sub liquid crystal display device, which is different from the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When the sub liquid crystal display device (for example, WXGA) is provided, an image can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 800×480 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the video data α read from the SDRAM 712 to the select areas A, B 801, 802 and Through the LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, it is converted into, for example, an LVDS1+2 signal A+B having a resolution of 1920×1080 according to the set value for changing the enlargement ratio, and this LVDS1+2 signal A+B is transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sets the two image data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803 and 804 and LVTTL (1) and (2) 813 and 814 to set the enlargement ratio. Corresponding to, for example, LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1280×800, and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. .. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A+B and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and the projector device (for example, FHD) and two sub liquid crystal display devices (for example, WXGA) are transmitted. In (), an image can be appropriately displayed at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to each device.

(Modification 3)
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49, the sub-control board SS includes two video data for projector display (data blocks indicated by “α-1” and “α-2” with a resolution of 800×480) and a sub-image. By combining two video data for liquid crystal display (data blocks indicated by “β-1” and “β-2” with a resolution of 800×480), the LVDS dual-in signal composed of one combined signal can be used as a scaler board. Send to SK.

At this time, the scaler substrate SK has four video data α-1, α-2, β-1, β- divided by DSF(α), (β) 821, 822 based on the received LVDS dual-in signal. 2 is expanded in the memory space of the SDRAM 712 with an array image of any of the input patterns 1 to 3 as shown on the left side of FIG.

Then, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK selects two image data α-1 and α-2 read from the SDRAM 712, as shown in the upper right of FIG. 49, unless the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set. Through the areas A, B 801, 802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, converted into LVDS1 signal and LVDS2 signal (video signal indicated by “A” and “B” of resolution 800×480) for projector display, The LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sends the two video data β-1, β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803, 804 and LVTTL(1), (2) 813, 814 to the LVTTL1 signal for sub liquid crystal display. And LVTTL2 signals (video signals indicated by “C” and “D” with a resolution of 800×480), and these LVTTL1 signals C and LVTTL2 signals D are transmitted through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711 to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. Send to. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at the resolution designated by the sub-control board SS without the resolution being converted. As a result, the projector device projects an image at a resolution equivalent to 800×480 pixels, and when the sub liquid crystal device DD19 and two display devices other than the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 are provided, the projector device 800× Images can be displayed on each screen with a resolution equivalent to 480 pixels.

On the other hand, when the enlargement ratio change (resolution change) is set, the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK outputs the two video data α-1, α-2 read from the SDRAM 712 as shown in the lower right part of FIG. 49. Through the select areas A, B 801, 802 and LVDS (1), (2) 811, 812, for example, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B having a resolution of 1280×720 are converted according to the set value for changing the enlargement ratio, and these LVDS1 The signal A and the LVDS2 signal B are transmitted to the projector control board B23. At the same time, the MCU 700 sets the two image data β-1 and β-2 read from the SDRAM 712 through the select areas C, D 803 and 804 and LVTTL (1) and (2) 813 and 814 to set the enlargement ratio. Corresponding to, for example, LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D having a resolution of 1024×768, and these LVTTL1 signal C and LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL through the V-by-one HS transmitter 711. .. In this case, the LVDS1 signal A and the LVDS2 signal B, and the LVTTL1 signal C and the LVTTL2 signal D are transmitted at a resolution different from that specified by the sub-control board SS, and in the projector device and the three sub-liquid crystal display devices, It is possible to properly display an image with a resolution suitable for the display characteristics unique to the device.

(Modifications 4 to 6)
Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, the sub-control board SS includes video data for projector display (data blocks indicated by “α” and the like) and video data for sub liquid crystal display (“β” and the like). In some cases, a plurality of LVDS single-in signals corresponding to the respective data blocks are sequentially transmitted to the scaler substrate SK by sequentially outputting the data blocks shown in FIG. Even in such a case, it is possible to separately output the LVDS signal and the LVTTL signal showing a predetermined resolution by the signal processing similar to the above-described divided display pattern. In the projector device and the sub liquid crystal display device, each device is unique. It is possible to properly display an image at a resolution suitable for the display characteristics of. In addition, in this embodiment and its modifications 1 to 6, three types of resolutions of FHD, WXGA, and XGA are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to these, and depending on the specifications and performance of the display device, for example, VGA (Video Graphics). It is also possible to display a more vivid image by using a display device compatible with resolutions such as Array, 2K, 4K and the like.

The scaler board may be capable of outputting a plurality of video signals to one display means. For example, the scaler board may generate and output a video signal for partial screen display and a video signal for the remaining partial screen display from one video data. The scaler board may generate and output a left-eye video signal and a right-eye video signal for 3D display from one video data. According to this, an image can be displayed by a 3D display method using parallax based on the left-eye video signal and the right-eye video signal from the scaler substrate, and the projector device can stereoscopically display not only by projection mapping but also by parallax. It is possible to display images with a feeling and power.

(Communication specifications of gaming machine 1)
As shown in FIG. 53, as the communication specifications between the sub control board SS and the scaler board SK, between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23, and between the scaler board SK and the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL, there are a communication format and a communication. The speed (baud rate), data length, stop bit, presence/absence of parity, protocol, and communication format are defined as shown in the figure. Although the ID is shown separately for easy viewing of the transmission source ID and the transmission destination ID, it is actually a single byte of data. For example, the ID when the sub-control board SS transmits data to the scaler board SK is 21H as the data indicating the ID by combining the transmission source ID: 01H and the transmission destination ID: 20H. In the following description, the communication line between the sub control board SS and the scaler board SK is referred to as a first serial line, the communication line between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 is referred to as a second serial line, and the scaler board The communication line between the SK and the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL may be referred to as a third serial line.

(List of commands between each board)
As shown in FIG. 54, the commands exchanged between the scaler board SK and the sub control board SS are, for example, “start parameter request”, “parameter request”, “status”, and “command” as commands transmitted from the scaler board SK. “Reception confirmation” and “error notification” are defined, and as commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS, for example, “start parameter request confirmation”, “setting completion”, “status request”, “status request completion”, "Output screen division setting number", "output screen resolution setting", "input screen division setting number", and "input screen resolution setting" are defined. The contents and parameters (including the data position (D1 to n) in the communication format) of each command are as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55, the commands exchanged between the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL and the sub control substrate SS are, for example, “start parameter request” and “parameter” as commands transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. “Request”, “status”, “reception confirmation”, and “error notification” are defined, and as commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS, for example, “start parameter request confirmation”, “setting completion”, and “status request” , "Status request completion", "sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting", and "sub liquid crystal brightness setting" are defined. The contents and parameters of each command (including the data positions (D1 to Dn) in the communication format) are as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 56, the command exchanged between the projector control board B23 and the sub control board SS is, for example, “start parameter request”, “parameter request”, “reception confirmation” as a command transmitted from the projector control board B23. , "Error notification", "LED temperature", "FAN (fan) speed", "LED brightness", "horizontal adjustment value", "vertical adjustment value", "focus adjustment value", "drift correction temperature" Is defined, and the commands transmitted from the sub-control board SS include, for example, “start parameter request confirmation”, “setting completion”, “status request”, “status request completion”, “LED brightness setting”, “LED brightness setting”, Keystone distortion correction value, White color temperature setting, Horizontal position offset, Horizontal position adjustment value, Vertical position offset, Vertical position adjustment value, Brightness setting, Contrast setting, "Gamma setting", "focus offset", "focus adjustment value", "focus drift correction value", and "test pattern" are defined. The contents and parameters (including the data position (D1 to n) in the communication format) of each command are as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 57, the error information transmitted from the scaler board SK by the error notification transmission command includes “self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality”, “scaler output setting abnormality”, “scaler input setting abnormality”, and “WDT”. (Watchdog timer)-scaler", and a parameter (including the data position "D1" in the communication format), an error occurrence condition, and an error state are defined for each error. The error information transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL by the error notification transmission command includes "self-diagnosis (RAM check) abnormality", "touch panel input abnormality", "sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality", and "sub liquid crystal". "Abnormal temperature" and "WDT-sub liquid crystal", and parameters (including data position "D1" in the communication format), error occurrence conditions, and error states are defined for each error. The error information transmitted from the projector control board B23 by the error notification transmission command includes "LED (R) temperature abnormality", "LED (G) temperature abnormality", "LED (B) temperature abnormality", and "FAN 1 rotation". "Error", "FAN2 rotation error", "FAN3 rotation error", "Voltage error", "Self-diagnosis (RAM check) error", "WDT-DLP". Each error has a parameter (data in communication format). The position "D1" or "D2" is included), the error occurrence condition, and the error state are defined. An error management area of a scaler substrate SK, a projector control substrate B23, and a sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL described later (memory map of SDRAM shown in FIG. 96, memory map of DRAM shown in FIG. 106, memory of DRAM shown in FIG. 116). The error information and error detection conditions set in (see map) are applied as they are.

(Memory map of adjustment PC 1000)
As shown in FIG. 58, in the memory (DRAM) of the adjustment PC 1000, a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, and a status storage area are provided as work areas for predetermined application software when performing optical adjustment on the projector device B2. The area is provided. In the storage medium (HDD) of the adjustment PC 1000, horizontal position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E adjustment values, focus position A to E adjustment values, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion are recorded as items related to optical adjustment. A correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test pattern, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offset A to E, etc. are provided. Specific processing of the adjustment PC 1000 will be described later.

(Processing of main control board MS)
[Processing when power is turned on by the main CPU 300]
FIG. 59 shows a process when the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS turns on the power. As shown in the figure, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 300 performs a power-on process (S101). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines, for example, whether the backup is normal or whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and performs initialization according to the determination result.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (unit game) (S102). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes, for example, by designating a storage area for initialization at the end of one game. As a result, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 301 are cleared.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S103). In this processing, the main CPU 300 sets the activated line based on the number of inserted sheets and determines whether or not the start operation is possible.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a random value acquisition process (S104). In this process, the main CPU 300 extracts and acquires a random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area. The random number value is used in the next internal lottery process.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an internal lottery process (S105). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines an internal winning combination.

Next, the main CPU 300 executes reel stop initialization processing (S106). In this process, the main CPU 300 initializes the area related to the control for stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a start command generation/storage process (S107). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a start command and stores the generated start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub control board SS by the command transmission process. The start command includes various information (internal winning combination, game state, etc.) necessary for performance such as internal winning combination. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can perform an effect according to the start operation.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs wait processing (S108). In this processing, the main CPU 300 waits until a predetermined time (eg, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the previous game so as not to accept a start operation.

Next, the main CPU 300 executes reel rotation start processing (S109). In this process, the main CPU 300 requests the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs reel rotation start command generation and storage processing (S110). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a reel rotation start command and stores the generated reel rotation start command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The reel rotation start command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can recognize the start of rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, and can determine the timing of executing various effects and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S111). In this process, the main CPU 300 determines the attraction priority order of the winning combination that can be displayed, and stores the attraction priority order data in a predetermined storage area.

Next, the main CPU 300 executes reel stop control processing (S112). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on the timing of the stop operation by the player, the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning search process (S113). In this processing, the main CPU 300 collates the symbol combination and the symbol combination table displayed along the activated line after the reels RL, RC, RR are stopped, determines the display combination, and also determines the number of medals to be paid out. To do.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a winning operation command generation/storing process (S114). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a winning operation command and stores the generated winning operation command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The winning operation command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. As a result, the sub-control board SS can determine the effect contents and the like according to the winning.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs medal payout processing (S115). In this process, the main CPU 300 pays out medals based on the number of medals paid out determined in the process of S113.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a medal payout end command generation/storage process (S116). In this process, the main CPU 300 generates a medal payout end command and stores the generated medal payout end command in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The medal payout end command stored in the transmission data storage area is transmitted from the main control board MS to the sub control board SS in the command transmission process. Thereby, the sub-control board SS can recognize the end of payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus end check process (S117). In this process, the main CPU 300 ends the operation of the bonus game when the condition for ending the bonus game is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a bonus operation check process (S118). In this process, the main CPU 300 starts the operation of the bonus game when the condition for starting the bonus game is satisfied. The main CPU 300 operates the replay game when the replay condition is satisfied. After executing S118, the main CPU 300 shifts to the process of S102 again.

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 ms)]
FIG. 60 shows an interrupt process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 300 periodically saves registers in a predetermined cycle (1.1172 ms) (S121).

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an input port check process (S122). In this processing, the main CPU 300 confirms the presence or absence of an input signal from the door relay board DS. For example, the main CPU 300 stores signals from the start switch 54, the stop switch substrate 55, etc. for each interrupt process. Further, the main CPU 300 stores an input state command according to an input signal from various switches in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored input state command is transmitted to the sub control board SS in the data transmission process described later. As a result, it is possible to execute various effects according to the start operation of the unit game and the stop operation of the reels RL, RC, RR.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a timer update process (S123). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the timer set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs an effect timer update process (S124). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of updating the value of the effect timer set in the predetermined area of the main RAM 301.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs reel control processing (S125). In this process, the main CPU 300 performs a process of controlling the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR. Specifically, the main CPU 300 starts rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR in response to a request to start rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR, that is, in response to a start operation, and at a constant speed. Control is performed so that the reels RL, RC, and RR rotate. In addition, in accordance with the stop operation, control is performed so that the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR corresponding to the stop operation is stopped.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs 7SEG drive processing (S126). In this process, the main CPU 300 causes the 7-segment display 30 to display the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 300 performs a data transmission process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 300 transmits the command stored in the transmission data storage area to the sub control board SS via the security IC 306.

Next, the main CPU 300 restores the register (S128). Then, the main CPU 300 ends the interrupt process.

(Memory map of sub control board SS)
As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the sub RAM substrate 41, the SRAM 401, and the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS are provided with various regions for performing optical adjustment on the projector device B2.

As shown in FIG. 61, on the sub RAM board 41, a part of a work area for the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS to perform various controls (for example, an area used in a task system or an LED control task described later). Areas used for each task such as etc. are not shown), sub device reception storage area, sub device transmission storage area, scaler control reception storage area, sub LCD control reception storage area, projector control reception storage area, flag Storage area, scaler setting value storage area, scaler setting confirmation storage area, sub LCD setting value storage area, sub LCD setting confirmation storage area, touch panel input storage area, projector setting value storage area, projector status storage area, drift correction storage area It is provided. For example, in the flag storage area, an EXT reception flag, a reception completion flag, a scaler setting completion flag, a sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, a projector setting completion flag, a scaler setting changing flag, a sub liquid crystal setting changing flag, and a projector setting changing flag. The scaler startup setting flag, the sub liquid crystal startup setting flag, and the projector startup setting flag are stored. The touch panel input storage area stores an input type, an input X coordinate, and an input Y coordinate. A drift correction monitoring counter and a focus correction value storage area are provided in the drift correction storage area. The sub device means the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 controlled by the sub control substrate SS, the touch panel DD19T, and the projector device B2, as well as the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. The stored information will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the SRAM 401, as a part of the data that can be backed up (for example, the data of the area in which the game state, the RT state, etc. are backed up is not shown), a scaler set value storage area, a sub liquid crystal A setting value storage area and a projector setting value storage area are provided. In the scaler set value storage area, as the scaler set value, the output screen division setting number, the input screen division setting number, the output screen 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, the output screen 1 to 4 vertical resolution, the input screen 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, the input The screen 1 and vertical resolution are stored. In the sub liquid crystal set value storage area, sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and sub liquid crystal brightness are stored as sub liquid crystal set values. In the projector setting value storage area, horizontal position A to E offsets, horizontal position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E offsets, vertical position A to E adjustment values, and focus position offsets are set as projector setting values. A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, and test pattern are stored. These set values will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 62, on the sub-ROM board 42, a part of fixed data (control program of the sub-control board SS, various lottery values necessary for game, video data, sound data, LED data, accessory (screen A scaler initial value area, a sub liquid crystal initial value area, and a projector initial value area are provided as operation data and the like (not shown). In the scaler initial value area, the number of output screen division settings, the number of input screen division settings, baud rate, data length, parity, stop, output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, input screens 1 and 2 horizontal The resolution, the input screen 1 and the vertical resolution are stored. The sub liquid crystal initial value area stores sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and sub liquid crystal brightness. In the projector initial value area, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offset A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, contrast setting, Gamma settings, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, and test patterns are stored. The stored information will be described later.

(Processing of sub-control board SS)
[Processing when power is turned on by the sub CPU 400]
FIG. 63 shows the processing when the power is turned on by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of the sub control board SS (S131). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 initializes the task system such as error checking of the SRAM 401 and initialization of the sub RAM substrate 41 (RAM clear and backup data set of SRAM 401). The task system includes an LED control task, a sound control task, a screen accessory control task, a main task, a main board communication task, an animation task, and a sub device task, which will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the LED control task (S132). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of an LED control task described later (see FIG. 64).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a sound control task (S133). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a sound control task described later (see FIG. 65).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the screen accessory control task (S134). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a screen accessory control task described later (see FIG. 66).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main task (S135). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a main task described later (see FIG. 69).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates the main board communication task (S136). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a main board communication task described later (see FIG. 70).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates an animation task (S137). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of an animation task described later (see FIG. 72).

Next, the sub CPU 400 activates a sub device task (S138). In this process, the sub CPU 400 executes each process of a sub device task described later (see FIG. 73).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a power failure recovery process (S139). In this process, the sub CPU 400 performs a process of restoring backup data at the time of power failure. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process when the power is turned on.

[LED control task]
FIG. 64 shows an LED control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of LED-related data (S141).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED data analysis processing (S142).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED effect execution process (S143).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of 4 msec, for example (S144). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S142.

[Sound control task]
FIG. 65 shows a sound control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs an initialization process of sound-related data (S151).
Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data analysis processing (S152).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sound effect execution process (S153). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S152.

[Screen accessory control task]
FIG. 66 shows a screen accessory control task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory test process in order to confirm whether or not the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 are normally operated when the power is turned on (S161). For example, as a test, first, the reel screen mechanism E1 is moved to the display position and then to the storage position, and then the reel screen mechanism F1 is moved to the display position and then to the storage position. Then, when an abnormality is detected during the test operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, the projector device B2 displays the abnormality and requests the sound control task to output a message notifying the occurrence of the abnormality.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is registered screen accessory data (S162). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the screen accessory data requesting the operation of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 exists in a predetermined area of the sub RAM substrate 41. When the screen accessory data is present (S162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S163. When the screen accessory data does not exist (S162: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S164.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory motion construction process (S163). In this process, the sub CPU 400 constructs operation patterns of the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 based on the screen accessory data. As an operation pattern of the screen drive mechanisms E1 and F1, for example, when the character object data for projecting an image on the reel screen mechanism F1 is registered in a state where the image is projected on the front screen mechanism E1 (the front screen mechanism When the accessory data for instructing the storage operation for E1 is not registered), the sub CPU 400 that executes the screen accessory operation construction process sets the storage operation pattern of the front screen mechanism E1 and After the mechanism E1 is housed in the upper part, the operation pattern is constructed in the order of moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the display surface.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory control process (S164). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of 2 msec, for example (S165). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S162.

[Screen accessory control processing]
FIG. 67 shows a screen accessory control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 corresponds to the operation start step from the operation pattern of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed by the above-described screen accessory action construction processing, and changes the screen (projection target). It is determined whether or not (S171). If the screen change occurs in the operation start step (S171: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S172. When it is not the operation start step or when the screen change does not occur (S171: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S173.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus change request processing (S172). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a front screen control process (S173). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the front screen drive mechanism E2 to move the front screen mechanism E1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs reel screen control processing (S174). In this process, the sub CPU 400 controls the operation of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to move the reel screen mechanism F1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is -1 (S175). The focus standby counter is a subtraction counter for generating a predetermined waiting time when changing the focus position of the projector device B2. When the value of the focus standby counter is -1 (S175: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process. When the value of the focus standby counter is not -1 (S175: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S176.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176). When the value of the focus standby counter is 0 (S176: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S178. When the value of the focus standby counter is not 0 (S176: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S177.

Next, the sub CPU 400 subtracts 1 from the value of the focus standby counter (S177). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

In step S178, the sub CPU 400 requests the projector device B2 to change the focus position after the change. In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores focus position setting change request data in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the current focus position before the change and the focus position after the change. Thereby, for example, when the projection target of the image is switched from the front screen mechanism E1 to the reel screen mechanism F1 or vice versa, the projector device B2 changes the focus position setting. The focus mechanism 242 can be controlled based on the request data, and the projection lens 210 can be focused on the focus positions corresponding to the screen mechanisms E1 and F2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 to the focus standby counter (S179). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the screen accessory control process.

[Focus change request processing]
FIG. 68 shows focus change request processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 acquires the current focus position (focus position A to E offset) from the current operating state of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 (S181).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the changed focus positions (focus positions A to E offset) from the operation patterns of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 constructed from the registered accessory data (S182).

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the number of focus change pulses (S183). The focus change pulse number is the pulse number of the motor drive signal supplied to the focus motor 242C when changing the focus position, and is the required pulse number corresponding to the amount obtained by subtracting the changed focus position from the current focus position. Calculated as an absolute value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus adjustment time (S184). The focus adjustment time is the actual operating time of the focus mechanism 242 that changes the focus position. For example, when the motor drive signal for the focus motor 242C is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, the pulse width is doubled (pulse width). It is calculated by multiplying the period) by the number of focus change pulses obtained in S183.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates a transmission time (setting change transmission time) for changing the setting of the focus position through communication with the projector control board B23 (S185). This setting change transmission time is the transmission time 1 of the data exchanged between the sub-control board SS and the scaler board SK and the transmission of the data exchanged between the scaler board SK and the projector control board B23 as the focus position is changed. It is calculated as the total time of time 2 The transmission time 1 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits, which is the number of data×(data length+parity+start+stop), by 1/baud rate 1. Similarly, the transmission time 2 is obtained by multiplying the number of transmission bits by 1/baud rate 2. In this embodiment, the baud rate 1 is 38400 bps, the baud rate 2 is 19200 bps, the data length is 8 bits, there is no parity, and the start and stop bits are 1 bit. The transmission time 1 and the transmission time 2 obtained by using these numerical values Is calculated.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus change time (S186). The focus change time is calculated as the sum of the setting change transmission time obtained in S185 and the focus adjustment time obtained in S184.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is changed (S187). When changing to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S188. When the change is not to the front screen mechanism E1 (S187: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S189.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the moving time 1 when moving the front screen mechanism E1 to a predetermined position (S188). This movement time 1 is the actual operating time of the front screen drive mechanism E2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor E25 of the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, its pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S190.

In S189, the sub CPU 400 calculates the moving time 2 for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 to the predetermined position. This movement time 2 is the actual working time of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. For example, if the motor drive signal for the drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is a pulse square wave with a duty ratio of 0.5, its pulse width is doubled. It is calculated by multiplying the required time by the required number of motor pulses.

Next, the sub CPU 400 divides the difference between the movement times 1 and 2 obtained in S188 or S189 and the focus change time obtained in S186 by 2 corresponding to 2 msec of the processing cycle of the screen accessory control task, and calculates the result. A value corresponding to time is set in the focus standby counter (S190). As a result, with respect to the operation of moving the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the predetermined position and the operation of changing the focus position, the value which is just the required time difference between them is not set in the focus standby counter. The focus position can be changed to a predetermined position at the timing when the movement operation of F1 is completed. That is, it is possible to project an image having a good image quality with a focus on the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 just after the movement by changing the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is focus interlock when displaying an image (for example, "1" when the focus interlock flag (not shown) is present, and "0" when there is no focus interlock flag) (S191). .. The focus interlocking means that the focus position is continuously changed in conjunction with the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. When there is no focus interlock (S191: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S192. If there is focus interlocking (S191: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 to the focus standby counter (S192). That is, when the focus interlock is not performed, the focus position is immediately changed at the beginning of the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, and when the focus interlock is performed, the focus positions are adjusted at the timing when the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is ended. The change is completed. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus change request process.

[Main task]
FIG. 69 shows a main task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) vertical initialization signal (S201).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a VSYNC interrupt that occurs in a 33 msec cycle (S202).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs drawing processing (S203).

Next, the sub CPU 400 resets the watchdog timer (WDT) (S204). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S202.

[Main board communication task]
FIG. 70 shows a main board communication task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes the communication message queue (S211).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires a reception command from the main control board MS from the communication message queue (S212).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a received command (S213). If there is a received command (S213: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S214. If there is no received command (S213: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S218.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the received command (S214).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received command is a valid command (S215). When the received command is a valid command (S215: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S216. If the received command is not a valid command (S215: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S218. The received command is valid when, for example, the command value is in the range of 01H to 10H.

Next, the sub CPU 400 creates game information from the received command and stores the game information in a predetermined area (not shown) of the sub RAM board 41 (S216). This game information includes, for example, an internal winning combination, a game state, a set value, the number of bonus games, and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs command analysis processing (S217). This process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 10 msec (S218). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S212.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 shows command analysis processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a command consistency determination process (S221).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs effect content determination processing (S222).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an animation data determination process (S223).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs LED data determination processing (S224).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound data determination processing (S225).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a screen accessory data determination process (S226).

Next, the sub CPU 400 registers each determined data in a predetermined area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S227). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the command analysis process.

[Anime task]
FIG. 72 shows an animation task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 checks a change from the previous game information (S231).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a main object control process (S232).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a main animation task management process (S233).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub object control process (S234).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub animation task management process (S235).

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of 33 msec, for example (S236). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S231.

Subdevice task
FIG. 73 shows a sub device task by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs sub device initialization processing (S241). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler control process (S242). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control process (S243). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control processing (S244). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, the sub CPU 400 waits for a cycle of, for example, 10 msec (S245). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S242.

[Sub-device reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 74 shows a sub-device reception interrupt process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The sub device reception interrupt process is a reception interrupt process for fetching communication data transmitted by the scaler substrate SK in response to an external request from the sub device (sub liquid crystal display device DD19, touch panel DD19T, projector device B2, etc.). As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received data from the sub device is'STX' indicating the start of the data (S251). If the received data is'STX (Start of TeXt: 02H)' (S251: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S252. If the received data is not'STX' (S251: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S253.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF”, and clears the sub device reception storage area (S252). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S253, the sub CPU 400 saves the received data in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the received data from the sub device is'ETX' indicating the end of the data (S254). When the received data is'ETX (End of TeXt:03H)' (S254: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S255. When the received data is not'ETX' (S254: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S256.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to "ON" (S255). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S256, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the ETX reception flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM board 41 is'ON'. When the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S256: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S257. When the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S256: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub device reception data sum check process (S257).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S257 is normal (S258). When the sum value is normal (S258: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S260. If the sum value is not normal (S258: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S259. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the sum value is normal, the received data up to “ETX” excluding “STX” of the received data is added and received after “ETX” The matching of the sum value is determined by comparing the received data with the received data. The method of calculating the sum value is not limited to the addition formula, but a subtraction formula or an exclusive OR (also called BCC) may be used.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (clears the sub device reception storage area) (S259). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

In S260, the sub CPU 400 sets the reception completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON”. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device reception interrupt process.

[Sub device initialization process]
FIG. 75 shows a sub device initialization process performed by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 initializes a first serial line which is a communication line with the scaler substrate SK (S271).

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the scaler set value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S272). As shown in FIG. 62, the scaler setting values are the output screen division setting number, the input screen division setting number, the output screens 1 to 4 horizontal resolution, the output screens 1 to 4 vertical resolution, the input screens 1 and 2 horizontal resolution, the input It corresponds to a device profile showing the control characteristics of the scaler substrate SK such as the screen 1 and the vertical resolution.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the range of the scaler set value stored in the scaler set value storage area (S273).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether all the scaler set values in the scaler set value storage area are within the valid range (S274). As shown in FIG. 54, the valid range of the scaler set value is defined in advance as a transmission command from the sub control board SS. When all the scaler setting values are within the valid range (S274: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S276. If at least one scaler setting value is not within the valid range (S274: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S275.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the scaler set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the scaler set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 as initial values (S275). The initial value of the scaler setting value is written in advance in the scaler initial value area of the sub ROM substrate 42, as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S276). As shown in FIG. 62, the sub liquid crystal set value corresponds to a device profile indicating the display characteristics of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 such as the sub liquid crystal horizontal resolution, the sub liquid crystal vertical resolution, and the sub liquid crystal brightness.

Next, the sub CPU 400 checks the range of the sub liquid crystal set value stored in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (S277).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether all the sub liquid crystal set values in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area are within the valid range (S278). When all the sub liquid crystal set values are within the valid range (S278: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S280. When at least one sub liquid crystal setting value is not within the valid range (S278: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S279.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 as initial values (S279). The initial value of the sub liquid crystal set value is written in advance in the sub liquid crystal initial value area of the sub ROM substrate 42, as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 copies the value of the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 to the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S280). As shown in FIG. 62, the projector setting values are horizontal position A to E adjustment values, horizontal position A to E offsets, vertical position A to E adjustment values, vertical position A to E offsets, focus position offsets. A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, focus drift correction value A to E correspond to device profiles indicating display characteristics of the projector device B2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a check process for the range of projector setting values stored in the projector setting value storage area (S281).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether all the projector setting values in the projector setting value storage area are within the valid range (S282). If all the projector setting values are within the valid range (S282: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S284. When at least one projector setting value is not within the valid range (S282: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S283.

Next, the sub CPU 400 initializes the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 as initial values (S283). The initial value of the projector setting value is written in advance in the projector initial value area of the sub ROM substrate 42, as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting completion flag, the sub liquid crystal setting completion flag, and the projector setting completion flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF” (S284). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub device initialization process.

[Scaler control processing]
FIG. 76 shows the scaler control processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'scaler (see ID: 02H shown in FIG. 53)'. It is determined (S291). When the transmission source ID indicates “scaler” (S291: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S292. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “scaler” (S291: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a received data consistency check process for controlling the scaler board SK (S292). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '01H' to '05H' indicating the transmission command from the scaler board SK shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S293). When the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S293: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S294. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S293: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S295.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards (clears) the data in the sub device reception storage area because the consistency of the received data is abnormal (invalid received data) (S294). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

In S295, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler control reception time process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control process.

[Processing when receiving the scaler control]
FIG. 77 shows the processing at the time of receiving the scaler control by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the reception data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to the scaler control reception storage area (S301).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is a “start parameter request” (S302). When the received command is “activation parameter request (see CMD:01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” (S302: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S303. When the received command is not the "activation parameter request" (S302: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S304.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler activation parameter request reception process (S303). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

In S304, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'parameter request (see CMD: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the received command is “parameter request” (S304: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S305. If the received command is not a “parameter request” (S304: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S311.

Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a scaler set value change request (see CMD: 02H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) based on the value of the parameter included in the parameter request reception command (see FIG. 54). It is determined whether there is any (S305). If there is a request to change the scaler setting value (S305: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S306. When there is no request to change the scaler setting value (S305: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S309.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON” (S306).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler setting value to be changed) from the scaler setting value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S307).

Next, the sub CPU 400 uses the acquired setting change content as an argument (a general name of the parameter on the software, which indicates that the calling source passes the parameter to the called subroutine function (processing)) Is performed (S308). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 79. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

In S309, the sub CPU 400 sends a status request (see CMD: 02H, D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 54) from the scaler board SK based on the value of the parameter included in the command to receive the parameter request (see FIG. 54). It is determined whether or not there is. When there is a status request (S309: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S310. When there is no status request (S309: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S310). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

In S311, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'status (see CMD:03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the received command is'status' (S311: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S312. When the received command is not'status' (S311: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S313.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler status command reception process (S312). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

In S313, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'receipt confirmation (see CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the received command is'acknowledgement' (S313: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S314. If the received command is not'acknowledgement' (S313: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S315.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler reception confirmation reception time process (S314). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 81.

In S315, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'error notification (see CMD:05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)'. When the received command is'error notification' (S315: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S316. When the received command is not “error notification” (S315: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing when a scaler error occurs (S316).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a sound scaler error occurrence output to the speaker group 62 to notify the error of the scaler substrate SK by sound, and at the same time, to the LED group 61 to notify the error by the light emission mode. An LED scaler error occurrence lighting request is made (S317). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler control reception process.

[Processing when receiving a scaler startup parameter request]
FIG. 78 shows the processing when the scaler activation parameter request is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a startup parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S321). In this process, the sub CPU 400 sends a command of “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” to the scaler substrate SK.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON” (S322). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler activation parameter request.

[Scaler setting change processing]
FIG. 79 shows the scaler setting change processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the scaler setting value received as an argument (S331).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the output screen division setting number (S332). When the content of the setting change is the output screen division setting number (S332: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S333. When the setting change content is not the output screen division setting number (S332: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S334.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an output screen division setting number command transmission process (S333). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen division setting number in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and specifies an output pattern 0 to 3 as the output screen division setting number 1 to 4. The command of the division setting number (see CMD: 05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)' is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change processing.

In S334, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the output screen resolution setting. When the setting change content is the output screen resolution setting (S334: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S335. When the content of the setting change is not the output screen resolution setting (S334: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S336.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an output screen resolution setting command transmission process (S335). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the output screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and the output screen resolution setting includes output screen number (1 to 4), horizontal resolution (480 to 4060), and vertical. A command of “output screen resolution setting (see CMD:06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” for specifying the resolution (240 to 1600) is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change processing. Specifically, as an example, when the output screen division setting number is “2”, the output screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK twice (two cycles (400 msec)). Output screen number: 1 for the first time, horizontal resolution and vertical resolution corresponding to the output screen number: 1, output screen number for the second time: 2 and horizontal resolution and vertical resolution corresponding to the output screen number: 2 Sent. In the case of the input screen resolution setting command described later, similarly, the input screen resolution setting command is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK a number of times according to the input screen division setting number.

In S336, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the number of input screen division settings. When the content of the setting change is the number of input screen division settings (S336: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S337. When the setting change content is not the input screen division setting number (S336: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S338.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen division setting number command transmission process (S337). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen division setting number in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and designates 1 or 2 as the input screen division setting number. The command CMD: 07H shown in the right column)' is transmitted to the scaler substrate SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change processing.

In S338, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the input screen resolution setting. When the content of the setting change is the input screen resolution setting (S338: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S339. When the setting change content is not the input screen resolution setting (S338: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an input screen resolution setting command transmission process (S339). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the input screen resolution in the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and the input pattern (0, 1) corresponding to the input screen number (1, 2) is set as the input screen resolution setting. , A horizontal resolution (480 to 4060) and a vertical resolution (240 to 1600) are specified, and a command of “input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)” is transmitted to the scaler board SK. .. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler setting change processing. Such a scaler setting changing process is executed when the operator of the gaming machine manufacturing factory performs a menu operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T.

[Processing when receiving a scaler status command]
FIG. 80 shows processing when the scaler status command is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from “D1” of the reception data indicating the status, and based on the value, determines whether the status type is output setting or not (S341). When the status type is output setting (S341: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S342. If the status type is not output setting (S341: No), that is, if it is input setting, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S343.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the output screen resolution data stored after “D2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S342). As shown in FIG. 54, the output screen resolution data includes the number of output divisions (1 to 4), the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolutions (0 to 4060), and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolutions (0 to 1600). Is included. After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S344.

In step S343, the sub CPU 400 saves the input screen resolution data saved after “D2” of the status reception data in the scaler setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM board 41. As shown in FIG. 54, the input screen resolution data includes the input division number (1 or 2), the input first and second screen horizontal resolutions (0 to 4060), and the input first and second screen vertical resolutions (0 to 1600). Be done.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S344). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating the completion of the status request to the scaler board SK. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the scaler status command.

[Scalar reception confirmation Processing at reception]
FIG. 81 shows a scaler reception confirmation reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scaler setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'ON' (S351). When the scaler setting changing flag is “ON” (S351: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S352. When the scaler setting changing flag is not “ON” (S351: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler reception confirmation reception time process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (scaler setting value before the change) from the scaler setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S352).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the scaler set value storage area is an end block (-1 or 0FFFFH is stored) (S353). When the scaler set value storage area is the end block (S353: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S356. When the scaler setting value storage area is not the end block (S353: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S354.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a scaler setting change process (S354). This process is as shown in FIG. 79.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) of the scaler setting value storage area (S355). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler reception confirmation reception process.

In S356, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits to the scaler substrate SK a command indicating the scaler setting value'setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the scaler setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF” (S357). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the scaler reception confirmation reception process.

[Sub LCD control processing]
FIG. 82 shows a sub liquid crystal control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 indicates'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 04H shown in FIG. 53)'. It is determined whether or not (S361). When the transmission source ID indicates “sub liquid crystal” (S361: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S362. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “sub liquid crystal” (S361: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal control reception data consistency check process for controlling the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T (S362). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '41H' to '45H' indicating the transmission command from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL shown in FIG. Is checked and the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S363). When the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S363: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S364. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S363: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S365.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S364). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

In S365, the sub CPU 400 performs sub liquid crystal control reception time processing. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control process.

[Sub LCD control reception process]
FIG. 83 shows a sub liquid crystal control reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the reception data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to the sub liquid crystal control reception storage area (S371).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is “start parameter request (see CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” (S372). When the received command is “activation parameter request” (S372: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S373. When the received command is not the "activation parameter request" (S372: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S374.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal activation parameter request reception process (S373). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

In S374, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'parameter request (see CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the received command is “parameter request” (S374: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S375. If the received command is not a'parameter request' (S374: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S381.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a request for changing the sub liquid crystal setting value based on the value of the parameter included in the command for receiving the parameter request (see D1:01H shown in the left column of FIG. 55) ( S375). If there is a request to change the sub liquid crystal setting value (S375: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S376. If there is no request to change the sub liquid crystal setting value (S375: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S379.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON” (S376).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal set value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (see FIG. 62) (S377).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S378). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

In S379, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a status request from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL based on the value of the parameter included in the command for receiving the parameter request (see D1:02H shown in the left column of FIG. 55). To determine. When there is a status request (S379: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S380. When there is no status request (S379: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S380). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

In S381, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'status (see CMD:43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the received command is “status” (S381: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S382. When the received command is not “status” (S381: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S383.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal status command reception process (S382). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 86. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

In S383, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'receipt confirmation (see CMD:44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the received command is'acknowledgement' (S383: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S384. If the received command is not'acknowledgement' (S383: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S385.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process (S384). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S385, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'error notification (see CMD:45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)'. When the received command is “error notification” (S385: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S386. When the received command is not “error notification” (S385: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal error occurrence process (S386).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs sound sub liquid crystal error occurrence output to the speaker group 62 in order to notify by sound of an error of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL (sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or touch panel DD19T), and at the same time, An LED sub liquid crystal error occurrence lighting request is issued to the LED group 61 in order to notify the error in a light emitting mode (S387). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal control reception process.

[Processing when receiving sub-LCD activation parameter request]
FIG. 84 shows a process when the sub liquid crystal activation parameter request is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a startup parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S391). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of “start parameter request confirmation” to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to "ON" (S392). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal activation parameter request reception process.

[Sub LCD setting change processing]
FIG. 85 shows a sub liquid crystal setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change contents of the sub liquid crystal set value received as an argument (S401).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402). When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S403. When the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (S402: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S404.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting command transmission process (S403). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal screen resolution in the sub liquid crystal set value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sets a command for setting the sub liquid crystal screen resolution (see CMD: 45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55). To the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

In S404, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal brightness setting. When the setting change content is the sub liquid crystal luminance setting (S404: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S405. If the setting change content is not the sub liquid crystal brightness setting (S404: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal brightness setting command transmission process (S405). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the sub liquid crystal luminance in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) for setting the sub liquid crystal luminance. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal setting change process.

[Processing when receiving sub LCD status command]
FIG. 86 shows the processing when the sub liquid crystal status command is received by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts a value from "D1" of the reception data indicating the status, and determines whether the status type is touch input or not based on the value (S411). When the type of status is touch input (S411: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S412. When the type of status is not touch input (S411: No), that is, when the liquid crystal setting is set, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S413.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the touch input data included in the status reception command in the touch panel input storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S412). As shown in FIG. 55, the touch input data includes the input type and the input X and Y coordinates regarding the touch panel DD19T. After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S414.

In step S413, the sub CPU 400 saves the liquid crystal setting data included in the status reception command in the sub liquid crystal setting confirmation storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. As shown in FIG. 55, the liquid crystal setting data includes horizontal resolution (200 to 800) and vertical resolution (200 to 800).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S414). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command indicating completion of status request (see CMD: 44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal status command reception process.

[Sub LCD reception confirmation processing at reception]
FIG. 87 shows a sub liquid crystal reception confirmation and reception time process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'ON' (S421). When the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is “ON” (S421: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S422. If the sub liquid crystal setting changing flag is not “ON” (S421: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (sub liquid crystal set value to be changed) from the sub liquid crystal set value storage area (see FIG. 62) of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S422).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is an end block (S423). When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is the end block (S423: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S426. When the sub liquid crystal set value storage area is not the end block (S423: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S424.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a sub liquid crystal setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S424). This process is as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the sub liquid crystal setting value storage area (S425). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

In S426, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL a command (see CMD: 42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55) indicating the completion of setting of the sub liquid crystal set value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the sub liquid crystal setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF” (S427). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the sub liquid crystal reception confirmation reception process.

[Projector control processing]
FIG. 88 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'projector (see ID: 03H shown in FIG. 53)'. It is determined (S431). When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S431: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S432. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S431: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control reception data consistency check processing for controlling the projector device B2 (S432). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433). When the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S433: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S434. If there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S433: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S435.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S434). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S435, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector drift correction processing (S436). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

[Processing when receiving projector control]
FIG. 89 shows a projector control reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 copies the reception data from the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to the projector control reception storage area (S441).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'start parameter request (see CMD: 81H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S442). When the received command is “activation parameter request” (S442: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S443. When the received command is not the "activation parameter request" (S442: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S444.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs the process at the time of receiving the projector activation parameter request (S443). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 90. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

In S444, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'parameter request (see CMD:82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the received command is “parameter request” (S444: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S445. If the received command is not a “parameter request” (S444: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S451.

Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a projector setting value change request (see CMD:82H, D1:01H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) based on the parameter value (see FIG. 56) included in the parameter request reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (S445). If there is a request to change the projector setting value (S445: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S446. When there is no request to change the projector setting value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S449.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “ON” (S446).

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area (S447).

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector setting change process by using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S448). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

In S449, the sub CPU 400 requests the status from the projector control board B23 based on the value of the parameter included in the command for receiving the parameter request (see FIG. 56) (see CMD: 82H and D1: 02H shown in the left column of FIG. 56). It is determined whether or not there is. When there is a status request (S449: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S450. When there is no status request (S449: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process (S450). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

In S451, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'receipt confirmation (see CMD:83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. If the received command is'acknowledgement' (S451: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S452. When the received command is not'acknowledgement' (S451: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S453.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector reception confirmation reception time process (S452). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S453, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'error notification (see CMD:84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the received command is'error notification' (S453: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S454. When the received command is not “error notification” (S453: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S455.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs processing upon reception of a projector error notification (S454). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

In S455, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is a status-related command (see CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56). When the received command is a status-related command (S455: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S456. When the received command is not a status-related command (S455: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception time process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector status reception process (S456). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process.

[Processing when a projector startup parameter request is received]
FIG. 90 shows a process at the time of receiving a projector activation parameter request by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a startup parameter request confirmation command transmission process (S461). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command of “start parameter request confirmation” to the projector control board B23.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector startup setting flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to "ON" (S462). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the process at the time of receiving the projector activation parameter request.

[Projector setting change processing]
FIG. 91 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the projector setting value received as an argument (S471).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S472). When the setting change content is the horizontal position offset (S472: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S473. When the content of the setting change is not the horizontal position offset (S472: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S474.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs horizontal position offset command transmission processing (S473). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and a command for setting the horizontal position offset (see the right column in FIG. 56). CMD (see 88H)) to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S474, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset). When the content of the setting change is the vertical position offset (S474: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S475. When the content of the setting change is not the vertical position offset (S474: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S476.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs vertical position offset command transmission processing (S475). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset (vertical position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and a command for setting the vertical position offset (see the right column in FIG. 56). CMD shown (see 8AH) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S476, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the focus offset (focus position offsets A to E). When the setting change content is the focus offset (S476: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S477. If the setting change content is not the focus offset (S476: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S478.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S477). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sets a command for setting the focus position offsets A to E (CMD shown in the right column of FIG. 56: 8FH) is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S478, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is focus drift correction (focus drift correction values A to E). When the setting change content is focus drift correction (S478: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S479. When the setting change content is not the focus drift correction (S478: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S480.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus drift correction value command transmission processing (S479). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sets a command for setting the focus drift correction values A to E (shown in the right column of FIG. 56). CMD: 91H) to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S480, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S480: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S481. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S480: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S482.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED brightness setting command transmission process (S481). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 85H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board. Send to B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S482, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the content of the setting change is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S482: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S483. When the content of the setting change is not the keystone distortion correction value (S482: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S484.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S483). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 86H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value. It is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S484, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is contrast setting. When the content of the setting change is the contrast setting (S484: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S485. When the content of the setting change is not the contrast setting (S484: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S486.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S485). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the contrast to the projector control substrate B23. To send. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S486, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is gamma setting. When the content of the setting change is the gamma setting (S486: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S487. If the setting change content is not gamma setting (S486: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S488.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S487). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 8EH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the gamma value to the projector control substrate B23. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S488, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is white color temperature. When the content of the setting change is the white color temperature (S488: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S489. When the content of the setting change is not the white color temperature (S488: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S490.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S489). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 87H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the white color temperature to the projector control. It transmits to the board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S490, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is brightness. When the content of the setting change is the brightness (S490: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S491. If the setting change content is not brightness (S490: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S492.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S491). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and issues a command (see CMD: 8CH shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. To send. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S492, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is the test pattern (S492: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S493. When the setting change content is not the test pattern (S492: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S493). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and issues a command (see CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) for setting the test pattern to the projector control substrate B23. Send to. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker in a game hall or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before factory shipment.

[Processing when receiving and receiving the projector]
FIG. 92 shows a projector reception confirmation reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'ON' (S501). When the projector setting changing flag is “ON” (S501: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S502. When the projector setting changing flag is not “ON” (S501: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the setting change content (projector setting value to be changed) from the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S502).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the projector setting value storage area is an end block (S503). When the projector setting value storage area is the end block (S503: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S506. When the projector setting value storage area is not the end block (S503: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S504.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector setting change process using the acquired setting change content as an argument (S504). This process is as shown in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 updates the data acquisition position (block number) in the projector setting value storage area (S505). Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception time process.

In step S506, the sub CPU 400 performs a setting completion command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits to the projector control board B23 a command indicating the completion of setting the projector setting values (see CMD:82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the projector setting change flag in the flag storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to “OFF” (S507). Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector reception confirmation reception time process.

[Processing when receiving a projector error notification]
FIG. 93 shows a process at the time of receiving a projector error notification by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error occurrence process in response to the error notification from the projector control board B23 (S511).

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request output to the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL in order to display an error of the projector control board B23 (projector apparatus B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S512). ).

Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a sound projector error occurrence output request to the speaker group 62 in order to notify by sound of an error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) (S513). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector error notification reception process.

[Processing when projector status is received]
FIG. 94 shows the projector status reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'LED temperature (see CMD:85H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S521). .. When the command type is “LED temperature” (S521: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S522. If the command type is not “LED temperature” (S521: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S523.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the LED temperature data included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. (S522). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S523, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command type acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “FAN rotation speed (see CMD:86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. If the command type is'FAN rotation speed' (S523: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S524. When the command type is not “FAN rotation speed” (S523: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S525.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the FAN rotation speed data included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 86H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. Yes (S524). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S525, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'LED brightness (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is'LED brightness' (S525: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S526. When the command type is not “LED brightness” (S525: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of S527.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the LED brightness data included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 87H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. (S526). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S527, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “horizontal adjustment value (see CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is the “horizontal adjustment value” (S527: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S528. When the command type is not the “horizontal adjustment value” (S527: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S529.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the horizontal adjustment value included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 88H, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41. Yes (S528). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S529, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “vertical adjustment value (see CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is the “vertical adjustment value” (S529: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S530. When the command type is not the “vertical adjustment value” (S529: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S531.

Next, the sub CPU 400 saves the vertical adjustment value included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 89H, D1 to D5 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. Yes (S530). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S531, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command type acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is'focus adjustment value (see CMD:8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)'. When the command type is the'focus adjustment value' (S531: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S532. If the command type is not the'focus adjustment value' (S531: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S533.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus adjustment value included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 8AH, D1 to D10 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41. (S532). After that, the sub CPU 400 transitions to the processing of S535.

In S533, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the type of command acquired from the projector control board B23 by reception is “drift correction temperature (see CMD:8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)”. When the command type is'drift correction temperature' (S533: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S534. When the command type is not “drift correction temperature” (S533: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S535.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the drift temperature included in the acquired command as a status (parameter value, CMD: 8BH, D1 shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in the projector status storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S534). ..

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request completion command transmission process (S535). In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits to the projector control board B23 a command indicating completion of status request (see CMD:84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector status reception process.

[Projector drift correction processing]
FIG. 95 shows a projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 400 adds 1 to the value of the drift correction monitoring counter of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S541). The drift correction monitoring counter is an addition counter for measuring the timing of periodically correcting and monitoring the temperature drift related to the optical characteristics of the projector device B2.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (corresponding to approximately 1 minute) or more as a predetermined value (S542). When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S542: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S543. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than the predetermined value (S542: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S545.

Next, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter (S543).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command (CMD: 83H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) destined for the projector control board B23 in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S544). At this time, the drift correction temperature (CMD: 83H, D1, *1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) is designated as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S544 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 in FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the command (reception command) acquired from the reception data is'drift correction temperature (see CMD:8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' (S545). When the received command is “drift correction temperature” (S545: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S546. When the received command is not'drift correction temperature' (S545: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S546). The position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E. Such a position coefficient may be transmitted as a status from the projector control board B23, or may be stored in advance in the sub ROM board 42 or the like, or may be a focus position on the adjustment screen at the time of optical adjustment in FIG. A menu for inputting the position coefficient may be provided so that the position coefficient can be set.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and position coefficient (S547). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature around the lens.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S547 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S548). If the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S548: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S548: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S549.

Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and stores the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S549).

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S550).

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S551). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

(Memory map of scaler board SK)
As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, various information is stored in the ROM included in the SDRAM 712 and the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. Note that the various storage areas shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 do not show all the information used in the scaler substrate SK. For example, a control program executed by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK, a work area used by the MCU 700, and the like are omitted in FIGS. 96 and 97.

As shown in FIG. 96, the SDRAM 712 has a first control unit for receiving commands for exchanging commands with the sub control substrate SS, the projector control substrate B23, and the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. -Third reception storage area, first to third transmission storage areas for transmitting a command to each, a scaler LSI setting storage area for the multi-output scaler LSI 710, a status storage area, a flag other storage area, a multi-output scaler LSI 710 Also, a scaler LSI use area of the MCU (control LSI) 700 is provided. For example, in the scaler LSI setting storage area, output first to fourth screen horizontal resolutions, output first to fourth screen vertical resolutions, input first and second screen horizontal resolutions, output first and second screen vertical resolutions are stored. It The flags and other storage areas store first to third reception completion flags, first to third EXT reception flags, scaler LSI setting flags, reset request flags, transmission cycle counters, error management areas, and self-diagnosis storage areas. The stored information will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the ROM of the MCU 700, as the scaler LSI initial setting values, the number of output divisions regarding the image division, the number of input divisions, the output first to fourth screen horizontal resolutions, and the output first to fourth screen vertical resolutions. , The input 1st and 2nd screen horizontal resolutions, the input 1st and 2nd screen vertical resolutions are stored, and as the serial line setting values, the 1st to 3rd line baud rates, the 1st to 3rd line data lengths, the 1st ~ Third line parity, first to third line stop are stored, and a diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. The stored information will be described later.

(Processing of scaler substrate SK)
[Main processing of scaler board by MCU700]
FIG. 98 shows the scaler substrate main processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 700 performs the initialization process of the scaler substrate SK (S561). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the first reception completion flag in the flag or other storage area of the SDRAM 712 is'ON' (S562). When the first reception completion flag is'ON' (S562: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S563. When the first reception completion flag is not “ON” (S562: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S568.

Next, the MCU 700 acquires the reception data (command) from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S563).

Next, the MCU 700 sets the first reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas to “OFF” (S564).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates'scaler (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)' (S565). When the transmission destination ID indicates “scaler” (S565: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S567. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “scaler” (S565: No), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S566.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub device bypass transmission process (S566). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub-control-scaler reception time process (S567). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a scaler self-diagnosis process (S568). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 performs processing during transmission between the sub control and the scaler (S569). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a sub control bypass transmission process (S570). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the reset request flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is'ON' (S571). When the reset request flag is'ON' (S571: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S572. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S571: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S573.

Next, the MCU 700 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S572). Waiting for the watchdog timer to reset is a process for performing an infinite loop process without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting it to a predetermined value) and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU 700. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the MCU 700, the MCU 700 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S561) in the scaler board main process (also referred to as “reboot”). The same applies to S700 of the projector control main processing and S871 of the sub liquid crystal control main processing described later.

In S573, the MCU 700 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the MCU 700 waits for a cycle of, for example, 2 msec (S574). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S562.

[First serial line reception interrupt process]
FIG. 99 shows the first serial line reception interrupt processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. The first serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process that fetches received data in response to an external request from the sub control board BB via the first serial line during execution of the scaler board main process. The MCU 700 is configured to execute the second serial line reception interrupt process and the third serial line reception interrupt process as well as the first serial line reception interrupt process. The second serial line reception interrupt process is a communication interrupt process for fetching received data in response to an external request from the projector control board B23 via the second serial line, and the third serial line reception interrupt process is 3 is a communication interrupt process for receiving received data in response to an external request from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL via the serial line. The second and third serial line reception interrupt processes are substantially the same as the first serial line reception interrupt process except that the lines are different, and therefore their illustration is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 99, the MCU 700 determines whether the received data from the first serial line (sub control board SS) is'STX(02H)' indicating the start of the data (S581). When the received data is'STX' (S581: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S582. When the received data is not'STX' (S581: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S583.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the first ETX reception flag and the first reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to “OFF”, and clears the first reception storage area (S582). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S583, the MCU 700 saves the reception data from the first serial line (sub control board SS) in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the received data is'ETX(03H)' indicating the end of the data (S584). When the received data is'ETX' (S584: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S585. When the received data is not'ETX' (S584: No), the MCU 700 moves to the process of S586.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the first ETX reception flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to "ON" (S585). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S586, the MCU 700 determines whether the first ETX reception flag in the flag or other storage area of the SDRAM 712 is'ON'. When the first ETX reception flag is “ON” (S586: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S587. When the first ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S586: No), the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a received data sum check process (S587).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S587 is normal (S588). When the sum value is normal (S588: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S590. When the sum value is not normal (S588: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S589. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the MCU 700 discards the data in the first serial line reception storage area (S589). After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

In S590, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the first reception completion flag in the storage area to “ON”. After that, the MCU 700 ends the first serial line reception interrupt process.

[Scaler initialization processing]
FIG. 100 shows a scaler initialization process by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 initializes internal functions (S601).

Next, the MCU 700 initializes the first to third serial lines (S602).

Next, the MCU 700 acquires various initial setting values related to input/output of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 from the ROM (S603).

Next, the MCU 700 performs initial setting regarding input/output of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S604). In this process, the MCU 700 performs initial setting on the DSF(α)821, DSF(β)822 and the select areas A to D801 to 804 of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 based on the initial setting value acquired from the ROM.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the scaler LSI setting flag and the reset request flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to “OFF” (S605). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler initialization process.

[Sub-device bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 101 shows a sub-device bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the received data indicates “projector (30H)” (S611). When the transmission destination ID indicates “projector” (S611: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S612. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S611: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S614.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the second transmission storage area (S612).

Next, the MCU 700 performs the second serial line transmission process (S613). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub control board SS to the projector control board B23 to the second serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

In S614, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the reception data indicates'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)'. When the transmission destination ID indicates'sub liquid crystal' (S614: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S615. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate'sub liquid crystal' (S614: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken in the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the third transmission storage area (S615).

Next, the MCU 700 performs a third serial line transmission process (S616). In this process, the MCU 700 outputs the data transmitted from the sub control substrate SS to the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL to the third serial line. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub device bypass transmission process.

[Processing during reception between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 102 shows the sub-control-scaler reception time processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, in the MCU 700, the command (CMD) of the reception data (hereinafter, referred to as “acquired reception data” in the present process) acquired from the first reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 from the sub-control board SS in S563 is''. It is determined whether or not it is a status request (see CMD: 03H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)' (S621). When the command of the acquired received data is “status request” (S621: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S622. When the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S621: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S624.

Next, the MCU 700 registers the transmission request of the command indicating the “status” corresponding to the output setting (D1:01H) and the input setting (D1:02H) of the “status request” to the sub control board SS (S622). ).

Next, the MCU 700 saves various parameter values (D1) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S623). After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler reception time process.

In S624, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed (see CMD: 02H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S624: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S625. When the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S624: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S626.

Next, the MCU 700 changes the setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 with the set value in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S625). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S626, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD:01H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S626: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S627. When the command of the acquired received data is not “confirm activation parameter request” (S626: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S628.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag scaler LSI setting flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 to "ON" (S627). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S628, the MCU 700 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is'output screen division setting number (see CMD:05H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is the “output screen division setting number” (S628: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S629. When the command of the acquired received data is not the'output screen division setting number' (S628: No), the MCU 700 moves to the process of S630.

Next, the MCU 700 stores the output screen division setting number included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S629). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S630, the MCU 700 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is “output screen resolution setting (see CMD:06H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “output screen resolution setting” (S630: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S631. When the command of the acquired received data is not “output screen resolution setting” (S630: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S632.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the output screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S631). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S632, the MCU 700 determines whether the command of the acquired reception data is'input screen division setting number (see CMD:07H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)'. When the command of the acquired received data is the “input screen division setting number” (S632: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S633. When the command of the acquired received data is not the “input screen division setting number” (S632: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S634.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the input screen division setting number included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S633). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S636.

In S634, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “input screen resolution setting (see CMD: 08H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “input screen resolution setting” (S634: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S635. When the command of the acquired received data is not “input screen resolution setting” (S634: No), the MCU 700 determines that the command of the acquired received data is “status request completion (see CMD: 04H shown in the right column of FIG. 54)”. Therefore, the process proceeds to S636.

Next, the MCU 700 saves the input screen resolution included in the acquired received data in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 (S635).

Next, the MCU 700 registers a transmission request of a command indicating “receipt confirmation (CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” with the sub control board SS (S636). After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler reception time process.

[Scalar self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 103 shows the scaler self-diagnosis processing by the MCU 700 of the scaler substrate SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 writes, for example, '55AAH' as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the SDRAM 712 by the verify check (S641).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area matches the diagnosis value correctly (S642). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S642: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S644. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S642: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S643.

Next, the MCU 700 sets "self-diagnosis abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S643).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S644).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is normal (S645). When the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is normal (S645: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S647. When the status of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 is not normal (S645: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S646.

Next, the MCU 700 sets'WDT (watchdog timer)-scaler abnormality' as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S646).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the output setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S647).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the output setting data stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the output setting for implementation of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 have the same set value (S648). When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting have the same setting value (S648: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S650. When the output setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual output setting have different setting values (S648: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S649.

Next, the MCU 700 sets "scaler output setting abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S649).

Next, the MCU 700 reads the input setting of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 (S650).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the input setting data stored in the scaler LSI setting storage area of the SDRAM 712 and the input setting for implementation of the multi-output scaler LSI 710 have the same set value (S651). When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting have the same setting value (S651: Yes), the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process. When the input setting data of the SDRAM 712 and the actual input setting have different setting values (S651: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S652.

Next, the MCU 700 sets “scaler input setting abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the SDRAM 712 (S652). After that, the MCU 700 ends the scaler self-diagnosis process.

[Processing during transmission between sub-control and scaler]
FIG. 104 shows the processing at the time of transmission between the sub control and the scaler by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 (S661). The transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of command transmission from the scaler board SK.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is 100 or more as a predetermined value (S662). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S662: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S663. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S662: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler transmission process. In the present embodiment, since the scaler substrate main processing described above is configured to perform processing at a cycle of 2 msec, the value of the transmission cycle counter of 100 or more means 2 msec×100=200 msec or more. As a result, the data is transmitted to the sub-control board SS at a cycle of about 200 msec, but not limited to this, the predetermined value of the transmission cycle counter may be any value (for example, transmission cycle counter: 50×2 msec). =100 msec cycle).

Next, the MCU 700 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S663).

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the flag or other scaler LSI setting flag in the storage area of the SDRAM 712 is'OFF' (S664). When the scaler LSI setting flag is'OFF' (S664: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S665. When the scaler LSI setting flag is not “OFF” (S664: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S666.

Next, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “activation parameter request (see CMD:01H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)” for the sub control board SS (S665). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later. After the processing of S665, the MCU 700 moves to the processing of S676.

In S666, the MCU 700 determines whether error data exists in the error management area of the SDRAM 712. When the error data exists in the error management area (S666: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S667. When the error data does not exist in the error management area (S666: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S669.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'error notification (see CMD:05H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)' as transmission data for the sub-control board SS (S667). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later.

Next, the MCU 700 sets the flag of the SDRAM 712 and the reset request flag in the storage area to “ON” (S668). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S669, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command indicating'receipt confirmation (CMD: 04H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)' to the sub-control board SS. When there is a request to send a command indicating'receipt confirmation' (S669: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S670. When there is no request to send a command indicating “receipt confirmation” (S669: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S671.

Next, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'receipt confirmation' as transmission data for the sub control board SS (S670). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later. After the processing of S670, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S671, the MCU 700 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command indicating'status (see CMD: 03H shown in the left column of FIG. 54)' to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send a command indicating'status' (S671: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S672. When there is no request to send a command indicating'status' (S671: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S675.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the data in the status storage area of the SDRAM 712 is data related to output setting (S672). When the data in the status storage area is data related to the output setting (D1:01H) (S672: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S673. When the data in the status storage area is not the data related to the output setting, that is, the data related to the input setting (D1:02H) (S672: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S674.

Next, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating “status” related to output setting for the sub control board SS (S673). This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later. After the processing of S673, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S674, the MCU 700 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating the'status' related to the input setting on the sub control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the first serial line transmission processing of S676 described later. After the processing of S674, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S676.

In S675, the MCU 700 creates a command indicating'parameter request' for the sub control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the first transmission storage area of the SDRAM 712, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the next first serial line transmission processing of S676.

Next, the MCU 700 performs a first serial line transmission process (S676). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the scaler substrate SK to the sub control substrate SS. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub-control-scaler transmission process.

[Sub-control bypass transmission processing]
FIG. 105 shows a sub-control bypass transmission process by the MCU 700 of the scaler board SK. As shown in the figure, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the second reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is'ON' (S681). When the second reception completion flag is'ON' (S681: Yes), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of the next S682. When the second reception completion flag is not “ON” (S681: No), the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S684.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates'sub-control' (S682). When the transmission destination ID indicates “sub-control” (S682: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S683. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate'sub-control' (S682: No), the MCU 700 moves to the process of S684.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken in the second reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S683). After that, the MCU 700 shifts to the processing of S687.

In S684, the MCU 700 determines whether or not the third reception completion flag in the flag and other storage areas of the SDRAM 712 is'ON' (S684). When the third reception completion flag is “ON” (S684: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S685. When the third reception completion flag is not “ON” (S684: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub control bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 determines whether the transmission destination ID of the data stored in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 indicates'sub-control' (S685). When the destination ID indicates'sub-control' (S685: Yes), the MCU 700 moves to the processing of the next S686. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “sub-control” (S685: No), the MCU 700 ends the sub-control bypass transmission process.

Next, the MCU 700 copies the data once taken in the third reception storage area of the SDRAM 712 to the first transmission storage area (S686).

Next, the MCU 700 performs a first serial line transmission process (S687). By this transmission processing, various data are transmitted from the sub device (projector control board B23, sub liquid crystal I/F board SL) to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the MCU 700 ends the sub control bypass transmission process.

(Memory map of projector control board B23)
As shown in FIG. 106, various kinds of information are stored in the DRAM included in the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23, the EEPROM 231, and the ROM included in the control LSI 230.

As shown in FIG. 106, the DRAM of the control LSI 230 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, various flags & work areas, a general set value storage area, a setting data storage area, and various work areas not shown. .. For example, various flags and work areas include a reception completion flag, an EXT reception flag, a start setting flag, a horizontal position setting flag, a vertical position setting flag, a focus position setting flag, an error management area, a transmission cycle counter, a status storage area, and a reset. The request flag and the self-diagnosis storage area are stored. In the general setting value storage area, horizontal position A to E offset, vertical position A to E offset, focus position offsets A to E, focus drift correction values A to E, LED brightness setting, trapezoidal distortion correction value, white color The temperature setting, brightness setting, gamma setting, and contrast setting are stored. The setting data storage area stores horizontal position adjustment values, vertical position adjustment values, focus position adjustment values, LED brightness settings, keystone distortion correction values, white color temperature settings, brightness settings, gamma settings, and contrast settings. .. The stored information will be described later.

Further, the EEPROM 231 is provided with a basic setting value storage area. The horizontal position A to E adjustment values, the vertical position A to E adjustment values, and the focus position A to E adjustment values are stored in the basic set value storage area. The ROM of the control LSI 230 stores an LED temperature table, a control program for the projector control board B23 (not shown), and various constant values. The stored information will be described later.

(Processing of projector control board B23)
[Main Processing of Projector Control by Control LSI 230]
FIG. 107 shows the projector control main processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S691). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area are “ON” (S692). When the reception completion flag is'ON' (S692: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S693. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S692: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S697.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S693).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area to “OFF” (S694).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates'projector (see ID: 30H shown in FIG. 53)' (S695). When the transmission destination ID indicates “projector” (S695: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S696. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S695: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S697.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector reception time process (S696). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S697). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 113.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector transmission process (S698). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area are “ON” (S699). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S699: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S700. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S699: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S701.

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S700). Waiting for the watchdog timer to be reset is processing for performing an infinite loop process without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting a predetermined value) and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs the reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S691) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In step S701, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a cycle of 4 msec, for example (S702). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S692.

[Projector serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 108 shows a projector serial line reception interrupt process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. This process is a communication interrupt process for fetching received data in response to an external request via the second serial line during execution of the projector control main process.

As shown in FIG. 108, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the received data from the second serial line is'STX(02H)' indicating the start of the data (S711). When the received data is'STX' (S711: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S712. If the received data is not'STX' (S711: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S713.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the work area to "OFF", and clears the reception storage area (S712). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In step S713, the control LSI 230 saves the reception data from the second serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the received data is'ETX' indicating the end of the data (S714). When the received data is'ETX' (S714: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S715. When the received data is not'ETX' (S714: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S716.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the ETX reception flag in the work area to "ON" (S715). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In S716, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the ETX reception flag in the work area are'ON'. When the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S716: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S717. When the ETX reception flag is not “ON” (S716: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a received data sum check process (S717).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S717 is normal (S718). When the sum value is normal (S718: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S720. When the sum value is not normal (S718: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S719. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S719). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

In step S720, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area to “ON”. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector serial line reception interrupt process.

[Projector initialization process]
FIG. 109 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 initializes internal functions (S721).

Next, the control LSI 230 initializes the second serial line (S722).

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, and other common settings from the EEPROM 231 (S723).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S723 (S724).

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus adjustment value A (focus on the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D) from the EEPROM 231 (S725).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs electric focus control processing of the focus mechanism 242 based on the data acquired in S725 (S726). Specifically, according to the electric focus control process, a motor drive signal (excitation signal) to the focus motor 242C is output, and the focus is adjusted to the focus position. The same applies to the processing of S755 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags and work areas of the DRAM (S727). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

[Processing during reception between sub-control and projector]
FIG. 110 shows sub-control-inter-projector reception processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command (CMD) of the received data acquired from the second serial line is “status request” (S731). When the command of the received data (hereinafter referred to as “acquired received data” in this processing) acquired from the reception storage area of the DRAM in S693 is “status request” (S731: Yes), the control LSI 230 determines that Then, the process proceeds to S732. When the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S731: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S734.

Next, the control LSI 230 registers a command transmission request corresponding to the status (CMD: 85H to 8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56) in response to the'status request' of the sub control board SS (S732).

Next, the control LSI 230 saves various parameter values (see CMD: 83H, D1, *1 shown in the right column of FIG. 56) included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S733). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector reception time process.

In S734, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed (see CMD:82H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. When the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S734: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S735. If the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S734: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S736.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector internal setting change process (S735). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S742.

In S736, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD:81H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. If the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S736: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S737. When the command of the acquired received data is not “confirm activation parameter request” (S736: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S738.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the flag and other activation setting flags in the storage area of the DRAM to "ON" (S737). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S742.

In S738, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is a setting-related command (see CMD: 85H to 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56). When the command of the acquired received data is a setting-related command (S738: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S739. If the command of the acquired received data is not a setting-related command (S738: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S740.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector setting value storage process (S739). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 112. After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S742.

In S740, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'test pattern (CMD: 92H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)'. When the command of the acquired received data is the'test pattern' (S740: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S741. When the command of the acquired received data is not the “test pattern” (S740: No), the control LSI 230 determines that the command of the acquired received data is “status request completion (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56)”. , S742.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a test pattern display process (S741). According to this process, a test pattern for an operator to confirm the adjustment condition when performing optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is displayed as a projected image by the projector device B2. When the test pattern is displayed, the simple test pattern is displayed on the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 as a virtual image by simulation. The display mode of this simple test pattern will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124.

Next, the control LSI 230 registers the transmission request of the command indicating "receipt confirmation" (S742). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector reception time process.

[Projector internal setting change processing]
FIG. 111 shows a projector internal setting change process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the start setting flag in the work area are “ON” (S751). When the activation setting flag is'ON' (S751: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the next processing of S752. When the activation setting flag is not “ON” (S751: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S757.

Next, the control LSI 230 reads the horizontal position A adjustment value, the vertical position A adjustment value, the LED brightness setting value, the trapezoidal distortion correction value, the white from the basic setting value storage area of the EEPROM 231 and the general setting value storage area of the DRAM. A color temperature setting value, a brightness setting value, a gamma setting value, and a contrast setting value are acquired (S752).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the data acquired in S752 (S753).

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is the focus position A adjustment value+focus position offset A as the focus position control data value (S754).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S754 (S755).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & all setting flags in the work area to "OFF" (S756). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change processing.

In S757, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of position (A to E) is set in the various flags of the DRAM & the horizontal position setting flag in the work area. When the position type is set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S758. When the position type is not set in the horizontal position setting flag (S757: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S760.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is the horizontal position (change) adjustment value+the horizontal position (change) offset as the control data value indicating the horizontal position of the image projection (S758). Note that (change) corresponds to the position after the change of the horizontal position adjustment values A to E and the horizontal position offsets A to E. For example, if the change is (B), the horizontal position control data value is the horizontal position B adjustment value+the horizontal position B offset.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags of the DRAM & horizontal position setting flags in the work area (S759). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S763.

In S760, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of position (A to E) is set in the various flags of the DRAM & the vertical position setting flag in the work area. When the position type is set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S761. When the type of position is not set in the vertical position setting flag (S760: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S764.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a value that is a vertical position (change) adjustment value+vertical position (change) offset as a control data value indicating the vertical position of the image projection (S761). Note that (change) corresponds to the position after the change of the vertical position adjustment values A to E and the vertical position offsets A to E.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags of the DRAM & vertical position setting flags in the work area (S762).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a setting change control process of the DLP control circuit 232 based on the control data value acquired in S758 or S761 (S763). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change processing.

In step S764, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of position (A to E) is set in the various flags of the DRAM & the focus position setting flag in the work area. When the position type is set in the focus position setting flag (S764: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S765. When the position type is not set in the focus position setting flag (S764: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change process.

Next, the control LSI 230 calculates a focus position (change) adjustment value+focus position offset (change)+focus drift correction (change) as a focus position control data value (S765). Note that (change) corresponds to the position after the change of the focus adjustment values A to E and the focus position offsets A to E.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears various flags of the DRAM & the focus position setting flag in the work area (S766).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs the electric focus control process of the focus mechanism 242 based on the control data value acquired in S765, as in S755 (S767). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector internal setting change processing.

[Projector setting value storage processing]
FIG. 112 shows a projector setting value storage process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 performs the setting range determination processing based on the data of the setting value of the reception data acquired from the reception storage area in S693 (S771). In this setting range determination processing, it is determined whether or not the value is in the range described in the parameter column of CMD: 85H to 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56, and the determination result is returned as a return value.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines from the return value of the determination result whether or not the acquired setting value data is valid data (S772). When the acquired data of the set value is valid data (S772: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S773. When the acquired setting value data is not valid data (S772: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired setting value is a type (basic setting value, CMD: 89H, 8B, 90H shown in the right column of FIG. 56, and the EEPROM shown in FIG. 106) to be stored in the EEPROM 231. Yes (S773). When the acquired set value is the type to be stored in the EEPROM 231 (S773: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S774. The acquired setting value is not the type to be stored in the EEPROM 231, that is, the general setting value to be stored in the DRAM (CMD: 85H to 88H, 8AH, 8CH to 8FH, 91H shown in the right column of FIG. 56 and the DRAM shown in FIG. 106. ) Or the like (S773: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S776.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the acquired data is'adjustment PC (ID: 05H shown in FIG. 53)' (S774). When the transmission source ID is “adjustment PC” (S774: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S775. When the transmission source ID is not “adjustment PC” (S774: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage process.

Next, the control LSI 230 saves the acquired setting value in the specified position of the basic setting value storage area (see EEPROM shown in FIG. 106) of the EEPROM 231 (S775). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing. As a result, the basic setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the EEPROM 231 according to the operation of the adjustment PC 1000.

In S776, the control LSI 230 saves the acquired setting value in a designated position in the general setting value storage area of the DRAM (see DRAM shown in FIG. 106). Thereby, the general setting items related to the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 can be changed on the DRAM not only by the operation of the adjustment PC 1000 but also by the operation using the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 or the touch panel DD19T.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of the installation value is the horizontal position offset (S777). When the type of the installation value is the horizontal position offset (S777: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S778. When the type of the installation value is not the horizontal position offset (S777: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S779.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the types of positions (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM & the horizontal position setting flag in the work area (S778). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

In S779, the control LSI 230 determines whether the type of the set value is the vertical position offset. When the type of the installation value is the vertical position offset (S779: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S780. When the type of the installation value is not the vertical position offset (S779: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S781.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the types of positions (A to E) in various flags of the DRAM & vertical position setting flags in the work area (S780). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

In S781, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the type of the set value is the focus position offset. When the type of the set value is the focus position offset (S781: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next process of S782. When the type of the installation value is not the focus position offset (S781: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets the type of position (A to E) in the various flags of the DRAM & the focus position setting flag in the work area (S782). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector setting value storage processing.

[Projector self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 113 shows a projector self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, '55AAH' as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S791).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value read from the self-diagnosis storage area (load value) matches the diagnosis value correctly (S792). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S792: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S794. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S792: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S793.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "self-diagnosis abnormality (see projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S793).

Next, the control LSI 230 performs an LED temperature diagnosis process (S794). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor B25.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S795: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S797. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S795: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S796.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "LED temperature abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S796). Specifically, the temperature sensor B25 detects the temperature near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and the lens unit B21. The control LSI 230 measures each temperature through the temperature sensor B25, and when the condition in the condition field of the LED temperature abnormality of the projector control board error information shown in FIG. 57 is satisfied, the value of the status field indicates the error management of the DRAM. Set to area. For example, as the LED (G) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240G, when the temperature around the LED light source 240G detected by the temperature sensor B25 is 105° C. or more and less than 110° C., a warning (01B (B means Bit) is given. )) is set, and if it is 110° C. or higher, shutdown (11B) is set.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs FAN rotation diagnosis processing (S797). In this processing, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the fans 244A, 244B, 245.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S798: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S800. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S798: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S799.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "FAN rotation abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S799). Specifically, similar to the above-mentioned LED temperature abnormality, the FAN rotation abnormality is set according to the conditions of FAN1 to 4 rotation abnormality of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power supply diagnosis process (S800). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage supplied to the projector device B2.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S801: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S803. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is less than the specified voltage (S801: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S802.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "voltage abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S802). Specifically, similar to the LED temperature abnormality described above, the voltage abnormality is set according to the condition of the voltage abnormality of the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S803). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S804: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S806. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S804: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S805.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets'DLP abnormality' as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S805). Specifically, like the LED temperature abnormality described above, the DLP abnormality is set according to the condition of WDT-DLP in the projector control board error information shown in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not data indicating'LED temperature abnormality' (forced shutdown),'FAN rotation abnormality', or'voltage abnormality' is set in the error management area (S806). .. When the data indicating any of the above abnormalities is set in the error management area (S806: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S307. If none of the data indicating the abnormality is set in the error management area (S806: No), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

Next, the control LSI 230 issues a rotation stop command to the FAN1 to 3 (fans 244A, 244B, 245), or a DLP control circuit 232 and LEDs (R, G, B) (LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba). And issues a drive stop command (S807). As a result, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. In this embodiment, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped when data indicating “LED temperature abnormality”, “FAN rotation abnormality”, or “voltage abnormality” is set in the error management area. However, the power must be turned off for restoration, but the invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the projector device B2 may be restarted when the occurring abnormality is recovered while the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped.

[Processing during transmission between sub-control and projector]
FIG. 114 shows sub-control-projector transmission processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 (S811). This transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting a command from the projector control board B23.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value of the transmission cycle counter is, for example, 125 (4 msec×125=500 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S812). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (500 msec or more has elapsed from the previous transmission) (S812: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S813. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S812: No), the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission time process.

Next, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S813).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the projector setting flag in the work area are'OFF' (S814). When the projector setting flag is'OFF' (S814: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S815. When the projector setting flag is not “OFF” (S814: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S816.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “startup parameter request” for the sub-control board SS as transmission data (S815). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the second serial line transmission processing of S825 described later. After the processing of S815, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S825.

In S816, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM. When the error data exists in the error management area (S816: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S817. When there is no error data in the error management area (S816: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S820.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates, as transmission data, a command indicating'error notification (CMD: 84H shown in the left column of FIG. 56, and see FIG. 57)' for the sub-control board SS (S817). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the second serial line transmission processing of S825 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether the error data in the error management area is data indicating a self-diagnosis abnormality or a DLP abnormality (S818). When the error data is data indicating the self-diagnosis abnormality or the DLP abnormality (S818: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S819. If the error data is neither the self-diagnosis abnormality data nor the DLP abnormality data (S818: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S825.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area to "ON" (S819). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S825.

In step S820, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command indicating “reception confirmation (see CMD: 83H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send a command indicating'receipt confirmation' (S820: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S821. When there is no request to send a command indicating “receipt confirmation” (S820: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S822.

Next, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “receipt confirmation” for the sub control board SS as transmission data (S821). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the second serial line transmission processing of S825 described later. After the processing of S821, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S825.

In S822, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not there is a request to send a command corresponding to the status (left column CMD: 85H to 8BH in FIG. 56) to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send a command corresponding to the status (S822: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S823. When there is no command transmission request corresponding to the status (S823: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S824.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs status transmission data creation processing (S823). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 115. After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S825.

In S824, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating “parameter request (CMD: 82H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” for the sub-control board SS as transmission data. This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the next second serial line transmission processing of S825.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a second serial line transmission process (S825). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the projector control board B23 to the sub control board SS via the scaler board SK. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission process.

[Status transmission data creation processing]
FIG. 115 shows the status transmission data creation processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23. As shown in the figure, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter of the status storage area of the DRAM is the LED temperature (S831). When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED temperature (S831: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S832. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED temperature (S831: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S834.

Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensor B25 of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and generates temperature data (S832).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the temperature data (CMD: 85H, D1 to D3 shown in the left column in FIG. 56) as a parameter in the'LED temperature (CMD: 85H shown in the left column in FIG. 56)' command ( S833). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S834, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter in the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed. When the parameter of the status storage area is the FAN rotation speed (S834: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S835. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the FAN rotation speed (S834: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S837.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the rotation pulse numbers of FAN1 (intake fan 244A), FAN2 (intake fan 244B), and FAN3 (exhaust fan 245) as rotation pulse data (S835).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the “FAN rotation speed (CMD: 86H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)” command with the FAN rotation pulse number as a parameter (S836). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In step S837, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter of the status storage area is LED brightness. When the parameter of the status storage area is the LED brightness (S837: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S838. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the LED brightness (S837: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S840.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the brightness data of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B from the DLP control circuit 232 (S838).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the LED brightness data acquired from the'LED brightness number (see CMD: 87H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command that includes the LED brightness setting in the status (S839). .. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S840, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter in the status storage area is the horizontal adjustment value. When the parameter in the status storage area is the horizontal adjustment value (S840: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S841. When the parameter in the status storage area is not the horizontal adjustment value (S840: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S843.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the horizontal position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S841).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the values of the horizontal position AE adjustment values as parameters in the'horizontal adjustment value (CMD: 88H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S842). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S843, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter in the status storage area is the vertical adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the vertical adjustment value (S843: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S844. When the parameter in the status storage area is not the vertical adjustment value (S843: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S846.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the vertical position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S844).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data by using the values of the vertical position AE adjustment values as parameters in the'vertical direction adjustment value (CMD: 89H shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S845). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S846, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the parameter in the status storage area is the focus adjustment value. When the parameter of the status storage area is the focus adjustment value (S846: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S847. When the parameter in the status storage area is not the focus adjustment value (S846: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S849.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the focus position A to E adjustment values from the EEPROM 231 (S847).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates transmission data using the values of the focus position AE adjustment values as parameters in the'focus adjustment value (CMD: 8AH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command (S848). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In S849, the control LSI 230 determines whether the parameter in the status storage area is the drift correction temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature (S849: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S850. When the parameter in the status storage area is not the drift correction temperature (S849: No), the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

Next, the control LSI 230 inputs data from the temperature sensor B25 relating to the drift correction temperature and generates drift correction temperature sensor data (S850).

Next, the control LSI 230 creates, as transmission data, a'drift correction temperature (CMD:8BH shown in the left column of FIG. 56)' command that includes the drift correction temperature sensor data in the status (S851). After that, the control LSI 230 ends the status transmission data creation process.

(Memory map of sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL)
As shown in FIG. 116, various information is stored in the DRAM and ROM included in the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL.

As shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM of the MCU 900 is provided with a reception storage area, a transmission storage area, a flag area, various storage areas, and a sub liquid crystal setting storage area. For example, a reception completion flag, an EXT reception flag, and a sub liquid crystal setting flag are stored in the flag area. The various storage areas store a transmission cycle counter, a status storage area, a reset request flag, an error management area, and a self-diagnosis storage area. Horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and brightness are stored in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area. The stored information will be described later.

Further, the ROM of the MCU 900 stores horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, and brightness as data values of the liquid crystal initial setting area, and the baud rate (third serial line), data length, parity, as serial line setting values. Stop is stored, and the diagnostic value (55AAH) is stored as a value for self-diagnosis. The stored information will be described later. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the DRAM stores various other work areas used by the MCU 900, and the ROM stores control programs executed by the MCU 900 and constant data.

(Treatment of sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL)
[Main processing of sub liquid crystal control by MCU900]
FIG. 117 shows the sub liquid crystal control main processing by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, when the power is turned on, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal initialization process (S861). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 900 performs touch panel input processing (S862). In this process, the MCU 900 performs a predetermined operation based on an operation signal (a signal corresponding to a touch operation, a flick operation, a pinch operation) from the touch panel DD19T.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM is'ON' (S863). When the reception completion flag is'ON' (S863: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S864. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S863: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S868.

Next, the MCU 900 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S864).

Next, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to'OFF' (S865).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates'sub liquid crystal (see ID: 40H shown in FIG. 53)' (S866). When the destination ID indicates “sub liquid crystal” (S866: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S867. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate'sub liquid crystal' (S866: No), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of S868.

Next, the MCU 900 performs processing during reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal (S867). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub-liquid crystal self-diagnosis process (S868). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

Next, the MCU 900 performs processing during transmission between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal (S869). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the reset request flag in each storage area of the DRAM is'ON' (S870). When the reset request flag is'ON' (S870: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S871. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S870: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S872.

Next, the MCU 900 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S871). Waiting for the watchdog timer to reset is a process for performing an infinite loop process without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting a predetermined value) and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the MCU 900. When the reset signal is output to the MCU 900, the MCU 900 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S861) of the sub liquid crystal control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S872, the MCU 900 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the MCU 900 waits for a cycle of 4 msec, for example (S873). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S862.

[Sub LCD serial line reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows a sub-liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process by the MCU 900 of the sub-liquid crystal I/F board SL. This process is a communication interrupt process for fetching received data in response to an external request via the third serial line during execution of the sub liquid crystal control main process described above.

As shown in FIG. 118, the MCU 900 determines whether the received data from the third serial line is'STX(02H)' indicating the start of the data (S881). When the received data is'STX' (S881: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S882. When the received data is not'STX' (S881: No), the MCU 900 moves to the process of S883.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag and the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “OFF” and clears the reception storage area (S882). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S883, the MCU 900 saves the reception data from the third serial line in the reception storage area of the DRAM.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the received data is'ETX(03H)' indicating the end of the data (S884). When the received data is'ETX' (S884: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S885. When the received data is not'ETX' (S884: No), the MCU 900 moves to the process of S886.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM to "ON" (S885). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S886, the MCU 900 determines whether the ETX reception flag in the flag area of the DRAM is'ON'. When the ETX reception flag is “ON” (S886: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S887. When the ETX reception flag is not "ON" (S886: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

Next, the MCU 900 performs received data sum check processing (S887).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the sum value obtained in S887 is normal (S888). When the sum value is normal (S888: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S890. When the sum value is not normal (S888: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S889. The method of calculating the sum value is the same as the content described in the sub device reception interrupt process (S258 in FIG. 74).

Next, the MCU 900 clears the reception storage area of the DRAM (S889). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

In S890, the MCU 900 sets the reception completion flag in the flag area of the DRAM to “ON”. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal serial line reception interrupt process.

[Sub liquid crystal initialization processing]
FIG. 119 shows a sub liquid crystal initialization process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 initializes internal functions (S891).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the third serial line (S892).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 based on the horizontal resolution, the vertical resolution, and the brightness stored in the ROM (S893).

Next, the MCU 900 initializes the touch panel DD19T (S894).

Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag and the reset request flag to “OFF” in the flag area and various storage areas of the DRAM (S895). After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal initialization process.

[Processing during reception between sub-control and sub-liquid crystal]
FIG. 120 shows processing during reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the received data acquired from the third serial line in S864 is'status request (see CMD:43H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' (S901). When the command of the acquired received data is “status request” (S901: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S902. When the command of the acquired received data is not “status request” (S901: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S904.

Next, the MCU 900 registers a command transmission request indicating "status" in response to the "status request" (S902).

Next, the MCU 900 saves various parameter values included in the acquired received data in the status storage area of the DRAM (S903). After that, the MCU 900 ends the process at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

In S904, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is'setting completed (see CMD:42H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is “setting completed” (S904: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S905. When the command of the acquired received data is not “setting completed” (S904: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S906.

Next, the MCU 900 changes the setting of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL with the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S905). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S906, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation (see CMD: 41H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. When the command of the acquired received data is “start parameter request confirmation” (S906: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S907. When the command of the acquired received data is not “start parameter request confirmation” (S906: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S908.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM to "ON" (S907). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S908, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the command of the acquired reception data is the'sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting (see CMD:45H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)' command. When the command of the acquired received data is the'sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting' command (S908: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S909. When the command of the acquired received data is not the “sub liquid crystal screen resolution setting” command (S908: No), the MCU 900 moves to the process of S910.

Next, the MCU 900 stores the set value of the sub liquid crystal screen resolution of the received data acquired in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S909). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S912.

In S910, the MCU 900 determines whether the command of the acquired received data is'sub liquid crystal brightness setting (see CMD:46H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)'. When the command of the acquired received data is “sub liquid crystal brightness setting” (S910: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S911. If the command of the acquired received data is not “sub liquid crystal brightness setting” (S910: No), the command of the acquired received data is “status request completion (see CMD:44H shown in the right column of FIG. 55)”. Shifts to the processing of S912.

Next, the MCU 900 stores the brightness setting value of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area of the DRAM (S911). According to such processing, when the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 is performed, the resolution and the brightness thereof are arbitrarily changed so that the operator who visually recognizes the simple test pattern through the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 can easily see it. be able to.

Next, the MCU 900 registers a transmission request for a command indicating "receipt confirmation" (S912). After that, the MCU 900 ends the process at the time of reception between the sub control and the sub liquid crystal.

[Sub LCD self-diagnosis processing]
FIG. 121 shows a sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process by the MCU 900 of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 writes, for example, '55AAH' as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S921).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area correctly matches the diagnosis value (S922). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S922: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S924. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S922: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S923.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "self-diagnosis abnormality (see the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S923).

Next, the MCU 900 reads the status (operating state) of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL (S924).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not the status of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL is normal (S925). When the status of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL is normal (S925: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S927. When the status of the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL is not normal (S925: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S926.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "WDT-sub liquid crystal abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S926).

Next, the MCU 900 reads the actual data (actual resolution, brightness, etc.) regarding the sub liquid crystal image setting (S927).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the set value in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data regarding the sub liquid crystal image setting have the same set value (S928). When the set value of the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data regarding the sub liquid crystal image setting have the same set value (S928: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S930. When the set value in the sub liquid crystal setting storage area and the actual data related to the sub liquid crystal image setting do not match (S928: No), the MCU 900 proceeds to the processing of the next S929.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "sub liquid crystal screen setting abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S929).

Next, the MCU 900 reads temperature information (sensor temperature) based on a signal from a temperature sensor (not shown) incorporated in the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S930).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the sensor temperature is 100° C. or higher (S931). When the sensor temperature is 100° C. or higher (S931: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S931. When the sensor temperature is lower than 100° C. (S931: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S933.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "sub liquid crystal temperature abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S932).

Next, the MCU 900 performs the operation state determination process of the touch panel DD19T (S933).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the ON state (touch, flick, or pinch state) of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934). When the ON state of the touch panel DD19T is detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S935. When it is not detected for 30 minutes or more (S934: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S936.

Next, the MCU 900 sets "touch panel input abnormality (see sub liquid crystal I/F substrate error information shown in FIG. 57)" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S935).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the status, the set value, or the data indicating “temperature abnormality” is set in the error management area (S936). When any of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S937. When none of the above data is set in the error management area (S936: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis processing.

Next, the MCU 900 performs a sub liquid crystal operation stop process (S937). As a result, the operations of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the touch panel DD19T are stopped. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub liquid crystal self-diagnosis process.

[Sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission processing]
FIG. 122 shows a sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process by the MCU 900 of the sub-liquid crystal I/F substrate SL. As shown in the figure, the MCU 900 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 (S941). The transmission cycle counter is an addition counter for measuring the cycle of transmitting a command from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the value of the transmission cycle counter is 50 (200 msec) or more as a predetermined value (S942). When the value of the transmission cycle counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S942: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S943. When the value of the transmission cycle counter is less than the predetermined value (S942: No), the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process.

Next, the MCU 900 clears the value of the transmission cycle counter (S943).

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether or not error data exists in the error management area of the DRAM (S944). When the error data exists in the error management area (S944: Yes), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of the next S945. When there is no error data in the error management area (S944: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S947.

Next, the MCU 900 sends an “error notification (see CMD: 45H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)” command to the sub control board SS as an error management area (CMD: 45H and D1: error information shown in the left column of FIG. 55). (Reference) is added and transmission data is created (S945). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later.

Next, the MCU 900 sets the reset request flags in various storage areas of the DRAM to "ON" (S946). After that, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S947, the MCU 900 determines whether the sub liquid crystal setting flag in the flag area of the DRAM is'OFF'. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is'OFF' (S947: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S948. When the sub liquid crystal setting flag is not “OFF” (S947: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S949.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of the'startup parameter request (CMD: 41H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command for the sub-control board SS (S948). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later. After the processing of S948, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S949, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a request to send the'reception confirmation' command to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send the'receipt confirmation' command (S949: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S950. When there is no request to send the'receipt confirmation' command (S949: No), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of S951.

Next, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of the'receipt confirmation (CMD: 44H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command for the sub control board SS (S950). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later. After the processing of S950, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In S951, the MCU 900 determines whether or not there is a request to send the'status' command to the sub control board SS. When there is a request to send the'status' command (S951: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S952. When there is no request for transmission of the'status' command (S951: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S955.

Next, the MCU 900 determines whether the data type of the status storage area of the DRAM is related to touch input (S952). When the data type of the status storage area is related to touch input (S952: Yes), the MCU 900 moves to the processing of the next S953. When the data type of the status storage area is not related to touch input, that is, related to liquid crystal setting (S952: No), the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S954.

Next, the MCU 900 adds the data of the touch panel input area to the'status (see CMD: 43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' command relating to the touch input to the sub control board SS to create transmission data (S953). ). This transmission data is stored in the transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later. After the processing of S953, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In step S954, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating'status (see CMD:43H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' related to the liquid crystal setting on the sub control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the third serial line transmission processing of S956 described later. After the processing of S954, the MCU 900 shifts to the processing of S956.

In step S955, the MCU 900 creates transmission data of a command indicating'parameter request (CMD: 42H shown in the left column of FIG. 55)' with respect to the sub control board SS. This transmission data is stored in the third transmission storage area of the DRAM, and is transmitted as a transmission command to the sub control board SS by the next third serial line transmission processing of S956.

Next, the MCU 900 performs the third serial line transmission process (S956). By this transmission processing, various commands are transmitted from the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL to the sub control substrate SS via the scaler substrate SK. After that, the MCU 900 ends the sub-control-sub-liquid crystal transmission process.

(Optical adjustment of projector device B2)
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a test pattern projected when the projector device B2 is optically adjusted. A factory inspector (also referred to as a quality assurance person) activates the application software for optical adjustment on the adjustment PC 1000 and performs a predetermined operation according to the menu of the software, whereby the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1. Alternatively, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be operated to display the test pattern TP as shown in FIG. 123 on each projection surface. FIG. 123 shows, as an example, a state in which the test pattern TP is displayed on the reflecting portion D1 of the fixed screen mechanism D. The factory inspection operator can observe such a display mode of the test pattern TP from the upper display window UD1 of the gaming machine 1.

The test pattern TP has, for example, a color pattern in which SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) color bars are sprite-shaped in a circle and a small circular pattern in four corners is arranged on a background crosshatch pattern. Is.

Specifically, the factory inspector operates one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 so as to be a projection target, and each time the projection target is switched, While observing the display mode of the test pattern TP, the projector device B2 can be adjusted so that the display mode is appropriate. As a result, for the projector device B2, the horizontal position adjustment value, the vertical direction position adjustment value, the focus position adjustment value, the LED brightness setting, the keystone distortion correction value, the white color temperature setting, the brightness setting, the contrast setting, the gamma setting, and the test. Optical adjustment can be performed for each item such as a pattern, a horizontal position offset, a vertical position offset, a focus position offset, and the like.

In the present embodiment, at the time of adjustment work such as before assembling the gaming machine in, for example, identification symbols'A' to'C' are assigned to the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1, respectively. The horizontal position A to C adjustment value, the vertical position A to C adjustment value, and the focus position A to C adjustment value which are different for each projection target are set in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 using these identification symbols. Other adjustment items (LED brightness setting, keystone distortion correction value, white color temperature setting, brightness setting, contrast setting, gamma setting, test pattern, horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset) After assembled, it is set in the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS. Note that the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, and the focus position offset can be adjusted by the maintenance operator at the site such as a game arcade by adjusting the adjusted values at the factory.

On the other hand, FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a test pattern TP' and the like displayed on the screen (touch panel DD19T) of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 during optical adjustment of the projector device B2 in the field such as a game arcade. After the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall or the like, the maintenance operator can perform a predetermined operation to display the test pattern TP′ or the like on the touch panel DD19T which is the screen of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. .. The maintenance operator can appropriately perform the optical adjustment of the projector device B2 individually by using such a test pattern TP'.

Unlike the test pattern TP directly displayed on the projection target, the test pattern TP' displayed on the touch panel DD19T is displayed as a virtual image by simulation as an operation target that can be intuitively deformed. In addition, the touch panel DD19T displays buttons T1 and T2 for changing the setting of horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction for each projection target, as well as keystone distortion correction and LED brightness. , A button T3 and an indicator T4 for changing the setting of the white color temperature, brightness, contrast and gamma value are displayed, and a ten key T5 for inputting various numerical values is also displayed.

Specifically, the maintenance worker displays a test pattern TP′ or the like on the touch panel DD19T by performing a predetermined operation, and any one of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 projects. Operate as targeted. After that, the maintenance operator selects one of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction by operating the buttons T1 and T2, and directly touches the test pattern TP′ with the touch panel operation. It is possible to adjust the display mode while changing the display mode. That is, in the test pattern TP', the display position changes vertically and horizontally or the image quality changes according to the operation of the maintenance operator. Accordingly, with respect to the projector device B2, it is possible to change the setting of the horizontal position offset, the vertical position offset, the focus position offset, and the focus drift correction for each different projection target. At this time, the maintenance operator can also observe the actual test pattern TP because the test pattern TP is simultaneously projected from the projector device B2 onto the national screen mechanism D. The horizontal position offset, vertical position offset, focus position offset, and focus drift correction are set in the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41.

Further, the maintenance operator operates the buttons T3, the ten-key pad T5 and the like while observing the test pattern TP′ together with the actual test pattern TP, thereby correcting the trapezoidal distortion, the LED brightness, the white color temperature, the brightness, the contrast and the gamma value. It is possible to change the setting of each item by directly inputting numerical values. At this time, the test pattern TP' changes its overall shape or color tone according to the operation of the maintenance operator. The values of the respective items such as the trapezoidal distortion correction, the LED brightness, the white color temperature, the brightness, the contrast, and the gamma value which have been changed in this way are stored in the projector setting value storage area of the SRAM 401 of the sub control board SS and the sub RAM board 41. Is set in the projector setting value storage area.

Next, a modification of the present invention will be described. The same or similar components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Cooling structure of projector device)
FIG. 125 shows a first modification of the projector device. The projector device X shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22. In the interior partitioned by the bottom plate X21 and the cover case X22, similarly to the above-described one, a lens unit B21 (partially not shown) including the projection lens 210, LED light sources (240R, 240G, 240B) and DMD ( 241) and the like are provided, and an exhaust fan 245, heat dissipation plates 2430 and 2431, and a heat sink 243Xa are further provided. A heat sink 243Xc is externally attached to the outside of the cover case X22 so as to be entirely exposed. An opening X22B for guiding the irradiation light from the projection lens 210 to the outside is provided on one surface (front surface in FIG. 125) of the cover case X22. The projector device X of the first modification is directly attached to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and is provided so as to directly guide the irradiation light to the projection target without passing through a mirror.

An LED light source (240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba) and a DMD substrate (241a) (not shown) are provided in contact with one surface (lower surface in FIG. 125) of the heat dissipation plate 2430. Another heat radiating plate 2431 is arranged so as to overlap with the other one surface (upper surface in FIG. 125) of the heat radiating plate 2430, and the two heat radiating plates 2430 and 2431 are surface-attached by screws. A heat-conducting sheet (or a heat-conducting gel) is attached to the surface where the heat radiating plates 2430 and 2431 are in contact with each other, and the heat radiating plate 2430 is screwed with a tap for screw fixing (not shown). No). A mounting hole for screwing with a screw is provided on the upper surface of the heat dissipation plate 2431. Further, by removing the screw of the heat dissipation plate 2431, the heat pipe 243Xd and the heat sink 243Xc can be removed. The heat dissipation plate 2430 is connected so as to transfer the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate to the heat sink 243Xa via the heat pipe 243Xb. The heat dissipated in the air by the heat sink 243Xa is forcibly discharged by the exhaust fan 245 through the exhaust port X22D provided in the cover case X22.

On the other hand, the heat dissipation plate 2431 is connected so as to transfer heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. The heat pipe 243Xd extends from the inside of the cover case X22 to the outside through a hole X22A provided in the cover case X22, and is connected to a heat sink 243Xc provided outside. That is, the heat radiating plate 2431 is connected so as to receive the heat generated by the LED light source or the DMD substrate from the heat radiating plate 2430, and further transfer the heat to the heat sink 243Xc via the heat pipe 243Xd. As a result, the heat generated by the LED light source and the DMD substrate is transmitted to the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat dissipation plate 2431 and the heat pipe 243Xd, guided to the outside of the projector apparatus X, and then the heat sink 243Xc. It is designed to be exhausted. Such an external heat sink 243Xc can also effectively eliminate heat buildup inside the projector apparatus X and prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

FIG. 126 shows a second modification of the projector device. A projector device X′ shown in the figure has a bottom plate X21 and a cover case X22, and a lens unit B21 including a projection lens 210 inside thereof (partly not shown), as in the case of the first modification described above. And an optical mechanism (not shown) including LED light sources (240R, 240G, 240B) and DMD (241), and an exhaust fan 245, a heat dissipation plate 2430, and heat sinks 243Xa, 243Xc. There is. The heat sink 243Xc is arranged as follows, unlike the one according to the first modification described above.

The heat sink 243Xc is directly bonded to one surface (upper surface in FIG. 126) of the heat dissipation plate 2430, and is provided so that heat can be directly transferred from the heat dissipation plate 2430. Further, the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc is exposed to the outside through an opening X22C provided in one surface (upper surface in FIG. 126) of the cover case X22. According to the arrangement structure of the heat sink 243Xc, the heat generated in the LED light source and the DMD substrate is efficiently transmitted to the fin portion of the heat sink 243Xc located outside the cover case X22 through the heat dissipation plate 2430, and thus the projector device X. Heat will be exhausted outside the. Even with the heat sink 243Xc whose fins are exposed to the outside, it is possible to effectively eliminate the heat pool inside the projector apparatus X and prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

FIG. 127 shows an arrangement form of a projector device according to the third modification. A detailed structure of the projector device X″ shown in the figure is not shown, but the same structure as the projector device X′ shown in FIG. 126 is used, except that a heat sink exposed to the outside is not provided. That is, in the projector device X″, a heat dissipation plate 2430 is provided so as to face the opening X22C of the cover case X22 in place of the heat sink 243Xc described above, and the upper surface of the heat dissipation plate 2430 slightly protrudes from the opening X22C. It is exposed (not shown in FIG. 127). In such a projector device X″, the heat dissipation plate 2430 exposed from the opening X22C of the cover case X22 is connected to the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G via the metal heat conducting member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 is not shown. The upper wall G4 is made of a metal plate member having high thermal conductivity such as stainless steel. According to such a mounting structure of the projector apparatus X″, the upper surface wall G4 is generated inside the apparatus. Since the heat is efficiently transmitted to the upper surface wall G4 through the heat dissipation plate 2430 and the heat conducting member Y, and the upper surface wall G4 itself functions as a heat dissipation member, it is possible to effectively eliminate the heat accumulation inside the projector device X″. It is possible to prevent overheating of optical components such as lenses.

FIG. 128 shows a circuit configuration of a projector device applied to fourth to twentieth modified examples described later. The projector device B2 as shown in FIG. 33 is also applied to the fourth modification to the twentieth modification. Therefore, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 128, the projector device B2 applied to the fourth modification to the twentieth modification has the first temperature sensor B25a, the second temperature sensor B25b, the intake air temperature sensor B26a, and the like as electrical components. An exhaust temperature sensor B26b and a plurality of pulse sensors B27a, B27b, B27c are included. Further, the projector device B2 is supplied with electric power to the intake fans 244A (FAN1), 244B (FAN2), the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), the LED boards 240Ra, 240Ga, 240Ba, the DMD board 241a, etc., which are not shown. A power supply circuit B20 is also included.

The first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b have the same functions as the temperature sensor B25 described above. The first temperature sensor B25a is provided so as to detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240R in the LED board 240Ra and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23. The second temperature sensor B25b is provided so as to detect the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B in the LED board 240Ga and the LED board 240Ba, and output a temperature detection signal to the projector control board B23. As described above, regarding the heat generation characteristics of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B, while the LED light source 240G and the LED light source 240B tend to be relatively high, the LED light source 240R tends to be relatively low. Specifically, the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a. It should be noted that only one of the temperature sensors B25a and B25b of this type may be provided according to the specifications. Further, when the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b are not particularly distinguished, they are referred to as the temperature sensor B25.

The intake air temperature sensor B26a is arranged near the intake port of the intake fan 244B (FAN2), detects the temperature of the air supplied from the outside of the projector apparatus B2 to the inside through the intake fan 244B, and controls the projector. It is provided so as to output a temperature detection signal to the substrate B23. The exhaust temperature sensor B26b is arranged near the exhaust port of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3), detects the temperature of the air exhausted from the inside of the projector device B2 to the outside through the exhaust fan 245, and controls the projector. It is provided so as to output a temperature detection signal to the substrate B23. In general, the temperature detected by the exhaust temperature sensor B26b tends to be higher than the temperature detected by the intake temperature sensor B26a. Note that only one of the temperature sensors B26a and B26b of this type may be provided according to the specifications. Further, the intake air temperature sensor B26a and the exhaust gas temperature sensor B26b may be referred to as ventilation temperature sensors.

The pulse sensor B27a is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 244A (FAN1) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of FAN1. The pulse sensor B27b is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 244B (FAN2) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of FAN2. The pulse sensor B27c is provided so as to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 245 (FAN3) to the projector control board B23 as a rotation speed detection signal of FAN3. In the present embodiment, the intake fans 244A, 244B (FAN1, FAN2) are of relatively high rotation type, and the exhaust fans 245 (FAN3) are of relatively low rotation type. As a result, the rotation speed detected via the pulse sensors B27a and B27b corresponding to FAN1 and FAN2 tends to be higher than the rotation speed detected via the pulse sensor B27c corresponding to FAN3. It should be noted that with respect to this type of pulse sensor 27a, 27b, 27c, only one or any two may be provided depending on the specifications. The pulse sensor may be composed of, for example, a photo interrupter.

Fourth to 23rd modified examples will be described below on the premise of the projector device B2 as described above. It should be noted that each of the following modifications does not necessarily use all of the temperature sensor and the pulse sensor, but can be realized by using only a part of them. Further, with respect to each of the following modified examples, arbitrary modified examples may be appropriately combined with each other unless there is a special reason that makes it difficult to combine the technical prerequisites.

FIG. 129 shows projector control main processing by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as processing according to the fourth modification. The processing shown in FIG. 129 is a modification of part of the processing shown in FIG. 107 described above so that the processing is suitable for the projector device B2 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 129, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 230 performs a projector initialization process (S1001). This process corresponds to the process in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area are “ON” (S1002). When the reception completion flag is “ON” (S1002: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the next processing of S1003. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S1002: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S107.

Next, the control LSI 230 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S1003).

Next, the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area to “OFF” (S1004).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates “projector” (S1005). When the transmission destination ID indicates “projector” (S1005: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1006. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S1005: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S1007.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector reception process (S1006). This process corresponds to the process of FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector self-diagnosis process (S1007). This process corresponds to the process in FIG. 113. Note that the projector self-diagnosis process can also be applied as a process as shown in FIG. 130 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a sub-control-projector transmission process (S1008). This process corresponds to the process in FIG. The sub-control-projector transmission process can also be applied as the process shown in FIG. 135 described later.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown), the FAN rotation abnormality, the FAN temperature abnormality, or the voltage abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1009). The LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) means an LED temperature abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown described later, and one of the temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B is predetermined using the LED temperature control table shown in FIG. 131(a). Generated and stored when detected as above temperature. The FAN rotation abnormality means a FAN rotation abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown, and using the FAN temperature rotation speed control table shown in FIG. 134, it is determined that one of the rotation speeds of FAN1 to 3 is less than a predetermined rotation speed under a predetermined temperature environment. Generated and stored when detected. The FAN temperature abnormality is generated and stored when the intake air temperature near FAN2 is detected as a predetermined temperature or higher using the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131(b). The voltage abnormality is generated and stored when, for example, a voltage boost of less than a predetermined specified voltage value is detected in the power supplied from the power supply circuit B20. When any one of these abnormalities is written in the error management area (S1009: Yes), the control LSI 230 basically transmits the error notification command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and thus the control of the step S1010. Move to processing. The error notification will be described later. On the other hand, when neither abnormality is written in the error management area (S1009: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S1013. The FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later, may be applied instead of the one shown in FIG. 131(b). Further, it is also possible to apply a FAN temperature rotation speed control table as shown in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS responds by sending a status request command, for example, in response to the error notification command transmission (S1010). When the sub CPU 400 responds (S1010: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1012. When the sub CPU 400 has not responded (S1010: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S1011.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since it was confirmed that any abnormality was written in the error management area of the DRAM (S1011). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S1011: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1012. When the predetermined time has not elapsed (S1011: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1013.

Next, the control LSI 230 sends a rotation stop command to the FANs 1 to 3 and a drive stop command to the LED driver 233 that drives the DLP control circuit 232 and the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B (S1012). As a result, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area are “ON” (S1013). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S1013: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1014. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S1013: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1015.

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S1014). Waiting for the watchdog timer to be reset is processing for performing an infinite loop process without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting a predetermined value) and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 230. When the timer outputs the reset signal to the control LSI 230, the control LSI 230 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S1001) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In S1015, the control LSI 230 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 230 waits for a cycle of 4 msec, for example (S1016). After that, the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1002.

FIG. 130 shows a self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the fourth modification. The process shown in FIG. 130 is a part of the above-described process shown in FIG. 113 modified so as to be a process suitable for the projector apparatus B2 of FIG. 128 in conjunction with the projector control main process of FIG. 129.

As shown in FIG. 130, the control LSI 230 writes, for example, “55AAH” as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S1021).

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area matches the diagnosis value correctly (S1022). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S1022: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of S1024. If the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S1022: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the next step S1023.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "self-diagnosis abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1023). This self-diagnosis abnormality includes an error due to the reset wait of the watchdog timer (WDT) described later. When the error information related to the self-diagnosis abnormality including the WDT reset wait is set, the control LSI 230 transmits the command indicating the error notification to the transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. (See S817 of FIG. 135 described later), set the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later), and described above according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The projector initialization process (S1001) shown in FIG. 129 is executed. The sub-control-projector transmission process and the projector initialization process executed in this case will be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S1024). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signals from the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S1025: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1027. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S1025: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1026.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "LED temperature abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1026). Specifically, the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b detect temperatures near the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B. The control LSI 230 measures the respective temperatures through the first temperature sensor B25a and the second temperature sensor B25b to determine whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature based on the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131(a). If the temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature, error information indicating an abnormality related to warning or forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. The warning means a warning display performed before the forced shutdown, and the forced shutdown causes the main operations of the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B and FAN1 to 3 of the projector device B2 to be abnormal such as temperature and FAN rotation speed. It means to forcibly stop according to.

For example, as the error information of the LED (R) temperature abnormality related to the LED light source 240R, a warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240R detected by the first temperature sensor B25a is 85° C. or higher and lower than 90° C. , 90°C or higher, forced shutdown is set. The error information of the LED(G) temperature abnormality relating to the LED light source 240G and the error information of the LED(B) temperature abnormality relating to the LED light source 240B have different generation conditions from the error information of the LED(R) temperature abnormality. A warning is set when the temperature near the LED light source 240G or the vicinity of the LED light source 240B detected by the temperature sensor B25b is 100° C. or higher and lower than 105° C., and when the temperature is 105° C. or higher, the forced shutdown is set. When the error information related to such an LED temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission processing (S1008) shown in FIG. (See S817 of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later). (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). The sub-control-projector transmission process and projector initialization process executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN rotation diagnosis process (S1027). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the pulse sensors B27a to B27c of the FAN1 to FAN3.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S1028: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of S1030. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S1028: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S1029.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "FAN rotation abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1029). Specifically, the pulse sensors B27a to B27c detect the rotation speeds of the FAN1 to FAN1 to 3. Further, for example, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the intake air temperature of FAN2 as the reference FAN temperature. The control LSI 230 measures the respective rotation speeds through the pulse sensors B27a to B27c and also measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a, so that the FAN temperature reaches a predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table in FIG. It is determined whether or not (for example, 32° C.) or lower, and if the FAN temperature is lower than or equal to a predetermined temperature, the rotational speed of any one of FAN1 to FAN1 to 3 is individually prescribed specific rotational speed (for example, FAN1:4410 rpm, FAN2). : 4410 rpm, FAN 3: 3710 rpm), error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM, and if the FAN temperature is higher than a predetermined temperature, one of FAN1 to 3 If the rotation speed is less than the specific rotation speed (for example, FAN1:6090 rpm, FAN2:4410 rpm, FAN3:4410 rpm) individually specified as a severer condition than the one described above, error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is displayed. Set in the error management area of DRAM.

For example, based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, as the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1, when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 4410 rpm when the FAN temperature is 32° C. or lower. , Forced shutdown is set. Further, as the error information of the rotation speed abnormality related to FAN1, forced shutdown is set when the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a is less than 6090 rpm when the FAN temperature is higher than 32°C. Based on the FAN temperature rotation speed control table of FIG. 134, the error information of the rotation speed abnormality concerning FAN2 and FAN3 is also set to forced shutdown when the same condition is satisfied. When such error information related to the FAN rotation number abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above ( A command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S817 of FIG. 135 described later) (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later). (See S825 of FIG. 135 described later). The sub-control-projector transmission process and projector initialization process executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a FAN temperature diagnosis process (S1030). In this process, the control LSI 230 acquires the intake air temperature as the FAN temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the intake air temperature sensor B26a, for example.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031). When the acquired FAN temperature is normal (S1031: Yes), the control LSI 230 moves to the process of S1033. When the acquired FAN temperature is not normal (S1031: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1032. For example, a temperature sensor may be installed in each of the FANs 1 to 3 and the FAN rotation speed may be controlled according to the FAN temperatures 1 to 3 detected by the temperature sensors.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "FAN temperature abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1032). Specifically, the intake air temperature sensor B26a detects the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) near FAN2. The control LSI 230 measures the FAN temperature through the intake air temperature sensor B26a to determine whether or not the FAN temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature based on the FAN temperature control table of FIG. 131(b). For example, error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. For example, if the FAN temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a is 67° C. or higher, the forced shutdown is set as the error information of the FAN temperature abnormality. When the error information related to the FAN temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. (See S817 of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later). (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). The sub-control-projector transmission process and projector initialization process executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a projector power source diagnosis process (S1033). In this process, the control LSI 230 detects the operating voltage of the power supplied from the power supply circuit B20 of the projector device B2.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034). When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S1034: Yes), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the process of S1036. When the operating voltage of the projector device B2 is less than the specified voltage (S1034: No), the control LSI 230 proceeds to the processing of the next S1035.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "voltage abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1035). Specifically, for example, error information of abnormal voltage indicating abnormal voltage drop is set. When the error information related to such voltage abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). 135 (see S817 in FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' in FIG. 135 described later) (see (See S825 in FIG. 135 described later). The sub-control-projector transmission process and projector initialization process executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

Next, the control LSI 230 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S1036). In this process, the control LSI 230 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 232.

Next, the control LSI 230 determines whether or not the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is normal (S1037: Yes), the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 232 is not normal (S1037: No), the control LSI 230 moves to the processing of the next S1038.

Next, the control LSI 230 sets "DLP abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S1038). When the error information related to such DLP abnormality is set, the control LSI 230 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S1008) shown in FIG. 129 described above (described later). (See S817 of FIG. 135), after setting the reset request flag to'ON' (see S818 and S819' of FIG. 135 described later), the projector initial shown in FIG. 129 described above in response to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The conversion processing (S1001) is executed. That is, since the command indicating the error notification is created as the transmission data in S1008 and the reset request flag is set to'ON', the error notification command created in S1008 is processed by the process of S727' in FIG. 136 after rebooting. Will be sent in. At this time, an error notification command, information indicating the error notification, or the like can be stored in the EEPROM 231. In such a case, even when a voltage change (decrease, interruption, abnormality due to increase, etc.) occurs due to power interruption or restart, the command and information can be retained without being erased. The sub-control-projector transmission process and projector initialization process executed in this case will also be described later with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

According to the projector control main process and the projector self-diagnosis process, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub control board SS in accordance with various abnormalities of the projector device B2, and a response from the sub control board SS is sent at that time. In such a case, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is forcibly shut down, so that the operation failure due to the heat accumulation of the projector apparatus B2 can be avoided, and the discomfort of the video for a long time can be eliminated.

Further, even if there is no response from the sub-control board SS, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is automatically shut down after a predetermined time such as 30 seconds elapses, so that the malfunction of the projector apparatus B2 can be surely avoided. You can In the case of DLP abnormality, that is, in the case of error processing by the watchdog timer, reboot (initialization processing) is performed, and error transmission is performed after the reboot. In the case of this kind of DLP abnormality, there is a high possibility that the projector device B2 is frozen and it is difficult to give an error notification to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS (for example, the communication status is not normal, the transmission is Commands and information that should be created cannot be created normally). Therefore, error transmission is executed after rebooting. Note that the DLP abnormality may be treated in the same manner as other errors, and the error transmission related to the DLP abnormality may be performed before rebooting. Further, when the projector device B2 itself reboots or shuts down, communication with the sub CPU 400 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or longer, so the sub CPU 400 detects an abnormality and the sub CPU 400 causes the projector to project. A reboot command (or a reboot) may be given to the device B2. Further, when the sub CPU 400 cannot receive the signal from the projector apparatus B2 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more, it is determined that the projector apparatus B2 is likely to be in the process of being rebooted, and is transmitted after the reboot processing. When the sub CPU 400 does not receive the received error notification command (that is, when a time longer than 1000 ms, for example, 5000 ms elapses), the sub CPU 400 controls the projector device B2 to forcibly reboot. Alternatively, an error may be notified.

FIG. 131 shows an LED temperature control table and a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a reference table according to the fourth modification.

As shown in FIG. 131A, in the LED temperature control table, the control conditions corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED light source 240R (LED(R)), the LED light source 240G (LED(G)) and the LED light source 240B( It is specified that the control condition corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the LED (B) is different.

For example, regarding the LED light source 240R (LED(R)), the operation is normally controlled when the LED temperature is 0°C or higher and lower than 85°C, and the operation is controlled without stopping when the LED temperature is 85°C or higher and lower than 90°C. However, it is controlled to perform warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image on the screen or the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and when the LED temperature becomes 90° C. or more, the projector device B2 Controlled to force shutdown of major operations. At the time of the warning, the corresponding processing is performed by the control LSI 230, and a command relating to the error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 displays a projection image showing the warning on the screen. On the other hand, on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed. At the time of forced shutdown, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS, so that an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19.

On the other hand, regarding the LED light source 240G (LED(G)) and the LED light source 240B (LED(B)), if the LED temperature is 0°C or higher and lower than 100°C, the operation is normally controlled, and the LED temperature is 100°C or higher and 105°C or higher. Although the operation is controlled without stopping at a temperature lower than ℃, it is controlled so as to warn (warning display) as a temperature abnormality by the projected image on the screen and the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, and further, the LED temperature is When the temperature rises to 105° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to forcibly shut down. At the time of such a warning, the control LSI 230 performs the corresponding process, and the command related to the error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 displays the warning on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Further, even in the case of forced shutdown, a command relating to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. The image indicating the warning or the shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and also displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. Thereby, even if the projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or even if the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image showing a warning or a shutdown is displayed by either one of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player or game hall manager of that fact. At this time, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, an error is generated from the external centralized terminal board 31 of the gaming machine 1 to the gaming machine management device such as a hall computer or an island control computer. You may make it notify and notify. In addition, as the display means of the present embodiment, a projection device, a screen, a liquid crystal display device, a display device by lighting a dot unit using an LED, a touch panel, a flexible liquid crystal display device, an Illumina array (registered trademark), a transparent liquid crystal A display, a transparent screen, a movable accessory, an immovable accessory, and the like can be applied. The number of projector devices, screens, and liquid crystal display devices is not particularly limited. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the security signal is externally output from the main control board MS or the payout/launch control circuit (not shown) via the external centralized terminal board 31, but from the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. The security signal may be output to the outside.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131(b), the FAN temperature control table basically defines the FAN temperature (intake air temperature) of FAN2 as a target, and defines the control condition according to the FAN temperature.

For example, when the FAN temperature is 0°C or higher and lower than 67°C, the operation is normally controlled, and when the FAN temperature is 67°C or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down without warning (warning display). Controlled by. Even during such forced shutdown due to the FAN temperature, the command relating to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS, so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 displays an image indicating the shutdown of the projector device B2. To be done. Even in this case, the image indicating the warning or the shutdown is projected by the projector device B2 and displayed on the liquid crystal display device DD19 in the same manner as the projected image. Thereby, even if the projection by the projector device B2 is difficult or impossible, or even if the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19 is difficult or impossible, an image showing a warning or a shutdown is displayed by either one of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player or game hall manager of that fact. Further, in addition to the projection by the projector device B2 and the display by the liquid crystal display device DD19, the external centralized terminal board 31 of the gaming machine 1 notifies the management device of the game hall such as a hall computer or an island computer that an error has occurred. You may make it notify.

According to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, the LED temperatures of the LED light source 240R (LED(R)), the LED light source 240G (LED(G)), and the LED light source 240B (LED(B)) can be calculated. When the temperature rises and exceeds a specified temperature (for example, LED(R): 85°C, LED(G), (B): 100°C), a warning is given that it is determined to be abnormal, and the LED temperature further rises. Then, the temperature becomes higher than a specified temperature (for example, LED(R): 90° C., LED(G), (B): 105° C.) or even if the intake air temperature (FAN temperature) near FAN2 is lower than the LED temperature. When the temperature exceeds (for example, 67° C.), the main operation of the projector apparatus B2 is temporarily stopped by the forced shutdown. Therefore, the malfunction of the projector apparatus B2 due to the heat accumulation is notified in advance by a warning and appropriately avoided. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the video that may take a long time.

Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, when the temperature of the LED (R) is, for example, 85° C. or higher, or the temperature of the LEDs (G) and (B) is higher, for example, 100° C. or higher, An error warning is issued to the CPU 400, the temperature of the LED (R) further rises to, for example, 90° C. or higher, or the temperature of the LEDs (G) and (B) rises to, for example, 105° C. or higher, or , If the intake air temperature of FAN2 is lower than the temperature (85° C.) at which the LED (R) warns (error warning) is performed and becomes equal to or higher than the prescribed temperature of FAN2, for example, 67° C., the operation of the projector device B2 is performed. Is temporarily stopped by the forced shutdown, the malfunction of the projector apparatus B2 due to the heat accumulation is notified in advance by a warning to the sub CPU 400, and then appropriately avoided, and the discomfort of the video for a long time is eliminated. You can The temperature at which the LED(R) is warned (85° C.) is not limited to the LED(R), but is a temperature that serves as a criterion for determining an abnormality in the entire LED including the LED(G) and the LED(B). May be That is, when there are a plurality of types of LEDs such as LED (R), LED (G), and LED (B), the presence or absence of an abnormality may be determined based on any one of the LED temperatures. The intake air temperature of the fan 2 is a temperature that can be recognized as the ambient temperature of the intake fan, the temperature of the intake fan itself, the temperature outside the projector device, or the outside air temperature.

Further, according to the LED temperature control table and the FAN temperature control table, for example, when the temperature of the LED (R) becomes 85° C. or higher, a warning is given to the sub CPU 400, and accordingly a warning relating to an error notification is displayed on the screen. Is projected and displayed, and a similar image showing a warning related to error notification is separately displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Further, when the temperature of the LED (R) rises to, for example, 90° C. or higher, or the intake air temperature of the FAN 2 rises to, for example, 67° C. or higher, an error notification is given to the sub CPU 400, and the warning is issued accordingly. After the image related to the different error notification is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19, the operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly stopped by the response from the sub CPU 400 to the error notification. As a result, the malfunction of the projector device B2 due to the heat accumulation is notified in advance by an error notification related to a warning and an error notification related to a forced shutdown after that, and appropriately avoided, so that the discomfort of an image that extends for a long time can be avoided. It can be resolved. In such a case, if there is no response from the sub CPU 400 even after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the shutdown can be forcedly performed.

FIG. 132 shows a FAN temperature control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the fifth modification. The table shown in FIG. 132 is an improved version of the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 131(b).

In the FAN temperature control table shown in FIG. 132, the control condition corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the intake air temperature (FAN2) and the control condition corresponding to the temperature abnormality of the exhaust temperature (FAN3) are defined to be different.

For example, the intake air temperature is controlled to forcibly shut down the main operation of the projector device B2 when the intake air temperature reaches 67° C. or higher, similar to that shown in FIG. 131(b). At the time of forced shutdown, an image showing shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. On the other hand, with respect to the exhaust gas temperature, the operation is normally controlled until it reaches, for example, 75° C., which is somewhat higher than the intake air temperature, and the operation is controlled without stopping at 75° C. or more and less than 80° C. The projection image and the display image of the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 are controlled to perform warning (warning display) as a temperature abnormality, and when the exhaust temperature becomes 80° C. or higher, the main operation of the projector device B2 is forcibly shut down. Controlled. At the time of such a warning, the control LSI 230 performs the corresponding process, and the command related to the error warning is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, and the projector device B2 displays the warning on the screen. While the projected image is displayed, an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. Further, even in the case of forced shutdown, a command relating to the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS, so that an image showing the shutdown of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19.

FIG. 133 shows a projector error notification reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the sixth modification. The process shown in FIG. 133 is a part of the above-described process shown in FIG. 93 modified so that the process is suitable for the projector device B2 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 133, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector error occurrence process in response to the error notification from the projector control board B23 (S1041).

Next, if the projector error is a warning, the sub CPU 400 makes a display request to both the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the projector device B2 so as to make a warning-related notification by making full use of both the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 and the projector device B2. In response, a response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is transmitted (S1042). If the projector error is not a warning, the sub CPU 400 skips the processing of S1042 and moves to the processing of the next S1043.

Next, if the projector error is a shutdown, the sub CPU 400 issues a display request to the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 so that the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 notifies the shutdown of the projector device B2, and thereafter, the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. When the display device DD19 is informed of shutdown, a response signal (command) corresponding to the error notification is transmitted to the projector device B2 after that (S1043).

Next, the sub CPU 400 issues a sound projector error occurrence output request to the speaker group 62 in order to notify by sound of an error of the projector control board B23 (projector device B2) (S1044). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector error notification reception process.

By using the FAN temperature control table of FIG. 132 in combination with the LED temperature control table of FIG. 131(a) to execute the projector error notification reception time process of FIG. 133, for example, the LED(R) If the temperature is 85° C. or higher, or if the exhaust temperature of the FAN 3 becomes lower than that temperature, for example, 75° C. or higher, an error notification relating to a warning is issued to the sub CPU 400 by determining that it is abnormal, and further LED(R) If the temperature rises to 90° C. or higher, or if the intake temperature of FAN2 becomes lower than the exhaust temperature, eg, 67° C. or higher, the operation of the projector device B2 is automatically stopped by forced shutdown. A malfunction of the projector device B2 due to heat accumulation can be notified in advance by a warning to the sub CPU 400, and appropriately avoided to eliminate the discomfort of the image that extends for a long time.

FIG. 134 shows a FAN temperature rotation speed control table stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector control board B23 as a table according to the seventh modification.

As shown in FIG. 134, in the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, it is specified that the shutdown control condition is different based on the lower limit of the FAN rotation speed specified for each of FAN1 to 3. Further, as the FAN temperature, for example, the intake air temperature of FAN2 is applied.

For example, if the FAN temperature (FAN2) is 32° C. or lower, and for the intake fan FAN1, if the FAN rotation speed becomes less than 4410 rpm defined as the lower limit value, it is determined that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity, and For FAN2, if the FAN speed is less than 4410 rpm specified as the lower limit value, it is determined that there is a rotation speed error due to insufficient intake capacity. Then, the intake capacity is insufficient and it is determined that there is a rotation speed error. When the rotation speed error is determined in this way, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcedly shut down.

On the other hand, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32° C., it is required to exhibit a larger intake/exhaust (ventilation) capacity. Therefore, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) becomes higher than 32° C., the lower limit value of a part of the FAN rotation speed is raised. As a result, when the FAN temperature (FAN2) is higher than 32° C., with regard to the intake fan FAN1, when the FAN rotation speed becomes less than 6090 rpm which is defined as a higher lower limit value, the rotation speed error is determined due to insufficient intake capacity. When the FAN rotation speed for the intake fan 2 is less than 4410 rpm which is defined as the same lower limit value as above, it is determined that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity, and for the exhaust fan 3, the FAN rotation speed is the above. When it is less than 4410 rpm which is defined as a higher lower limit value, it is determined that the rotation speed error is due to insufficient intake capacity. Even when it is determined that there is a rotation speed error, the main operation of the projector device B2 is controlled to be forcedly shut down.

According to such a FAN temperature rotation speed control table, when the FAN temperature becomes higher than 32° C., for example, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown, while even if the FAN temperature is 32° C. or less, such a temperature situation occurs. Accordingly, with respect to the exhaust fan 3 and the intake fan 1, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown according to the respective fan rotation speeds. Further, when the FAN temperature is 32° C. or lower, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown according to the FAN rotation speed of the intake FAN 2 corresponding to the FAN temperature, so that the projector apparatus B2 is not heated. It is possible to appropriately avoid the malfunction due to the accumulation depending on the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and to eliminate the discomfort of the image that extends for a long time.

Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown according to the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3, while the intake air intake air is controlled regardless of the detected fan temperature. Since the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown even in accordance with the FAN rotation speed of the FAN2, the malfunction of the projector apparatus B2 due to the heat accumulation is appropriately avoided in accordance with the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and the operation is performed for a long time. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort of the image that extends.

Further, according to the FAN temperature rotation speed control table, the operation of the projector device B2 is stopped by the forced shutdown in accordance with the FAN temperatures of the intake fan 2 and the exhaust fan 3 and the intake fan 1. Therefore, the malfunction due to the heat accumulation of the projector device B2 can be appropriately avoided in accordance with the FAN temperature and the FAN rotation speed, and the discomfort of the image for a long time can be eliminated.

It should be noted that all of the FANs 1 to 3 are each provided with a temperature sensor, and the FANs of the respective FANs 1 to 3 are provided in accordance with the airflow temperatures passing through the respective FANs 1 to 3 detected through the respective temperature sensors. You may make it perform stop control by rotation speed and shutdown.

FIG. 135 shows a sub-control-projector transmission process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 135 is executed in S1008 of the projector control main process of FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial modification of the process of S819 shown in FIG. 114 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 135, the processes other than S819' are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only the process of S819' will be described.

As shown in FIG. 135, in S819', the control LSI 230 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area to "ON". After that, the control LSI 230 ends the sub-control-projector transmission process. That is, in the case of a self-diagnosis abnormality or DLP abnormality including an error due to the watchdog timer (WDT) resetting wait, the command of “error notification” indicating these abnormalities is not immediately transmitted, and the reset request flag is set to “ON”. The output of the reset signal is waited for from the watchdog timer (WDT) in response to the', and when the reset signal is output, the projector initialization process shown in FIG. 136 is executed by rebooting. Becomes

FIG. 136 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 as a process according to the eighth modification. The process shown in FIG. 136 is executed in S1001 of the projector control main process of FIG. 129 described above, and is a partial improvement of only the process of S727 shown in FIG. 109 described above. Therefore, in FIG. 136, the processes other than S727' are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only the process of S319' will be described.

As shown in FIG. 136, in S727′, the control LSI 230 initializes various flags & work areas of the DRAM, and performs self-diagnosis abnormality (watchdog timer (WDT) before this projector initialization processing by rebooting). (Including the reset wait error)) and an'error notification' command indicating a DLP abnormality are created, the command of'error notification' is transmitted to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. After that, the control LSI 230 ends the projector initialization process.

According to the projector control main process and the projector self-diagnosis process shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, and the sub-control-projector transmission time process and the projector initialization process shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the LED of the projector device B2 ( (R, G, B), FAN1 to 3 or FAN1 to 3 or the power supply circuit B20 becomes abnormal due to a thermal factor, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is forced to shut down after an error notification is issued to the sub CPU 400 accordingly. To be stopped. On the other hand, for example, if the watchdog timer is not cleared (or set to a predetermined value) and falls into an infinite loop for abnormal processing, the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is stopped in this case as well, but rebooted (restarted). Due to this, when the watchdog timer is reset and the operation of the projector apparatus B2 is restored, an error notification is given to the sub CPU 400. Therefore, after surely notifying the sub CPU 400 of various malfunctions of the projector apparatus B2, It can be avoided.

As described above, when the abnormality processing is performed using the watchdog timer, there is a high possibility that the projector device B2 is frozen, and thus the normal operation is unlikely to be guaranteed, and an early reboot ( Reset or restart) is required. Even if an attempt is made to send the send command at this stage, there is a high possibility that the send command will not be sent normally. Therefore, it is desirable to control the sub CPU 400 so that an error is notified after the reboot. As described above, when the projector device B2 is frozen, the watchdog timer is not cleared and the time is up (including counts of addition formula and subtraction formula), so the projector device B2 is rebooted and an error occurs after rebooting. Notification will be given. It should be noted that the reboot can also be recognized as a process for restarting. Further, when the abnormality processing is performed using the watchdog timer, there is a high possibility that it is frozen and normal projection is difficult. Therefore, the liquid crystal display device DD19 and the gaming machine 1 are Components (for example, frame components, board components, front door components, cabinets, reels, levers, segment indicators and light sources (mainly LEDs) of the payout control board, segment displays provided on the housing Vessel and light source (for example, LED), body frame member, dish unit, gaming machine side component, button, front panel (including liquid product display device), projector device B2 component, projector device B2 projection The abnormality may be notified by various constituent members such as a reflecting member, a decorative member protruding from the frame, and the like. According to this, even when various abnormalities are detected except when the abnormality processing is performed by using the watchdog timer, the abnormality is caused by the above-mentioned components of the gaming machine 1 and the projection by the projector device B2. It is possible to perform notification and display (for example, error notification, warning, warning, abnormality notification, etc.) related to.

Regarding the abnormal operation of the gaming machine 1 and the projector device B2, the external communication means of the gaming machine 1 (external centralized terminal board 31, wireless communication means, short-range wireless communication, optical communication means, encrypted communication means, decryption communication) Means, encryption and decryption communication means, etc.), external communication means provided in the projector device B2, and the like, and devices in the amusement arcade (for example, hall computer, island computer, sand device, outbox, counting each unit). Machine, game media lending device with counter, data display, digital signage, representative lamp, call button, game medium number notification means (for example, one that notifies the number of game media by driving or emitting light from the case), Management device, peripheral device, CR unit, etc.) to notify that an error has occurred, as one means of various combinations of the exemplified devices, or a plurality of means. The game machine 1 can communicate with the outside using various communication modes. When such an error is notified to the outside, the manager of the gaming machine turns on/off the power of the gaming machine 1 (power interruption and restoration of power interruption, change of setting, etc.), and the setting screen of the gaming machine. It is possible to perform an operation for eliminating an error from (a setting screen for a player, a setting screen for a game hall, etc.). As the game medium, various game media such as the number of game media on the data are assumed in addition to medals and balls. In addition, it can be applied to a gaming machine in which the number of game media on the data (balls held, balls paid out, balls lent, balls accumulated, credits, number of shots, number of shots, number of foul balls, etc.) increases and decreases. In addition, the possessed ball, the payout ball, the rented ball, and the stored coin are terms applicable to various game media such as medals and balls. Further, in the case of an error in which a reboot is performed in the present embodiment, error information (self-diagnosis abnormality, DLP abnormality, or reset request flag, etc.) stored before rebooting at the time of restart is stored (for example, in the EEPROM). Since it is stored and stored in a storage area that is not cleared before and after rebooting, it is possible to send an error notification during the initialization process that is executed when the system is restarted. It is also possible to clear part or all, clear only the work area related to the error notification, etc.). In addition, it is also possible to simply use the watchdog timer to determine whether the communication between the boards or the communication between the control devices is normally performed, and in this case also, the abnormality detection using the watchdog timer can be performed. You can also use the phrase "do". The error information transmitted to the sub CPU 400 after the projector device B2 is rebooted is transmitted at the time of initialization processing executed at power-on or reboot, but the present invention is not limited to this. The error information may be transmitted in the step after the conversion processing.

FIG. 137 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as a process according to the ninth modification. The processing shown in FIG. 137 is obtained by modifying a part of the processing shown in FIG. 88 described above so that the processing is suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 137, the sub CPU 400 receives a command indicating that the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 is'projector' for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more. It is determined whether or not (S1051). When the command has not been received for the predetermined time or more (S1051: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1052. When some command is received within the predetermined time (S1051: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1053. At this time, if the received data is normal, it is transmitted at a cycle of, for example, 500 ms using the transmission cycle counter, so that the presence or absence of received data is monitored based on 1000 ms, which is a longer time. ing.

Next, the sub CPU 400 outputs a projector error occurrence display request output to the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL in order to display an error of the projector control board B23 (projector apparatus B2) on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 (S1052). ). As a result, if there is no response from the projector device B2 even after a lapse of time such as 500 ms or more, an image or the like for notifying an error of the projector device B2 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In step S1053, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area indicates “projector”. When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S1053: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1054. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S1053: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control reception data consistency check processing for controlling the projector device B2 (S1054). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines from the return value of the check result whether or not the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S1055). When the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S1055: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1056. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1055: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1057.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1056). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In step S1057, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception process. This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 89 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector drift correction processing (S1058). This processing corresponds to the processing in FIG. 95 described above. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

According to such a projector control process, the operation of the projector device B2 should be restored by, for example, rebooting, but the sub CPU 400 causes the sub CPU 400 to perform a predetermined time period (for example, 500 ms) longer than the transmission time interval of the projector device B2 (for example, 500 ms). For example, if there is no predetermined response from the projector device B2 even after 1000 ms), it is determined that the projector device B2 has some operation failure that cannot be restored by rebooting, and that fact is indicated by an image related to the error notification. It can be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device DD19. As a result, any malfunction of the projector device B2 can be reliably and promptly notified by an error notification and then avoided. Note that the predetermined time is not limited to 1000 ms as an example, and various times such as 500 ms or more can be set if the transmission time interval for one communication is 500 ms.

FIG. 138 illustrates a projector control reception process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification. In the process shown in FIG. 138, the process of S448 shown in FIG. 89 described above is the process of FIG. 140 described later, and only the process of S449 is deleted. Therefore, in FIG. 138, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 89 are used and the description thereof will be omitted. The case of S445: No and the processing of S450 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 138, if there is no request to change the projector setting value (S445: No), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the process of S450. In S450, the sub CPU 400 performs a status request command transmission process. In this process, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command to the projector control board B23. Then, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control reception process. In the tenth modified example, the parameter request command transmitted from the projector control board B23 does not include parameter values such as setting change and status. For example, a focus position setting change including a focus position origin adjustment described later is performed. A parameter value indicating whether the request is to change the projector setting value is included. That is, a command for requesting a parameter can be transmitted from the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing. Based on the parameter value included in such a command, in S445, it is determined whether or not there is a request for changing the projector setting value. Is determined. When the parameter request command is transmitted from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing, the sub CPU 400 receives the parameter request command (or upon receipt of the command), the projector device B2. When there is a request to change the projector setting value such as the focus position adjustment, the change of the projection content, the screen movement, etc., the projector setting value and the parameter can be transmitted to the projector device B2. In this way, the projector device B2 side can control the transmission timing of the command transmitted from the sub CPU 400, or the projector device B2 periodically transmits the parameter request command to the sub CPU 400. It is also possible to notify the sub CPU 400 that the command can be received. Further, the timing for transmitting the command requesting the parameter from the control LSI 230 of the projector control board B23 to the sub CPU 400 is set to a predetermined interval (for example, 500 ms interval, constant interval, constant cycle, etc.), but the timing is not limited to these. The parameter may be transmitted to the projector control board B23 when the sub CPU 400 determines to change the parameter of the projector device B2. In addition, when a command for requesting a parameter is transmitted from the projector control board B23 at a predetermined interval, a transmission/reception process in one process (for example, a transmission/reception process during startup of the projector device, a transmission/reception process during parameter change in the projector device, an error occurs). It is also conceivable that the parameter request command may be received a plurality of times in the (transmission/reception process, etc.), and it is assumed that the start of the transmission/reception process in one process and the command reception of the parameter request do not correspond one-on-one. In such a case, it is desirable that the sub CPU 400 independently transmits to the projector control board B23 at an arbitrary timing as described above. The parameter request command, the reception confirmation command transmitted from the projector device B2 to the sub CPU 400, or the setting completion command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the projector device B2 have duplicate commands and have special meanings. Unless specified, some commands may be discarded. By sending and receiving commands periodically in this way, unnecessary commands are discarded (or only the reception confirmation is performed and the subsequent processing is performed while monitoring that the communication status is normal). It is possible to simplify the processing.

FIG. 139 shows a projector drift correction process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as a process according to the tenth modification. The processing shown in FIG. 139 is a modification of part of the processing shown in FIG. 95 described above so that the processing is suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 139, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request based on the parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1061). This focus position setting change request is issued when the focus position should be changed while temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin described later and performing drift correction. When there is a focus position setting change request (S1061: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1062. If there is no focus position setting change request (S1061: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1063. Regarding the movement to the focus position, a method of obtaining the focus position after incorporating drift correction in advance and a method of moving the focus position according to the offset value without incorporating the drift correction and then performing the drift correction There is a method of moving the focus position, but either method may be applied or either method may be appropriately selected according to the situation. Further, the focus position may be moved by the drift correction and then the predetermined focus position may be further moved depending on the situation, or the focus movement may be performed collectively from the position before the movement to the position after the movement. The focus position may be moved. Focus control at that time is such as when grasping the position before movement, grasping the position after movement without grasping the position before movement, or grasping only the amount of movement. Various controls are possible.

In step S1062, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41. At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S1062 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

In S1063, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'drift correction temperature'. If the received command is “drift correction temperature” (S1063: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1064. When the received command is not'drift correction temperature' (S1063: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and also acquires the position coefficient of the focus position (S1064). As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the acquired drift correction temperature and position coefficient (S1065). As described above, the focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1065 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S1066). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1066: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1066: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1067.

Next, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and stores the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area (S1067).

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S1068).

Next, the sub CPU 400 increments the focus drift correction number counter by 1 (S1069). The drift correction number counter is an addition counter for accumulating the number of times the focus position drift correction is performed in response to the focus drift correction value being rewritten by the drift correction temperature. The focus drift correction counter is set to an initial value in the process in which it is determined that the focus drift correction will be performed after returning the focus position to the focus origin described later, and 1 is added when the focus drift correction is actually performed. It That is, when the focus drift correction is performed after returning to the focus origin, in order to count the next focus drift correction as the first time, -1 is set as the initial value of the focus drift correction number counter. The initial value of the focus drift correction number counter is also set when the projector device B2 is started. Further, since the case where the focus drift correction is performed after returning the focus position to the origin is counted as the first focus drift correction, the initial value of the focus drift correction counter may be set to zero. Further, when the initial value of the focus drift correction counter is set to 0, the count may not be performed when the focus drift correction is performed after returning to the focus origin. Regarding the focus drift correction, the temperature when the focus drift correction is performed last time (the temperature of the LED, the fan, the projector device, etc.) is compared with the temperature when the focus drift correction is performed this time, and based on the comparison result. It may be performed according to the amount of temperature change, or depending on the temperature when (or when) the focus movement (including the electric focus movement and the image movement by software image processing) is performed, and other predetermined conditions. The focus may be adjusted by adjusting the focus.

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S1070). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. As a result, the drift correction of the focus position is performed according to the drift correction temperature. The drift correction is a process of moving the focus position before correction for each drift correction temperature by a difference amount according to the drift correction, and the drift error included in the difference amount increases as the number of drift corrections increases. Regarding such drift error, the focus position is temporarily returned to the focus positions A to E (hereinafter, referred to as “focus origin”) that are reference positions for each projection surface, and then the focus position is adjusted to a position according to the adjustment value or the offset. By moving the position and then moving the focus position by the difference amount according to the drift correction, the drift error accumulated up to that point is eliminated. This will be described later. The focus position may be calculated by transmitting the electric focus position offset and the focus correction value, which are information necessary for that purpose, from the sub CPU 400, and the projector apparatus B2 may perform the calculation based on the information. Further, it is considered that the drift error is caused by the following factors. That is, since the electric focus adjustment according to the drift correction temperature is physically performed by making full use of the focus motor 242C, if this is performed for each change of 1° C., the focus motor 242C is drive-controlled extremely finely. Becomes At this time, if the focus motor 242C is driven swiftly and with high accuracy while projecting an image so that the player does not feel uncomfortable, the possibility of so-called motor out-of-step increases, and if the motor out-of-step occurs, the control circuit An error occurs between the focus position recognized on the side and the actual physical focus position. Since such a phenomenon is likely to occur when the electric focus adjustment is extremely finely performed, the electric focus adjustment is performed at a predetermined drift correction temperature (for example, a temperature change of 1 to 5° C.) as described later. This can be dealt with by controlling not to make adjustments. Further, if the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is suppressed, it is considered that the possibility of out-of-step of the motor is reduced, but there is a demerit that the focus time becomes long, and the focus required when the image is continuously projected. If the electric focus adjustment is performed by spending time, the image may be distorted or strange to the player. This is particularly likely to occur remarkably when a plurality of projection targets (screens) are provided and the projection targets are changed as in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the image is visually disturbed (for example, during the demonstration, in the dark, when the stage is changed for performance, etc.), the drive speed of the focus motor 242C is set to the normal case. It is also possible to deal with it by setting a slower speed.

FIG. 140 shows a projector setting change process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 140 is a part of the above-described process shown in FIG. 91 modified so that the process is suitable for the projector device B2 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 140, the sub CPU 400 extracts the setting change content of the projector setting value received as an argument (S1071).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S1072). When the content of the setting change is the horizontal position offset (S1072: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1073. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S1072: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1074.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs horizontal position offset command transmission processing (S1073). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and issues a command for setting the horizontal position offset to the projector control substrate B23. To send. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process. The horizontal position offset (horizontal image position offset) in the present embodiment is the horizontal position of the projection image that is horizontally offset-adjusted from the reference position for each projection surface, and the entire projection image is adjusted without performing electric focus adjustment. Means the position to be finely adjusted in the horizontal direction.

In step S1074, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the vertical position offset. When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S1074: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1075. When the setting change content is not the vertical position offset (S1074: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1076.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs vertical position offset command transmission processing (S1075). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the vertical position offset in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits a command for setting the vertical position offset to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process. The vertical position offset (vertical image position offset) in this embodiment is the vertical position of the projection image that is vertically offset-adjusted from the reference position for each projection surface, and the entire projection image is adjusted without performing electric focus adjustment. Means the position to be finely adjusted in the vertical direction. That is, since the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset control which two-dimensional position within the projection range the projected image is displayed, it is possible to move the projected image without electric focus adjustment. Is. The focus position may be moved by electric focus adjustment, and the horizontal position and the vertical position of the projection image may be moved during rendering, and the position of the projection image may be changed by software image processing. Further, the electric focus adjustment may be performed based on the values of the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset.

In S1076, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is the focus offset. When the setting change content is the focus offset (S1076: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1077. When the setting change content is not the focus offset (S1076: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1079.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing (S1077). This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S1078). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and the projector control command for setting the focus position offsets A to E (focus position offset command) is controlled. It transmits to the board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S1079, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is focus drift correction. If the setting change content is focus drift correction (S1079: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1080. If the setting change content is not the focus drift correction (S1079: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1082.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing (S1080). This process is the same as the process of S1077, and will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the sub CPU 400 performs a focus drift correction value command transmission process (S1081). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sets a command (focus drift correction value command) for setting the focus drift correction values A to E. Is transmitted to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S1082, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S1082: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1083. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S1082: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1084.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs an LED brightness setting command transmission process (S1083). In this processing, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In step S1084, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the content of the setting change is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S1084: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1085. When the content of the setting change is not the keystone distortion correction value (S1084: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1086.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S1085). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S1086, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is contrast setting. When the content of the setting change is the contrast setting (S1086: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1087. When the content of the setting change is not the contrast setting (S1086: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1088.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S1087). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the contrast to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S1088, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is gamma setting. When the setting change content is gamma setting (S1088: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1089. When the content of the setting change is not the gamma setting (S1088: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1090.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S1089). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41 and sends a command for setting the gamma value to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S1090, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is white color temperature. When the setting change content is the white color temperature (S1090: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1091. When the content of the setting change is not the white color temperature (S1090: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1092.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S1091). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and sends a command for setting the white color temperature to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In S1092, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the setting change content is brightness. When the content of the setting change is the brightness (S1092: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1093. If the setting change content is not brightness (S1092: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1094.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a brightness command transmission process (S1093). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the brightness in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the brightness to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process.

In step S1094, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is the test pattern (S1094: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1095. When the setting change content is not the test pattern (S1094: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S1095). In this process, the sub CPU 400 rewrites the test pattern in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the test pattern to the projector control board B23. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector setting changing process. Such a projector setting change process is executed when a maintenance worker in a game hall or an inspection worker makes various optical adjustments to the projector device B2 before factory shipment.

FIG. 141 shows focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as processing according to the tenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 141, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the focus origin adjustment flag is “ON” (S1101). The origin adjustment flag is flag information for designating whether or not to return the focus position to the focus origin. When the focus origin adjustment flag is'ON' (S1101: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1102. When the focus origin adjustment flag is not “ON” (S1101: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 400 sets a command indicating a focus origin adjustment instruction. This command, together with the focus position offset command or the focus drift correction value command, is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the processing of S1078 and S1081 of FIG. 140 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “OFF”. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment instruction transmission process.

FIG. 142 shows a projector control process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as a process according to the tenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 142 is obtained by modifying a part of the process shown in FIG. 88 described above so that the process is suitable for the projector device B2 of FIG. 128.

As shown in FIG. 142, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the transmission source ID of the reception data temporarily stored in the sub device reception storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 indicates “projector” (S1110). When the transmission source ID indicates “projector” (S1110: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1111. When the transmission source ID does not indicate “projector” (S431: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1118.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector control reception data consistency check processing for controlling the projector device B2 (S1111). In this process, the sub CPU 400 checks whether or not the value of the command ID included in the received data matches the value of '81H' to '8BH' indicating the transmission command from the projector control board B23 shown in FIG. Then, the check result is returned as a return value.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets 0 to the reception counter of the projector control reception data (S1112). This reception counter is for counting the commands transmitted from the control LSI 230 at a transmission cycle of 500 ms as an example in the present embodiment. For example, if the value of the reception counter is 3 or more, it means that at least 1000 ms has elapsed since the reception counter was reset to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the consistency of the received data from the return value of the check result of the processing of S1111 (S1113). When the consistency of the received data is abnormal (S1113: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1114. When there is no abnormality in the consistency of the received data (S1113: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1115.

Next, the sub CPU 400 discards the data in the sub device reception storage area (S1114). After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1118.

In step S1115, the sub CPU 400 performs focus origin adjustment determination processing. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs a projector control reception time process (S1116). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 138 described above.

Next, the sub CPU 400 performs projector drift correction processing (S1117). This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 139 described above. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In S1118, the sub CPU 400 increments the reception counter of the projector control reception data by 1.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the reception counter of the projector control reception data is 3 or more (S1119). That is, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not at least 1000 ms has elapsed since the reception counter was reset. When the value of the reception counter is 3 or more and at least 1000 ms or more has elapsed (S1119: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1120. On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter is less than 2 and 1000 ms has not elapsed (S1119: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

In step S1120, the sub CPU 400 causes the sub liquid crystal display device DD19 to display an image or the like related to the error notification. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector control process.

FIG. 143 shows focus origin adjustment determination processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as processing according to the tenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 143, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is during demo transition (during demo command reception) (S1121). The demo means a state in which an image similar to the actual effect is displayed by the projector device B2 or the like when a predetermined time has elapsed without inserting a medal, and the demo command is the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. Is transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the sub CPU 400 when shifting to the demo mode. The process of transmitting the demo command will be described later with reference to FIG. 151. When it is time to shift to the demo (S1121: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1128. When it is not the time of the shift to the demo ((S1121): No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1122.

In S1122, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not a chance state (hereinafter referred to as "CT") is started as a game state. CT is, for example, a gaming state in which the reel screen mechanism F1 is projected and projected while displaying an image for presentation. The transition of the game state including this CT will be described later with reference to FIG. 152. When it is the time to start CT (S1122: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1128. When it is not the time to start CT, the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1123.

In S1123, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the setting of the member menu. The member menu is called as a screen as shown in FIG. 124 when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, password input operation) on the touch panel DD19T. The player can arbitrarily select whether or not to adjust the origin. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1123: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1128. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1124.

In S1124, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is, for example, 30 times or more as a predetermined value. If the number of drift corrections is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (S1124: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1125. If the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1124: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1126.

In S1125, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1128.

In S1126, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the number of symbol variations (or the number of games, the number of startups, etc.) has reached 300 times or more in the state where the focus origin adjustment flag is “OFF”. The number of symbol fluctuations means the number of times counted each time the variable display of symbols (identification information) is started by rotationally driving the reels RL, RC, RR. The number of times of change of the symbol (the number of times of change display of the identification information) is counted by using the change counter. When the origin adjustment flag for focus is ‘OFF’ and the number of symbol variations reaches 300 times or more (S1126: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1127. Even if the focus origin adjustment flag is ‘OFF’, if the number of symbol variations is less than 300 times (S1126: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

In S1127, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the variation counter that counts the number of symbol variations when the focus origin adjustment flag is in the “OFF” state.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1128).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a focus position setting change request in order to change the focus position while returning the focus position to the focus origin and then performing drift correction (S1129). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the contents of temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and then changing the focus position. Thereby, for example, when the screen to which the image is projected is switched, the projector apparatus B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, and then, respectively. It is possible to focus the projection lens 210 while performing drift correction at the focus position according to the screen. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

According to the processing of FIGS. 138 to 143 as described above, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even when the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error is accumulated for each drift correction. By changing the setting so that the focus position once returns to the focus origin in accordance with the gaming state (CT), and further the setting in the member menu, all drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, for the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction during the electric focus control, it is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction at an appropriate timing.

Further, even when the number of drift corrections reaches a predetermined number of times, for example, 30 or more, the setting is changed so that the focus position once returns to the focus origin during drift correction, so that all drift errors accumulated up to that point are removed. Therefore, also with this, it is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction for the image projected from the projector device B2 while repeatedly performing the drift correction.

Further, even if the number of symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, for example, 300 times or more without returning the focus position to the focus origin, the setting is changed so that the focus position once returns to the focus origin, so that the drift accumulated until then. Since all the errors are removed, this also effectively suppresses the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction for the image projected from the projector device B2 by repeatedly changing the focus position.

It should be noted that the control subject for changing the setting of the focus position is not limited to the sub CPU 400, and for example, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 itself may change the setting of the focus position. In this case, the control LSI 230 automatically adjusts the focus position by, for example, monitoring the LED temperature and performing feedback control so as to perform drift correction after returning the focus position to the focus origin according to the LED temperature. be able to. At this time, whether or not the setting change accompanied by the origin adjustment of the focus position can be appropriately determined according to the flag and the condition regarding the origin adjustment of the focus position.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a main series of processes of the projector control process is executed in response to a command transmitted from the projector device B2 at a transmission cycle of, for example, 500 ms, and the focus position is processed by the process of S1115 in the series of processes. It is determined whether or not the origin adjustment is performed. Therefore, the timing at which the origin adjustment of the focus position is actually performed may be delayed from the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied due to a slight time lag. The command may be immediately transmitted to the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is necessary to transmit a command to change the focus position, the command may be transmitted immediately at that time. Upon receiving such a command, the projector device B2 can immediately adjust the origin of the focus position and change the focus position while performing drift correction.

FIG. 144 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the eleventh modification. The process shown in FIG. 144 corresponds to the effect contents determination process of S222 shown in FIG. 71, which is suitable for being executed while adjusting the origin of the focus position. Further, FIG. 145 shows a display example of an image projected by the projector device B2 according to the eleventh modification.

As shown in FIG. 144, the sub CPU 400 determines effect contents according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1131).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect contents, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1132). If the effect is accompanied by a change in the focus position (S1132: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1137. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1132: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1133.

In S1133, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is 15 times or more as a predetermined value, for example. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1133: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1134. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1133: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect content determined in the process of S1131, and ends the effect content determination process.

In S1134, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect content determined in the process of S1131, and then changes the effect content to an effect that involves changing the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1135).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as the initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1136).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests the setting change of the focus position in order to project the image while changing the focus position while temporarily performing the drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin as the effect changed in the process of S1134. Is performed (S1137). As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the effect image projected from the projector device B2 causes a so-called out-of-focus phenomenon due to the focus position once returning to the focus origin, and corresponds to, for example, an internal winning combination. The image becomes difficult to see, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145(b), by gradually adjusting the focus position to the position corresponding to the screen of the projection target, an image in which the pattern is clearly visible is displayed. ..

According to such effect contents determination processing, the focus position is compensated by the drift correction even when the temperature of the projector device B2 rises, and the drift error is accumulated for each drift correction. Since the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin in order to project an image for production that changes to a clearly visible state, it is possible to eliminate all drift errors accumulated up to that point. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction while using the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction in the electric focus control.

In addition, the image shown in FIG. 145 is relatively changed from a state where the visibility is lowered due to initial out-of-focus to a state where the visibility is gradually improved and the visibility is improved. It is possible to provide a state in which the visibility changes due to the change of the above as the video content for production. More specifically, as such a video expression, a predetermined effect image (for example, a specific small image) that informs the player of a lottery result such as an internal winning combination, a rare combination, a reach pattern, a jackpot pattern, etc. Images such as cherries and watermelons, numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc., images, effects, etc.) are made to look through with a telescope, and an initially blurred image becomes gradually visible. Can be provided. At this time, since the outline and color of the projected predetermined effect image are vaguely visible to the player, when the effect accompanied by the origin adjustment is executed, the effect accompanied by the origin adjustment is, for example, 10000 ms. At the same time, if the time required for the origin adjustment in the performance is 2500 ms, for example, a common image like a treasure box is displayed for the first 1500 ms, and the remaining 1000 ms and the end of the performance (elapse of the production time for 7500 ms). The predetermined effect image described above may be displayed. By doing this, when the origin is adjusted and the player is vaguely grasping the outline and color scheme, the final display content is unknown and the notification is made by the effect image at the timing when the outline becomes clear. You can also do it. In the production accompanied by the origin adjustment, at which timing within the production time, the origin adjustment is performed, for example, at the same time as the production is started in 10000 ms, or during the production which is 5000 ms, or when 7500 ms has elapsed. It is possible to appropriately change the timing such as the timing according to the end of the effect depending on the effect, and such information regarding the timing of the origin adjustment may be stored in advance or appropriately changed depending on the situation. You may choose to choose. Also, when the effect time is not predetermined (for example, when the identification pattern capable of displaying the game result to the player is stopped in accordance with the operation of the operation means), a treasure box or a predetermined effect The timing of displaying the image is the operation of the operation means of the player (for example, the operation of the stop button of the reel, the operation of the operation means provided for the game machine, the operation of the lever, the operation of the payout, the operation of the lending, 1 The displayed timing may be different depending on the operation of the bet or the MAX bet, the operation of the button that can be moved to the standby position and the protruding position and can be pressed at any position, and the like. The origin adjustment may be executed under the condition that the operation means is operated while the identification pattern is changing. Then, when it is determined in advance that the execution period of the effect of performing the origin adjustment is performed, the origin adjustment is performed on the condition that the operation means is operated, and the origin adjustment is performed, and the treasure box or the predetermined effect image described above. May be displayed.

FIG. 146 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the twelfth modified example. The process shown in FIG. 146 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 144.

As shown in FIG. 146, the sub CPU 400 determines effect contents according to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1141).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect contents, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1142). If the effect involves changing the focus position (S1142: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1148. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1142: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1143.

In step S1143, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is, for example, 15 times or more as a predetermined value. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1143: Yes), the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of the next S1144. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1143: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect contents determined in the process of S1141, and ends the effect contents determination process.

In S1144, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the received command, whether or not the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination corresponding to a rare combination such as a so-called RT transition combination or a bonus combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific internal winning combination (S1144: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1145. When the internal winning combination is not a specific internal winning combination (S1144: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect content determined in the processing of S1141 and ends the effect content determination processing.

In S1145, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect contents determined in the process of S1141 and then changes the effect contents to effects involving a change in the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1146).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as the initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1147).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests the setting change of the focus position in order to project the image while changing the focus position while temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and performing drift correction as the effect changed in the process of S1145. Is performed (S1148). According to this, the content of the effect once determined according to the internal winning such as the rare combination having a relatively low winning probability is changed, and as the effect image projected from the projector apparatus B2 at that time, the effect image shown in FIG. An image similar to that shown will be displayed. It should be noted that such an effect content determination process may be executed only when the number of games reaches a predetermined number without a specific internal winning combination being internally won.

Even with such an effect content determination process, the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin when projecting an image for effect with a relatively low appearance frequency, and all drift errors accumulated at that time can be removed. This makes it possible to suppress image quality deterioration due to drift correction.

FIG. 147 shows an effect content determination process by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as a process according to the thirteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 147 corresponds to a modified example of the process shown in FIG. 144 or 146.

As shown in FIG. 147, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect contents in accordance with the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1151).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the decided effect contents, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1152). If the effect involves changing the focus position (S1152: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1157. In the case of the effect without changing the focus position (S1152: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1153.

In S1153, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is 15 times or more as a predetermined value, for example. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1153: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1154. If the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1153: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect contents determined in the process of S1151 and ends the effect contents determination process.

In S1154, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the effect contents determined in the processing of 1151 are effects accompanied by darkening of the image. The effect accompanied by darkening of the image means, for example, when the projection target is switched from one screen to another screen, the image is temporarily brought into a dark state at the time of switching. When the effect is accompanied by darkening of the image (S1154: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1155. When the effect is not accompanied by darkening of the image (S1154: No), the sub CPU 400 finalizes the effect content determined in the processing of S1151 and ends the effect content determination processing.

In S1155, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to “ON” while keeping the effect contents determined in the process of S1151.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as the initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1156).

Then, the sub CPU 400 makes a focus position setting change request in order to project a relatively dark image while changing the focus position while performing drift correction after temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin when the image darkens. (S1157). According to this, when the image is darkened due to the screen switching, as the image projected from the projector device B2, an image in which the out-of-focus state cannot be visually recognized is displayed as a relatively dark-looking image. .. It should be noted that such effect contents determination processing may be executed only when the image is simply darkened to a predetermined level without switching the screen.

According to such an effect content determination process, the focus position can be temporarily returned to the focus origin in a specific effect state where the player is hard to see the out-of-focus image in the dark state of the image, and all drift errors accumulated at that time are removed. As a result, it is possible to suppress image quality deterioration due to subsequent drift correction.

FIG. 148 shows a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS, as a table according to the fourteenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the drift correction temperature table, for example, the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25 is effectively applied as a data value according to the situation of temperature change. Whether or not it is specified in a predetermined temperature range.

For example, regarding the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, when the temperature change per minute is 10° C. or more, the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value A is applied. According to this, the drift correction temperature is directly applied as the data valid value A, regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. That is, when there is a relatively rapid temperature change, the drift correction temperature is valid as it is as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value.

On the other hand, regarding the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25, if the temperature change per minute is less than 10° C., the drift correction temperature defined as the data valid value B is applied. According to this, when the temperature difference between the drift correction temperature and the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0°C to ±11°C, the applicable data valid value B is 0°C. , +11° C. or higher and −11° C. or lower, the data valid value B is applied as it is. That is, when the temperature change is relatively gradual, the drift correction temperature is not valid as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ±11° C. Drift correction is not performed within the temperature range where the difference is ±11°C. Note that the temperature change per minute in the present embodiment is, for example, a temperature measured at a predetermined time (for example, one minute, which is not limited, and may be obtained by time management using a real-time clock or the like). Is added and the total value of the added temperatures is divided by the number of times of measurement, or the maximum and minimum values of the temperatures measured in a predetermined time are obtained, and the intermediate value between the maximum and minimum values and the previous drift correction are calculated. The result of comparison with the temperature at the time of performing (or the temperature at the time of turning on the power) may be obtained as the temperature change per minute.

FIG. 149 shows projector drift correction processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control substrate SS as processing according to the fourteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 149 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 95 or FIG. 139 described above, and is partly improved as the process using the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 149, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not there is a focus position setting change request based on the parameter request command from the projector control board B23 (S1161). When there is a focus position setting change request (S1161: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1163. If there is no focus position setting change request (S1161: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1162.

In S1162, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, 120 (corresponding to approximately 1 minute) or more as a predetermined value. The drift correction monitoring counter is, for example, an addition counter for measuring time in order to monitor a temperature change per minute. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S1162: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1163. When the value of the drift correction monitoring counter is less than the predetermined value (S1162: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1165.

In S1163, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the drift correction monitoring counter.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets a status request command with the projector control board B23 as the transmission destination in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM board 41 (S1164). At this time, the drift correction temperature is specified as a parameter in the status request command. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. The command set in the process of S1164 is transmitted to the projector control board B23 by the process of S450 of FIG. 138 described above.

In S1165, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the command (received command) acquired from the received data is'drift corrected temperature'. If the received command is “drift correction temperature” (S1165: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1166. When the received command is not'drift correction temperature' (S1165: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process.

In step S1166, the sub CPU 400 acquires the drift correction temperature from the projector status storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 and the position coefficient of the focus position. As described above, the position coefficient of the focus position is a constant factor for obtaining the optimum correction position (focus correction value) according to the temperature characteristics for each of the focus positions A to E.

Next, the sub CPU 400 refers to the drift correction temperature table of FIG. 148 based on the temperature change per minute, and selects a valid drift correction temperature data value as the focus drift correction value (S1167). At this time, for example, when the temperature change per minute is 10° C. or more, the drift correction temperature is directly selected as the data valid value A regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. On the other hand, when the temperature change per minute is less than 10°C, the drift correction temperature is 0°C as the data valid value B when the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature is within the range of 0°C to ±11°C. If it is selected and is not less than +11° C. and not more than −11, it is directly selected as the data valid value B.

Next, the sub CPU 400 calculates the focus drift correction value by multiplying the drift correction temperature and the position coefficient selected as the data valid value (S1168). The focus drift correction value means a value obtained by correcting the focus position according to the ambient temperature (drift correction temperature) as described above. At this time, if 0° C. is selected as the valid data value, the focus drift correction value becomes 0, and the drift correction is not performed.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the latest focus drift correction value calculated in S1168 is equal to the existing correction value in the focus correction value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S1169). When the latest focus drift correction value is equal to the existing correction value (S1169: Yes), the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. When the latest focus drift correction value is different from the existing correction value (S1169: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1170.

In step S1170, the sub CPU 400 overwrites and stores the focus drift correction value in the focus correction value storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a command for requesting a setting change of the focus drift correction value to the projector control board B23 (S1171).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1172).

Next, the sub CPU 400 stores the focus position and the focus drift correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 (S1173). After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the projector drift correction process. Thereby, when the drift correction temperature is selected as a data valid value other than 0, the drift correction of the focus position is performed.

According to such a projector drift correction process, for example, a temperature range in which the drift correction is invalid is set according to a temperature change per minute, and the drift correction may or may not be performed even at the same drift correction temperature. Yes, the drift correction is appropriately performed according to the temperature change situation. Also by this, the drift error accumulated for each drift correction can be reduced as much as possible, and the deterioration of the image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2 can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a drift correction temperature table stored in the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS, as a table according to the fifteenth modification. This drift correction temperature table corresponds to a modified example of the drift correction temperature table shown in FIG. 148.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the drift correction temperature table, with respect to the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25, for example, in accordance with the status of the temperature change, whether or not the drift is being displayed. Whether or not the corrected temperature is effectively applied as a data value is defined in a predetermined temperature range.

For example, when the temperature change per minute for the drift correction temperature obtained through the temperature sensor B25 is 10° C. or more (in the case of temperature change a) except when the demo display is being performed, the data valid value A is set. The specified drift correction temperature applies. According to this, the drift correction temperature is directly applied as the data valid value A, regardless of the temperature difference from the predetermined reference temperature. That is, when a predetermined image corresponding to the game state is being projected and there is a relatively rapid temperature change as, for example, an effect display other than the demo display, the drift correction temperature is a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value. Will be valid as is.

On the other hand, even when the demo display is not being performed, if the temperature change per minute for the drift correction temperature obtained via the temperature sensor B25 is less than 10° C. (in the case of temperature change b), the data is valid. The drift correction temperature defined as the value B'is applied. According to this, when the temperature difference between the drift correction temperature and a predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0°C to ±6°C, the applied data valid value B′ is 0°C. Therefore, when detected at +6° C. or higher and −6° C. or lower, the data valid value B′ to be applied is directly applied. That is, when the temperature change is relatively gradual except during the demo display, the drift correction temperature is effective as a data value for calculating the focus drift correction value unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ±6°C. Therefore, the drift correction is not performed within the temperature range of ±6°C.

Further, during the demo display, the drift correction temperature defined through the temperature sensor B25 is applied as the data correction value B regardless of the temperature change per minute. According to this, when the temperature difference between the drift correction temperature and the predetermined reference temperature is detected within the range of 0°C to ±11°C, the applicable data valid value B is 0°C. , +11° C. or higher and −11° C. or lower, the data valid value B is applied as it is. That is, during demo display, it is not necessary to project an image with high image quality even if drift correction is performed. Therefore, the drift correction temperature should be the focus unless the temperature difference from the reference temperature exceeds ±11°C. The data value is not valid as a data value for calculating the drift correction value, and the drift correction is not performed within the temperature range of ±11° C.

FIG. 151 shows a demo command transmission process by the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS as a process according to the fifteenth modification. The processing shown in FIG. 151 is sequentially executed within the medal acceptance/start check processing of, for example, S103 shown in FIG. 59 described above, or in sequence with each processing shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 151, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted (including a state where the BET button can be operated) (S1181). When it is in a state where medals can be inserted (S1181: Yes), the main CPU 300 moves to the processing of the next S1182. When it is not possible to insert medals (S1181: No), the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

In S1182, the main CPU 300 determines whether the error flag is “1”. The error flag is flag information for indicating whether or not there is a communication error or the like between the main control board MS and its connection board, and when there is an error, "1" is set. When the error flag is “1” (S1182: Yes), the main CPU 300 moves to the process of S1188. When the error flag is not '1' but '0' (S1182: No), the main CPU 300 moves to the next process of S1183.

In S1183, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not the demo command transmission flag is “1”. The demo command transmission flag is flag information indicating whether or not the demo command can be transmitted to the sub-control board SS, and is set to "1" when the demo command can be transmitted. When the demo command transmission flag is "1" (S1183: Yes), the main CPU 300 moves to the process of S1186. When the demo command transmission flag is not '1' but '0' (S1183: No), the main CPU 300 moves to the next process of S1184.

In S1184, the main CPU 300 sets the initial value of the demo command transmission timer. The demo command transmission timer is a subtraction timer for measuring the standby time until the demo command is transmitted, and a numerical value corresponding to the standby time such as 30 s or 60 s is set as an initial value.

Next, the main CPU 300 sets the demo command transmission flag to "1" (S1185).

Next, the main CPU 300 subtracts 1 from the value of the demo command transmission timer (S1186).

Next, the main CPU 300 determines whether the value of the demo command transmission timer is "0" (S1187). When the value of the demo command transmission timer is "0" (S1187: Yes), the main CPU 300 moves to the next process of S1188. When the value of the demo command transmission timer is not “0” (S1187: No), the main CPU 300 moves to the next process of S1188.

In S1188, the main CPU 300 determines whether or not an error such as a communication error is occurring between the main control board MS and its connection board. When an error is occurring (S1188: Yes), the main CPU 300 shifts to the processing of S1192. If no error has occurred (S1188: No), the main CPU 300 moves to the processing of the next S1189.

In step S1189, the main CPU 300 generates demo command data and stores the generated demo command data in the transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301. The stored demo command data is transmitted to the sub control board SS in the data transmission process (command transmission process) of S127 shown in FIG. As a result, a demonstration image is projected as a demonstration display from the projector device B2.

Next, the main CPU 300 sets ‘0’ in the demo command transmission flag (S1190).

Next, the main CPU 300 sets "0" to the error flag (S1191). Then, the main CPU 300 ends the demo command transmission process.

In S1192, the main CPU 300 sets the error flag to “1” and ends the demo command transmission process. In this case, the demo is not displayed because an error is occurring.

According to the projector drift correction processing using the drift correction temperature table shown in FIG. 150 depending on whether the demo display is being performed or not, the temperature range in which the drift correction becomes invalid differs depending on whether the demo display is being performed or not. While the invalid temperature range becomes relatively wide during the demo display, the invalid temperature range becomes relatively narrow or becomes invalid except during the demo display. That is, the frequency of drift correction is changed not only by the drift correction temperature but also by the demo display, and the frequency of the drift correction can be suppressed even if the state of the demo display becomes long, so that drift errors that accumulate for each drift correction can be generated. The image quality of the image projected from the projector device B2 can be effectively suppressed.

FIG. 152 shows the transition of the game state according to the sixteenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 152, the gaming machine 1 as a pachi-slot machine has a plurality of gaming states, and the plurality of gaming states include, as an example, a normal gaming state and a bonus gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “BB”). ), a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as “CZ”), an ART game state (hereinafter referred to as “ART”), and a chance time (hereinafter referred to as “CT”).

For example, the normal gaming state is a gaming state in which a transition lottery to CZ, BB or the like is performed in accordance with an internal winning combination, and when the transition lottery is won, a transition to CZ or BB or the like is made. In this normal game state, for example, an effect image is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1.

BB is a gaming state in which a so-called regular bonus is repeatedly performed until the number of paid-out medals exceeds a predetermined number, and while shifting from CZ, ART, or CT in accordance with an internal winning combination, a normal gaming state according to a predetermined ending condition. In addition to the shift to, the lottery for adding the number of ART games and the random hit lottery for ART are performed, and if these lottery is won, the number of ART games is increased or the game state is shifted to ART. For example, in the normal game state or in BB shifted from CZ, the effect image is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1, and in BB shifted from ART, the effect image is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1. , BB in the ART additional zone which has been moved from CT, the effect image is displayed while appropriately switching the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1.

The CZ shifts from the normal game state according to the internal winning combination, while performing the lottery to shift to CT via ART, BB, or ART, and when winning the shift lottery, the game shifts to ART, BB, or CT. It is in a state. In this CZ, for example, an image for effect is displayed using the front screen mechanism E1.

In ART, the state in which the sub CPU 400 notifies the reel stop operation so that the internal winning combination wins or does not win advantageously for the player is called "AT", and this AT is combined with a so-called replay high probability state (RT). It is a game state controlled by. During the ART, it is possible to win the internal winning combination so as to increase the number of medals as much as possible without reducing. Therefore, as the number of ART games increases, more medals can be acquired. The ART shifts from BB, CZ, or CT in accordance with the internal winning combination, while performing the lottery for shifting to BB or CT, and when winning the shift lottery, shifts to BB or CT. In the ART, for example, a fixed screen mechanism D is used to display an effect image. For example, in the case of transition from ART to CT, a game aimed at aligning a specific symbol combination during a high replay probability state is performed, and if a lottery capable of aligning the specific symbol combination is won, ART It is possible to increase the number of games and the number of CT sets.

In CT, for example, the winning probability of small wins such as bells, watermelons, cherries, etc. does not change, but regardless of the internal winning win, depending on the stop operation by the player's so-called push, it is possible to win any small win. In the gaming state in which the reels are controlled, basically, during CT, the maximum value of the number of sliding symbols (maximum sliding display number) is 1 for one or a plurality of reels. By the way, in the game state other than CT, the maximum value of the number of sliding symbols is 4. CT changes from ART according to the internal winning combination, while drawing lottery to change to ART, adding lottery to the number of ART games, and further adding lots to the CT set number, and if these lottery is won, it shifts to ART. Or add the number of ART games and the number of CT sets. Such CT continues for the number of games in addition to the specified number of games. In this CT, an image for presentation is displayed using the reel screen mechanism F1.

In this way, at the start of each game state, the screen to be projected by the projector device B2 is appropriately switched. Then, in particular, at the time of starting CT in which an image is projected on a specific screen (reel screen mechanism F1), the focus position is temporarily returned to the focus origin and then the focus position is changed while performing drift correction. Has become. As a result, all drift errors accumulated so far are removed. Therefore, with respect to the image projected from the projector device B2 while performing the drift correction in the electric focus control, it is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration due to the drift correction every time the image is transferred to CT.

Note that the plurality of gaming states are not limited to these, and may include, for example, a state in which the winning probability of shifting to CZ has a high probability or a low probability in the normal gaming state, and other states. The gaming state may also include a state in which the probability of shifting to a more advantageous gaming state is different.

FIG. 153 shows a focus adjustment frequency setting table stored in the sub ROM substrate 42 of the sub control substrate SS, as a table according to the seventeenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the focus adjustment frequency setting table, the number of times of variation of the symbol after the origin adjustment (readjustment) of the previous focus position is performed depending on the case where the change frequency of the focus position is relatively high or low. Is reached 150 times or 300 times, a setting change request is made to perform the next origin adjustment. The case where the frequency of changing the focus position is relatively high corresponds to, for example, the CT described above with reference to FIG. 152, and the case where the frequency of changing the relative frequency is relatively low indicates a game state other than such a CT. Equivalent to. During CT, there is a possibility of winning the BB in the ART addition zone, so the frequency of changing the focus position is relatively high. In FIG. 153, as an example, it is determined whether or not the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) is performed on the condition of the number of symbol fluctuations. It may be defined to determine whether or not to perform the next origin adjustment on the condition of a specific number of executions of performance from the winning combination or the time elapsed since the origin adjustment was performed last time. Further, for example, in a gaming machine provided with a so-called pseudo BB, the BB may change 150 times or more, so that the BB may be applied as a case where the change frequency is relatively high.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the effect content determination processing of the sub control board SS according to the seventeenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 154 is a process using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153, and corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 144, 146, or 147.

As shown in FIG. 154, the sub CPU 400 determines the effect content in accordance with the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS (S1201).

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines, based on the determined effect contents, whether or not the effect involves a change in the focus position that requires screen switching (S1202). If the effect involves changing the focus position (S1202: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1208. When the effect does not involve changing the focus position (S1202: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1203.

In S1203, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is 15 times or more as a predetermined value, for example. When the number of drift corrections is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1203: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1204. When the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1203: No), the sub CPU 400 determines the effect contents determined in the process of S1201, and then shifts to the process of S1209.

In S1204, the sub CPU 400 determines whether the internal winning combination is a specific small combination such as a rare small combination. When the internal winning combination is a specific small winning combination (S1204: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1205. When the internal winning combination is not a specific small winning combination (S1204: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1209.

In S1205, the sub CPU 400 discards the effect contents determined in the process of S1201 and then changes the effect contents into effects corresponding to the winning of a specific small winning combination that involves changing the focus position.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1206).

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as the initial value in the focus drift correction number counter (S1207).

Then, the sub CPU 400 requests the focus position setting change in order to project the image while changing the focus position while temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and performing drift correction as the effect changed in the process of S1205. Is performed (S1208). As a result, as the effect image projected from the projector device B2, for example, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the focus position once returns to the focus origin to cause so-called out-of-focus, which corresponds to a specific small win. The image becomes difficult to see, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145(b), by gradually adjusting the focus position to a position corresponding to the screen of the projection target, the pattern corresponding to a specific small win can be seen clearly. An image like this is displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the gaming state is bonus (BB) (S1209). When the gaming state is the bonus (BB) (S1209: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1210. If the gaming state is not bonus (BB) (S1209: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1212.

In S1210, the sub CPU 400 further determines whether or not the effect mode is the effect mode of the ART addition zone during bonus. In such an effect mode in the BB of the ART additional zone, the fixed screen mechanism D and the reel screen mechanism F1 are appropriately switched, so that the frequency of changing the focus position (the number of changes) is relatively higher than that in the other effect modes (many times). )Become. Then, in the effect mode of the bonus addition ART zone (S1210: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1211. When it is not the effect mode of the ART addition zone in the bonus (S1210: No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1212.

In S1211, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to “high”. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “high” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table in FIG. 153 is referred to. As a result, the sub CPU 400 once returns the focus position to the focus origin by readjustment again when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 150 times after performing the origin adjustment (readjustment) of the focus position last time, and then performs drift correction. The image is projected while changing the focus position while performing. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect contents determination process.

On the other hand, in S1212, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus change frequency to “low”. That is, the case where the focus change frequency is “low” in the focus adjustment frequency setting table in FIG. 153 is referred to. With this, the sub CPU 400 once returns the focus position to the focus origin by re-adjustment when the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 300 times, which is more than the previous 150 times, after performing the origin adjustment (re-adjustment) of the focus position last time. Then, the image is projected while changing the focus position while performing drift correction. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the effect contents determination process.

According to the effect content determination processing using the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153, in a specific game state (effect mode) in which the frequency of changing the focus position relatively increases with the screen switching, the change frequency Since there is a higher possibility that the focus position will be adjusted to the origin than in the effect mode in other game states where there is relatively little, the focus adjustment error that accumulates each time the focus position is changed is also reduced according to the frequency of changing the focus position. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration of the image due to the focus adjustment error.

FIG. 155 shows focus origin adjustment determination processing by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS as processing according to the eighteenth modification. The process shown in FIG. 155 corresponds to a modification of the process shown in FIG. 143.

As shown in FIG. 155, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is during demo shift (during demo command reception) (S1221). When it is the time of the demo shift (S1221: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the process of S1228. When it is not the time of the shift to the demo ((S1221): No), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1222.

In S1222, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not it is the CT start time as the game state. When it is the time to start CT (S1222: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of S1228. If it is not the time to start CT, the sub CPU 400 moves to the processing of the next S1223.

In S1223, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the setting of the member menu. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is selected by the member menu (S1223: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1228. When the origin adjustment of the focus position is not selected by the member menu, the sub CPU 400 proceeds to the processing of next S1224.

In S1224, the sub CPU 400 acquires the value of the focus drift correction number counter as the drift correction number, and determines whether the drift correction number is, for example, 30 times or more as a predetermined value. When the drift correction count is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S1224: Yes), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1225. If the number of drift corrections is less than the predetermined value (S1224: No), the sub CPU 400 moves to the process of S1226.

In S1225, the sub CPU 400 sets -1 as an initial value in the focus drift correction number counter. After that, the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of S1228.

In S1226, the sub CPU 400 determines whether or not the condition according to the frequency of changing the focus position, that is, the predetermined condition according to the frequency of changing the focus position defined in the focus adjustment frequency setting table of FIG. 153 is satisfied. .. For example, if the frequency of changing the focus position is "high", and the number of symbol variations has reached 150 since the origin adjustment of the focus position was performed last time, or if the frequency of changing the focus position is "low". In the case where the number of symbol fluctuations has reached 300 times since the origin adjustment of the focus position was performed last time (S1226: Yes), the sub CPU 400 shifts to the processing of the next S1227. On the other hand, even if the focus position change frequency is "high", if the previous origin adjustment or the number of symbol fluctuations has not reached 150 times, or if the focus position change frequency is "low" When the number of symbol variations has not reached 300 times (S1226: No), the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

In S1227, the sub CPU 400 clears the value of the variation counter that counts the variation of the focus position when the focus origin adjustment flag is in the “OFF” state.

Next, the sub CPU 400 sets the focus origin adjustment flag to "ON" (S1228).

Next, the sub CPU 400 makes a focus position setting change request in order to change the focus position while returning the focus position to the focus origin and then performing drift correction (S1229). In this process, the sub CPU 400 stores the setting change request data including the origin adjustment of the focus position in the sub device transmission storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits this data to the projector device B2. The focus position setting change request data includes the contents of temporarily returning the focus position to the focus origin and then changing the focus position. Thereby, for example, when the screen to which the image is projected is switched, the projector apparatus B2 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the focus position setting change request data to temporarily return the focus position to the focus origin, and then, respectively. It is possible to focus the projection lens 210 while performing drift correction at the focus position according to the screen. After that, the sub CPU 400 ends the focus origin adjustment determination process.

According to such focus origin adjustment determination processing, the condition for adjusting the origin of the focus position is switched according to the frequency of change of the focus position, and the focus adjustment error can be appropriately reduced. It is possible to effectively suppress the image quality deterioration of the image.

FIG. 156 is a diagram showing a communication sequence when the projector device B2 according to the nineteenth modification and the sub CPU 400 are activated.

As shown in FIG. 156, when the communication between the projector device B2 and the sub control board SS is established at the time of starting the gaming machine 1, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 sends a start parameter request command to the sub control board SS. It is transmitted to the CPU 400. The sub CPU 400 that has received the activation parameter request command transmits a activation parameter request confirmation command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command for confirming the activation parameter request transmits the command for confirming reception to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits an LED brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the LED brightness setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are controlled based on the LED brightness specified by the command. At this time, according to the LED brightness setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 100% brightness is designated as a default value. Upon receiving the LED brightness setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a trapezoidal distortion correction command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the trapezoidal distortion correction command, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the trapezoidal distortion correction value specified by the command. At this time, according to the trapezoidal distortion correction command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 40 is designated as the default value of trapezoidal distortion correction (trapezoidal distortion correction value). Upon receiving the trapezoidal distortion correction command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a white color temperature setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the white color temperature setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are controlled based on the white color temperature designated by the command. At this time, according to the white color temperature setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 1 is designated as the default value of the white color temperature. Upon receiving the white color temperature command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a horizontal image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the horizontal image position offset setting command, the focus mechanism 242 is controlled based on the horizontal image position offset value designated by the command. At this time, according to the horizontal image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, the horizontal image position offset value held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. The control LSI 230 that has received the horizontal image position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a vertical image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command for setting the vertical image position offset, the control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the offset value of the vertical image position specified by the command. At this time, according to the vertical direction image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, the value of the vertical direction image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. The control LSI 230 that has received the vertical image position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a brightness setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the brightness setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are controlled based on the brightness setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the brightness setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 50 is specified as the default brightness value. Upon receiving the brightness setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a contrast setting command to the control LSI 230. In the control LSI 230 that has received the contrast setting command, the LED light sources 240R, 240G, 240B are controlled based on the contrast setting value designated by the command. At this time, according to the contrast setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 50 is designated as the default value of contrast. Upon receiving the contrast setting command, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 that has received the reception confirmation command transmits a gamma setting command to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command controls the LED light sources 240R, 240G, and 240B based on the gamma setting value specified by the command. At this time, according to the gamma setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, for example, 1 is designated as the default value of the gamma value. The control LSI 230 that has received the gamma setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400, which has received the reception confirmation command, transmits the electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command for setting the electric focus position offset, the control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism 242 based on the offset value of the electric focus position designated by the command. At this time, according to the electric focus position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 157, the electric focus position offset value held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set. The control LSI 230 that has received the electric focus position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Next, the sub CPU 400 receiving the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 receiving the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence at startup is completed.

As described above, at startup, the communication sequence as shown in FIG. 156 is performed as one set. There is a case where a command for requesting a start parameter is transmitted from the projector device B2 during such a communication sequence, but in this case, the sub CPU 400 discards the command. Further, the reception confirmation command transmitted from the control LSI 230 to the sub CPU 400 is retransmitted by the retry processing until it shows a correct reception result, for example, up to 10 times, if it does not show a correct reception result.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a communication sequence during normal operation between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the nineteenth modification.

As shown in FIG. 158, during the normal operation of the projector device B2, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Upon receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (R)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector apparatus B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230 that has received the command of the status request "LED temperature (R)" sets the temperature detected by the first temperature sensor B25a as the LED temperature (R) and indicates the LED temperature (R) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (G)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (G)", the control LSI 230 sets the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (G) and indicates the LED temperature (G) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “LED temperature (B)” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector apparatus B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request "LED temperature (B)", the control LSI 230 sets the temperature detected by the second temperature sensor B25b as the LED temperature (B) and indicates the LED temperature (B) (see FIG. 159). Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command “intake FAN temperature” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request “intake fan temperature”, the control LSI 230 sends the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the intake fan temperature to the sub CPU 400, using the temperature detected by the intake air temperature sensor B26a of FAN2 as the intake fan temperature. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request command “FAN1 rotation speed” (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230, which has received the command of the status request “FAN1 rotation speed”, transmits the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN1 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27a of the FAN1 as the FAN1 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “FAN2 rotation speed” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. Upon receiving the command of the status request “FAN2 rotation speed”, the control LSI 230 transmits the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN2 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27b of the FAN2 as the FAN2 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “FAN3 rotation speed” command (see FIG. 159) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230, which has received the command of the status request “FAN3 rotation speed”, transmits the command (see FIG. 159) indicating the FAN3 rotation speed to the sub CPU 400, using the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor B27c of the FAN3 as the FAN3 rotation speed. To do.

After that, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request completion command for the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 having received the command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence during the normal operation of the projector device B2 ends.

As described above, the communication sequence at the time of normal operation as shown in FIG. 158 is performed as one set, for example, every 30 seconds after the end of the communication sequence at startup. In such a communication sequence, when the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command that does not indicate a correct reception result to the status request command transmitted from the sub CPU 400 to the control LSI 230, for example, the reception confirmation command is correct up to 10 times. The reception confirmation command is retransmitted by the retry processing until the reception result is shown.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a communication sequence at the time of screen switching between the projector device B2 and the sub CPU 400 according to the nineteenth modification. The screen switching here means after the screen to be projected is changed from one screen to another screen.

As shown in FIG. 160, at the time of screen switching, the control LSI 230 of the projector device B2 transmits a parameter request command to the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS. Upon receiving the parameter request command, the sub CPU 400 transmits the electric focus position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the electric focus position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the electric focus position offset value held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the corresponding screen after the change. As a result, the focus position is offset adjusted with respect to the focus origin of the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the electric focus position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a horizontal image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the horizontal image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the horizontal image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the changed screen. .. As a result, the horizontal image position is offset-adjusted with respect to the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the horizontal image position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a vertical image position offset setting command to the control LSI 230. According to the vertical direction image position offset setting command, as shown in FIG. 161, the value of the vertical direction image position offset held in the sub CPU 400 (EEPROM 231) is set as the setting information of the changed screen. .. As a result, the vertical image position is offset-adjusted with respect to the changed screen. The control LSI 230 that has received the vertical image position offset setting command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the sub CPU 400 that receives the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 that receives the command transmits the reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400 again. After that, the parameter request command is retransmitted to the sub CPU 400.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request “drift correction temperature” command (see FIG. 161) to the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230. The control LSI 230, which has received the command of the status request “drift correction temperature”, transmits the command (see FIG. 161) indicating the drift correction temperature to the sub CPU 400, using the temperature detected by the temperature sensor B25 as the drift correction temperature.

Next, the sub CPU 400 transmits a status request completion command for the projector device B2 to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 having received the command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400. Although not shown in FIG. 160, the control LSI 230 that has transmitted the command again transmits the parameter request command (see FIG. 161) to the sub CPU 400 again.

After that, the sub CPU 400, which has received the parameter request command, transmits a command instructing the electric focus drift correction to the control LSI 230. As a result, in the projector device B2, the focus position offset-adjusted with respect to the focus origin is further compensated and adjusted by drift correction based on the drift correction temperature indicated by the above-mentioned command. Then, the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 400, the sub CPU 400 which receives the reception confirmation command transmits a setting completion command to the control LSI 230, and the control LSI 230 which has received the command confirms the reception confirmation. Is transmitted to the sub CPU 400. As a result, the communication sequence when switching screens is completed.

As described above, the communication sequence at the time of switching screens is performed with the procedure as shown in FIG. 160 as one set when the screen to be projected is changed. In such a communication sequence, when the control LSI 230 transmits a reception confirmation command that does not show a correct reception result to the sub CPU 400, the reception confirmation command is retried until a correct reception result is shown, for example, up to 10 times. Will be retransmitted.

According to such a communication sequence, the focus position is offset-adjusted each time the screen is switched, and the focus position is adjusted with high accuracy by the drift correction according to the temperature. Even if the adjustment is frequently performed, it is possible to suppress the image disturbance and the deterioration of the image quality, and it is possible to continuously project the high-quality image while switching the screens.

Also, since the horizontal and vertical positions of the projected image are adjusted each time the screen is switched, it is possible to project the image from the projector device B2 onto each screen at appropriate projection positions in the horizontal and vertical directions. It is possible to perform image correction physically and software.

Further, since the focus position varies according to the temperature condition of the projector device B2 although the offset adjustment is performed, it takes a predetermined time to acquire the temperature from the projector device B2 in order to perform the drift correction when the screen is switched. .. That is, depending on the predetermined time period, it is assumed that the screens may be switched even while the temperature is being acquired from the projector device B2. On the other hand, according to the communication sequence at the time of screen switching described above, the offset adjustment of the horizontal image position and the vertical image position is performed after the offset adjustment of the focus position, and then the focus position is readjusted by the drift correction. Since the drift correction is finally performed in a stepwise procedure, it is possible to suppress the image distortion with high accuracy even if the screen switching operation is frequently performed. It is possible to continuously project high-quality images.

FIG. 162 shows main control main processing executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the twentieth modification.

In the pachinko machine, when the power is turned on, the main CPU of the main control board first performs an initialization process (S1231). In this processing, the main CPU performs processing such as permission of access to the main RAM, backup restoration, and initialization of the work area. Next, the main CPU performs an initial value random number updating process (S1232). In this process, the main CPU updates the initial random number counter value.

Next, the main CPU performs a special symbol control process (S1233). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process regarding the progress of the special symbol game, the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device.

Next, the main CPU performs normal symbol control processing (S1234). In this process, the main CPU performs a predetermined control process relating to the progress of the normal symbol game and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device.

Next, the main CPU executes a control process of the symbol display device (S1235). In this process, the main CPU performs the display control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the normal symbol based on the execution result of the special symbol control process and the normal symbol control process.

Next, the main CPU performs a game information data generation process (S1236). In this process, the main CPU generates game information data to be transmitted to the hall computer of the game store and stores the game information data in the main RAM.

Next, the main CPU performs a storage/game state data generation process (S1237). In this process, the main CPU generates storage/game state data to be transmitted to the sub control board of the pachinko machine based on the value of the probability variation flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/game state data in the main RAM. To do. After that, the main CPU returns to the processing of S1232 and repeats the processing of S1232 and thereafter.

FIG. 163 shows a system timer interrupt process executed in the main control board of the pachinko machine according to the twentieth modification.

In the pachinko gaming machine, the main CPU interrupts the main processing at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt processing even while the main processing is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU executes a system timer interrupt process as shown in FIG. 157 according to the clock pulse generated from the reset clock pulse generation circuit in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms).

As shown in FIG. 157, the main CPU saves the data (information) in each register (S1241). Next, the main CPU performs a random number update process (S1242). In this processing, the main CPU updates various random number values extracted from the big hit determination counter, the symbol determination counter, the hit determination counter, the falling determination counter, the variation pattern determination counter, the effect pattern determination counter, and the like. ..

The jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter lack fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, the big hit determination counter and the symbol determination counter are updated at a periodic timing of, for example, 2 ms to ensure fairness.

Next, the main CPU performs a switch input detection process (S1243). In this process, the main CPU detects winning or passing through various starting openings, various winning openings, and a ball passage detector.

Next, the main CPU performs a timer update process (S1244). Specifically, the main CPU has various timers such as a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control board and the sub-control board and a special winning opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening. Perform update processing.

Next, the main CPU performs a command output process (S1245). In this process, the main CPU transmits various commands such as a winning command, a variation command, and a demo command to the sub CPU of the sub control board. For example, the demo command is transmitted after a predetermined time elapses without a game ball being fired after the end of the change of the special symbol (for example, in the case where the state where the game is not played continues for 3 minutes or more).

Next, the main CPU performs a game information output process (S1246). In this process, the main CPU outputs various information related to the game processed by the main control board, the sub control board, the payout/launch control circuit, etc. to the hall computer or the like of the game shop.

Next, the main CPU restores the data of each register saved in S1241 (S1247). After that, the main CPU ends the system timer interrupt process.

Even in such a pachinko machine, by installing the projector device B2 or the like, the same effect as that of the pachi-slot machine described above can be exhibited.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, a pachi-slot machine or a pachinko machine was described as a typical example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The above-described various techniques of the present invention can be applied to other game machines, for example, an enclosed game machine. Further, the general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines and slot machines in addition to the gaming machines mentioned above.

Further, it is needless to say that the numerical values, information, constituent elements and the like shown in the above embodiment are merely examples and can be appropriately changed within the scope of the present invention. For example, a value or a number may include 0, and may include a minus or plus value.

For example, in the present embodiment, various conditions include the number of counts and the number of executions, and there is a process of determining the number of executions and the execution time (execution period), which is the period of execution. It is not something that will be done. For example, when the condition is that the process is executed three times or more, the condition may be that the process is executed once or more, or 0 or more times depending on the initial value. This is defined as a predetermined condition that the number of times of execution is three times or more, and when judging whether or not the number of times of execution is three or more, from a software point of view, it is basically determined whether or not it has been executed. Since it suffices to be able to make a determination, the condition is to determine whether it is 1 or 0 in the information theory (code theory). On the contrary, the same is true in the case where it is determined whether or not it is not executed, and it is determined whether it is 0 or 1 in the information theory (code theory).

That is, determining whether or not execution is performed is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution unit is 1 or 0. This means that the flag is set to “ON” when the execution is performed and the flag is set to “ON”. Even when it is determined whether or not it is “ON”, as a result, whether or not there is a signal input for setting the flag to “ON” (whether or not the signal has been received once or a plurality of times is input. It is equivalent to determining whether or not there is an output, whether or not it is output, and the like. Therefore, even if the presence/absence of the flag is determined, the number of executions itself is not counted, but it is synonymous with the determination of the number of executions (counts, counting results, interrupts, etc.) as a unit. The determination of the flag and the determination of the number of times can be performed by essentially the same comparison calculation process.

The same applies to the case of determining the time. For example, in the case of determining the execution time, it is synonymous with determining whether the binary value corresponding to the execution time is 1 or 0. And can be performed by a simple comparison operation process. However, in the case of making a determination using a flag or a variable, it may be determined to be present when the value is 0 by negative logic and may be determined to be absent when the value is 1.

In addition, at the time of starting the gaming machine, the backlight may be turned off until communication is established, for example, in order to prevent an afterimage phenomenon from occurring in the sub liquid crystal display device.

In addition, since the movable screen is not returned to the standby position during error notification, the error notification image may be projected according to the screen that is the projection target at that time.

Further, the projector device of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of performing projection on a plurality of screens, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projector device may be one screen or a plurality of screens. It only needs to be able to project on any screen. Further, the projection target is not limited to the screen, but includes, for example, an accessory, a board, a front panel, an outer frame, a main body frame, a cabinet, an upper plate, a lower plate, a player, a ceiling above the gaming machine, and a passage from the gaming machine. Various projection forms such as projection toward the target are conceivable. As for the projection method, various methods such as so-called rear projection, front projection, rear projector that reflects projection light, and front projector that reflects projection light can be applied. However, it is also possible to combine a plurality of these different methods.

Further, the intake fan and the exhaust fan in the present embodiment are ventilation means capable of performing ventilation inside the projector apparatus by rotating those components. That is, the ventilation means includes an intake means or an exhaust means, and the control for the intake means in the present embodiment (such as a condition for shutting down or a warning) can be applied to the exhaust means as well. The control can also be applied to the intake means.

<Second Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment of the present invention is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The gaming machine 3001 can be played by using a game medium such as a coin, a medal, a game ball, or a token, or a card that stores information on a game value that is given to or given to a player. In the following description, it is assumed that a medal is used. The gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, but the description of the same configuration will be omitted as appropriate. Further, the same configurations as those in the first embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals as those used in the first embodiment.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the gaming machine 3001 to the player is referred to as the front side (front direction) of the gaming machine 3001, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (rear direction, depth direction), The right side and the left side viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 3001, respectively. In addition, such an expression regarding a direction is similarly used in the case of showing a projector device or the like which is a part of the gaming machine 3001.

A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-back direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. The direction orthogonal to the front-back direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

As shown in FIG. 164, the appearance of the gaming machine 3001 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 3002. The housing 3002 is a gaming machine body having a metal cabinet 3003 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism 3004 arranged on the upper front part of the cabinet 3003, and a lower part arranged on the lower front part of the cabinet 3003. It has a door mechanism 3005.

Further, in the top wall 3006 of the cabinet 3003, two openings 3007 penetrating in the vertical direction are formed at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member 3008 is attached to the upper wall 3006 so as to close each of the two openings 3007.

As shown in FIG. 165, the upper door mechanism 3004 and the lower door mechanism 3005 are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 3003. An exterior panel is attached to the upper door mechanism 3004 and the lower door mechanism 3005, and the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet 3003 can be closed. The upper door mechanism 3004 has an upper display window 3009 in the center. A transparent panel 3010 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window 3009.

The lower door mechanism 3005 is provided with a main display window 3011 formed as a rectangular opening in a substantially central portion of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet 3003 is mounted on the back side of the main display window 3011. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) each having a plurality of types of symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface thereof. These reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (in one horizontal row) so that they can rotate in the vertical direction at a constant speed. Through the main display window 3011, the reels RL, RC, RR can visually recognize the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR.

A transparent panel made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window 3011 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. A first pedestal portion 3012a, a second pedestal portion 3012b, and a third pedestal portion 3012c that are substantially horizontal are formed below the main display window 3011. The first pedestal portion 3012a located on the right side of the main display window 3011 is provided with a medal insertion slot 3013 for inserting medals. The medal insertion slot 3013 is an opening through which a player inserts a medal. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 3013 are credited or bet on the game.

The second pedestal portion 3012b located on the left side of the main display window 3011 is provided with a maximum BET button 3014 (also called a MAXBET button) as an activated line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button 3014 is pressed, “3” is selected as the number of inserted medals.

A sub display device 3015 is provided on the third pedestal portion 3012c located on the front surface side of the main display window 3011. The sub display device 3015 displays, for example, the number of medals to be paid out when the winning is established, and the number of credited remaining medals. Since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 3001 is usually 50, the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed on the sub display device 3015. It should be noted that when the maximum number of medals, 50, has been credited, the inserted medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 3021 as they are.

On the front side of the maximum BET button 3014, a start lever 3016 is provided for rotating and driving the reels RL, RC, RR by the player's operation and for starting the variable display of the symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever 3016 is attached to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever 3016 and on the front side of the sub display device 3015, three stop buttons 3017L for stopping the rotations of the three reels RL, RC, RR by the player's pressing operation (stop operation). , 3017C, 3017R are provided.

A C/P button 3018 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button 3014. The C/P button 3018 is used to switch the credit/payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by pushing a button. When payout is selected by switching the C/P button 3018 (non-credit state), medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 3021 (cancel chute) provided in the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism 3005. The paid-out and paid-out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 3022.

A waist panel 3019 (a waist light guide plate) is arranged below the start lever 3016 and the stop buttons 3017L, 3017C, 3017R. The waist panel 3019 is configured as a makeup panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel 3019, names indicating various models of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

A speaker 3020L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening 3021 and a speaker 3020R is provided on the right side thereof. The speakers 3020L and 3020R notify the player of various information related to the game by sound such as voice and music. A sub liquid crystal display device 3023 is arranged on the left side of the main display window 3011. The sub liquid crystal display device 3023 is a so-called touch panel 3023T in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). Note that the touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitance type that detects a part of the human body (fingertip, etc.) or contact with an electrostatic pen, and outputs the detection signal, or It may be of a type that detects the contact of a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs the detection signal, or of another type or structure (in-cell structure or the like). In the present embodiment, the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 and the touch panel 3023T can be used to perform the optical adjustment of the projector device as described above.

The sub liquid crystal display device 3023 functions as a SUI (smart user interface), and displays game information such as the number of games as the game progresses on the display screen thereof, depending on the player. A message or an input key for requesting selection or input is displayed.

Note that, in the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, it is also possible to display, on the display screen thereof, the content (effect information) according to the effect on the game as the game progresses, for example. Further, as the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, for example, an attachment having a function as a performance accessory or a dedicated attachment such as a jog dial or a push button may be mounted. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 can be omitted by allocating its function to a display unit 3080 described later and the like. A sub liquid crystal display device different from the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 may be arranged on the right side of the main display window 3011. As such another sub liquid crystal display device, an LED substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided on the back side of the sub liquid crystal display device, and the display surface is formed by a panel that is transparent and decorated so that it can be performed. May be formed.

FIG. 166 is a front view showing the inside of the cabinet 3003 in which the upper door mechanism 3004 and the lower door mechanism 3005 of the gaming machine 3001 are omitted. As shown in FIG. 166, the inside of the cabinet 3003 is partitioned by an intermediate support plate 3030 into an upper space and a lower space. That is, the intermediate support plate 3030 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet 3003 into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism 3004 in the cabinet 3003 and houses the display unit 3080 and the like. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism 3005 in the cabinet 3003. The reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 3001, and the like are integrally held with the lower door mechanism 3005 on the rear side of the lower door mechanism 3005 and housed in the lower space described above.

The display unit 3080 is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate 3030 in the cabinet 3003. The display unit 3080 is a so-called projection mapping device including an irradiation unit 3100 that emits irradiation light for displaying an image and a screen device 3090 that displays an image when the irradiation light from the irradiation unit 3100 is irradiated.

Further, the screen device 3090 is provided with a front screen mechanism 3091 which is irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation unit 3100, and further, a sub-control board 3200 is arranged in the lower space. The sub-control board 3200 controls the irradiation unit 3100 according to the performance operation of the screen or the accessory to project the irradiation light on the screen or the accessory to display an image as a visual effect.

A power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP are provided at the bottom of the lower space of the cabinet 3003. Further, a sub relay board SN is provided on the sub control board 3200.

(Display unit)
FIG. 167(a) shows only the upper door mechanism 3004 and the display unit 3080. As described above, the display unit 3080 includes the irradiation unit 3100 and the screen device 3090, and ventilation holes 3024a and 3024b having a plurality of small holes are provided on the upper exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004.

FIG. 167(b) is a diagram showing a display unit 3080 (that is, a state in which the upper door mechanism 3004 is removed from the upper door mechanism 3004 and the display unit 3080 shown in FIG. 167(a)). The display unit 3080 has a housing having an opening formed in the front as illustrated. The housing is composed of a projector cover 3101 forming the upper part of the irradiation unit 3100 and a screen device 3090. The projector cover 3101 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen device 3090.

A reflector holder 3102 is formed in the center of the front surface of the projector cover 3101 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism 3004 is opened. The mirror mechanism 3105, which will be described later, is attached to the reflector holding portion 3102 so that its interval can be adjusted. Accordingly, the reflection angle of the optical mirror 3106 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the irradiation unit 3100 can be finely adjusted. An exhaust port 3103a is arranged at the front left side of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101 and an intake port 3103b is arranged at the front right side of the upper surface. Due to such a configuration, when the projector cover 3101 is attached to the cabinet 3003 and the upper door mechanism 3004 is closed (that is, the gaming machine 3001 is in use), it is shown in FIG. 167(a). The ventilation port 3024a in the upper exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004 communicates with the exhaust port 3103a arranged at the front left end of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101, and the ventilation port 3024b in the upper exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004 connects to the projector cover 3101. Is positioned so as to communicate with the intake port 3103b arranged at the right end on the front side of the upper surface.

FIG. 168 is a plan view of the irradiation unit 3100 shown in FIG. 167(b). An exhaust port 3103a is arranged at the front left end of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101 and an intake port 3103b is arranged at the right front end of the upper surface. A reflector holder 3102 provided at the center of the front surface of the projector cover 3101 is arranged so as to slightly project from the main body of the projector cover 3101.

FIG. 169 shows a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 3100 taken along line XX-XX shown in FIG. 168.

Here, the irradiation unit 3100 reflects in the direction of the projector device 3300 that emits the irradiation light forward, and the screen device 3090 that is arranged in front of the projector device 3300 and is arranged obliquely downward and rearward of the irradiation light from the projector device 3300. And a projector cover 3101 that accommodates the projector device 3300 and the mirror mechanism 3105.

The projector device 3300 is attached to the projector cover 3101 while being externally covered by the case 3402, and is arranged in the cabinet 3003. The projector device 3300 is attached to the projector cover 3101 via a flat plate-shaped upper base and a lower base that are horizontally arranged.

The projector device 3300 includes a projector control board 3310 and an optical mechanism 3330. The optical mechanism 3330 emits the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B and reflected by the DMD 3333 (Digital Micromirror Device) toward the front mirror mechanism 3105 via the lens unit 3332 and the like. It is configured. The projector device 3300 will be described in detail later.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the projector device 3300 and the mirror mechanism 3105 are housed in the projector cover 3101. The lower surface 3109 of the projector device 3300 has an inclined surface that is inclined upward from the rear toward the front at the front portion thereof.

As shown in FIG. 169, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light, and the fixed screen mechanism according to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. A fixed screen mechanism similar to D. Further, the front screen mechanism 3091 has the same configuration as the front screen mechanism E1 according to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 17, and is rotatably provided between the front exposure position and the front standby position. ing. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism 3091 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism 3091 covers the fixed screen mechanism 3120 from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the front screen mechanism 3091. It is possible.

When the front screen mechanism 3091 moves to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 is exposed so that an image by irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism 3120. That is, when the front screen mechanism 3091 is arranged at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism 3091 becomes a projection target of the projector device 3300. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism 3091 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 becomes a projection target of the projector device 3300.

A reel screen mechanism 3130 shown in FIG. 169 is a reel screen mechanism similar to the reel screen mechanism F1 according to the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 18, and rotates between a reel exposed position and a reel standby position. It is possible. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set so that the reel exposure position exists in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism 3130 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism 3130 covers the fixed screen mechanism 3120 from the front, so that the image by the irradiation light appears only on the reel screen mechanism 3130. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism 3130 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 is exposed so that an image by irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism 3120. That is, when the reel screen mechanism 3130 is arranged at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism 3130 becomes a projection target of the projector device 3300. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism 3130 is arranged at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 becomes the projection target of the projector device 3300.

FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the projector device 3300 and the projector cover 3101.

The irradiation unit 3100 shown in FIG. 170(a) is composed of a projector cover 3101 and a projector device 3300. An exhaust port 3103a is arranged at the front left end of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101, and an intake port 3103b is arranged at the front right end of the upper surface of the projector cover 3101. When the mounting screws of the top cover 3110 attached to the upper surface of the projector cover 3101 are removed to remove the top cover 3110, and the above-mentioned mounting screws of the upper pedestal are removed to remove the upper pedestal, FIG. The state as shown in () indicates that the projector device 3300 is housed in the projector cover 3101.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 170(b), the mounting screw of the lower pedestal is removed to remove the lower pedestal and the projector cover 3101. As shown in FIG. 170(c), the projector device 3300 is taken out.

The projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 170(c) is covered with the case 3402 as described above. In addition, a vent hole 3404b having a plurality of holes is provided on a side surface of the case 3402, and an air passage and an intake port 3103b in the projector cover 3101 and a ventilation port 3024b provided in an exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004 are provided. Through this, air is taken into the projector device 3300 from the outside of the gaming machine 3001. Although the details will be described later, an intake fan (intake fan 3210 described later) for taking in external air is installed in the air flow path inside the projector cover 3101.

Although not shown in FIG. 170(c), a vent hole 3404a having a plurality of similar holes is provided on the side surface opposite to the side surface of the case 3402 provided with the vent hole 3404b described above. A structure in which air is discharged from the inside of the projector device 3300 to the outside of the game machine 3001 through an air flow path and an exhaust port 3103a in the projector cover 3101 and a ventilation port 3024a provided in an exterior panel of the upper door mechanism 3004. Has become. Although details will be described later, exhaust fans (exhaust fans 3342a and 3342b described later) are installed in the vicinity of the vent hole 3404a inside the projector device 3300.

Further, an opening 3403 is formed in the case 3402 of the projector device 3300, and irradiation light emitted from the optical mechanism 3330 of the projector device 3300 passes through the opening 3403 and is provided to the front mirror mechanism 3105. ..

In this embodiment, the projector device 3300 is arranged so that the original upper surface of the projector device 3300 is on the lower side (that is, in an upside down positional relationship).

(System configuration of gaming machine 3001)
As shown in FIG. 171, the gaming machine 3001 has a main control board MS, a sub control board 3200, a reel drive board RD, a door relay board DS, a sub relay board SN, and a scaler board SK as main boards included in the system. The projector control board 3310, the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL, and the screen drive control board CS are provided. Power is supplied to the main control board MS, the sub-control board 3200, and the like from the power supply board DE1 of the power supply device DE when the power supply switch DE2 is on.

The gaming machine 3001 includes an improved projector device 3300 and the like, and the sub-control board SS and the projector control board B23 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment are a sub-control board 3200 and a projector control board 3310, respectively. .. The other components are the same as those of the gaming machine 1, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the gaming machine 3001, as in the gaming machine 1, the 7-segment display unit 30 for digital display, the external centralized terminal board 31 for connecting the external display unit, the graphic board 40, and the sub RAM are known components. Substrate 41, Sub ROM Substrate 42, Medal Identification Selector 50, Door Open/Close Monitor Switch 51, BET Switch 52, Settlement Switch 53, Start Switch 54, Stop Switch Substrate 55, Setting Key Type Switch 56, LED Substrate 60, Performance And a decorative LED group 61, a production speaker group 62, a 24h door monitoring unit 63, and a door monitoring switch 64. Descriptions of these known components will be omitted.

The sub-control board 3200 is a board mainly for controlling effects associated with the game of the gaming machine 3001. The sub control board 3200 is connected to the sub relay board SN via a connector (BtoB: board-to-board), and the sub relay board SN and the scaler board SK are connected to each other via a harness H. Various signals are bidirectionally exchanged with these.

As described above, the gaming machine 3001 includes the intake fan 3210 inside the projector cover 3101 and further includes the pulse sensor 3211. The sub control board 3200 receives a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 from the pulse sensor 3211 as a rotation speed detection signal, and stores it in the sub RAM board 41.

FIG. 172 shows the circuit configuration of the sub control board 3200 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 172, the sub control board 3200 has a sub CPU 3201, an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 401 having a backup function, and a real time clock (RTC: Real Time Clock) 402 which is a time and date counting circuit, and is replaced. As a possible expansion card, a graphic board 40, a sub RAM board 41, and a sub ROM board 42 are mounted by bus connection. The graphic board 40 includes a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit) 440 and a VRAM (video memory) 441.

Further, the sub CPU 3201 transmits, for example, a signal for displacing the projection surface of the front screen mechanism 3091 to the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 through the sub relay substrate SN and the screen drive control substrate CS. .. Further, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a video signal for displaying a video on the projector device 3300, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, etc. to the projector control board 3310 and the sub liquid crystal I/F board SL through the scaler board SK.

Further, the sub CPU 3201 controls driving of the intake fan 3210, receives a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 from the pulse sensor 3211 as a rotation speed detection signal, and stores it in the sub RAM substrate 41.

FIG. 173 shows the circuit configuration of the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment.

A projector control board 3310 shown in FIG. 173 includes a control LSI 3311, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 3312, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 3313, and an LED driver 3314. As shown in FIG. 173, the optical mechanism 3330 of the projector device 3300 includes a lens unit 3332, and further includes R (red), G (green), and B (blue) as constituent elements arranged around the lens unit 3332. ) LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B for emitting each color light and a DMD 3333 are provided. Further, a focus mechanism for adjusting the focus of the projection lens 3332b of the lens unit 3332 is provided.

The control LSI 3311 controls the DLP control circuit 3313 to project the irradiation light based on the command from the sub control board 3200 received via the relay board 3301. Further, the control LSI 3311 controls the focus mechanism 3332a of the lens unit 3332 to move the projection lens 3332b of the lens unit 3332 in the optical axis direction based on the command from the sub control substrate 3200 received via the relay substrate 3301. As a result, focus adjustment is performed when the irradiation light is projected.

The focus mechanism 3332a is a mechanism similar to the focus mechanism 242 of the lens unit B21 in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 24, and the projection lens 3332b is the gaming machine of the first embodiment shown in FIG. The projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 in No. 1 has the same configuration. The focus mechanism 3332a is for focusing the fixed screen mechanism 3120 of the screen device 3090 and the front screen mechanism 3091 which is displaced with respect to the projector device 3300 while changing the focal length of the projection lens 3332b.

The EEPROM 3312 stores data relating to the setting/adjustment of the projector device 3300 by the control LSI 3311. Although not particularly shown, the control LSI 3311 includes a ROM that stores a control program and the like, and a DRAM that is used in a work area related to setting and adjustment of the projector device 3300.

The DLP system of the projector device 3300 is mainly configured by the DLP control circuit 3313, the LED driver 3314, the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B, and the DMD 3333 of the optical mechanism 3330.

The DMD3333 has a mirror corresponding to pixels corresponding to the display resolution integrated on the main surface of the semiconductor chip. The DMD3333 is configured such that each mirror is tilted +10° or −10° around an axis along a diagonal line with respect to the main surface by the electrostatic field action of the memory element immediately below each mirror. With such a configuration, each mirror of the DMD 3333 is switched between an ON state (a state that reflects light in a predetermined direction) and an OFF state (a state that reflects light outside the predetermined direction). That is, when each mirror of the DMD 3333 is in the ON state, it guides the light incident from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B through a dichroic mirror (not shown) or the like to the lens unit 3332 through the dichroic mirror or the like, while turning it OFF. In the state, the light incident from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B via the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected toward a direction other than the lens unit 3332.

The DLP control circuit 3313 controls the LED driver 3314 that drives the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B, and DMD3333 in a time-division manner by using the dichroic mirrors (not shown) to emit the lights of the RGB colors from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B. Incident on. At this time, the DLP control circuit 3313 turns the mirror corresponding to which pixel into the ON state or the OFF state at which timing according to the projected image, that is, which color of the light of each color of RGB, which timing. Determines whether to reflect in a predetermined direction by controlling the ON/OFF state of each mirror of the DMD3333. In addition, when the light incident through the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected in a direction other than the lens unit 3332, even if the reflected light is reflected again in the projector device 3300, the direction of the lens unit 3332 is reduced. It may be controlled so that the light incident through the dichroic mirror or the like is reflected in a direction other than the lens unit 3332 so that the light does not proceed to the above.

By such control of the DLP control circuit 3313, the light reflected by the DMD 3333 in a predetermined direction proceeds to the lens unit 3332, passes through the projection lens 3332b, enters the mirror mechanism 3105, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105. By being reflected, it is guided to the projection target. As a result, the irradiation light is projected on the screen or accessory that is the projection target, and an image according to the effect is formed.

As shown in FIG. 173, projector device 3300 further includes a temperature sensor 3341, an exhaust fan 3342, and a pulse sensor 3343.

The temperature sensor 3341 has a function similar to that of the temperature sensor B25 described above, and is composed of, for example, a thermistor. The temperature sensor 3341 collectively represents a plurality of temperature sensors. The temperature sensor 3341 detects the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 3331R and outputs the temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310, detects the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source 3331G, and detects the temperature in the projector control board 3310. A temperature sensor 3341b that outputs a temperature detection signal and a temperature sensor 3341c that detects a temperature near the LED light source 3331B and outputs a temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310. For example, such temperature sensors 3341a, 3341b, 3341c are arranged on the corresponding LED boards 3331Ra, 3331Ga, 3331Ba, or in the vicinity of the LED boards.

Further, the temperature sensor 3341 further detects the temperature in the vicinity of the DMD 3333 and outputs the temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310, and detects the temperature in the vicinity of the lens unit 3332 and outputs the temperature to the projector control board 3310. It includes a temperature sensor 3341e that outputs a temperature detection signal.

The temperature sensors 3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d described above are an example of temperature detecting means provided near the optical element such as the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) or DMD3333, or near the optical element. Such temperature detecting means includes an optical element itself and may include an object provided with the optical element. For example, when the temperature detecting means is provided in the optical element itself, when the temperature detecting means is provided on the substrate on which the optical element is provided, when the temperature detecting means is provided near the position where the optical element is arranged, When the temperature detecting means is provided in the vicinity of the substrate provided with, and when the temperature detecting means is provided inside the object (for example, the projector) provided with the optical element, the temperature changes depending on the amount of heat generated by the optical element. This may include a case where the temperature detecting means is provided at a position where the temperature of various structures such as air, a substrate, and an electronic circuit can be detected.

In the present embodiment, the temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c) for detecting the temperature of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and the temperature sensor for detecting the temperature of the lens unit 3332 detect the temperature in units of 1°C. .. That is, the unit in which the temperature detected by these temperature sensors changes (temperature change unit) is 1°C.

On the other hand, the temperature sensor that detects the temperature of the DMD3333 detects the temperature in units of 0.25°C. That is, the unit in which the temperature detected by this temperature sensor changes (temperature change unit) is 0.25°C.

With such a configuration, the temperature change regarding the DMD 3333 can be detected with higher accuracy than the temperature change regarding the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) or the lens unit 3332. Note that the temperature change regarding the DMD 3333 includes a temperature change around the DMD 3333, a temperature change around the DMD 3333, a temperature change around the exhaust fan 3342, or a temperature change around the exhaust fan 3342. This may include a temperature change of the projector device 3300. Further, in order to grasp such a temperature change, the arrangement position of the temperature sensor 3341d can be adjusted, or another temperature sensor can be used.

The exhaust fan 3342 includes two exhaust fans, that is, an exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) and an exhaust fan 3342b (FAN5).

The pulse sensor 3343 is provided so as to output two pulse sensors, that is, a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) to the projector control board 3310 as a rotation speed detection signal of the FAN4. Pulse sensor 3343a and a pulse sensor 3343b provided to output a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3342b (FAN5) to the projector control board 3310 as a rotation speed detection signal of FAN5. Including. The pulse sensor may be composed of, for example, a photo interrupter.

As shown in FIG. 173, the power supply circuit 3302 supplies power to the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B via the LED driver 3314. Although omitted in FIG. 173, the power supply circuit 3302 also supplies power to the exhaust fan 3342, the lens unit 3332, the DMD 3333, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the projector device 3300 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device 3300 makes the projection distance to the projection target by folding back the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism 3105, and shortens the projection distance of the irradiation light as much as possible by setting the contrast ratio to 1000:1. ing. As a result, the display unit 3080 including the projector device 3300 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet 3003 of the gaming machine 3001.

(Processing of main control board MS and scaler board SK)
As described above, the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment includes the same main control board MS and scaler board SK as the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and basically, the main control board MS. The processing by the scaler substrate SK is the same as that of the gaming machine 1.

(Processing of Sub Control Board 3200)
As described above, the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment includes the sub control board 3200 different from the sub control board SS of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, but basically, the first control board 3200. The same process as the sub control substrate SS of the embodiment is performed. Hereinafter, the processing of the sub control board 3200 will be appropriately described when the processing different from that of the sub control board SS is performed.

(Processing of Projector Control Board 3310)
In the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the projector device B2 is used, and the projector device B2 includes the projector control board B23 (see FIGS. 21 and 128). On the other hand, in the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment, a projector device 3300 different from the projector device B2 of the first embodiment is adopted, and the projector control board 3310 included in the projector device 3300 is also the first embodiment. The projector control board B23 included in the projector device B2 of FIG. In the following description, the process of the projector control board 3310 will be described in the form of improving a part of the process described above as the process suitable for the projector device B2 illustrated in FIG.

(DMD temperature judgment)
Next, temperature determination regarding the DMD 3333 of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 shows projector device 3300 with part of case 3402 removed. Here, for convenience of description, the projector device 3300 is shown upside down with respect to the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 170(c), that is, the projector device 3300 is shown upside down.

The case 3402 of the projector device 3300 includes an upper case 3402a and a lower case 3402b. In FIG. 174, the lower case 3402b is removed and the upper case 3402a is shown. Further, a vent hole 3404a having a plurality of holes is arranged on the side surface of the upper case 3402a.

Inside the projector device 3300, as shown in FIG. 174, two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) are arranged. Further, a heat sink 3410 is arranged between the two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) and the vent 3404a. The heat sink 3410 is configured to surround a part of the heat pipe 3411.

With such a configuration, the heat inside the projector device 3300 is released to the outside through the vent holes 3404a by the two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b), and the heat collected through the heat pipe 3411 and the like is also absorbed by the heat sink. When 3410 receives the wind from the two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b), it is discharged to the outside through the ventilation port 3404a.

Further, a lens unit 3332 is arranged near the two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b). The projection lens 3332b of the lens unit 3332 is held by the lens holder 3412. A lens cover 3413 is attached to the front end of the lens unit 3332, and a filter 3414 is held in the opening of the lens cover 3413.

The projector control board 3310 is arranged and fixed inside the projector device 3300 as shown in FIG. 174.

FIG. 175 is a bottom view of the projector device 3300 from which the lower case 3402b is removed, as viewed from below, as in FIG. 174. In the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 175, the fan cover covering the two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) is removed, and the projector control board 3310 is transparently shown by a dotted line.

As shown in FIG. 175, a vent 3404a is provided at the left end of the upper case 3402a, and a vent 3404b is provided at the right end of the upper case 3402a. A heat sink 3410 is arranged on the right side of the ventilation port 3404a (inside the projector device 3300), and two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) and a lens unit 3332 are arranged on the right side thereof.

The heat pipe 3411 connected to the heat sink 3410 extends over the entire length in the longitudinal direction of the heat sink 3410, further bends below the heat sink 3410, and extends over substantially the entire length in the longitudinal direction of the projector device 3300.

The DMD 3333 is arranged on the right side of the exhaust fan 3342b, and the DMD heat sink 3417 is held in proximity to the DMD 3333. The optical case 3418 is provided with an opening (or a transmission part) through which the irradiation light from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B, the irradiation light to the DMD 3333, and the reflected light from the DMD 3333 pass, and further, the reflection from the DMD 3333. An opening portion (or a transmission portion) for providing light to the lens unit 3332 is provided.

The DMD 3333 is connected to the optical case 3418 with a DMD heat sink 3417 interposed therebetween, and the DMD heat sink 3417 is also provided with an opening (or a transmissive portion). It is provided inside the optical case 3418 through the opening of the case 3418 and the like.

A temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333 and outputs a temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310 is arranged between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333. The temperature sensor 3341d is held by being mounted on the projector control board 3310 at this position, for example. Further, the temperature sensor 3341d can be held at an arbitrary position between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333, for example, at any position in the space region 3416. In this example, it is held on the projector control board 3310, but it is not limited to this.

Although the temperature sensor 3341d is intended to detect the temperature of the DMD 3333, it cannot be placed directly on the DMD substrate, and thus is close to the temperature of the DMD 3333 between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333. The temperature sensor 3341d is arranged at a position suitable for detecting the temperature (a position “downstream” of the DMD 3333 in the inside of the projector device 3300 from the flow of the air flow path P4 described later).

A temperature sensor 3341e that detects the temperature near the lens unit 3332 and outputs a temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310 is arranged between the exhaust fan 3342a and the lens unit 3332 (lens holder 3412).

FIG. 176 is a rear view of the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 175 as seen from the rear. Unlike FIG. 175, the projector control board 3310 is shown as an entity.

As shown in FIG. 176, a vent 3404a is provided at the left end of the upper case 3402a, and a vent 3404b is provided at the right end of the upper case 3402a. A heat sink 3410 is arranged on the right side of the ventilation port 3404a (inside the projector device 3300), and an exhaust fan 3342b and a lens unit 3332 are arranged on the right side thereof. The heat pipe 3411 is connected to the heat sink 3410 as described above.

The DMD 3333 is arranged on the right side of the exhaust fan 3342b, and the L-shaped DMD heat sink 3417 is held in proximity to the DMD 3333 so that the heat of the DMD 3333 is conducted, and is connected to the optical case 3418.

As described above, the temperature sensor 3341d is held by the projector control board 3310 between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333. Further, the temperature sensor 3341d can be held at an arbitrary position between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333, for example, at any position in the space region 3416.

FIG. 177 is a bottom view of a state where the projector device 3300 is arranged in the irradiation unit 3100 as seen from below, and is for explaining the air flow in the irradiation unit 3100 and the projector device 3300. Here, for convenience of description, the lower surface 3109 and the two duct covers (3421a, 3421b) of the irradiation unit 3100 are removed (see FIG. 178), and the lower case 3402b and the projector control board of the projector device 3300 are removed. 3310 is shown with it removed.

When external air is forcibly taken into the irradiation unit 3100 of the gaming machine 3001 from the intake port 3103b of the projector cover 3101 by the intake fan 3210, the taken-in air is an air flow path formed by the projector cover 3101. Along (through a space P5 indicated by a dotted line), the air is guided to the ventilation port 3404b provided in the upper case 3402a of the projector device 3300, and is guided into the projector device 3300.

The air taken into the projector device 3300 from the ventilation port 3404b passes through the surface of the optical case 3418 and the heat sink 3410 by the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) and the exhaust fan 3342b (FAN5) in the projector device 3300. It is forcibly discharged to the outside of the vent hole 3404a provided in the upper case 3402a of the projector device 3300. Such an air flow in the projector device 3300 is indicated by an arrow as an air flow path P4.

The air discharged to the outside of the ventilation port 3404a is guided toward the exhaust port 3103a of the projector cover 3101 along the air flow path formed by the projector cover 3101 (through the space P6 shown by the dotted line), and from there. It is discharged to the outside.

By forming such a U-shaped air flow as a whole, the air flow passing through the projector device 3300 is effectively formed, and efficient heat dissipation is performed. The flow of air (the air flow path P4) passing through the projector device 3300 cools the optical case 3418 and the DMD 3333 from the surface (outside), and the heat is conducted by the heat pipe 3411 and the like, and is accumulated in the heat sink 3410 inside the projector device 3300. Of heat (for example, heat generated from DMD3333) is taken away. That is, the heat generated in projector device 3300 is exhausted by the flow of air passing through projector device 3300.

The intake fan 3210 is an example of intake means for sending external air. Such intake means is formed by the projector cover 3101 of the gaming machine 3001 like the intake fan 3210 of the present embodiment. It may be one that indirectly takes in outside air via the flow path, or one that directly takes in outside air and sends that air to projector apparatus 3300.

FIG. 178 is an exploded perspective view of a state where the projector device 3300 is arranged in the irradiation unit 3100, as seen from an oblique lower side. Two duct covers (3421a, 3421b) are arranged between the lower surface 3109 of the irradiation unit 3100 and the projector cover 3101.

By attaching the duct cover 3421b to the projector cover 3101, an air flow path from the intake fan 3210 to the ventilation port 3404b of the upper case 3402a is formed without any gap, and the intake fan 3210 effectively causes outside air to project. It will be sent to 3300. On the other hand, by attaching the duct cover 3421a to the projector cover 3101, an air flow path from the ventilation port 3404a of the upper case 3402a to the front of the exhaust port 3103a of the projector cover 3101 is formed without any gap, and the exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) are formed. ), the air in the projector device 3300 is effectively sent to the outside.

Note that the space from the intake port 3103b of the projector cover 3101 to the intake fan 3210, and the space in the vicinity of the exhaust port 3103a of the projector cover 3101 in which the duct cover 3421a does not form an air flow path are lower surfaces of the projector device 3300. By attaching 3109 to the projector cover 3101, each is connected to an air flow path formed by a duct cover, and an air flow path having a high degree of sealing is formed as a whole.

FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the projector device 3300 with the lower case 3402b removed, as seen from the rear side. In the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 179, the fan cover that covers the two exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b), the projector control board 3310, and the optical case 3418 are shown in a removed state.

Under the optical case 3418, a base 3419 (made of, for example, metal) is arranged, which is connected to the heat pipe 3411 to realize effective heat dissipation.

Three LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) are arranged on the base 3419. Here, exemplifying the arrangement of the LED light source 3331B, as shown in FIG. 179, the heat plate 3331Bb is arranged on the base 3419, and the LED substrate 3331Ba is attached to the heat plate 3331Bb. An LED light source 3331B and a temperature sensor 3341c that detects a temperature near the LED light source 3331B and outputs a temperature detection signal to the projector control board 3310 are arranged on the LED board 3331Ba.

Further, a cover 3331Bc is arranged on the LED board 3331Ba to connect to the optical case 3418, but the display is omitted here for convenience of description. The cover 3331Bc has the same shape as the cover 3331Gc displayed for the LED light source 3331G.

Here, the arrangement of the LED light source 3331B has been described, but the same applies to the LED light source 3331G and the LED light source 3331R. The LED light source 3331G and the temperature sensor 3341b are arranged on the LED substrate 3331Ga, and the LED light source 3331R is arranged on the LED substrate 3331Ra. And a temperature sensor 3341a.

In addition, in this embodiment, the LED light sources are arranged as the LED light source 3331B, the LED light source 3331G, and the LED light source 3331R from the side closer to the DMD 3333, but such an arrangement is merely an example.

(Shutdown temperature setting/DMD temperature peak hold/Screen inversion function)
Next, a shutdown temperature setting function regarding the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment, a peak hold function regarding the temperature of the DMD 3333, and a screen inversion function will be described respectively.

As described above, the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the present embodiment includes the temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333, and based on the relationship between the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d and the shutdown temperature. The main parts of the projector device 3300 are forcibly stopped (forced shutdown). The shutdown temperature can be set from the sub control board 3200, for example.

Further, the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the present embodiment has a function of storing (peak hold) the MAX temperature among the temperatures detected by the temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333 described above.

Furthermore, the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the present embodiment has a function (screen inversion function) of rotating and projecting an image in accordance with the gaming machine in which the projector device 3300 is mounted. Further, such image rotation is in accordance with the designation from the sub-control board 3200. Note that the rotation of the image includes, for example, forward rotation, vertical inversion, horizontal inversion, vertical inversion+horizontal inversion, and the like.

The processing relating to each of the above functions will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 189.

180 shows the projector control main processing by the control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310 in the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 180 is a part of the above-described process shown in FIG. 129 improved in order to realize the above-described functions of the projector device 3300.

As shown in FIG. 180, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 3311 performs a projector initialization process (S2001). This process corresponds to the process in FIG.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area are “ON” (S2002). When the reception completion flag is “ON” (S2002: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the processing of the next S2003. When the reception completion flag is not “ON” (S2002: No), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2007.

Next, the control LSI 3311 acquires the reception data from the reception storage area of the DRAM (S2003).

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets various flags of the DRAM & the reception completion flag in the work area to “OFF” (S2004).

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the transmission destination ID of the acquired reception data indicates “projector” (S2005). When the transmission destination ID indicates'projector' (S2005: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the processing of the next S2006. When the transmission destination ID does not indicate “projector” (S2005: No), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2007.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a sub-control-projector reception process (S2006). This process corresponds to the process of FIG.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs projector self-diagnosis processing (S2007). This processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a sub-control-projector transmission time process (S2008). This process corresponds to the process shown in FIG. Alternatively, the process shown in FIG. 135 may be performed.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not an LED temperature abnormality (shutdown), a FAN rotation abnormality, a DMD temperature abnormality, or a voltage abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM (S2009). The LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) means an LED temperature abnormality leading to a forced shutdown described later, and for example, one of the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B near the LED temperature control table shown in FIG. 131(a) is used. Is generated and stored when the temperature is detected as being equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature.

The FAN rotation abnormality means a FAN rotation abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown, and is generated when either the FAN rotation speed of FAN4 or FAN5 is detected as less than the predetermined rotation speed using the FAN rotation speed control table shown in FIG. 187. -Stored.

In the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when there is a FAN temperature abnormality, the FAN temperature abnormality is written in the error management area of the DRAM described above, but in the gaming machine 3001 of the second embodiment, regarding the FAN temperature abnormality, Do not manage.

The DMD temperature abnormality means a DMD temperature abnormality that leads to a forced shutdown, and is generated and stored when the temperature near the DMD 3333 is equal to or higher than the shutdown temperature (threshold value of DMD temperature) stored in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311. It The temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the DMD 3333 is disposed between the exhaust fan 3342b and the DMD 3333, and is disposed downstream of the air flow path P4 formed in the projector device 3300, and thus the exhaust fan 3342b. The temperature in the vicinity will be detected. Therefore, such detection of the DMD temperature abnormality also has the meaning of complementing the detection of the FAN temperature abnormality which is not managed in the second embodiment.

The voltage abnormality is generated/stored when, for example, a voltage boost of less than a predetermined specified voltage value is detected in the power supplied from the power supply circuit 3302.

When any one of these abnormalities is written in the error management area (S2009: Yes), the control LSI 3311 basically sends an error notification command to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200, and therefore, in S2010. Move to processing. The error notification process will be described later. On the other hand, if neither abnormality is written in the error management area (S2009: No), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2013.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 responds by sending a status request command in response to the error notification command transmission (S2010). When the sub CPU 3201 responds (S2010: Yes), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2012. If the sub CPU 3201 has not responded (S2010: No), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2011.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since it was confirmed that any abnormality was written in the error management area of the DRAM (S2011). When the predetermined time has elapsed (S2011: Yes), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2012. When the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2011: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2013.

Next, the control LSI 3311 transmits a rotation stop command to the FAN4 and FAN5, and sends a drive stop command to the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 that drives the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B (S2012). .. As a result, the main operation of projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the various flags of the DRAM & the reset request flag in the work area are “ON” (S2013). When the reset request flag is “ON” (S2013: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the processing of the next S2014. When the reset request flag is not “ON” (S2013: No), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2015.

Next, the control LSI 3311 waits for the watchdog timer (WDT) to be reset (S2014). Waiting for reset of the watchdog timer is a process of performing an infinite loop process without clearing the watchdog timer (or setting a predetermined value) and waiting for the watchdog timer to output a reset signal to the control LSI 3311. When the timer outputs a reset signal to the control LSI 3311, the control LSI 3311 is reset, and the process is restarted from the first step (S2001) in the projector control main process (also referred to as “reboot”).

In step S2015, the control LSI 3311 clears the value of the watchdog timer (WDT).

Next, the control LSI 3311 waits for a cycle of 4 msec, for example (S2016). After that, the control LSI 3311 shifts to the processing of S2002.

181 and 182 show a projector self-diagnosis process by the control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310 in the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment. The processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 is an improvement of a part of the processing shown in FIG. 130 described above in order to realize the above-described function by the projector device 3300.

As shown in FIG. 181, the control LSI 3311 writes, for example, “55AAH” as the diagnostic value read from the ROM in the self-diagnosis storage area of the DRAM by the verify check (S2021).

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the value (load value) read from the self-diagnosis storage area exactly matches the diagnosis value (S2022). When the load value matches the diagnostic value (S2022: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2024. When the load value does not match the diagnostic value (S2022: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the next processing of S2023.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets "self-diagnosis abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2023). This self-diagnosis abnormality includes an error due to the reset wait of the watchdog timer (WDT) described later. When the error information related to the self-diagnosis abnormality including the WDT reset waiting is set, the control LSI 3311 transmits a command indicating an error notification to the transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission processing (S2008) shown in FIG. (For example, the processing shown in S817 of FIG. 135), the reset request flag is set to'ON' (for example, the processing shown in S818 and S819' of FIG. 135), and the error notification is issued. The command shown is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, the processing shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, the above-described projector initialization processing (S2001) shown in FIG. 180 is executed in response to the reset signal from the watchdog timer.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs LED temperature diagnosis processing (S2024). In this processing, the control LSI 3311 acquires the LED temperature based on the temperature detection signals from the temperature sensor 3341a, the temperature sensor 3341b, and the temperature sensor 3341c.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the acquired LED temperature is normal (S2025). When the acquired LED temperature is normal (S2025: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2027. When the acquired LED temperature is not normal (S2025: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the processing of the next S2026.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets "LED temperature abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2026). Specifically, the temperature sensor 3341a, the temperature sensor 3341b, and the temperature sensor 3341c detect temperatures near the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B, respectively. The control LSI 3311 measures each temperature through these temperature sensors to determine whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature, for example, based on an LED temperature control table as shown in FIG. 131(a). If the temperature is equal to or higher than the predetermined temperature, error information indicating an abnormality related to warning or forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM. The warning means a warning display performed before the forced shutdown, and the forced shutdown refers to the operation of the main components such as the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B, the FAN4, and the FAN5 of the projector device 3300 such as the temperature and the FAN rotation speed. It means to stop forcibly according to the abnormal condition.

When such error information related to the LED temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (for example, , The processing as shown in S817 of FIG. 135), without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (for example, the processing as shown in S818, S819' of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is sub-controlled. The data is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the board 3200 (for example, the processing shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and the FAN5 is stopped, and the driving of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180), and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 causes an error in the sub control substrate 3200. A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

Next, in step S2027, the control LSI 3311 detects the maximum LED value (LED temperature (MAX)) of the LED temperature stored in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310 (LED temperature (MAX)) and the corresponding temperature sensor 3341a for the LED light source 3331R. The current temperature (current temperature) near the generated LED light source 3331R is compared, and if the current temperature is higher than the LED temperature (MAX), the current temperature is stored as the LED temperature (MAX). Such maximum temperature update processing is similarly performed for the LED light sources 3331G and 3331B.

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs FAN rotation diagnosis processing (S2028). In this process, the control LSI 3311 acquires the FAN rotation speed based on the fan rotation speed signals from the pulse sensors 3343a and 3343b of the FAN4 and FAN5.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S2029). When the acquired FAN rotation speed is normal (S2029: Yes), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2031. When the acquired FAN rotation speed is not normal (S2029: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the processing of the next S2030.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets "FAN rotation abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2030). Specifically, the pulse sensors 3343a and 3343b detect the rotation speeds of the FAN4 and FAN5. For each rotation speed, based on the FAN rotation speed control table of FIG. 187, if the rotation speed of either FAN4 or FAN5 is less than a predetermined rotation speed (for example, 4410 rpm), error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown Is set in the error management area of the DRAM.

When such error information related to the FAN rotation number abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above ( For example, without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (for example, the processing shown in S817 of FIG. 135) (for example, the processing shown in S818 or S819' of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is subordinated. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the control board 3200 (for example, the processing shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and the FAN5 is stopped, and the driving of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180), and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 causes an error in the sub control substrate 3200. A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs DMD temperature diagnosis processing (S2031). In this process, the control LSI 3311 acquires the DMD temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor 3341d.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the acquired DMD temperature is normal (S2032). When the acquired DMD temperature is normal (S2032: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2034. When the acquired DMD temperature is not normal (S2032: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the next processing of S2033.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets “DMD temperature abnormality” as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2033). Specifically, the temperature sensor 3341d detects the temperature near the downstream of the DMD 3333. The control LSI 3311 measures whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the shutdown temperature stored in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311 by measuring the temperature through the temperature sensor 3341d. Error information indicating an abnormality is set in the error management area of the DRAM. The shutdown temperature has a default value of 50° C. in this example, but can be set between 1° C. and 128° C. Further, shutdown control executability information (information indicating whether to perform forced shutdown control based on the shutdown temperature) is stored in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311, and the error management area is set based on the shutdown control executability information. It is also possible to control whether or not to do it.

When the error information related to the DMD temperature abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (for example, , The processing as shown in S817 of FIG. 135), without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (for example, the processing as shown in S818, S819' of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is sub-controlled. The data is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the board 3200 (for example, the processing shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and the FAN5 is stopped, and the driving of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180), and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 causes an error in the sub control substrate 3200. A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

Next, in step S2034, the control LSI 3311 detects the highest DMD temperature (DMD temperature (MAX)) of the DMD 3333 stored in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310 and the corresponding temperature sensor 3341d. The current temperature near the DMD 3333 (current temperature) is compared, and if the current temperature is higher than the DMD temperature (MAX), the current temperature is stored as the DMD temperature (MAX).

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a lens temperature diagnosis process in S2035 of FIG. 182. In this processing, the control LSI 3311 acquires the lens temperature based on the temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor 3341e.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the acquired lens temperature is normal (S2036). When the acquired lens temperature is normal (S2036: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2038. When the acquired lens temperature is not normal (S2036: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the next processing of S2037.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets "lens temperature abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2037). Specifically, the temperature sensor 3341e detects the temperature near the lens unit 3332. The control LSI 3311 measures the temperature through this temperature sensor to determine whether or not the measured temperature is equal to or higher than a predetermined temperature based on a lens temperature control table as shown in FIG. 188. Error information indicating an abnormality related to warning or forced shutdown is set in the error management area of the DRAM.

The warning means a warning display before the forced shutdown. Further, it may be controlled to perform image correction based on the measured temperature. Since the image is distorted when the temperature of the lens becomes high, it is checked whether or not the image actually projected by the projector device 3300 is distorted, and if the distortion is generated, it is corrected. For example, in response to a setting change request from the projector device 3300, a focus offset command, a focus drift correction value command, and the like are transmitted from the sub control board 3200 to the projector device 3300, and image correction is realized. Further, at this time, the projector device 3300 transmits the temperature measured by the temperature sensor 3341e to the sub control board 3200, and the focus offset command, the focus drift correction value command, and the like are generated based on these values. Good.

The forced shutdown means to forcibly stop the main operations of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B), FAN4, FAN5, etc. of the projector apparatus 3300 according to an abnormality such as temperature or FAN rotation speed.

In such a lens temperature diagnosis, if error information indicating an abnormality related to forced shutdown is set, the control LSI 3311 sends a command indicating an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S2008) shown in FIG. Created as transmission data (for example, the processing shown in S817 of FIG. 135), and without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (for example, the processing shown in S818 and S819' of FIG. 135), the error A command indicating the notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, the process shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and the FAN5 is stopped, and the driving of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180), and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 causes an error in the sub control substrate 3200. A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

On the other hand, in the lens temperature diagnosis, when the error information indicating the abnormality related to the warning is set, the control LSI 3311 causes the sub-control-projector transmission process (S2008) shown in FIG. (For example, the processing as shown in S817 of FIG. 135), the error notification is issued without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (for example, the processing as shown in S818 and S819' of FIG. 135). The command shown is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, the processing shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, the sub-control board 3200 issues an error display request to the sub-liquid crystal display device 3023 (S512 in FIG. 93), but the projector device 3300 repeats the normal process.

Next, in step S<b>2038, the control LSI 3311 detects the maximum value (lens temperature (MAX)) of the lens temperature stored in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310 (lens temperature (MAX)) and the corresponding temperature sensor 3341 e for the lens unit 3332. The current temperature (current temperature) near the selected lens unit 3332 is compared, and if the current temperature is higher than the lens temperature (MAX), the current temperature is stored as the lens temperature (MAX).

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a projector power source diagnosis process (S2039). In this process, the control LSI 3311 detects the operating voltage of the power supplied from the power supply circuit 3302 of the projector device 3300.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the operating voltage of the projector device 3300 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S2040). When the operating voltage of the projector device 3300 is equal to or higher than the specified voltage (S2040: Yes), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the process of S2042. When the operating voltage of the projector device 3300 is less than the specified voltage (S2040: No), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the next process of S2041.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets "voltage abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2041). Specifically, for example, error information of abnormal voltage indicating abnormal voltage drop is set. When the error information related to such a voltage abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (for example, 135)), without setting the reset request flag to'ON' (for example, the processings shown in S818 and S819' of FIG. 135), the command indicating the error notification is issued to the sub-control board. The data is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the 3200 (for example, the processing shown in S825 of FIG. 135). As a result, in the projector device 3300, the rotation of the FAN4 and the FAN5 is stopped, and the driving of the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED driver 3314 is stopped (S2012 in FIG. 180), and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 causes an error in the sub control substrate 3200. A display request is made (S512 in FIG. 93).

Next, the control LSI 3311 performs a DLP operation diagnosis process (S2042). In this processing, the control LSI 3311 checks the operation of the DLP control circuit 3313.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines whether the operation of the DLP control circuit 3313 is normal (S2043). When the operation of the DLP control circuit 3313 is normal (S2043: Yes), the control LSI 3311 ends the projector self-diagnosis process. When the operation of the DLP control circuit 3313 is not normal (S2043: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the next process of S2044.

Next, the control LSI 3311 sets "DLP abnormality" as error data in the error management area of the DRAM (S2044). When the error information related to such DLP abnormality is set, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data in the sub-control-projector transmission processing (S2008) shown in FIG. 180 described above (for example, 135), the reset request flag is set to'ON' (for example, the processings of S818 and S819' in FIG. 135), and the above-described processing is performed according to the reset signal from the watchdog timer. The projector initialization process (S2001) shown in FIG. 180 is executed.

That is, since the command indicating the error notification is created as the transmission data in S2008 and the reset request flag is set to “ON”, the error notification command created in S2008 is processed by the process of S727′ in FIG. 136 after rebooting. Will be sent in. At this time, the error notification command or information indicating the error notification can be stored in the EEPROM 3312. In such a case, even when a voltage change (decrease, interruption, abnormality due to increase, etc.) occurs due to power interruption or restart, the command and information can be retained without being erased. After that, the control LSI 3311 ends the projector self-diagnosis process.

According to the projector control main process and the projector self-diagnosis process, an error notification command is transmitted to the sub control board 3200 according to various abnormalities of the projector device 3300, and a response from the sub control board 3200 is sent at that time. If so, the circuits and fans of the projector device 3300 are stopped (forced shutdown is performed) according to the abnormality that has occurred, so that malfunction of the projector device 3300 due to heat accumulation can be avoided and it can take a long time. The discomfort of such images is eliminated, and it is possible to safely project high-quality images with high visual effects.

Further, even if there is no response from the sub-control board 3200, the operation of the projector device 3300 is automatically shut down after a predetermined time such as 30 seconds elapses, so that the malfunction of the projector device 3300 is surely avoided. Secure projection of high-quality images is ensured. In the case of DLP abnormality, that is, in the case of error processing by the watchdog timer, reboot (initialization processing) is performed, and error transmission is performed after the reboot. In the case of this kind of DLP abnormality, there is a high possibility that the projector device 3300 is frozen and it is difficult to give an error notification to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, the communication status is not normal, the transmission is Commands and information that should be created cannot be created normally). Therefore, error transmission is executed after rebooting. Note that the DLP abnormality may be treated in the same manner as other errors, and the error transmission related to the DLP abnormality may be performed before rebooting.

When the projector device 3300 itself reboots or shuts down, communication with the sub CPU 3201 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or longer, so the sub CPU 3201 detects an abnormality and the sub CPU 3201 causes the projector A reboot command (or a reboot) may be issued to the device 3300. Further, when the sub CPU 3201 cannot receive the signal from the projector device 3300 for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) or more, it is determined that the projector device 3300 is likely to be in the process of being rebooted, and is transmitted after the reboot process. When the sub CPU 3201 cannot receive the received error notification command (that is, when a time longer than 1000 ms, for example, 5000 ms has elapsed), the sub CPU 3201 is controlled to forcibly reboot the projector device 3300. Alternatively, an error may be notified.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the temperature of the DMD 3333 and the output data of the temperature sensor 3341d. A temperature sensor 3341d, which is arranged near the DMD 3333 and detects the temperature near the DMD 3333, outputs output data as shown in FIG. 183, for example, in accordance with the detected temperature (in FIG. 183, the output data is a hexadecimal number). Is expressed).

When the output data of the temperature sensor 3341d is 000h, the DMD temperature is 0.0°C, when the output data is 320h, the DMD temperature is 50°C, and when the output data is 7FFh, the DMD temperature is 128°C. To be done. However, if the output data of the temperature sensor 3341d is not in the range of 000h to 7FFh (for example, if it is FFCh or 800h, which indicates a negative temperature), it shall be processed as 0°C.

184 and 185 show a projector setting change process by the sub control board 3200 in the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment. The processes shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 are obtained by modifying a part of the process shown in FIG. 140 described above in order to realize the above-described functions by the projector device 3300.

When a command (parameter request: setting change) is received from the projector device 3300 in the projector control processing that is activated at predetermined intervals by the sub device task of the sub control board 3200 (see FIG. 73), the projector control reception processing is activated. (See FIG. 137), and in the projector control reception process, when it is determined that the acquired command from the projector device 3300 is the projector setting change request, the projector setting change process is activated (see FIG. 138). ).

As shown in FIG. 184, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 takes out the setting change content of the projector setting value received as an argument (S2071).

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is a horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) (S2072). When the content of the setting change is the horizontal position offset (S2072: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2073. When the setting change content is not the horizontal position offset (S2072: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2074.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs horizontal position offset command transmission processing (S2073). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the horizontal position offset (horizontal position A to E offset) in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and issues a command for setting the horizontal position offset to the projector control substrate 3310. To send. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process. The horizontal position offset (horizontal image position offset) in the present embodiment is the horizontal position of the projection image that is horizontally offset-adjusted from the reference position for each projection surface, and the entire projection image is adjusted without performing electric focus adjustment. Means the position to be finely adjusted in the horizontal direction.

In S2074, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is the vertical position offset. When the setting change content is the vertical position offset (S2074: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2075. When the content of the setting change is not the vertical position offset (S2074: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2076.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs vertical position offset command transmission processing (S2075). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the vertical position offset in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the vertical position offset to the projector control substrate 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process. The vertical position offset (vertical image position offset) in this embodiment is the vertical position of the projection image that is vertically offset-adjusted from the reference position for each projection surface, and the entire projection image is adjusted without performing electric focus adjustment. Means the position to be finely adjusted in the vertical direction. That is, since the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset control which two-dimensional position within the projection range the projected image is displayed, it is possible to move the projected image without electric focus adjustment. Is. The focus position may be moved by electric focus adjustment, and the horizontal position and the vertical position of the projection image may be moved during rendering, and the position of the projection image may be changed by software image processing. Further, the electric focus adjustment may be performed based on the values of the horizontal position offset and the vertical position offset.

In S2076, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the setting change content is focus offset. When the setting change content is the focus offset (S2076: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2077. When the content of the setting change is not the focus offset (S2076: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2079.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing (S2077). This processing is, for example, the same processing as that shown in FIG. After that, the sub CPU 3201 performs a focus position offset command transmission process (S2078). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the focus position offsets A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and the projector control command (focus position offset command) for setting the focus position offsets A to E is controlled. Transmit to substrate 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2079, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is focus drift correction. When the setting change content is focus drift correction (S2079: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2080. When the setting change content is not focus drift correction (S2079: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2082.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs focus origin adjustment instruction transmission processing (S2080). This process is the same as the process of S2077. After that, the sub CPU 3201 performs focus drift correction value command transmission processing (S2081). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the focus drift correction values A to E in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sets a command (focus drift correction value command) for setting the focus drift correction values A to E. Is transmitted to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In step S2082, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the setting change content is LED brightness setting. When the setting change content is the LED brightness setting (S2082: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2083. When the setting change content is not the LED brightness setting (S2082: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2084.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs an LED brightness setting command transmission process (S2083). In this processing, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the LED brightness setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and sends a command for setting the LED brightness to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In step S2084, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the setting change content is a trapezoidal distortion correction value. When the setting change content is the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S2084: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2085. If the setting change content is not the trapezoidal distortion correction value (S2084: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2086.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs trapezoidal distortion correction value command transmission processing (S2085). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the trapezoidal distortion correction value in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits a command for setting the trapezoidal distortion correction value to the projector control substrate 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In step S2086, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the setting change content is contrast setting. When the content of the setting change is the contrast setting (S2086: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2087. When the content of the setting change is not the contrast setting (S2086: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2088.

Next, the sub CPU3201 performs a contrast setting command transmission process (S2087). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the contrast setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the contrast to the projector control substrate 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In step S2088, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the setting change content is gamma setting. When the setting change content is gamma setting (S2088: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2089. When the content of the setting change is not the gamma setting (S2088: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2090.

Next, the sub CPU3201 performs a gamma setting command transmission process (S2089). In this processing, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the gamma setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the gamma value to the projector control substrate 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In step S2090, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the setting change content is white color temperature. When the content of the setting change is the white color temperature (S2090: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2091. When the setting change content is not the white color temperature (S2090: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2092.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a white color temperature command transmission process (S2091). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the white color temperature in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and sends a command for setting the white color temperature to the projector control substrate 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2092, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is the brightness. When the content of the setting change is the brightness (S2092: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2093. When the setting change content is not brightness (S2092: No), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of S2094.

Next, the sub CPU3201 performs a brightness command transmission process (S2093). In this processing, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the brightness in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM board 41, and transmits a command for setting the brightness to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2094, the sub CPU3201 determines whether the setting change content is a test pattern. When the setting change content is the test pattern (S2094: Yes), the sub CPU3201 moves to the processing of the next S2095. If the setting change content is not the test pattern (S2094: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2096 shown in FIG. 185.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a test pattern command transmission process (S2095). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the test pattern in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41, and transmits a command for setting the test pattern to the projector control substrate 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2096, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is the shutdown temperature setting. When the setting change content is the shutdown temperature setting (S2096: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2097. When the setting change content is not the shutdown temperature setting (S2096: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2098.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs a shutdown temperature setting transmission process (S2097). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 rewrites the shutdown temperature in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to the preset shutdown temperature of the DMD 3333, and sends a command for setting the shutdown temperature to the projector control substrate 3310. To send. The shutdown temperature transmitted to the projector control board 3310 is provided as data to the sub control board 3200 in advance, or is provided to the sub control board 3200 by an input operation on the gaming machine 3001.

The projector control board 3310 stores the shutdown temperature (shutdown control threshold value) thus received in the DRAM of the projector control board 3310. Also, the shutdown control executability information indicating whether or not to perform the shutdown control based on the shutdown temperature can be stored in the DRAM. The shutdown temperature and the shutdown control executability information are stored in the DRAM as described above and are erased when the power of the gaming machine 3001 is turned off. The timing at which the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control executability information are stored is the timing at which the projector setting change processing shown in FIGS. 184 and 185 is executed, and basically, the projector control board 3310 outputs the projector setting value. This is the case where a change request (CMD: 82H, D1: 01H shown in the left column of FIG. 56) is issued. The projector control board 3310 may make this change request at startup. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

In S2098, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not the setting change content is the screen reverse setting. When the content of the setting change is the screen inversion setting (S2098: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2099. If the setting change content is not the screen inversion setting (S2098: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

Next, the sub CPU3201 performs screen inversion setting processing (S2099). In this process, the sub CPU 3201 sets the screen inversion setting in the projector setting value storage area of the sub RAM substrate 41 to the preset screen inversion setting (or to the screen inversion setting selected according to a predetermined condition). A command for rewriting and setting the screen inversion is transmitted to the projector control board 3310. The screen inversion setting transmitted to the projector control board 3310 may be provided as data to the sub control board 3200 in advance, or may be provided to the sub control board 3200 by an input operation on the gaming machine 3001.

The projector control board 3310 can store the screen inversion setting thus received in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310, for example. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector setting change process.

Such a projector setting change process is basically executed when a maintenance worker in a game hall or an inspection worker performs various optical adjustments on the projector device 3300 before factory shipment. In order to store the above-mentioned shutdown temperature and shutdown control executability information in the DRAM, the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control executability information can be executed at startup or at any other timing.

In the above description, the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control executability information are stored in the DRAM of the projector control board 3310 by the projector setting change process, but these information are initialized by the projector initialization process.

FIG. 186 shows a projector initialization process by the control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310 in the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment. The process shown in FIG. 186 is a modification of part of the process shown in FIG. 136 described above in order to realize the above function by the projector device 3300.

The process of S2121 corresponds to S721 of FIG. 109, and the process of S2122 corresponds to S722 of FIG.

In S2123, the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control executability information are initialized. In this process, the contents of the DRAM of the projector control board 3310 are initialized to a predetermined shutdown temperature and predetermined shutdown control executability information. The initial value set in this way is, for example, (shutdown temperature, shutdown control executability information)=(50° C., OK) or (shutdown temperature, shutdown control executability information)=(−, NO) Is.

The processing of S2124 to S2127 corresponds to S723 to S726 of FIG. 109, and the processing of S2128 corresponds to S727' of FIG. 136.

In the present embodiment, the external control means such as the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 is set so that the shutdown temperature and the shutdown control executability information are stored in the DRAM of the projector control board 3310. The various settings can be made by various other external control means.

For example, the main control board MS of the gaming machine 3001 and other controllers/control means included in the gaming machine 3001 can function as the external control means. In addition, external control means such as the adjustment PC 1000 connected to the projector device 3300 and the sub relay board SN, and setting control means that can be attached to the projector device 3300 can also function as the external control means.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310 stores the DMD temperature (MAX) indicating the maximum DMD temperature after the power of the gaming machine 3001 is turned on. On the other hand, the DMD 3333 has a shorter life when it is in a high temperature environment. Therefore, regarding the quality of the DMD 3333 such as whether or not it can be recycled, the DMD temperature (MAX) and the operating time of the gaming machine 3001 (or energization). It can be judged from (time). The DMD temperature (MAX) stored in the EEPROM 3312 can be reset at the factory or the like as needed. The environment in which the temperature is high may include not only a temperature equal to or higher than the shutdown temperature at which forced shutdown occurs but also a case where the temperature does not reach forced shutdown but is rather high.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to determine whether or not the projector device 3300 can be recycled based on the operating time (or energizing time) of the gaming machine 3001 and the DMD temperature (MAX). Here, the operating time can be grasped by the gaming machine 3001 storing the energizing time of the gaming machine or the measurement of the operating time by the RTC, and the projector device 3300 can determine the operating time of the projector device 3300. By storing these values and grasping these values as the operating time (or the energizing time), it can be used as an index (reference) for determining whether or not the projector device 3300 can be recycled.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to notify the replacement time of the projector device 3300 due to long-term use may be determined based on the above-described determination criterion of recyclability. In addition, it is generally considered that the operating time and the energizing time are different times. However, since the DMD 3333 of the projector device 3300 is considered to be always operating when energizing, the operating time of the gaming machine 3001 or the projector device 3300. It is also possible to consider it as the energization time of the gaming machine 3001 and the projector device 3300.

Note that the operating time of the gaming machine 3001 or the projector device 3300 thus grasped can be configured not to be reset from the gaming machine 3001 or the projector device 3300.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the screen inversion setting is stored in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310. The screen inversion setting is, for example, “0: forward rotation”, “1: upside down”. , “2: horizontal inversion”, “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion”.

FIG. 189 shows what kind of image is projected from the projector device 3300 on the screen in accordance with the screen inversion setting described above. FIG. 189(a) shows an original image 3430 represented by original image data, and FIGS. 189(b) to 189(e) respectively show the projector device 3300 of the present embodiment and the projector 3300. An image projected on a screen virtually provided in front of the device 3300 is shown. In the gaming machine 3001 of the present embodiment, the image from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105 and projected on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like, but here, the image from the projector device 3300 remains as it is. It shall be projected on a virtual screen.

Further, in the gaming machine 3001 of the present embodiment, the projector device 3300 is arranged such that the original upper surface is on the lower side (see FIG. 170(c)), but FIGS. 189(b) to 189(e). In the above, it is assumed that the projector apparatus 3300 is arranged in the original posture, which is the upside-down direction of this arrangement direction. In addition, in FIGS. 189(b) to 189(e), when the original image 3430 composed of the characters “ABC” shown in FIG. 189(a) is projected on the virtual screen, the screen is displayed. The image is shown transparently viewed from the opposite side of the projection plane.

Here, in FIG. 189(b), the screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is “0: normal rotation”, and the original image 3430 shown in FIG. 189(a) is directly projected on the screen projection surface. When viewed from the opposite side of the screen projection surface, it is visually recognized as a left-right inverted image (left-right inverted because it is viewed from the opposite side of the projection surface) as shown in the image 3430a.

In FIG. 189(c), the screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is “1: vertical inversion”, and the original image 3430 shown in FIG. 189(a) is vertically inverted and projected on the screen projection surface. When viewed from the opposite side of the screen projection surface, as shown in the image 3430b, it is visually recognized as an image that is horizontally inverted (left-right inverted because it is viewed from the opposite side of the projection surface) and vertically inverted.

In FIG. 189(d), the screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is “2: horizontal inversion”, and the original image data shown in FIG. 189(a) is horizontally inverted and projected on the screen projection surface. When viewed from the opposite side of the screen projection surface, as shown in the image 3430c, the image is visually recognized as the same image as the original image 3430 (the left-right inverted image is further inverted because the image is viewed from the opposite side of the projection surface). It

In FIG. 189(e), the screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion”, and the original image 3430 shown in FIG. 189(a) is vertically inverted on the screen projection surface. When projected from the opposite side of the screen projection surface, the image is reversed vertically as shown in the image 3430d (the left and right reversed image is further reversed left and right as viewed from the opposite side of the projection surface). Is visually recognized as an image.

In the gaming machine 3001 of the present embodiment, the projector device 3300 is arranged, for example, in the postures shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, so that the image projected on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like is in the correct rotation direction for the player. As can be visually recognized by, the initial value of the screen inversion setting is set to “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion”. In this case, the screen inversion setting can be said to be so-called “Ceiling+Mirror” setting from the relationship among the posture of the projector device 3300, the rotation direction of the original image 3430, the mirror mechanism 3105, and the front screen mechanism 3091.

The projector control board 3310 of the projector device 3300 controls the rotation direction when projecting an image based on the screen inversion setting described above. Further, such inversion of video can be realized by, for example, control of the DMD 3333 by the DLP control circuit 3313, control of a video signal by the control LSI 3311 or the DLP control circuit 3313, and the like. Further, the projector device 3300 may be a projector that can be selected to rotate an image in at least one of a vertical direction and a horizontal direction.

(Anti-smoke design)
Next, the anti-smoke design regarding the optical case 3418 of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 190 is an exploded perspective view showing a part of the projector device 3300 of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 190, the optical case 3418 includes an optical case body 3418a and an optical case top 3418b that closes the upper opening of the optical case body 3418a.

As described above, the optical case body 3418a has openings (3418c, 3418d, 3418e) through which the irradiation light from the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B passes, the irradiation light to the DMD 3333, and the reflected light from the DMD 3333. An opening (not shown) for passing therethrough is provided, and an opening 3418f for providing the reflected light from the DMD 3333 to the lens unit 3332 is further provided. In FIG. 190, the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, 3331B and the mirrors are not shown.

As can be seen from FIG. 179 in which the display of the optical case 3418 is omitted and the description thereof, the LED light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B are arranged on the LED boards 3331Ra, 3331Ga, and 3331Ba, respectively, and the LED boards 3331Ra, 3331Ga, and 3331Ba are arranged. Heat plates 3331Rb, 3331Gb, and 3331Bb are attached to the respective units.

As shown in FIG. 179, covers (3331Rc, 3331Gc, 3331Bc) are arranged between the LED substrate (3331Ra, 3331Ga, 3331Ba) and the corresponding openings of the optical case body 3418a, respectively. Invasion of dust (that is, smoke (for example, smoke such as cigarettes) and dust) into the openings (3418c, 3418d, 3418e) of the 3418a is effectively prevented.

In order to prevent dust (smoke, dust, etc.) from entering between the DMD 3333 and the DMD heat sink 3417, between the DMD heat sink 3417 and the optical case body 3418a, and between the lens unit 3332 and the optical case body 3418a. If necessary, a member such as a sheet-shaped sponge for enhancing the airtightness is arranged. Such a member also has an effect of preventing contact between parts on both sides of the member and absorbing vibration.

Further, such a member is, for example, an elastic member made of resin, but is not limited to this. In FIG. 190, a sponge 3333a arranged between the DMD 3333 and the DMD heat sink 3417 is shown.

FIG. 190 also shows the optical case top 3418b removed from the optical case body 3418a. At the end of the upper opening of the optical case body 3418a, a recess 3418g is formed around the entire circumference of the opening, and when the optical case top 3418b is attached to the upper part of the optical case body 3418a, the optical case body The concave portion 3418g of the 3418a engages with a convex portion 3418h (see FIG. 191) corresponding to the shape of the concave portion 3418g formed on the lower surface of the optical case top 3418b, thereby increasing the airtightness of the inside of the optical case 3418 and preventing dust. Intrusion of (smoke, dust, etc.) is effectively blocked.

FIG. 191 shows a cross section of the optical case 3418 taken along the cutting plane XY shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 191(a), when the optical case top 3418b is attached to the upper part of the optical case body 3418a, the convex portion 3418h formed on the lower surface of the optical case top 3418b is inserted into the concave portion 3418g of the optical case body 3418a. It will be engaged (fitted) over the entire circumference of the concave portion 3418g.

FIG. 191(b) shows a state in which the convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b is engaged with the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a.

FIG. 192 is an enlarged view of a portion of the circle XZ shown in FIG. 191(b). FIG. 192 shows a state in which the convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b is engaged with the concave portion 3418g of the optical case body 3418a.

Further, in FIG. 192, there is a space between the convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b and the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a, and the member 3418i formed in a shape along the concave portion 3418g is arranged therein. The convex portion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b and the concave portion 3418g of the optical case main body 3418a hold the 3418i and press it in some cases.

By disposing such a member 3418i between the convex portion 3418h and the concave portion 3418g, it is possible to further improve the airtightness of the optical case 3418 and effectively prevent the intrusion of dust (smoke, dust, etc.). .. As described above, in order to dissipate the heat generated by the projector device 3300, the air flow (the air flow path P4) passing through the projector device 3300 is formed. You will always be exposed. Therefore, increasing the airtightness of the optical case 3418 and preventing the intrusion of dust (smoke, dust, etc.) has an important meaning in safely projecting a high-quality image having a high image visual effect.

Further, such a member 3418i also has an effect of preventing contact between the convex portion 3418h and the concave portion 3418g and absorbing vibration. The member 3418i is, for example, an elastic member made of resin, but is not limited to this.

Further, in FIG. 192, a protrusion 3418j is formed at the tip of the protrusion 3418h of the optical case top 3418b. With such a protrusion 3418j, the member 3418i is more firmly held by the protrusion 3418h and the recess 3418g, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 3418j shifts with the passage of time. Further, the presence of the protrusion 3418j can further enhance the degree of sealing of the optical case 3418.

Such a protrusion 3418j may be provided on the side of the recess 3418g of the optical case body 3418a. Further, in addition to the protrusion 3418j provided on the protrusion 3418h, two protrusions having apexes at opposite positions deviated from the apexes of the protrusion 3418j are provided on the recess 3418g, and the member 3418i alternates at these three apexes. It may be configured to be pressed by and held in a wavy shape.

(Dust stop cover)
Next, the structure of the dustproof cover of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 shows projector device 3300 with part of case 3402 removed. Here, for convenience of description, the projector device 3300 is shown upside down with respect to the projector device 3300 shown in FIG. 170(c), that is, the projector device 3300 is shown upside down.

The case 3402 of the projector device 3300 is composed of an upper case 3402a and a lower case 3402b, but in FIG. 193, the lower case 3402b is shown in a state of being removed to the upper side. Further, the lens cover 3413 and the filter 3414 are shown in a state of being removed from the lens unit 3332.

The lens cover 3413 is matched with the shape of the filter 3414 in the lower portion (in the drawing, it is shown to be arranged above the lens cover 3413, but here, it is represented as “lower portion” in accordance with the top and bottom of the gaming machine 3001). A filter holding portion 3413a is provided, and the filter 3414 is held by being fitted into the filter holding portion 3413a. The lens cover 3413 holding the filter 3414 on the filter holding portion 3413a is moved along the arrow shown in FIG. 193 and attached to the front end of the lens unit 3332. With such a configuration, the lens cover 3413 covers the front surface of the lens unit 3332, and thus the projection lens 3332b of the lens unit 3332 is protected from dust (smoke, dust, etc.).

After the lens cover 3413 is attached to the lens unit 3332, the lower case 3402b is attached to the upper case 3402a.

FIG. 194 shows the projector device 3300 with the lower case 3402b attached to the upper case 3402a in this manner. It can be seen from the opening 3420 of the lower case 3402b shown in FIG. 193 that part of the lens cover 3413 and the filter 3414 held by the filter holding portion 3413a are arranged so as to be exposed from the projector device 3300.

In addition, the upper portion of the lens cover 3413 (in the figure, it is shown to be arranged below the lens cover 3413, but here, it is expressed as “upper” in accordance with the top and bottom of the gaming machine 3001) is the lower case 3402b. Stored in the projecting portion 3421.

With such a configuration, a part of the lens cover 3413 is stored inside the projector device 3300, and the influence from the outside of the projector device 3300 is minimized. The filter 3414 is held by the filter holding portion 3413a, and thus is in a state of slightly protruding to the outside of the projector device 3300 (see FIG. 175). As a result, it is possible to reduce the influence of the filter 3414 on the flow of air inside the projector device 3300 (the air flow path P4).

Further, when the impact is applied from the front side of the lens cover 3413 (the front side of the projector device 3300), the protrusion 3421 of the lower case 3402b that stores the upper portion of the lens cover 3413 abuts a member that is immediately close thereto and the impact. Can be absorbed and the lens unit 3332 and the like can be protected.

(LED temperature error 1)
Next, the temperature error determination regarding the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described.

The projector device 3300 detects the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) by the temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c) arranged on the LED substrate (3331Ra, 3331Ga, 3331Ba), and detects the previous temperature. When the difference from the current temperature is equal to or more than a predetermined temperature difference, it is controlled to perform warning or forced shutdown.

Such an error determination is performed by the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 195 and 196. The projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 is a modification of the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182. The projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 differs from the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 only in the LED temperature diagnosis processing (S2024′). A description will be given with reference to FIG. 197, and a description of other processes will be omitted.

FIG. 197 shows the LED temperature diagnosis processing (S2024') shown in FIG. 195. In addition, in this process, the same process is performed individually for each of the LEDs, but here, description will be made regarding one LED (LED light source 3331R, LED substrate 3331Ra).

The control LSI 3311 acquires the current temperature (LED temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341a in S2141. Since the temperature sensor 3341a is arranged on the LED board 3331Ra, the temperature near the LED light source 3331R is detected.

Next, the control LSI 3311 obtains the previous LED temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341a from the DRAM in S2142. The previous LED temperature is, for example, the temperature acquired as the “current LED temperature” at the timing of the previous LED temperature diagnosis processing. However, the temperature acquired as the “current LED temperature” in the LED temperature diagnosis processing executed at a timing that is traced back by a predetermined time or a timing before the predetermined number of times of detection may be acquired as the “previous LED temperature”.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2143 whether or not the condition of the following Expression 1 is satisfied.
Current LED temperature-Previous LED temperature> Current LED temperature *x/100 (Equation 1)

When the condition of Expression 1 is not satisfied (S2143: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2147. When the condition of Expression 1 is satisfied (S2143: Yes), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the processing of next S2144.

Next, in step S2144, the control LSI 3311 determines that the current LED temperature is an abnormality that requires a warning. That is, the fact that the current LED temperature satisfies the condition of Expression 1 means that the current LED temperature has increased from the previous LED temperature by the reference temperature (x% of the current LED temperature) or more. .. As a result, when the LED temperature rises sharply, the event is warned as abnormal. Here, in order to determine a rapid increase, a temperature of a predetermined ratio (x%) of the current LED temperature is set as a reference temperature.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2145 whether or not the condition of the following Expression 2 is satisfied.
Current LED temperature-Previous LED temperature> Current LED temperature *(x+α)/100... (Equation 2)

When the condition of Expression 2 is not satisfied (S2145: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2147. When the condition of Expression 2 is satisfied (S2145: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the processing of the next S2146.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2146 that the current LED temperature is an abnormality that requires forced shutdown. That is, the fact that the current LED temperature satisfies the condition of Expression 2 means that the current LED temperature has increased from the previous LED temperature by the reference temperature (x+α% of the current LED temperature) or more. The reference temperature here is set based on a rate higher by α% than the rate (x%) determined in the processing of S2143, and indicates that the abnormality is more serious. Accordingly, when the LED temperature rapidly rises, it is possible to forcibly shut down the event as an abnormal event. In this case, instead of the forced shutdown, control may be performed so as to give a warning (warning) as in the process of S2144 (in this case, the warning message can indicate that the abnormality is more serious). ..

Further, in order to determine such an abnormality that requires forced shutdown, the current LED temperature reaches a predetermined temperature instead of using a reference temperature based on a predetermined ratio (for example, x+α%) of the current LED temperature. If it does, it can be judged as abnormal.

Next, in step S2147, the control LSI 3311 stores the acquired current LED temperature in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311 as the previous temperature or in association with the acquisition time.

Although the error determination is performed using the value of x or α indicating the ratio here, such a value of x or α can be set from the sub-control board 3200 side (for example, by a projector setting change process), or It can be stored in advance in the EEPROM 3312 or the like of the control LSI 3311.

If there is an LED temperature abnormality that requires forced shutdown or warning in the LED temperature diagnosis processing, the control LSI 3311 performs processing of S2026 of the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIG. Set (shutdown) or LED abnormal temperature (warning).

When the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 writes the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) in the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2009 illustrated in FIG. When the sub CPU 3201 responds to the error notification command transmission (S2010: Yes), the rotation stop command is transmitted to the FAN4 and FAN5, and the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED light source are detected. A drive stop command is sent to the LED driver 3314 that drives the 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B (S2012). As a result, the main operation of projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down.

On the other hand, when the LED temperature abnormality (warning) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 indicates an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission process (S2008) shown in FIG. A command is created as transmission data, and a command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200. As a result, an error display request is issued to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 on the sub control substrate 3200, and information indicating that an LED temperature abnormality has occurred is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

In this example, the control LSI 3311 controls the temperature error determination regarding the LED, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 may control the temperature error determination. In this case, for example, the sub CPU 3201 obtains the current LED temperature from the projector device 3300 and compares the current LED temperature with the previous LED temperature stored on the gaming machine 3001 side so as to perform the above determination. be able to.

By such temperature error determination regarding the LED, it is not necessary to change the temperature setting regarding the LED according to the environment where the gaming machine is installed, and it is possible to always perform the abnormality determination based on the current temperature.

(LED temperature error 2)
Next, another temperature error determination regarding the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described.

The projector device 3300 detects the temperature in the vicinity of the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) by the temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c) arranged on the LED substrate (3331Ra, 3331Ga, 3331Ba), and detects the previous temperature. When the difference from the current temperature is equal to or more than a predetermined temperature difference, it is controlled to perform warning or forced shutdown.

Such error determination is performed by the projector self-diagnosis processing similar to FIGS. 195 and 196. The present projector self-diagnosis processing is different from the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 195 and 196 in that the LED temperature diagnosis processing (S2024″) is performed instead of the LED temperature diagnosis processing (S2024′). Therefore, this processing will be described here with reference to FIG. 198, and description of other processing will be omitted.

FIG. 198 shows the above-mentioned LED temperature diagnosis processing (S2024″). In addition, in this process, the same process is performed individually for each of the LEDs, but here, description will be made regarding one LED (LED light source 3331R, LED substrate 3331Ra).

In step S2161, the control LSI 3311 acquires the current temperature (LED temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341a. Since the temperature sensor 3341a is arranged on the LED board 3331Ra, the temperature near the LED light source 3331R is detected.

Next, the control LSI 3311 acquires the previous LED temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341a from the DRAM in S2162. The previous LED temperature is, for example, the temperature acquired as the “current LED temperature” at the timing of the previous LED temperature diagnosis processing. However, the temperature acquired as the “current LED temperature” in the LED temperature diagnosis processing executed at a timing that is traced back by a predetermined time or a timing before the predetermined number of times of detection may be acquired as the “previous LED temperature”.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2163 whether or not the condition of the following Expression 3 is satisfied.
Current LED temperature-previous LED temperature>upper limit temperature-(current LED temperature*current LED temperature/correction value y) (Equation 3)

When the condition of Expression 3 is not satisfied (S2163: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2167. When the condition of Expression 3 is satisfied (S2163: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the next process of S2164.

Next, in step S2164, the control LSI 3311 determines that the current LED temperature is an abnormality that requires a warning. That is, the fact that the current LED temperature satisfies the condition of the expression 3 means that the current LED temperature has increased from the previous LED temperature by the reference temperature or more. As a result, when the LED temperature rises sharply, the event is warned as abnormal.

Here, the reference temperature is a value obtained by subtracting the allowable change amount from the reference change amount, and the reference change amount is a predetermined temperature, for example, 5°C. The allowable change amount is the current LED temperature*current LED temperature/correction value y. The correction value y is, for example, a value such as 2000, 1000, 500, and the allowable change amount thus obtained becomes larger as the current LED temperature becomes higher, and as a result, the reference temperature becomes the current LED. The higher the temperature, the smaller the value.

Therefore, in this temperature error determination, as the current LED temperature becomes higher, a warning is given in response to a smaller temperature change. A minimum value (for example, 1° C.) is set as the reference temperature, and when the value obtained by subtracting the allowable change amount from the reference change amount is smaller than the minimum value, the minimum value is set as the reference temperature.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2165 whether or not the condition of the following Expression 4 is satisfied.
Current LED temperature>Upper limit of LED temperature (Equation 4)

When the condition of Expression 4 is not satisfied (S2165: No), the control LSI 3311 moves to the process of S2167. When the condition of Expression 4 is satisfied (S2165: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the processing of the next S2166.

Next, the control LSI 3311 determines in S2166 that the current LED temperature is an abnormality that requires forced shutdown. That is, the fact that the current LED temperature satisfies the condition of Expression 4 means that the current LED temperature has reached the predetermined upper limit temperature. Accordingly, when the LED temperature rises and exceeds the predetermined temperature, it is possible to forcibly shut down the event as an abnormal event. In this case, instead of the forced shutdown, the warning (warning) may be controlled similarly to the processing of S2164 (in this case, the warning message may indicate that the upper limit temperature is exceeded). Can be).

Next, in step S2167, the control LSI 3311 stores the acquired current LED temperature in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311 as the previous temperature or in association with the acquisition time.

Although the error determination is performed here using the reference change amount, the value of the correction value y, and the upper limit temperature, these values can be set from the sub-control board 3200 side (for example, by the projector setting change process). It can be stored in advance in the EEPROM 3312 or the like of the control LSI 3311.

If there is an LED temperature abnormality that requires forced shutdown or warning in the LED temperature diagnosis processing, the control LSI 3311 performs processing of S2026 of the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIG. Set (shutdown) or LED abnormal temperature (warning).

When the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 writes the LED temperature abnormality (shutdown) in the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2009 illustrated in FIG. When the sub CPU 3201 responds to the error notification command transmission (S2010: Yes), the rotation stop command is transmitted to the FAN4 and FAN5, and the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED light source are detected. A drive stop command is sent to the LED driver 3314 that drives the 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B (S2012). As a result, the main operation of projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down.

On the other hand, when the LED temperature abnormality (warning) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 indicates an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission process (S2008) shown in FIG. The command is created as transmission data, and the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 without setting the reset request flag to “ON”. As a result, an error display request is issued to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 on the sub control substrate 3200, and information indicating that an LED temperature abnormality has occurred is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

By such a temperature error determination regarding the LED, the upper limit of the allowable amount of change in temperature (difference between the current LED temperature and the previous LED temperature) is set smaller as the current LED temperature rises (that is, The higher the current LED temperature becomes, the more sensitive it becomes to a small temperature change), and abnormalities of parts such as an LED light source that increase with the temperature rise can be accurately detected.

If the upper limit temperature-(current LED temperature*current LED temperature/correction value y)<lower limit error temperature (temperature difference), then the current LED temperature-previous LED temperature>lower limit error temperature If the judgment is made and the judgment is YES, it is possible to judge that the LED temperature warning is an abnormal condition. On the other hand, the current temperature>lower limit error temperature (LED temperature) is determined, and when the determination is YES, it may be determined that the LED temperature warning is an abnormality.

Next, referring to FIG. 199, the relationship between the current LED temperature and the reference temperature (that is, the reference change amount-the allowable change amount) in the above temperature error determination will be described using an example.

FIG. 199(a) is a table showing the relationship between the current LED temperature and the reference temperature, and shows the patterns for the three correction values y. Here, the reference change amount is 5 (° C.), and the minimum value is 1 (° C.).

FIG. 199(b) is a graph showing the table shown in FIG. 199(a). As can be seen from this graph, the reference temperature becomes a smaller value as the current LED temperature rises, and by changing the correction value y, the transition of the reference temperature can be controlled in a desired pattern. When the correction value y is reduced, a more severe reference temperature is set for the current increase in LED temperature.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 199(b), if the current LED temperature is 20° C., and if the temperature rises by 4° C. in the next temperature detection, it is 24° C., and there is no major damage to the LED light source, etc. Although not determined, if the current temperature is 50° C., and if the temperature rises by 4° C. in the next temperature detection, it becomes 54° C. (regardless of the correction value y in FIG. 199(b)) LED light source, etc. Since there is a concern that the damage will be serious to the user, an abnormality will be notified by a warning or the like.

(Exhaust fan rotation speed error)
Next, the rotation speed error determination regarding the exhaust fans (3342a (FAN4), 3342b (FAN5)) of the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment will be described.

The projector device 3300 detects the rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) by the two pulse sensors (3343a, 3343b), and warns or forces the fan rotation speed at different timings. Control to shut down.

Such error determination is performed by the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 200 and 201. The projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 200 and 201 is a modification of the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182. The projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 200 and 201 differs from the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 only in the FAN rotation diagnosis processing (S2028′). This will be described with reference to FIG. 202, and description of other processes will be omitted.

FIG. 202 shows the FAN rotation diagnosis processing (S2028') shown in FIG. In this process, the same process is performed individually for each exhaust fan, but here, one exhaust fan (3342a (FAN4)) will be described.

In step S2181, the control LSI 3311 acquires the rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) detected by the pulse sensor 3343a at the time of startup from the DRAM of the control LSI 3311.

Next, in step S2182, the control LSI 3311 acquires the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) detected by the pulse sensor 3343a as the current FAN rotation speed.

Next, in step S2183, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the condition of the following Expression 5 is satisfied.
FAN rotation speed at startup *z1> Current FAN rotation speed (Equation 5)

When the condition of Expression 5 is not satisfied (S2183: No), the control LSI 3311 ends the FAN rotation speed diagnosis process. When the condition of Expression 5 is satisfied (S2183: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the next process of S2184.

Next, in step S2184, the control LSI 3311 determines that the current FAN rotation speed is an abnormality that requires a warning. That is, the fact that the current FAN rotation speed satisfies the condition of Equation 5 means that the current FAN rotation speed is lower than the reference rotation speed based on the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup. As a result, when the FAN rotation speed drops to a predetermined level, the event is warned (warning) as abnormal.

Here, the reference rotation speed is a value obtained by multiplying the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup by a predetermined scale factor z1. z1 is a numerical value such as 80% (0.8).

Next, in step S2185, the control LSI 3311 determines whether or not the condition of Expression 6 below is satisfied.
FAN rotation speed at startup *z2> current FAN rotation speed (Equation 6)

When the condition of Expression 6 is not satisfied (S2185: No), the control LSI 3311 ends the FAN rotation speed diagnosis process. When the condition of Expression 6 is satisfied (S2185: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the next process of S2186.

Next, in step S2186, the control LSI 3311 determines that the current FAN rotation speed is an abnormality that requires forced shutdown. That is, the fact that the current FAN rotation speed satisfies the condition of Expression 6 means that the current FAN rotation speed is lower than the reference rotation speed based on the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup. Accordingly, when the FAN rotation speed drops to a predetermined level, the event can be forcedly shut down as an abnormal event. In this case, instead of the forced shutdown, a control may be performed to give a warning (warning) as in the process of S2184.

Here, the reference rotation speed is a value obtained by multiplying the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup by a predetermined scale factor z2. z2 is a numerical value such as 70% (0.7) smaller than z1.

Although the error determination is performed here using the predetermined magnification z1 and the predetermined magnification z2, these values can be set from the sub-control board 3200 side (for example, by the projector setting change processing) or the EEPROM 3312 of the control LSI 3311. Etc. can be stored in advance.

When there is a fan rotation abnormality that requires a forced shutdown or a warning in the fan rotation speed diagnosis processing, the control LSI 3311 causes the error self-diagnosis area of the DRAM to display “FAN rotation” in the processing of S2030 of the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIG. 195. Set "abnormal (shutdown)" or "FAN rotation abnormal (warning)".

When the FAN rotation degree abnormality (shutdown) is set in the error management area of the DRAM as error data, the control LSI 3311 writes the FAN rotation abnormality (shutdown) to the error management area of the DRAM in the process of S2009 shown in FIG. When the sub CPU 3201 responds to the error notification command transmission (S2010: Yes), the rotation stop command is transmitted to the FAN4 and FAN5, and the DLP control circuit 3313 and the LED are detected. A drive stop command is sent to the LED driver 3314 that drives the light sources 3331R, 3331G, and 3331B (S2012). As a result, the main operation of projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down.

On the other hand, when the FAN rotation abnormality (warning) is set as error data in the error management area of the DRAM, the control LSI 3311 indicates an error notification in the sub-control-projector transmission time process (S2008) shown in FIG. The command is created as transmission data, and the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 without setting the reset request flag to “ON”. As a result, an error display request is issued to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 on the sub control board 3200, and information indicating that the FAN rotation abnormality has occurred is output to the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

Storage of the FAN rotation number at startup is executed in, for example, the projector initialization process. This process will be described with reference to FIG. The projector initialization process shown in FIG. 203 is a modification of the projector initialization process shown in FIG. 186. The projector initialization process of FIG. 203 is different from the projector initialization process of FIG. 186 in that the acquisition process of the FAN rotation number at startup (S2201) is added, and therefore this process will be described here. The description of other processes is omitted.

In the projector initialization processing of FIG. 203, in S2201, the acquisition processing of the FAN rotation number at the time of startup is performed. In this process, the same process is performed individually for each exhaust fan, but here, one exhaust fan (3342a (FAN4)) will be described.

In the acquisition process of the FAN rotation number at the time of startup, the control LSI 3311 causes the pulse sensor 3343a to operate within a predetermined period after the projector device 3300 is started (for example, timing when the control LSI 3311 or FAN4 is powered on). The rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the exhaust fan 3342a (FAN4) detected by is acquired and stored in the DRAM of the control LSI 3311.

Here, the rotation speed of the exhaust fan 3342a detected by the pulse sensor 3343a within a predetermined period after the start is taken into consideration, for example, in consideration of the rising of the FAN 4 when the rotation is started. It is possible to set the highest rotation speed among the rotation speeds within a predetermined period. Further, other than this, it is possible to grasp the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup based on various standards. For example, the average value of the number of rotations within a predetermined period after starting, the number of rotations detected at a predetermined timing after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting, and the like at the time of starting FAN rotation number You can also do it.

Further, for example, the FAN rotation speed is detected in each of the continuous minute sections immediately after the FAN 4 is activated, and the difference between the FAN rotation speed in one section and the FAN rotation speed in the next section becomes a predetermined value or less (that is, , The detected FAN rotation speed can be used as the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup.

Incidentally, rpm is generally used as a unit of the rotational speed, and the comparison is performed by using the rotational speed of 1 minute (or the rotational speed converted into the rotational speed of 1 minute) as a unit, but the same as the current FAN rotational speed. As long as the comparison is performed by the number of revolutions in the time range, any number of revolutions in the time range may be used.

Even if the fan rotation speed decreases due to aging deterioration or variation due to such FAN rotation speed error determination, a warning or forced shutdown is performed according to the change from the fan rotation speed stored at the time of startup. Therefore, careless replacement of the fan is avoided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 204(a), when the warning is configured to be performed based on the FAN rotation speed on the specifications, if the FAN rotation speed on the specifications is 5000 rpm and the predetermined magnification is 80%, the warning threshold value is set. Is 4000 rpm. Here, assuming the state of the fan before deterioration over time, the FAN rotational speed at startup is 5000 rpm as specified, and a warning is given when the current FAN rotational speed has dropped to 4000 rpm. That is, at this point, the grace rotation speed up to the warning is 1000 rpm.

Next, assuming the state of the fan after deterioration over time, it is assumed that the FAN rotation speed at startup is 4500 rpm. At this time, since the warning threshold value is the same as that before the deterioration over time, the grace rotation speed up to the warning is 500 rpm. In such a situation, if the current FAN rotation speed decreases by 500 rpm due to factors such as dust and foreign matter, a warning will be issued and the fan will be replaced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204(b), when the warning is configured based on the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup, if the predetermined magnification is 80%, the warning threshold is the FAN rotation speed at startup. *0.8. Here, assuming the state of the fan before deterioration over time, the FAN rotation speed at startup is 5000 rpm as specified, and the warning threshold value is set to 4000 rpm based on the FAN rotation speed at startup (5000 rpm). .. Therefore, a warning is issued when the current FAN rotation speed drops to 4000 rpm. That is, at this point, the grace rotation speed up to the warning is 1000 rpm.

Next, assuming the state of the fan after deterioration over time, it is assumed that the FAN rotation speed at startup is 4500 rpm. At this time, the warning threshold value is set to 3600 rpm based on the FAN rotation speed (4500 rpm) at the time of startup. In such a situation, if the current FAN rotation speed decreases by 500 rpm due to factors such as dust and foreign matter, unlike the case shown in FIG. 204(a) described above, no warning is issued in that state. Since the warning threshold has a grace rotation speed of 900 rpm, the warning is issued only when the current FAN rotation speed is 900 rpm lower than the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup.

In this way, by setting the warning threshold value based on the FAN rotation number at the time of startup, the warning (forced shutdown) threshold value is set according to the aged deterioration or the variation of the fan, thereby reducing unnecessary fan replacement. You can On the other hand, the above method of setting the warning threshold value based on the fan rotation speed at the time of startup can also be expressed as changing the grace rotation speed until the warning according to the reduction in the fan rotation speed. is there.

(Screen inversion function 2)
As described above, the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment, in accordance with the setting change process from the sub-control board 3200, adjusts the image to the gaming machine in which the projector device 3300 is mounted, It has a screen inversion function of rotating and projecting (image rotation includes, for example, forward rotation, vertical inversion, horizontal inversion, vertical inversion+horizontal inversion, etc.). Here, another screen inversion function according to the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 205 shows a side view of a gaming machine 3001' which is a modified example of the gaming machine 3001, in which the side wall of the cabinet 3003 has been removed. Further, in FIG. 205, for convenience of description, a projector device 3300 for projecting an image, a mirror mechanism 3105 for reflecting the image projected from the projector device, a front screen mechanism 3091 on which the image from the projector device 3300 is projected, and the like. , Respectively, are shown transparently.

As shown in FIG. 205, the gaming machine 3001′ is a modification basically having the same configuration and function as the gaming machine 3001, and is at the uppermost position (position A) of the gaming machine 3001′ and is irradiated. The projector device 3300 is stored in the unit 3100, and the image emitted from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105 arranged on the lower front side and projected on the front screen mechanism 3091.

However, as a difference from the gaming machine 3001, in the gaming machine 3001′, the projector device 3300 can be installed at the lowermost position (position B) of the screen device 3090, and when an image is emitted from the projector device 3300. The image is projected on the screen mechanism 3091′ arranged on the upper front side of the projector device 3300.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 3001′, the projector device 3300 can be installed at a position (position C) in the lower space of the cabinet 3003, and when an image is emitted from this projector device 3300, the image is projected by the projector device 3300. Is projected on the screen mechanism 3091″ arranged on the lower front side of the screen.

As described above, in the gaming machine 3001′ shown in FIG. 205, the projector device 3300 can be arranged at various positions (positions A to C) of the gaming machine 3001′, and various images related to the effect of the game are displayed. It can be displayed in a manner. The projector device 3300 projects an image on the corresponding screen mechanism based on the rotation direction (that is, the rotation direction of the image) designated according to such various installation positions.

Note that the installation position of the projector device 3300 shown in the game machine 3001' is merely an example, and the projector device 3300 can be installed at various other positions.

When the projector device 3300 is installed in the position A, as described above, the projector device 3300 is housed in the irradiation unit 3100 so that the original upper surface is on the lower side (see FIG. 170), and the filter of the lens cover 3413 is used. The holder 3413a is arranged below the projector device 3300, and the irradiation light (image) passes through the filter 3414 held by the filter holder 3413a (downward) (see FIG. 193). The irradiation light thus irradiated is reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105, and the irradiation light (image) reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105 is projected onto, for example, the front screen mechanism 3091, and the game projected onto this front screen mechanism 3091. The player views an image or the like related to the effect from the front of the gaming machine 3001′.

At this time, in the projector device 3300, the screen inversion setting is set to “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion” as described above. That is, as described above, the projector device 3300 arranged at the position A in the gaming machine 3001′ is stored in an upside-down posture from the original posture of the projector device 3300, and thus the image to be emitted is inverted upside down. There is a need. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 3105 and projected on the front side of the front screen mechanism 3091, and the projected image is visually recognized by the player from the front direction of the gaming machine 3001′ (the front side of the screen mechanism 3091). Therefore, it is necessary to reverse the image to be irradiated. The screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189(e).

When the projector device 3300 is installed in the position B, the projector device 3300 is stored in the irradiation unit 3100 so that the original upper surface of the projector device 3300 is the upper side as it is, and the filter holding portion 3413a of the lens cover 3413 is on the upper side of the projector device 3300. Irradiation light (image) is emitted (in the upward direction) after passing through the filter 3414 held by the filter holding portion 3413a. The irradiation light thus radiated is projected on, for example, a screen mechanism 3091′, and a player views an image or the like relating to the effect of the game projected on the screen mechanism 3091′ from the front direction of the gaming machine 3001′. Become.

At this time, in the projector device 3300, the screen inversion setting is set to “2: horizontal inversion” as described above. That is, since the projector device 3300 arranged at the position B in the gaming machine 3001' is stored in the original posture of the projector device 3300 as described above, it is not necessary to vertically flip the projected image. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 3300 is projected to the rear side of the screen mechanism 3091′, and the projected image is visually recognized by the player from the front direction of the gaming machine 3001′ (the front side of the screen mechanism 3091′). It is necessary to invert the image to be reproduced horizontally. The screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189(d).

In addition, the screen mechanism 3091′ displays an image related to the effect of the game as a liquid crystal display screen, and as a rear projector screen, receives the irradiation light of the projector device 3300 located at the position B on the back side, and the screen mechanism 3091′ of the gaming machine 3001′. A liquid crystal film capable of providing images and the like on the front surface is provided. Further, this liquid crystal film can be configured as a transmissive panel, and in accordance with a predetermined signal, the front screen mechanism 3091 behind it, the fixed screen mechanism 3120 exposed when the front screen mechanism 3091 moves, and the reel screen. The image projected on the mechanism 3130 can be visually recognized by the player.

When the projector device 3300 is installed at the position C, the projector device 3300 is housed in the irradiation unit 3100 so that the original upper surface of the projector device 3300 is on the lower side, and the filter holding portion 3413a of the lens cover 3413 is on the lower side of the projector device 3300. The irradiation light (image) is emitted (downward) through the filter 3414 held by the filter holding portion 3413a. The irradiation light thus radiated is projected on, for example, the screen mechanism 3091″, and the player views the image related to the effect of the game projected on the screen mechanism 3091″ from the front direction of the gaming machine 3001′. It will be.

At this time, in the projector device 3300, the screen inversion setting is set to “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion” as described above. That is, since the projector device 3300 arranged at the position C in the gaming machine 3001′ is stored in a posture that is the reverse of the original posture of the projector device 3300 as described above, the projected image is inverted upside down. There is a need. Further, since the irradiation light from the projector device 3300 is projected to the rear side of the screen mechanism 3091″ and the projected image is visually recognized by the player from the front direction of the gaming machine 3001′ (the front side of the screen mechanism 3091″). , It is necessary to reverse the projected image horizontally. The screen inversion setting of the projector device 3300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189(e).

The screen mechanism 3091″ is a screen arranged instead of the waist panel 3019 configured as a makeup panel as described above, and has the same function as the screen mechanism 3091′ described above.

In this way, for the projector device 3300 installed in the gaming machine 3001 ′, the corresponding screen inversion setting is performed according to the installation position of the projector device 3300. For example, whether the projector device 3300 is arranged in the original posture or in the posture opposite to the original posture, that is, upside down, determines whether or not the screen flip setting is to be turned upside down. Further, when the irradiation light from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism, it is determined to perform the left-right inversion of the screen inversion setting, but the left-right inversion setting is not limited to such a case and the above-described screen inversion may be performed. Even in the case of the so-called rear projection configuration such as the projection onto the mechanism 3091′ (position B) or the projection onto the screen mechanism 3091″ (position C), it is determined that the screen inversion setting is horizontally reversed. It In the case of having both the mirror mechanism and the rear projection structure, it is possible to prevent horizontal reversal as a result of having to perform horizontal reversal twice.

Note that such screen inversion setting is set in the projector device 3300 by the projector setting changing process by the sub control board 3200 described above (see FIGS. 184 and 185).

For example, in step S2098 of the projector setting change processing illustrated in FIG. 185, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 determines whether the setting change content is the screen reverse setting, and when the setting change content is the screen reverse setting (S2098: Yes), the sub CPU3201 performs the screen inversion setting process in S2099. In this processing, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a command for performing screen reverse setting to the projector control board 3310.

When the projector control board 3310 of the projector device 3300 receives the command for performing the screen inversion setting from the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200, the projector control board 3310 stores the screen inversion setting in the EEPROM 3312 or the like, and an image related to the effect is produced from the sub control board 3200. When a command to irradiate the image is issued, the rotation direction of the image is determined by referring to the screen inversion setting stored in the EEPROM 3312 and the like, and then the DLP control circuit 3313 and the like are controlled to cause the optical mechanism 3330 to display the image. Irradiate.

Note that such a screen inversion setting is set by a hall menu or the like that is displayed (by a predetermined special operation) when the gaming machine 3001′ is started, and the like from the sub-control board 3200 by the above-described projector setting change processing. The projector device 3300 gives an instruction. Further, the screen inversion setting may be stored in advance in the sub ROM substrate 42 or the sub RAM substrate 41 of the sub control substrate 3200.

Further, when the projector device 3300 can be installed in such a plurality of positions, the sub control board 3200 or the like has a connection terminal or a connector to be connected to the projector device 3300 for each installation position (of the projector device 3300). In this case, the sub-control board 3200 automatically determines the installation position of the projector device 3300 by determining whether or not these connection terminals and connectors are connected to the projector device 3300, and the sub-control substrate 3200 determines that the installation position is the same. Based on this, it is possible to perform control so as to perform the corresponding screen inversion setting.

The gaming machine 4001 illustrated in FIGS. 206 and 207 is a pachinko machine that realizes the same function as the screen inversion setting by the sub control board 3200 and the projector device 3300 described above. A projector device having the same configuration and function as projector device 3300 is shown as projector device 4300. As described above, in the present embodiment, the screen inversion function 2 described above can be applied to a pachinko machine.

FIG. 206 shows a perspective view of the gaming machine 4001. In this gaming machine 4001, a main body frame 4002 is attached to a holding frame 4011, and a top frame 4007 and a first screen mechanism (first projection area) 4141 are arranged on a front frame 4007 held by the main body frame 4002. Further, below the first screen mechanism 4141, a second screen mechanism (second projection area) 4121 is arranged. The left side decoration member 4023 is arranged on the left side of the first screen mechanism 4141 and the second screen mechanism 4121, and the right side decoration member 4021 is arranged on the right side of the first screen mechanism 4141 and the second screen mechanism 4121.

The player executes the game by operating the firing handle 4079 and firing the game medium (pachinko ball). In addition, the player plays the game while viewing the effects displayed on the first screen mechanism 4141 and the second screen mechanism 4121, the image relating to the game, and the like.

FIG. 207 is a diagram schematically showing a side surface of the gaming machine 4001, and part of the internal structure including the projector device 4300 is transparently shown. The projector device 4300 installed at the position D provides the player with the image and the like related to the effect by directly projecting the image on the back surface of the first screen mechanism 4141. The first screen mechanism 4141, similar to the screen mechanism 3091′ and the screen mechanism 3091″ shown in FIG. 205, displays images relating to the performance of the game as a liquid crystal display screen, and is at the position D as a rear projector screen. A liquid crystal film capable of receiving the irradiation light of the projector device 4300 on the rear surface and providing an image or the like to the front surface of the game machine 4001 is provided.

The gaming machine 4001 shown in FIG. 207 further shows a state in which the projector device 4300 is installed at the position E. The projector device 4300 installed at the position E irradiates the mirror mechanism 4145 with irradiation light, and the irradiation light reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 is projected onto the back surface of the second screen mechanism 4121. As a result, the image related to the effect is displayed to the player. The second screen mechanism 4121 is similar to the screen mechanism 3091' and the screen mechanism 3091'' shown in FIG.

In the gaming machine 4001 illustrated in FIGS. 206 and 207, the projector device 4300 can be arranged at either the position D or the position E. For example, the projector device 4300 is installed at the position D to display an image projected from the projector device 4300 on the first screen mechanism 4141, and the second screen mechanism 4121 serves as a liquid crystal display screen without using the projector device 4300. It can be configured to display an image.

When the projector device 4300 is installed at the position D, the projector device 4300 is stored in the holding frame 4011 so that the original upper surface of the projector device 4300 is on the lower side, and the projector device 4300 has a lens cover 4413 (corresponding to the lens cover 3413 of the projector device 3300). The filter holding unit 4413a (corresponding to the filter holding unit 3413a of the projector device 3300) is below the projector device 4300 and passes through the filter 4414 (corresponding to the filter 3414 of the projector device 3300) held by the filter holding unit 4413a. Then, the irradiation light (image) is emitted (downward). The irradiation light thus irradiated is projected on the first screen mechanism 4141 as described above.

At this time, in the projector device 4300, the screen inversion setting is set to “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion”. That is, as described above, the projector device 4300 arranged at the position D in the gaming machine 4001 is stored in a posture that is the reverse of the original posture of the projector device 4300, and therefore it is necessary to flip the image to be irradiated upside down. There is. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 4300 is projected to the rear side of the first screen mechanism 4141, and the projected image is visually recognized by the player from the front direction of the gaming machine 4001 (the front side of the first screen mechanism 4141). It is necessary to reverse the projected image horizontally. The screen inversion setting of the projector device 4300 is the same as that shown in FIG. 189(e).

When the projector device 4300 is installed at the position E, the projector device 4300 is housed in the holding frame 4011 so that the original upper surface of the projector device 4300 faces downward, and the projector device 4300 has a lens cover 4413 (corresponding to the lens cover 3413 of the projector device 3300). The filter holding unit 4413a (corresponding to the filter holding unit 3413a of the projector device 3300) is below the projector device 4300 and passes through the filter 4414 (corresponding to the filter 3414 of the projector device 3300) held by the filter holding unit 4413a. Then, the irradiation light (image) is emitted (downward). The irradiation light thus irradiated is projected onto the second screen mechanism 4121 via the mirror mechanism 4145 as described above.

At this time, in the projector device 4300, the screen inversion setting is set to “1: upside down”. That is, as described above, the projector device 4300 arranged at the position E in the gaming machine 4001 is stored in a posture that is the reverse of the original posture of the projector device 4300, and therefore it is necessary to flip the image to be irradiated upside down. There is. Further, the irradiation light from the projector device 4300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 and projected to the rear side of the second screen mechanism 4121, and the projected image is played from the front direction of the gaming machine 4001 (the front side of the second screen mechanism 4121). Since the image is visually recognized by the person, the image to be irradiated is horizontally flipped twice, but as a result, the process is the same as the process of not horizontally flipping. The screen inversion setting of such a projector device 4300 is, after all, the same as the mode shown in FIG. 189(c).

In this way, in the projector device 4300, the corresponding screen inversion setting is performed according to the installation position of the projector device 4300. Such screen reversal setting is set in the projector device 4300 by the projector setting change processing by the sub control board 4200 (corresponding to the sub control board 3200) as in the case of the gaming machine 3001' (see FIGS. 184 and 185).

When the projector control board 4310 (control LSI 4311) of the projector device 4300 receives the command for performing the screen inversion setting from the sub CPU 4201 of the sub control board 4200, the screen inversion setting is stored in the EEPROM 4312 or the like, and the sub control board 4200 outputs the command. When there is a command to irradiate an image or the like relating to the effect, the rotation direction of the image is determined by referring to the screen inversion setting stored in the EEPROM 4312 or the like, and then the DLP control circuit 4313 or the like is controlled to control the optical mechanism 4330. To irradiate the image.

Further, the projector device 4300 may be a projector that is selectable to rotate the image in at least one of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

(Screen inversion function 3)
As described above, the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment, in accordance with the setting change process from the sub-control board 3200, adjusts the image to the gaming machine in which the projector device 3300 is mounted, It has a screen inversion function of rotating and projecting (image rotation includes, for example, forward rotation, vertical inversion, horizontal inversion, vertical inversion+horizontal inversion, etc.). Here, still another screen inversion function according to the present embodiment will be described.

A gaming machine 4001' shown in FIG. 208 is a modification of the gaming machine 4001 shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, and members having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals. While the gaming machine 4001 was configured to install one projector device 4300 at either position D or position E, the gaming machine 4001′ has two projector devices (4300a, 4300b) at position D. , And position E at the same time. Further, in such a gaming machine 4001', there may be an area where the projection range of the projector device 4300a at the position D and the projection range of the projector device 4300b at the position E overlap.

Both of the projector devices (4300a, 4300b) have the same configuration and function as the projector device 4300, and the sub control board 4200′ of the gaming machine 4001′ is basically the same as the sub control board 4200 described above. However, the sub-control board 4200 is different from the sub-control board 4200 in that communication with the two projector devices (4300a, 4300b) is performed individually.

The sub-control board 4200' performs the effect content determination process shown in FIG. 209 so as to determine the rotation direction of the image according to the projector device that projects the image. This effect content determination process is a modification of the effect content determination process (S222) executed by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 209, the sub-CPU 4201′ of the sub-control board 4200′ (corresponding to the sub-CPU 3201 of the sub-control board 3200) responds to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. Is determined (S2221).

Next, the sub CPU 4201' selects a projector device that projects the determined effect contents (S2222).

It is determined whether the selected projector device is the first projector (for example, the projector device 4300a shown in FIG. 208) (S2223). When the selected projector device is not the first projector (S2223: No), the sub CPU 4201' moves to the process of S2226. When the selected projector device is the first projector (S2223: Yes), the sub CPU 4201' moves to the process of next S2224.

In S2224, the sub CPU 4201' determines an image to be projected by the first projector. Next, in S2225, the designation information (screen inversion setting) of the rotation direction of the image projected by the first projector is determined. The screen inversion setting determined here is set in the corresponding projector device 4300a by the projector setting change processing by the sub control board 4200' as described above. Note that the projector device 4300a is installed at a position D in an upside-down posture as shown in FIG. 208, and irradiation light from the projector device 4300a is projected onto a first screen mechanism 4141 configured as a rear projector screen. Therefore, the screen inversion setting is set to “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion”.

Next, the sub CPU 4201' determines whether the selected projector device is the second projector (for example, the projector device 4300b shown in FIG. 208) (S2226). When the selected projector device is not the second projector (S2226: No), the sub CPU 4201' ends the effect contents determination process. When the selected projector device is the second projector (S2226: Yes), the sub CPU 4201' moves to the process of next S2227.

In S2227, the sub CPU 4201' determines an image to be projected by the second projector. Next, in S2228, the designation information (screen inversion setting) of the rotation direction of the image projected by the second projector is determined. The screen inversion setting determined here is set in the corresponding projector device 4300b by the projector setting change processing by the sub control board 4200' as described above. As shown in FIG. 208, the projector device 4300b is installed at a position E in the upside-down posture, and the irradiation light from the projector device 4300a is reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 and then configured as a rear projector screen. Since the image is projected on the second screen mechanism 4121, the screen inversion setting is set to “1: upside down”.

The sub-control board 4200′ can perform the screen inversion setting for each of the projector devices (4300a, 4300b) based on the designation information of the image rotation direction determined in such an effect content determination process (FIG. 184, see FIG. 185). The control LSI 4311′ of the projector control board 4310′ of the projector device (4300a, 4300b) stores the screen inversion setting in the DRAM or the like, and when the sub-control board 4200′ issues a command to irradiate an image or the like relating to the effect. , The screen inversion setting stored in the DRAM or the like is used to determine the rotation direction of the image, and then the DLP control circuit 4313′ or the like (corresponding to the DLP control circuit 3313 or the like of the projector device 3300) is controlled to control the optical mechanism 4330. The image is illuminated by'(corresponding to the optical mechanism 3330 of the projector device 3300).

In addition, the sub-control board 4200′ can perform the corresponding screen inversion setting according to the installation position of the projector device (4300a, 4300b) in advance, as long as the rotation direction does not change due to the effect contents, and the projector device (4300a 4300b) stores the screen inversion setting in the EEPROM 4312' or the like (corresponding to the EEPROM 3312 or the like of the projector device 3300), and when the sub-control board 4200' issues a command to irradiate an image or the like relating to the effect, It may be configured to determine the rotation direction of the image by referring to the screen inversion setting stored in the EEPROM 4312′ or the like.

In the present embodiment, the content of the effect is determined according to the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the command is not received, the rotation direction of the image is determined by referring to the screen inversion setting. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, when one of the projector devices does not display while the demo screen is being displayed, and the other projector device is displaying, even if one of the projector devices is not displaying, You may control so that the screen inversion setting of a video may be performed. At this time, the state where one of the projectors is not displaying includes the case where a layer is used to display an image in which the projection area is filled with black, so that the state behind the layer displaying the image in black is displayed. In some cases, the identification information (design, decorative design, etc.) may fluctuate, and it is possible to set the screen inversion for the image displaying the identification information. Such processing can be set not only for one (single) projector apparatus but also for both (plural) projector apparatuses. Further, it is possible to set the screen inversion even for an image filled with black, and the color is not limited to black. Further, since the screen inversion setting can be performed for each layer as described above, the screen inversion setting may be controlled separately for the superimposed images. By performing such control, when there is an overlap in the projection range of a plurality of projector devices, for the overlapped part (the part where the images are overlapped), the images for which individual screen inversion settings have been made are displayed. Even in the overlapping state, the images can be projected normally.

Further, each of the projector devices 4300, 4300a, and 4300b may be a projector that can be selected to rotate an image in at least one of a vertical direction and a horizontal direction.

(Screen inversion function 4)
As described above, the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment rotates the image according to the setting from the sub-control board 3200 in accordance with the gaming machine in which the projector device 3300 is mounted. It has a screen inversion function of projecting the image (for example, the rotation of the image includes normal rotation, vertical inversion, horizontal inversion, vertical inversion + horizontal inversion, etc.). Here, still another screen inversion function according to the present embodiment will be described.

210 is a cross-sectional view of an irradiation unit similar to that shown in FIG. 169, but here, an irradiation unit 5100 of the gaming machine 5001 similar to the irradiation unit 3100 of the gaming machine 3001 is shown.

The irradiation unit 5100 shown in FIGS. 210 and 211 is a modification of the irradiation unit 3100 shown in FIG. 169 and the like. The projector device 5300 shown in FIGS. 210 and 211 basically has the same configuration and function as the projector device 3300 of the gaming machine 3001, but as will be described later, by the projector setting change processing by the sub control board 5200, The screen inversion setting is set in projector device 5300.

Further, in the irradiation unit 3100, the mirror mechanism 3105 is mounted so as not to be movable/rotatable except for fine adjustment of the position, whereas the mirror mechanism 5105 of the irradiation unit 5100 rotates about the rotation shaft 5105a. Mounted movably. For example, in FIG. 210, the mirror mechanism 5105 is arranged at the position F, and in FIG. 211, the state where the mirror mechanism 5105 is moved from the position F to the position G is shown.

As shown in FIG. 210, when the mirror mechanism 5105 is rotated downward (position F), the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 5300 is reflected by the mirror mechanism 5105 and projected onto the front screen mechanism 5091 or the like. It

Further, as shown in FIG. 211, when the mirror mechanism 5105 is moved to the horizontal position (position G), the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 5300 is projected on the front surface of the projector device 5300. In this case, the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 5300 is projected on the player, the screen, or the like. In the case of the irradiation unit 5100, there is no screen on the front side of the projector device 5300, but a screen or a decoration member may be arranged so that the irradiation light can be projected.

The mirror mechanism 5105 can be driven by, for example, a conventional drive mechanism. The mirror mechanism 5105 is provided with a rotary shaft 5105a extending in the left-right direction. Both ends of the rotation shaft 5105a are rotatably held by a projector cover 5101 (corresponding to the projector cover 3101 of the projector device 3300), and when the mirror drive motor is driven by the control of the sub control board 5200, the mirror drive motor is driven. The motor shaft gear fixed to the shaft portion rotates, and in conjunction with this motor shaft gear, the rotation shaft gear provided near the end of the rotation shaft 5105a rotates, and as a result, the mirror mechanism 5105 is positioned. From F to position G or from position G to position F, the rotary shaft 5105a is rotated. The mirror drive motor is, for example, a drive unit such as a stepping motor.

The gaming machine 6001 shown in FIG. 212 is a modification of the gaming machine 4001' shown in FIG. 208, and the members having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals. The gaming machine 6001 is configured to have two projector devices (6300a, 6300b) at the positions D and E at the same time as the gaming machine 4001'. In addition, it is configured to include a mirror mechanism 6140 and a third screen mechanism 6142. The drive mechanism of such a mirror mechanism 6140 is the same as the drive mechanism of the mirror mechanism 5105 described above.

The projector device (6300a, 6300b) has the same configuration and function as the projector device (4300a, 4300b), but as described later, it is determined according to the operation of the mirror mechanism 6140 by the effect content determination process. With respect to the rotation direction, the screen inversion setting is performed for the two projector devices (6300a, 6300b) by the projector setting change processing by the sub control board 6200 (corresponding to the sub control board 4200′).

In the gaming machine 6001 shown in FIG. 212, the illumination light emitted from the projector device 6300a is not reflected by the mirror mechanism 6140 and is projected on the first screen mechanism 4141 as it is. As a result, the projector device 4300a shown in FIG. The same projection mode is used.

The irradiation light emitted from the projector device 6300b is reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 and projected onto the second screen mechanism 4121, as in FIG.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 6001 shown in FIG. 213, the mirror mechanism 6140 rotates downward and the irradiation light emitted from the projector device 6300a is reflected by the mirror mechanism 6140 and projected onto the third screen mechanism 6142. .. The image projected on the third screen mechanism 6142 is visually recognized by the player via the first screen mechanism 4141. In this case, the first screen mechanism 4141 is a liquid crystal film configured as a transmissive panel according to a predetermined signal, like the screen mechanism 3091′ in FIG. 205. By using the first screen mechanism 4141 as a transmissive panel, The player can visually recognize the image projected on the third screen mechanism 6142 behind the player.

Here, the effect content determination processing in which the sub control board 6200 determines the rotation direction of the image according to the position of the mirror mechanism 6140 and the projector device (6300a, 6300b) that projects the image will be described with reference to FIG. To do. This effect contents determination process is a modification of the effect contents determination process (S222) executed by the sub CPU 400 of the sub control board SS shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 214, the sub CPU 6201 of the sub control board 6200 (corresponding to the sub CPU 4201 ′ of the sub control board 4200 ′) responds to the command received by being transmitted from the main CPU 300 of the main control board MS. Is determined (S2241).

Next, the sub CPU 6201 selects a projector device that projects the determined effect contents (S2242).

Next, the sub CPU 6201 determines whether or not the determined effect content is an effect of moving the mirror mechanism 6140 (that is, an effect of moving the mirror mechanism 6140 to the lower side (position in FIG. 213)) (S2243). .. If the effect is not to move the mirror mechanism 6140 (S2243: No), the process moves to S2247. If the effect is to move the mirror mechanism 6140 (S2243: Yes), the process moves to the next step S2244.

Next, in step S2244, the sub CPU 6201 determines whether the selected projector device is the first projector (for example, the projector device 6300a shown in FIGS. 212 and 213). When the selected projector device is not the first projector (S2244: No), the sub CPU 6201 moves to the process of S2247. When the selected projector device is the first projector (S2244: Yes), the sub CPU 6201 moves to the processing of the next S2245.

In S2245, the sub CPU 6201 determines an image to be projected by the first projector. Next, in S2246, the designation information (screen inversion setting) of the rotation direction of the image projected by the first projector is determined. The screen inversion setting determined here is set in the corresponding projector device 6300a by the projector setting changing process by the sub control board 6200 as described above. Note that, as shown in FIG. 213, the projector device 6300a is installed at a position D in an upside-down posture, reflected by the mirror mechanism 6140, and the reflected light is projected on the front side of the third screen mechanism 6142. The screen inversion setting is set to “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion”.

In this example, when the effect is not to move the mirror mechanism 6140 (S2243: No), control is performed so that image projection by the first projector is not performed, but in this case, image projection by the first projector is performed. May be. At this time, the irradiation light from the projector device 6300a is not reflected by the mirror mechanism 6140 and is directly projected to the rear side of the first screen mechanism 4141. Therefore, the screen inversion setting is “3: vertical inversion+horizontal inversion”. Is set.

Next, the sub CPU 6201 determines whether or not the selected projector device is the second projector (for example, the projector device 6300b shown in FIGS. 212 and 213) (S2247). When the selected projector device is not the second projector (S2247: No), the sub CPU 6201 ends the effect contents determination process. When the selected projector device is the second projector (S2247: Yes), the sub CPU 6201 moves to the processing of the next S2248.

In S2248, the sub CPU 6201 determines an image to be projected by the second projector. Next, in S2249, the designation information (screen inversion setting) of the rotation direction of the image projected by the second projector is determined. The screen inversion setting determined here is set in the corresponding projector device 6300b by the projector setting changing process by the sub control board 6200 as described above. Note that the projector device 6300b is installed at a position E in an upside-down posture as shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, and further, the irradiation light from the projector device 6300b is reflected by the mirror mechanism 4145 and the second screen mechanism 4121. Since the image is projected on the rear side, the screen inversion setting is set to “1: upside down”.

The sub-control board 6200 can perform screen inversion setting for each of the projector devices (6300a, 6300b) based on the designation information of the image rotation direction determined by such effect content determination processing (FIG. 184). 185). The control LSI 6311 of the projector control board 6310 of the projector device (6300a, 6300b) stores this screen inversion setting in the DRAM or the like, and when the sub-control board 6200 issues a command to illuminate an image or the like relating to the effect, the DRAM or the like. The rotation direction of the image is determined by referring to the screen inversion setting stored in, and then the DLP control circuit 6313 and the like (corresponding to the DLP control circuit 3313 and the like of the projector device 3300) are controlled to control the optical mechanism 6330 (the projector device 3300). (Corresponding to the optical mechanism 3330), the image is irradiated.

Further, the sub-control board 6200 can perform the corresponding screen inversion setting in advance according to the installation position of the projector device 6300b as long as the rotation direction does not change depending on the contents of the effect. The screen reversal setting stored in the EEPROM 6312 or the like is stored in the EEPROM 6312 or the like (corresponding to the EEPROM 3312 or the like of the projector device 3300), and when the sub-control board 6200 issues a command to irradiate the image related to the effect. It may be configured to determine the rotation direction of the image with reference to the setting.

Further, each of the projector devices 5300, 6300a, and 6300b may be a projector that can be selected so as to rotate an image in at least one of a vertical direction and a horizontal direction.

(Warning due to DMD temperature rise (sub-control board))
Next, in the sub-control board 3200 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment, a function of issuing a warning based on a rise in temperature of the DMD 3333 will be described. As described above, in the gaming machine 3001, the projector device 3300 determines the temperature abnormality regarding the DMD 3333 by the projector self-diagnosis process (see FIG. 181), and when the temperature regarding the DMD 3333 exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the projector device Although the main operation of the 3300 is controlled to be forcibly shut down, various warning screens are displayed here under the control of the sub-control board 3200 according to the temperature of the DMD 3333.

That is, by acquiring the temperature (DMD temperature) regarding the DMD 3333 from the projector device 3300 on the side of the sub-control board 3200, and instructing the projector device 3300 to illuminate an image on the front screen mechanism 3091 based on the acquired DMD temperature. A warning screen is displayed on the upper display window 3009 of the gaming machine 3001 or a warning screen is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 by giving an instruction via the sub liquid crystal I/F substrate SL.

FIG. 215 shows a warning screen displayed according to an instruction from the sub control board 3200. FIG. 215(a) shows a warning screen (1) displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 when the DMD temperature satisfies a predetermined condition. In this example, most of the rise in the DMD temperature is caused by putting an object on the ventilation openings 3024a and 3024b of the gaming machine 3001, so that the portions of the ventilation openings 3024a and 3024b are highlighted. The top of the housing (3002) is shown as a guide map 3501.

FIG. 215(b) shows a warning screen (2) displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 when the DMD temperature satisfies a predetermined condition.

Further, the period in which the warning screen (1) is displayed is, for example, from when the DMD temperature satisfies a predetermined condition until the forced shutdown by the projector device 3300 is performed, and the warning screen (2) is displayed. The displayed period is, for example, a period from when the projector device 3300 is forcibly shut down and the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like is no longer illuminated with an image until the power is cut off (the power of the gaming machine 3001 is turned off).

Further, during the period in which the warning screen (2) is displayed, not after the projector apparatus 3300 is forcibly shut down and the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like is no longer illuminated with the image, but before the illumination is stopped, It is also possible to control the gaming machine 3001 so that the period from when the gaming machine 3001 recognizes the forced shutdown until the power failure. When the projector device 3300 is shut down, the projector device 3300 can also be configured to send a message to that effect to the gaming machine 3001 before the shutdown. Therefore, in this case, the gaming machine 3001 causes the projector device 3300 to display a warning screen. The warning screen (2) can be displayed even while (1) is being displayed.

In the present embodiment, the DMD temperature is obtained every 1 second (from the projector device 3300), the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the DMD 3333. The display/non-display of the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) as described above is determined by the relationship between the DMD temperature and the threshold values such as the warning temperature and the stable temperature. Further, a prescribed number of temperature drops is provided as a reference for the number of temperature drops, and is set to 3 times here.

Further, the shutdown predicted temperature of the DMD 3333 (the threshold of the DMD temperature expected to be forcibly shut down by the projector device 3300) is set to 64°C. The expected shutdown temperature of the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) is 105°C for 3331R and 125°C for 3331G and 3331B.

Further, in processing the sub control board 3200, four DMD temperatures are held. Here, the current temperature measured value (DMD temperature) is TempNow, the tempo of the previous one is TempOld1, the tempo of the second previous is TempOld2, and the tempnow of the third tempo is TempOld3. The DMD temperature is acquired every one second, and the TempNow is updated accordingly. However, the TempNow is updated only when the DMD temperature is different from the previous time. Therefore, when TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, and TempOld3 are arranged side by side and compared, the same value is not stored adjacently.

Further, in the processing of the sub control board 3200, four transitions of the DMD temperature state are held. Here, if TempOld1<TempNow, “temporary transition” is set, and if TempOld1>TempNow, “temporary transition” is set. Let TempNowSt be TempOld3St. Since TempNowSt is set as described above, it indicates whether or not the current DMD temperature is higher than the previous DMD temperature.

The values of the warning temperature, the stable temperature, and the prescribed number of temperature drops are stored in, for example, the sub ROM substrate 42. TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3, TempOwSt, TempOld1St, TempOld2St, and TempOld3St are temporarily stored in the sub RAM substrate 41 or the SRAM 401, for example.

FIG. 216 shows conditions relating to the display of the warning screen. Condition A and condition B are conditions for displaying the warning screen, condition C and condition D are conditions for hiding the displayed warning screen, and condition E is the displayed warning. This is a condition for maintaining the screen or the hidden warning screen as it is.

Condition A is (A-1) TempNowSt is “increase transition”, (A-2) TempNow is above warning temperature, and (A-3) TempOld1 is below warning temperature, TempNowSt is “increase transition”. It is a condition that all three conditions that are "are satisfied."

The condition B is that (B-1) TempNowSt is “increase transition”, (B-2) TempNow is at or above the warning temperature, and (B-3) TempOld1 is at or above the warning temperature, TempNowSt and TempOld1St are “ It is a condition that all three conditions of "upward transition" are satisfied.

The condition C is a condition in which all of the two conditions that (C-1) TempNowSt is “downward transition” and (C-2) TempNow is equal to or lower than the stable temperature are satisfied.

The condition D is a condition that (D-1) “falling transition” continues for a prescribed number of temperature lowering. As described above, in this example, the prescribed temperature decrease number is 3, so the condition D is that TempNowSt, TempOld1St, and TempOld2St are “downward transition”.

The condition E is a condition that (E-1) does not correspond to the above conditions A to D, or (E-2) TempOld1 is 0°C. When TempOld1 is 0° C., the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 may be a negative value due to noise or the like, and the sub-control board 3200 receives the negative value as the DMD temperature. Then, since 0° C. is corrected on the side of the sub-control board 3200, 0° C. may be stored in TempOld1 or the like, and the condition (E-2) corresponds to this.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, a specific display of the warning screen will be described. FIG. 217 is a table showing how the DMD temperature and the warning screen are displayed when the DMD temperatures are sequentially acquired on the sub control board 3200. It should be noted that although the number of times of temperature acquisition in which the DMD temperature is acquired is shown in this table, as described above, if the same DMD temperature continues, there is no update of TempNow, and this is not shown as the number of times of temperature acquisition. The item “temperature” corresponds to the TempNow of the number of times of temperature acquisition, and is in increments of 0.25° C. Further, in this example, the warning temperature is 50° C., the stable temperature is 49° C. lower than the warning temperature, and the item “state” corresponds to the TempNowSt of the number of times of temperature acquisition.

When the number of temperature acquisitions=“0” to “8”, although the rising transition continues, the warning temperature of 50° C. is not exceeded, the conditions A and B are not satisfied, and naturally, the conditions C and D are also satisfied. Therefore, the condition E is satisfied for that reason, and the non-display state is maintained. When the number of times of temperature acquisition=“9”, TempNow is 50° C. and the condition A is satisfied, so that the warning screen is displayed based on the condition A. At this time, since the DMD temperature is 64° C. or lower and the forced shutdown of the projector device 3300 has not been performed, the warning screen (1) is displayed.

When the number of temperature acquisitions=“10” to “15”, the rising transition is continuous and TempNow and TempOld1 exceed 50° C. Therefore, the condition B is satisfied, and the warning screen (1) is displayed based on the condition B. .. When the number of times of temperature acquisition=“16” and “17”, the transition is downward, but the conditions C and D are not satisfied (condition E is satisfied), so the display state of the warning screen (1) is maintained.

When the number of temperature acquisitions=“18” to “20”, the downward transition continues three times or more, so the condition D is satisfied, and the warning screen (1) is not displayed based on the condition D.

After that, the determinations regarding the conditions A to E are similarly made, and the warning screen is displayed/hidden. For example, when the number of times of temperature acquisition=“32”, the downward transition continues twice and the TempNow becomes 49° C. or lower, so that the condition C is satisfied and the warning screen (1) is hidden based on the condition C.

When the temperature acquisition count=“36”, the warning screen (1) should be displayed by satisfying the condition A, but TempOld1, that is, TempNow of the previous time (temperature acquisition count=“35”) is 0° C. Therefore, the condition is satisfied and the state is maintained, and the non-display of the condition C is maintained when the number of times of temperature acquisition=“35”.

Further, when the number of temperature acquisitions=“44” to “49”, the rising transition continues and the warning screen is displayed, but when the number of temperature acquisitions=“44”, the warning screen (1) is displayed due to the condition A. On the other hand, when the number of times of temperature acquisition=“45” to “49”, the warning screen is displayed according to the condition B, and further, TempNow is displayed because it exceeds the shutdown predicted temperature of the DMD3333 of 64° C. The warning screen displayed is the warning screen (2).

FIG. 218 is a graph showing the transition of the DMD temperature shown in FIG. 217. The range of the number of times of temperature acquisition in which the warning screen (1) is displayed and the temperature in which the warning screen (2) is displayed. The range of the number of acquisitions is shown. As described above, the horizontal axis is based on the temperature acquisition frequency at which the DMD temperature different from the previous time is acquired, and is not based on time. The vertical axis shows the DMD temperature (° C.), but the display at 53° C. or higher is omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 218, the number of temperature acquisitions=“9” to “17”, “24” to “26”, “30”, “31”, “34”, “39”, “40”, “44”. The warning screen (1) is displayed with, and the warning screen (2) is displayed with the number of times of temperature acquisition=“45” to “49”.

FIG. 219 shows the same DMD temperature transition as that shown in FIG. 217. Here, in FIG. 219, a new item "number of projector temperature warnings" is shown. The projector temperature warning count is obtained by counting up the warning display (1) and the warning display (2) for each gaming machine 3001.

The projector temperature warning count is incremented when the warning screen is not displayed in the previous temperature acquisition count but is displayed in the current temperature acquisition count. For example, as shown in FIG. 219, the warning screen is not displayed when the temperature acquisition count is “8”, and the warning screen (1) is displayed when the temperature acquisition count is “9”. Count up the first temperature warning. The warning screen (1) is displayed when the number of times of temperature acquisition=“10”, but the warning screen (1) is displayed when the number of times of temperature acquisition=“9” at the previous time, and therefore the target is not counted up.

Thereafter, similarly, the number of times of temperature acquisition=“24”, “30”, “34”, “39”, “44” is counted up, and the number of times of projector temperature warning is finally 6 times.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, the warning screen (1) is displayed when the temperature acquisition count=“44”, and the warning screen (2) is displayed when the temperature acquisition count=“45” is displayed next. Although different warning screens are displayed in this way, when such different warning screens are displayed with consecutive temperature acquisition times, in the example of FIG. 219, such a warning screen is counted as once, but the warning screen ( It is also possible to individually count up 1) and the warning screen (2). Then, in the case shown in FIG. 219, the number of times the projector temperature is warned is 6 for the warning screen (1) and once for the warning screen (2). Further, such a projector temperature warning frequency is stored as cumulative data for the gaming machine 3001, but it can be managed as a projector temperature warning frequency for each day or for a predetermined period.

Further, the number of times of warning of the projector temperature thus grasped can be converted into a two-dimensional code and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like. For example, the person in charge of operation/maintenance of the gaming machine 3001 displays a hole menu or error screen related to operation/maintenance on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 by performing a predetermined special operation on the gaming machine 3001, and there, When an instruction is given to display the two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional code including the data of the number of times of warning of the projector temperature is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

The operation/maintenance staff can grasp the number of times the projector temperature is warned for the gaming machine 3001 by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like and performing a predetermined decoding process. The two-dimensional code includes the number of times the projector temperature is warned, the number of times the projector apparatus 3300 is shut down, the number of times the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) is shut down, the number of times the DLP control circuit 3313 is shut down, the number of times the exhaust fan 3342 is shut down, and the LED. The maximum temperature and the like of the light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) can be included, and thereby, hardware error information and the like of the gaming machine 3001 can be easily managed at a detailed level.

FIG. 220 shows the DMD temperature transition similar to that shown in FIG. 217. The temperature transition shown in FIG. 220 differs from the temperature transition of FIG. 217 in that the DMD temperature (TempNow) is 50.50° C. when the number of times of temperature acquisition=“37”.

In such a case, when the temperature acquisition count=“36”, the warning screen (1) should originally be displayed to satisfy the condition A, but TempOld1, that is, TempNow of the previous time (temperature acquisition count=“35”) is displayed. Since the temperature is 0° C., the condition E is satisfied, the state is maintained, and the non-display of the condition C in the temperature acquisition number=“35” is maintained. Further, when the number of times of temperature acquisition=“37”, TempOld1 is 50° C. or higher, and TempNowSt and TempOld1St are “increase transition”. Therefore, the condition B is satisfied, and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

That is, when the number of temperature acquisitions=“37”, TempOld1St (state in the number of temperature acquisitions=“36”) is based on the temperature due to noise or the like such as TempNow=0° C. of the number of temperature acquisitions=“35”. Although it is a determination of “increase”, this TempOld1St is grasped as an effective “increase transition”.

Next, the projector temperature warning screen determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. This process can be executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds by the sub device task (see FIG. 73) of the sub control board 3200.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 in S2261. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2262 whether the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the transmission cycle counter is not 250 or more (S2262: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2265. When the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more (S2262: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2263.

Next, in step S2263, the sub CPU 3201 sets a status request for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d that indicates the temperature near the DMD 3333. A value indicating the temperature (DMD temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341d is set as the status value. By such a status request, the DMD temperature is transmitted from the projector device 3300.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the transmission cycle counter (S2264). By handling the transmission cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can make a status request every second.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the current DMD temperature (TempNow) is 64° C. or higher (S2265). When the DMD temperature is not 64° C. or higher (S2265: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2267. When the DMD temperature is 64° C. or higher (S2265: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets to display the warning screen (2) on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2266). Since the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 is configured as the touch panel 3023T, the player or the like can perform an operation related to the game or an operation related to the warning according to the display of the warning screen (2). .. After that, the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the processing of S2272.

In this example, the TempNow (DMD temperature) is referred to, and if it is 64° C. or higher, the warning screen (2) is displayed. As described above, 64° C. is the shutdown predicted temperature of the DMD 3333, and the sub CPU 3201 can predict from this temperature that the projector device 3300 will perform forced shutdown.

In such a process, when the DMD temperature rises to 64° C., the projector device 3300 side is forcedly shut down and the information can no longer be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like. The warning screen is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 capable of displaying the. However, the warning screen (2) can be controlled to be displayed based on a criterion other than the DMD temperature. For example, with respect to the projector device 3300, since there are factors of shutdown other than the DMD 3333, when the projector device 3300 is shut down (or when there is a possibility of shutting down), the warning screen (2) is displayed uniformly. You may control.

Further, when the projector device 3300 shuts down, a notification to that effect can be transmitted from the projector device 3300 to the sub-control board 3200 and the like. In this case, the sub CPU 3201 can detect the shutdown of the projector device 3300. it can.

In S2267, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow has been updated, that is, whether or not the current DMD temperature has changed. When the TempNow is not updated (S2267: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector temperature warning screen determination process. When the TempNow is updated (S2267: Yes), the sub CPU3201 determines in S2268 whether or not the warning screen (2) is set. When the warning screen (2) is set (S2268: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector temperature warning screen determination process. These processes mean that once the warning screen (2) is displayed, the display of the warning screen (2) is not erased until the gaming machine 3001 is powered off (power off).

When the warning screen (2) is not set (S2268: No), the sub CPU3201 executes the display control process of the warning screen in S2269. As described above, the determination (condition E) when TempOld1 is 0° C. is also performed in this process. Further, in this example, when TempOld1 is 0° C., control is performed to maintain the display/non-display of the warning screen, but when TempOld1 becomes negative, control is performed to maintain the display/non-display of the warning screen. You may do so.

Next, in step S2270, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not to display a warning screen. When the warning screen is not displayed (S2270: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector temperature warning screen determination process. When displaying the warning screen (S2270: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets to display the warning screen (1) on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2271). In this case, not only the warning screen (1) is displayed on the front screen 3091 mechanism or the like, but also other display such as displaying the warning screen (2) on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like may be performed in parallel. it can.

Next, in step S2272, the sub CPU 3201 adds 1 to the projector temperature warning number when the warning screen was not displayed last time and the warning screen is displayed in the current process. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector temperature warning screen determination process. The projector temperature warning frequency accumulated in this way is converted into a two-dimensional code as described above and can be confirmed on the hole menu or error screen.

Next, the warning screen display control process (S2269) in the projector temperature warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 221 will be described with reference to FIG. 222.

First, in step S2291, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempOld1 is 0° C. or lower. If TempOld1 is not 0° C. or lower, that is, if it is a positive value (S2291: No), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2293. When TempOld1 is 0° C. or lower (for example, 0° C.) (S2291: Yes), the process proceeds to the next S2292, and it is determined that the screen display should be maintained. This determination corresponds to the condition E described above. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the warning screen display control process.

Next, in step S2293, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNowSt is increasing, that is, whether the relationship of the previous DMD temperature (TempOld1)<the current DMD temperature (TempNow) is satisfied. When the TempNowSt is increasing (S2293: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2299. When TempNowSt is not increasing (S2293: No), it is determined whether TempNow is equal to or lower than the stable temperature (S2294). The stable temperature is set to 49° C. in this example.

When TempNow is not equal to or lower than the stable temperature (S2294: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2296. When TempNow is equal to or lower than the stable temperature (S2294: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 shifts to S2297 to hide the warning screen. This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition C.

Next, in S2296, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the downward transition continues for a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times is the above-described temperature decrease prescribed number, and in this example, it is set to three times. If the downward transition continues for a predetermined number of times (S2296: Yes), it is determined to hide the warning screen (S2297). This determination corresponds to the condition D described above. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the warning screen display control process. On the other hand, when the downward transition has not continued for the predetermined number of times (S2296: No), it is determined that the screen display should be maintained (S2298). This determination corresponds to the condition E described above. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the warning screen display control process.

Next, in step S2299, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or higher than the warning temperature. The warning temperature is set to 50° C. in this example. When TempNow is not equal to or higher than the warning temperature (S2299: No), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2304. When TempNow is equal to or higher than the warning temperature (S2299: Yes), it is determined whether or not TempOld1 is lower than the warning temperature (S2300).

When TempOld1 is not lower than the warning temperature (S2300: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2302. When the TempOld1 is lower than the warning temperature (S2300: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 moves to S2303 to display the warning screen. This determination corresponds to the above-mentioned condition A.

Next, in step S2302, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempOld1St is increasing, that is, the relationship is that the DMD temperature (TempOld2) two times before the last time <the previous DMD temperature (TempOld1). If TempOld1St is not increasing (S2302: No), it is determined that the screen display should be maintained (S2304). This determination corresponds to the condition E described above. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the warning screen display control process.

On the other hand, if the TempOld1St is in the upward transition (S2302: Yes), it is determined to display the warning screen (S2303). This determination corresponds to the condition B described above. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the warning screen display control process.

In the warning screen display control processing shown in FIG. 222, the warning screen is hidden in S2297 and the warning screen is controlled to be displayed in S2303. However, such a warning screen may be a display of the entire screen. Further, in S2292, S2298, and S2304, it is determined that the screen display should be maintained, but this basically means that the display state or non-display state of the warning screen is maintained. However, at this time, it is possible to perform control so as to maintain the display or non-display of not only the warning screen but also the entire screen (even if the warning screen is not the display of the entire screen).

In the present embodiment, the warning screen display control process is performed according to the flow shown in FIG. 222, but various display controls can be performed. For example, if the warning screen is being displayed, it may be determined to hide the warning screen, and if the warning screen is not being displayed, the control may be maintained.

As described above, when the projector device 3300 shuts down, a notification to that effect (error notification) is transmitted from the projector device 3300 to the sub control board 3200, and the sub CPU 3201 detects the shutdown of the projector device 3300. can do.

Such an error notification determines that the DMD temperature is abnormal, for example, as described in S2008 to S2010 of the projector control main processing shown in FIG. 180, S2033 of the projector self-diagnosis processing shown in FIG. Then, the control LSI 3311 sets the error information of the DMD temperature abnormality in the error management area of the DRAM (S2033), and in response to this error information, the control LSI 3311 creates a command indicating an error notification as transmission data ( (S2008), the command indicating the error notification is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (for example, the process shown in S825 of FIG. 135). Note that in S825 of FIG. 135, when the self-diagnosis abnormality or the DLP abnormality is set in the error management area, the reset request is turned on, and the corresponding error notification command is controlled not to be transmitted (FIG. 135). In S818, S819′, and S825), in the present embodiment, it is possible to control to transmit the corresponding error notification command even for such an error that the reset request is turned ON.

In step S450 of the projector control reception process shown in FIG. 138, a status request command is transmitted to the projector control board 3310 in response to the status request for acquiring the DMD temperature set by the sub CPU 3201. 56 shows the status value corresponding to the LED temperature and the FAN rotation speed as the parameter of the status request (CMD: 83H) of the sub control board (transmission command), the status value corresponding to the DMD temperature. Are also added according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 56 shows commands corresponding to the LED temperature (CMD:85H) and the FAN rotation speed (CMD:86H) of the projector control board (transmission command), which also corresponds to the DMD temperature. The command to perform is added according to this embodiment.

Note that in S445 shown in FIG. 138, the status request command is controlled to be transmitted when there is no projector setting change request. However, the control is not limited to such a control. When received (S444: Yes), the status request command may be controlled to be transmitted every time.

In addition, the status request command may be controlled to be sequentially transmitted to the projector device 3300 at the time when each status request command is set.

On the other hand, the process in which the projector control board 3310 receives the status request command from the sub control board 3200 is performed in the sub control-projector transmission time process shown in FIG. 135, and in S822, the command transmission request corresponding to the status is sent. If there is (S822: Yes), the status transmission data creation process shown in FIG. 223 is executed. The status transmission data creation process of FIG. 223 will be described later.

It should be noted that in the sub-control-projector transmission process of FIG. 135, all commands transmitted from the projector device 3300 are transmitted at intervals of 500 ms (S811 to S813), but the'parameter request' command of S824 is transmitted. Only the command can be transmitted at 500 ms intervals, and other commands can be transmitted at any time, and the DMD temperature can be acquired at 1 second intervals as in the present embodiment.

In addition, when the projector device 3300 receives a status request command from the gaming machine side (sub-control board 3200), the projector device 3300 can be controlled to sequentially transmit the corresponding status.

It should be noted that the projector control board 3310 can transmit a parameter request command at an arbitrary timing. For example, when the projector control board 3310 is processing a command, the transmission of the'parameter request' command is omitted. be able to.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the status transmission data creation processing, which is a partial modification of the status transmission data creation processing shown in FIG. 115 described above.

The status transmission data creation process shown in FIG. 223 is the same as the status transmission data creation process of FIG. 115 with the addition of the status transmission data creation process (command transmission data creation process) relating to the DMD temperature. Therefore, the same processes as those in FIG. 115 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S849, the control LSI 3311 determines whether the parameter of the status storage area is the drift correction temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is not the drift correction temperature (S849: No), the control LSI 3311 proceeds to the processing of the next S2321.

In S2321, the control LSI 3311 determines whether the parameter of the status storage area is DMD temperature. When the parameter of the status storage area is the DMD temperature (S2321: Yes), the control LSI 3311 moves to the processing of the next S2322. If the parameter of the status storage area is not the DMD temperature (S2321: No), the control LSI 3311 ends the status transmission data creation process.

Next, the control LSI 3311 inputs data from the temperature sensor 3341d that detects the temperature near the DMD 3333 and generates DMD temperature data (S2322).

Next, the control LSI 3311 creates a "DMD temperature" command including the DMD temperature data in the status as transmission data (S2323). After that, the control LSI 3311 ends the status transmission data creation process.

In addition, the status of the lens temperature (for example, the temperature in the vicinity of the lens unit 3332, particularly in the vicinity of power for driving the angle of the lens, the temperature in the vicinity of power transmission, etc.) can also be transmitted.

224 and 225 are flowcharts showing the processing at the time of receiving the projector status, which is obtained by partially improving the processing at the time of receiving the projector status shown in FIG. 94 described above. Since the sub CPU 3201 receives the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 on the gaming machine 3001 side, if the acquired command is the DMD temperature in this projector status reception processing, the DMD temperature data is saved. Perform processing.

The projector status reception process shown in FIGS. 224 and 225 is the projector status reception process of FIG. 94 to which the DMD temperature reception process described above is added, and other processes are the same. The same processes as those in FIG. 94 are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

After S534 shown in FIG. 224, the process of the sub CPU 3201 shifts to the process of S2341 shown in FIG. 225. In S2341, the sub CPU3201 determines whether the acquired command is DMD temperature. If the acquired command is not the DMD temperature (S2341: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector status reception process.

When the acquired command is the DMD temperature (S2341: Yes), the sub CPU3201 corrects the acquired DMD temperature to 0° C. in S2342 when the acquired DMD temperature is negative. In this example, when the DMD temperature is negative, the DMD temperature is corrected to 0° C. However, the present invention is not limited to such processing, and for example, the DMD temperature is set to a negative value without correction. It is also possible to leave it as it is.

Next, in step S2343, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the acquired DMD temperature is the same value as the DMD temperature currently stored as TempNow. When the acquired DMD temperature is the same as TempNow (S2343: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2346.

If the acquired DMD temperature is not the same as TempNow (S2343: No), the sub CPU 3201 saves the DMD temperature data in the projector status storage area and updates TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, and TempOld3 in S2344. That is, the value of TempOld2 is copied to TempOld3, the value of TempOld1 is copied to TempOld2, the value of TempNow is copied to TempOld1, and the saved DMD temperature data is copied to TempNow.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 compares TempNow and TempOld1 set as described above in S2344, and updates TempNowSt, TempOld1St, TempOld2St, and TempOld3St (S2345). That is, the value of TempOld2St is copied to TempOld3St, the value of TempOld1St is copied to TempOld2St, the value of TempNowSt is copied to TempOld1St, and then TempOw and TempOld1 are compared, and the large value is compared by comparing TempNow and TempOld1S, and the large value is compared by Temp.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 performs status request completion command transmission processing in S2346. In this processing, the sub CPU 3201 sends a command indicating completion of status request (see CMD: 84H shown in the right column of FIG. 56) to the projector control board 3310. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the projector status reception process.

FIG. 226 is a diagram showing a communication sequence during normal operation between the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 and the projector device 3300. The communication sequence shown in FIG. 226 is a modification of the communication sequence of FIG. 158 for this embodiment, and a PJ status request from the sub-control board 3200 according to the configuration/function of the gaming machine 3001 of this embodiment. The content of has been changed.

As shown in FIG. 226, during the normal operation of the projector device 3300, the control LSI 3311 of the projector device 3300 transmits a command for requesting a parameter to the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200. The sub CPU 3201 that has received the parameter request command transmits a status request “LED temperature (R)” command (see FIG. 227) to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. Upon receiving the command of the status request “LED temperature (R)”, the control LSI 3311 sets the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341a as the LED temperature (R) and sub-commands the command indicating the LED temperature (R) (see FIG. 227). It is transmitted to the CPU 3201.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a status request “LED temperature (G)” command (see FIG. 227) to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. The control LSI 3311 that has received the command of the status request “LED temperature (G)” sets the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341b as the LED temperature (G) and sub-commands the command indicating the LED temperature (G) (see FIG. 227). It is transmitted to the CPU 3201.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a status request “LED temperature (B)” command (see FIG. 227) to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. Upon receiving the command of the status request “LED temperature (B)”, the control LSI 3311 sets the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341c as the LED temperature (B) and sub-commands the command indicating the LED temperature (B) (see FIG. 227). It is transmitted to the CPU 3201.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a status request “lens temperature” command (see FIG. 227) to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. The control LSI 3311 having received the command of the status request “lens temperature” transmits the command (see FIG. 227) indicating the lens temperature to the sub CPU 3201 with the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341e as the lens temperature.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits to the control LSI 3311 a command for the status request “FAN4 rotation speed” (see FIG. 227) to the projector device 3300. The control LSI 3311 that received the command of the status request “FAN4 rotation speed” transmits the command (see FIG. 227) indicating the FAN4 rotation speed to the sub CPU 3201 with the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor 3343a of the FAN4 as the FAN4 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a status request “FAN5 rotation speed” command (see FIG. 227) to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. The control LSI 3311 that received the command of the status request “FAN5 rotation speed” sends the command (see FIG. 227) indicating the FAN5 rotation speed to the sub CPU 3201 with the rotation speed detected by the pulse sensor 3343b of the FAN5 as the FAN5 rotation speed. To do.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a status request “DMD temperature” command (see FIG. 227) to the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311. The control LSI 3311 that has received the command of the status request “DMD temperature” transmits the command (see FIG. 227) indicating the DMD temperature to the sub CPU 3201 with the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d as the DMD temperature.

After that, the sub CPU 3201 transmits a status request completion command for the projector device 3300 to the control LSI 3311, and the control LSI 3311 receiving the command transmits a reception confirmation command to the sub CPU 3201. As a result, the communication sequence during the normal operation of projector device 3300 ends.

In FIG. 226, after the parameter request, various PJ status requests and the values corresponding thereto are transmitted as a series of communication sequences. However, for example, only the parameter requests are transmitted at fixed intervals such as 500 ms intervals, and other parameters are transmitted. The PJ status request command can be transmitted at any time.

FIG. 227 shows the commands used in the communication sequence during normal operation in FIG. 226. Although not shown in FIG. 56, in the sub-control board 3200 (sub-CPU 3201), the status value “8” corresponding to the lens temperature is used as a parameter in the status request (83h) regarding the lens temperature, and the projector device 3300 ( In response to this, the control LSI 3311) transmits a command (CMD=“8Ch”) corresponding to the lens temperature to the sub CPU 3201.

In the sub-control board 3200 (sub-CPU 3201), the status request “83h” regarding the rotation speed of the FAN 4 uses the status value “9” corresponding to the rotation speed of the FAN 4 as a parameter, and the projector device 3300 (control LSI 3311). Responds to this, and sends a command (CMD=“86h”, parameter: D4) corresponding to the rotation speed of FAN4 to the sub CPU 3201.

In the sub-control board 3200 (sub-CPU 3201), the status value “10” corresponding to the rotation speed of the FAN 5 is used as a parameter for the status request (83h) regarding the rotation speed of the FAN 5, and the projector device 3300 (control LSI 3311) In response to this, a command (CMD=“86h”, parameter: D5) corresponding to the rotation speed of FAN5 is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201.

Further, in the sub-control board 3200 (sub-CPU 3201), the status value “11” corresponding to the DMD temperature is used as a parameter in the status request (83h) regarding the DMD temperature, and the projector device 3300 (control LSI 3311) uses this status value. In response, a command (CMD=“8Dh”) corresponding to the DMD temperature is transmitted to the sub CPU 3201.

(Warning, etc. due to temperature rise of DMD (Modification 1))
As described above, in the sub-control board 3200 of the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment, the function of issuing a warning based on the temperature rise of the DMD 3333 has been described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227. Now, a modified example of such a function will be described.

Here, with reference to FIG. 228, a process of adjusting the brightness of the projector device 3300 according to the change in the DMD temperature will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an outline of such a brightness adjustment process. This process can be executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds by the sub device task (see FIG. 73) of the sub control board 3200.

In the brightness adjustment processing shown in FIG. 228, for example, when the DMD temperature rises to the specified temperature (1) in a situation where the DMD temperature rises, the brightness of the projector device 3300 (LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) is reduced to 1/. Change to 2, and set the brightness to 0 when the temperature reaches the specified temperature (2). On the other hand, when the DMD temperature falls to the specified temperature (2)-correction temperature in the phase where the DMD temperature decreases, the brightness of the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) is returned to 1/2, and the specified temperature (1)-correction When the temperature is reached, the brightness is returned to the original LED brightness (initial brightness). In this example, the specified temperature (1) is 50°C, the specified temperature (2) is 64°C, and the correction temperature is 5°C.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 in S2361. Next, in step S2362, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the transmission cycle counter is not 250 or more (S2362: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2365. When the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more (S2362: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2363.

Next, in step S2363, the sub CPU 3201 sets a status request for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d indicating the temperature near the DMD 3333. A value indicating the temperature (DMD temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341d is set as the status value. By such a status request, the DMD temperature is transmitted from the projector device 3300.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the transmission cycle counter (S2364). By handling the transmission cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can make a status request every second.

Next, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not TempNow (current DMD temperature) is updated (S2365). When TempNow is not updated (S2365: No), the sub CPU3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When TempNow is updated (S2365: Yes), the sub CPU3201 determines in S2366 whether TempNow is equal to or higher than the specified temperature (1).

If TempNow is equal to or higher than the specified temperature (1) (S2366: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets the brightness correction value to 1/2 in S2366. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment processing. Thus, by setting the brightness correction value to 1/2, the LED brightness is adjusted to (current) LED brightness*brightness correction value. In this example, the brightness correction value is set to 1/2, so the LED brightness is changed to 1/2 of the current LED brightness. The brightness correction value is 1/2 here, but a value between 0 and 1 can be selected. The LED brightness is the brightness of the LED light source, and is indicated by a value between 0% and 100%, for example.

When TempNow is not equal to or higher than the specified temperature (1) (S2366: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2368. In S2368, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or higher than the specified temperature (2).

If TempNow is equal to or higher than the specified temperature (2) (S2368: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets the brightness correction value to 0 in S2369. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment processing. Thus, by setting the brightness correction value to 0, the LED brightness is adjusted to (current) LED brightness*brightness correction value, that is, 0.

When TempNow is not equal to or higher than the specified temperature (2) (S2368: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2370. In step S2370, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or lower than the specified temperature (2)-correction temperature.

When TempNow is equal to or lower than the specified temperature (2)-correction temperature (S2370: Yes), the sub CPU3201 sets the brightness correction value to 1/2 in S2371. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment processing. In this way, by setting the brightness correction value to 1/2, the LED brightness which has been 0 is adjusted to 1/2 of the LED brightness.

When TempNow is not equal to or lower than the specified temperature (2)-correction temperature (S2370: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2372. In S2372, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or lower than the specified temperature (1)-correction temperature.

If TempNow is equal to or lower than the specified temperature (1)−correction temperature (S2372: Yes), the sub CPU3201 sets the brightness correction value to 1 in S2373. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment processing. As described above, by setting the brightness correction value to 1, the LED brightness is adjusted to ½ and the initial brightness is restored. If TempNow is not equal to or lower than the specified temperature (1)-correction temperature (S2372: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process.

By the brightness control process of the sub-control board 3200, the LED brightness is set to be low based on the specified temperature (1) and the specified temperature (2) when the DMD temperature rises, but remains unchanged when the DMD temperature drops. Instead of returning the LED brightness setting based on the specified temperature (1) and the specified temperature (2), the LED brightness setting adjusted to become smaller when the temperature further decreases by the temperature set by the correction temperature is returned. I am trying. With such a configuration, when the brightness of the LED light source is returned, the DMD temperature change is carefully judged and the brightness is adjusted, and as a result, a high-quality image with a high visual effect can be safely projected. You can

FIG. 229 is a graph illustrating how the brightness of the LED light source is adjusted by changing the DMD temperature. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in FIG. 229 is based on the number of times of temperature acquisition in which the DMD temperature different from the previous time is acquired, as in FIG. 218, and is not based on time. The vertical axis (left side) of the graph shown in FIG. 229 shows the DMD temperature (° C.), and the horizontal axis (right side) shows the LED luminance (%).

As shown in FIG. 229, when the DMD temperature rises from 46.00° C. to 65.00° C. from the temperature acquisition number=“0” to the temperature acquisition number “12”, the DMD temperature becomes 50° C. (that is, the specified temperature (1 )) When it is above (that is, at the point of X1 of the temperature acquisition number "3"), the LED brightness is adjusted from 100% to 50% (the brightness correction value is 1/2). After that, when the DMD temperature becomes 64° C. (that is, the specified temperature (2)) or higher (that is, at the point X2 of the temperature acquisition number “12”), the LED brightness is adjusted from 50% to 0% ( The brightness correction value is 0).

After the DMD temperature becomes 64° C. or higher, the DMD temperature temporarily falls below 64° C. at the temperature acquisition number “14”, but even in this case, the LED brightness adjusted to 0% is not changed. The DMD temperature becomes 64° C. or higher again at the temperature acquisition number “15”, and then falls below 64° C. at the temperature acquisition number “17”, but here again, the LED brightness is not adjusted, and the temperature is 59.00° C. (that is, the specified value). When the temperature falls below the temperature (2)-corrected temperature (5° C.) (at the point X3 of the temperature acquisition count “19”), the LED brightness is returned from 0% to 50%. After that, when the DMD temperature reaches 50° C. (that is, the specified temperature (1)) in the temperature acquisition number “22”, the LED brightness is not adjusted and 45.00° C. (that is, the specified temperature (1)). -When the temperature has dropped to the corrected temperature (5°C) (at the point of X4 of the temperature acquisition number "24"), the LED brightness is returned from 50% to 100%.

Thus, when the DMD temperature rises, the LED brightness is adjusted based on the relationship between the DMD temperature and the specified temperature (1) and the specified temperature (2), but when the DMD temperature drops, the DMD temperature decreases. The LED brightness is adjusted based on the relationship between the temperature and the temperature lower than the specified temperature (1) by the correction temperature and the temperature lower than the specified temperature (2) by the correction temperature.

The specified temperature (1), the specified temperature (2), the correction temperature, and the brightness correction value can be set to various values different from the above. Further, in the present embodiment, the three LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) are provided, but the LED brightness for these may be controlled to be uniformly adjusted, or may be individually adjusted. When individually adjusting the LED brightness, for example, the brightness of each LED light source may be adjusted according to different specified temperature (1) specified temperature (2), correction temperature, and brightness correction value.

Further, here, the gradual brightness adjustment according to the specified temperature is performed in two stages, but it may be performed in more stages, and different stages are adjusted in the rising and falling phases of the DMD temperature. May be. In this case, when the DMD temperature rises from the specified temperature (1) over the specified temperature (2) and then drops to the specified temperature (1), the brightness returns to the initial brightness (here, 100%->0%-). >100%), the brightness during this period (between 0% and 100%) can be set to be different between the rising phase and the falling phase (the brightness correction value is not limited to 1/2). ). Further, the correction temperature corresponding to the specified temperature may be different for each specified temperature. In addition, in this example, the brightness is set to 0% when the DMD temperature is equal to or higher than the specified temperature (2), but this is merely an example, and it may be set to another small value such as 2% or 3%. Can also Further, the prescribed temperature may be fixedly provided without providing the correction temperature itself. For example, the specified temperature (1) is 50° C., the specified temperature (2) is 64° C., the temperature for returning the LED brightness from 0% to 50% is 59° C., and the temperature for returning the LED brightness from 50% to 100% is 45° C. Good. Further, the correction temperature is not fixed to 5° C., and can be appropriately changed according to various conditions such as the brightness, the operating time (for the gaming machine 3001 and the projector device 3300), and the outside air temperature. Further, the correction temperature may be appropriately set by the gaming machine 3001 or the projector device 3300.

Even if the DMD temperature fluctuates around the specified temperature (1) or the specified temperature (2) many times by providing the correction temperature as in the present modification, the LED brightness is updated each time. Is prevented from changing frequently.

(Warning due to temperature rise of DMD (Modification 2))
Another modification of the function of issuing a warning based on the temperature rise of the DMD 3333 described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227 will be described. In this modification, it is determined whether or not to perform the warning screen display control processing based on the DMD temperature, depending on the mode of change in the DMD temperature.

FIG. 230 shows conditions relating to the display of the warning screen. Condition F and condition G are conditions for maintaining the displayed warning screen or the hidden warning screen as it is, and condition H and condition I are the warning screen shown in FIG. 222 described above. This is a condition for displaying the warning screen (1) based on the same judgment as the display control process (see conditions A to E in FIG. 216).

The condition F is a condition that satisfies the relationship of (F-1)TempOld1-TempNow≧first value. Here, the first value is a value such as 10.

Condition G is (G-1) TempOld1-TempNow<first value, (G-2) TempOld2-TempOld1≧first value, (G-3) TempOw-TempOld1≧second value. It is a condition that all three conditions of being present are satisfied. Here, the second value is a value such as 3, for example.

The condition H is (H-1)TempOld1-TempNow<first value, (H-2)TempOld2-TempOld1≧first value, (H-3)TempNow-TempOld1<second value. It is a condition that all three conditions of being present are satisfied.

The condition I is a condition that all of the two conditions of (I-1) TempOld1-TempNow<first value and (I-2) TempOld2-TempOld1<first value are satisfied.

Under the conditions F to I, when the difference between the current DMD temperature and the previous DMD temperature is equal to or larger than the first value, the change in the current DMD temperature and the previous DMD temperature is displayed in the warning screen display control process. It will not be used. When the difference between the current DMD temperature and the previous DMD temperature is less than the second value, the change between the current DMD temperature and the previous DMD temperature is used for the warning screen display control processing.

Note that in each condition shown in FIG. 230, the arithmetic results of “TempNow-TempOld1”, “TempOld1-TemNow”, and “TempOld2-TempOld1” are compared with the first value and the second value. The arithmetic result may be compared with the first value and the second value as absolute values excluding the concept of plus and minus, or may be compared with the first and second values in consideration of plus and minus. May be. At the same time, the first value and the second value may have the concept of plus or minus. Moreover, a value equal to or smaller than the first value can be set as the second value, and for example, the first value and the second value can be the same value. However, as shown in this example, the second value can be set to a value smaller than the first value (that is, the first value is 10 and the second value is 3 here). With such a setting, the display/non-display of the warning screen is appropriately controlled without being affected by a large temporary change in the detected temperature.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232, a process of controlling whether or not to determine whether or not to display the warning screen (1) according to the temperature change of the DMD 3333 will be described. This process is a modification of the warning screen display control process shown in FIG. 222, and is called in the projector temperature warning screen determination process of FIG. 221 executed by the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 (see S2269). Note that the process shown in FIG. 232 is the same as S2291 to S2304 in the warning screen display control process shown in FIG. 222, so the same reference numerals are given and the description of each process is omitted, and only the process of FIG. 231 will be described. To do.

First, in S2391, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 determines whether or not TempOld1-TempNow is greater than or equal to a first value. When TempOld1-TempNow is greater than or equal to the first value (S2391: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2394. If TempOld1-TempNow is not equal to or greater than the first value (S2391: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2392.

Next, in S2392, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not TempOld2-TempOld1 is greater than or equal to the first value. When TempOld2-TempOld1 is not equal to or larger than the first value (S2392: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to S2291 shown in FIG. 232 and thereafter performs the same process as the warning screen display control process shown in FIG. 222. When TempOld2-TempOld1 is greater than or equal to the first value (S2392: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2393.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2393 whether TempNow-TempOld1 is less than the second value. When TempNow-TempOld1 is not less than the second value (S2393: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2394. If TempNow-TempOld1 is less than the second value (S2393: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to S2291 shown in FIG. 232 and thereafter performs the same process as the display control process of the warning screen shown in FIG.

The sub CPU 3201 determines in S2394 that the screen display should be maintained.

FIG. 233 is a diagram exemplifying a transition of the DMD temperature at each temperature acquisition number and how a warning screen is displayed according to the change of the DMD temperature. The horizontal axis of the graph shown in the upper side of FIG. 233 is based on the number of times of temperature acquisition in which the DMD temperature different from the previous time is acquired, as in FIG. 218, and is not based on time. The vertical axis represents the DMD temperature (°C).

Here, the warning temperature and the stable temperature used in the determination of the conditions A to D are 50° C. and 49° C., respectively. The prescribed number of temperature drops is 3 times. Further, the first value and the second value used in the determination of the conditions F to I are 10 and 3, respectively. In addition, here, in the determination of the conditions F to I, the deviation of the DMD temperature is determined based on the absolute value thereof.

The number of times of temperature acquisition increases with the passage of time. For example, if the current DMD temperature (TempNow) is the DMD temperature of the number of times of temperature acquisition=“3”, the DMD temperature (TempOld1) immediately before that is The DMD temperature of the number of times of temperature acquisition=“2”, and the DMD temperature (TempOld2) two times before is the DMD temperature of the number of times of temperature acquisition=“1”.

First, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition count=“0” is 47° C., and the TempNow is “47”. At this point, the warning screen is not displayed.

Next, the DMD temperature acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions=“1” is 48.5° C., TempNow is “48.5”, and TempOld1 is “47”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, it corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied, the conditions A to D are not satisfied, so the condition E is satisfied. Then, the state is maintained (that is, the state where the warning screen is not displayed is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions=“2” is 47° C., TempNow is “47”, TempOld1 is “48.5”, and TempOld2 is “47”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, it corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied, the conditions A to D are not satisfied, so the condition E is satisfied. Then, the state is maintained (that is, the state where the warning screen is not displayed is maintained). The DMD temperatures acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions=“3” and “4” are 48.5° C. and 47° C., respectively, and the state is maintained in the same manner as above.

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition number=“5” is 49° C., TempNow is “49”, TempOld1 is “47”, and TempOld2 is “48.5”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, it does not correspond to the conditions A to D. Therefore, the condition E is satisfied. And the state is maintained (that is, the state where the warning screen is not displayed is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition number=“6” is 54° C., TempNow is “54”, TempOld1 is “49”, and TempOld2 is “47”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied, the TempNowSt changes upward, the TempNow is equal to or higher than the warning temperature, and the TempOld1. Is below the warning temperature, the condition A is met and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition count=“7” is 53° C., TempNow is “53”, TempOld1 is “54”, and TempOld2 is “49”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, it does not correspond to the conditions A to D. Therefore, the condition E is satisfied. And the state is maintained (that is, the display state of the warning screen (1) is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition number=“8” is 52° C., TempNow is “52”, TempOld1 is “53”, and TempOld2 is “54”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, it does not correspond to the conditions A to D. Therefore, the condition E is satisfied. And the state is maintained (that is, the display state of the warning screen (1) is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions=“9” is 51° C., TempNow is “51”, TempOld1 is “52”, TempOld2 is “53”, and TempOld3 is “54”. Here, when considering whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when considering whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, since the downward transition continues three times, The condition D is met, and the warning screen (1) is hidden.

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition number=“10” is 60° C., TempNow is “60”, TempOld1 is “51”, and TempOld2 is “52”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this also corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied there, it does not correspond to the conditions A to D. Therefore, the condition E is satisfied. And the state is maintained (that is, the state where the warning screen is not displayed is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition number=“11” is 47° C., TempNow is “47”, TempOld1 is “60”, and TempOld2 is “51”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition F, and the state is maintained there (that is, the state where the warning screen is not displayed is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition number=“12” is 55° C., TempNow is “55”, TempOld1 is “47”, and TempOld2 is “60”. Here, when considering whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition G, and the state is maintained there (that is, the state where the warning screen is not displayed is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition number=“13” is 56° C., TempNow is “56”, TempOld1 is “55”, and TempOld2 is “47”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied, then TempNowSt changes upward, TempNow is equal to or higher than the warning temperature, and TempOld1. Is equal to or higher than the warning temperature, and further TempNowSt and TempOld1St are increasing, so the condition B is met and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

Next, the DMD temperature acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions=“14” is 58° C., TempNow is “58”, TempOld1 is “56”, and TempOld2 is “55”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition I, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied, then TempNowSt changes upward, TempNow is equal to or higher than the warning temperature, and TempOld1. Is equal to or higher than the warning temperature, and further TempNowSt and TempOld1St are increasing, so the condition B is met and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

Next, the DMD temperature acquired when the temperature acquisition count=“15” is 48° C., TempNow is “48”, TempOld1 is “58”, and TempOld2 is “56”. Here, considering whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition F, and the state is maintained there (that is, the display state of the warning screen (1) is maintained).

Next, the DMD temperature acquired when the number of temperature acquisitions=“16” is 50° C., TempNow is “50”, TempOld1 is “48”, and TempOld2 is “58”. Here, when it is examined whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition H, and when it is examined whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied, then TempNowSt changes upward, TempNow is equal to or higher than the warning temperature, and TempOld1. Is lower than the warning temperature and TempNowSt is increasing, the condition A is met and the warning screen (1) is displayed.

Next, the DMD temperature acquired at the temperature acquisition count=“17” is 49° C., TempNow is “49”, TempOld1 is “50”, and TempOld2 is “48”. Here, when examining whether or not the conditions F to I are satisfied, this corresponds to the condition I, and when examining whether or not the conditions A to E are satisfied, TempNowSt changes downward and TempNow is equal to or lower than the stable temperature. Therefore, the condition C is met and the warning screen (1) is hidden.

As described above, according to the modified example of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the warning screen from being sensitively displayed or hidden in response to the abrupt change of the DMD temperature, and as a result, the visual image It is possible to safely project high-quality images with high effect.

In addition, as described above, regarding the subtraction result related to TempNow, TempOld1, and the like, the concept of plus or minus may be excluded (that is, the absolute value may be used) to determine the condition.

If there is no concept of plus or minus, when the DMD temperature suddenly drops or rises, it is possible to control so that the temperature at that time is not used for the judgment regarding the warning screen, but if there is the concept of plus or minus It is possible to determine whether or not to use the temperature at that time for the determination regarding the warning screen according to either the sudden drop of the DMD temperature or the rapid increase of the DMD temperature.

(Warning due to temperature rise of DMD (Modification 3))
Another modification of the function of issuing a warning based on the temperature rise of the DMD 3333 described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227 will be described. In this modification, the number of times the warning screen is displayed is cumulatively recorded and the number of temperature errors is grasped.

Here, the above processing will be described with reference to FIG. 234. This process is a modification of the projector temperature warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 221, and since many processes are the same as the process in FIG. 221, these are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted and changed. Only the processing (S2411, S2412) will be described.

In S2411 of FIG. 234, if it is determined that TempNow has been updated in S2267 (S2267: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 executes the warning screen display control process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 236. Next, the sub CPU3201 shifts to the processing of S2268.

Further, the sub CPU 3201 executes the error history determination processing in S2412 after S2266 or S2271 in FIG. 234. This processing will be described next with reference to FIG. 235.

FIG. 235 shows an error history determination process executed by the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200.

First, in step S2431, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the warning screen (2) is set to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023. When the warning screen (2) is not set to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2431: No), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2434. When the warning screen (2) is set to be displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2431: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2432, where the warning screen (2) is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023. It is determined whether or not it is being displayed.

When the warning screen (2) is being displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2432: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2434. When the warning screen (2) is not being displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 (S2432: No), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2433.

Next, in step S2433, the sub CPU 3201 adds 1 to the display count of the warning screen (2). In this way, when the warning screen (2) is not continuously displayed (when it is newly displayed), the number of times the warning screen (2) is displayed is counted up.

After that, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2434 whether the warning screen (1) is set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like. When the warning screen (1) is not set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2434: No), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2439. When the warning screen (1) is set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2434: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2435, where the warning screen (1) is displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like. It is determined whether or not it is being displayed. This is to increase the number of times the warning screen (1) is displayed when the warning screen (1) is not continuously displayed.

When the warning screen (1) is not being displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2435: No), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2436. When the warning screen (1) is being displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the like (S2435: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2439.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the power of the gaming machine 3001 is restored (S2436). This is because the display of the warning screen (1) that may be displayed when the power is restored is not counted. When the power is restored (S2436: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2439. When the power is not restored (S2436: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2437 and determines whether TempNow-TempOld1 is equal to or more than a predetermined value.

If TempNow-TempOld1 is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (S2437: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2439. The predetermined value is, for example, 15° C., and the difference between the two temperatures poses a problem, so the absolute value may be used for determination. If TempNow-TempOld1 is not equal to or larger than the predetermined value (S2437: No), the sub CPU 3201 adds 1 to the number of times of display of the warning screen (1) in S2438.

Next, in step S2439, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether the DMD temperature has been updated. If the DMD temperature has not been updated (S2439: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the error history determination process. If the DMD temperature has been updated (S2439: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2440 whether TempNow is 0° C. or not.

If TempNow is not 0° C. (S2440: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the error history determination process. When TempNow is 0° C. (S2440: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 adds 1 to the number of times 0° C. is recorded in S2441, and thereafter ends the error history determination process. Note that the number of times 0° C. is recorded can also be executed in the projector status reception processing as shown in FIG. 224.

The warning screen display control process shown in FIG. 236 is similar to the warning screen display control process described with reference to FIG. 222, and the same processes as those in FIG. 222 are designated by the same reference numerals. ing. Here, description of individual processing is omitted. However, in the warning screen display control process of FIG. 236, compared to the same process of FIG. 222, when TempOld1 becomes 0° C. or lower (for example, 0° C.), it is determined that the screen display is maintained (S2291, S2292) has been deleted.

An actual example of the number of times the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) are displayed in the present modification has been outlined with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220. Here, with reference to FIG. Another pattern for screen counting will be described.

FIG. 237 shows the same DMD temperature transition as shown in FIG. 219. In the temperature transition shown in FIG. 237, the DMD temperature (TempNow) is 0° C. when the temperature acquisition number=“35”, and the DMD temperature (TempNow) is 50.25° C. when the temperature acquisition number=“36”. However, as described in the warning screen display control processing shown in FIG. 236, in this example, when TempOld1 becomes 0° C. or lower (for example, 0° C.), it is determined that the screen display should be maintained ( Since S2291, S2292 in FIG. 222 are deleted, the temperature acquisition count=“36” corresponds to the condition A (see S2293, S2299, S2300, and S2303 in FIG. 236).

In such a situation, when the error history determination process shown in FIG. 235 is performed, the warning screen (1) is set for the temperature acquisition count=“36”, and the warning screen is not displayed and the power is restored. , TempNow (50.25° C.)−TempOld1 (0.00° C.)≧15° C., and the number of times the warning screen (1) is displayed is not counted up (see S2434 to S2438 in FIG. 235).

Therefore, in FIG. 237, when the temperature acquisition count=“36” and the warning screen (1) according to the condition A is displayed, the projector temperature warning count is not counted up. In the present modification, Such control is possible.

The DMD temperature used in the DMD temperature diagnosis processing of S2031 shown in FIG. 181 is corrected by 0° C. with respect to the DMD temperature on the projector device 3300 side (that is, the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d is lower than 0° C. or 0° C.). When the temperature is equal to or lower than 0° C., the correction result of setting the detected temperature to 0° C. is used, and the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side to the gaming machine 3001 side is the projector device 3300 side. DMD temperature corrected by 0°C. On the other hand, the gaming machine 3001 side also performs 0° C. correction on the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side (the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side and received by the gaming machine 3001 side).

Thus, originally, the DMD temperature grasped by the gaming machine 3001 side does not show a negative value, but the DMD temperature value transmitted from the projector device 3300 side shows a negative value due to noise or the like. Therefore, the game machine 3001 side is also controlled to perform 0° C. correction. However, it is assumed that the outside air temperature is very low and the DMD temperature transmitted from the projector device 3300 side continues to show 0° C. Therefore, in such a case, the warning notification by continuous 0° C. should not be issued. It may be set and controlled.

As described above, by the processing shown in FIGS. 234 to 236, the number of times the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) are displayed and the temperature error (that is, the DMD temperature which is considered to be mainly due to the noise error) is 0. It is possible to cumulatively store the number of times the error is recognized as °C.

Further, the number of times of display and the number of temperature errors stored in this way can be converted into a two-dimensional code and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like. For example, the person in charge of operation/maintenance of the gaming machine 3001 displays a hole menu related to operation/maintenance on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 by performing a predetermined special operation on the gaming machine 3001, and the two-dimensional code is displayed there. Is displayed, a two-dimensional code including the number of times the warning screen is displayed and temperature error data is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

The operation/maintenance staff can grasp the display count and the temperature error count of the gaming machine 3001 by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like and performing a predetermined decoding process. Further, the person in charge of operation/maintenance can also connect a portable terminal or the like to the gaming machine 3001 and copy the data relating to the number of display times and the number of temperature errors from the storage area.

In addition, in this case, the number of times the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) are displayed and the number of temperature errors are data accumulated after the gaming machine 3001 first operates. It can be accumulated and stored in a predetermined period such as daily or monthly.

Thus, according to the modified example of the present embodiment, the number of times the warning screen (1) and the warning screen (2) are displayed and the number of temperature errors are stored, and the error status of the projector device 3300 is displayed on the warning screen. It is possible to grasp from a viewpoint, and as a result, it is possible to safely project a high-quality image having a high image visual effect.

(Warning, etc. due to temperature rise of DMD (Modification 4))
Another modification of the function of issuing a warning based on the temperature rise of the DMD 3333 described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227 will be described. In this modification, a process of adjusting the brightness of the projector device 3300 according to the temperature change of the DMD 3333 will be described. This process can be executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds by the sub device task (see FIG. 73) of the sub control board 3200.

In the brightness adjusting process shown in FIG. 238, for example, when the DMD temperature rises, if the DMD temperature exceeds the reference operating temperature, the brightness value is lowered by 2.5° C. units and the DMD temperature is lowered, for example. In the aspect, for example, the brightness value is increased in units of 5°C. That is, when the DMD temperature rises, the brightness value is increased quickly, and when the DMD temperature falls, the brightness value is controlled to increase more slowly than when the brightness value is decreased. Further, when the DMD temperature decreases and reaches the reference operating temperature, the brightness value is controlled to return to the original set brightness value (initial brightness) when the temperature equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature elapses for a predetermined time.

In the brightness adjustment processing shown in FIG. 238, first, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 in S2461. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2462 whether the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the transmission cycle counter is not 250 or more (S2462: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2465. When the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more (S2462: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2463.

Next, in S2463, the sub CPU3201 sets a status request for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d indicating the temperature near the DMD 3333. A value indicating the temperature (DMD temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341d is set as the status value. By such a status request, the DMD temperature is transmitted from the projector device 3300.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the transmission cycle counter (S2464). By handling the transmission cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can make a status request every second.

Next, the sub CPU3201 determines whether or not TempNow (current DMD temperature) is updated (S2465). If TempNow is not updated (S2465: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When TempNow is updated (S2465: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2466 whether TempNowSt is in a downward transition.

When TempNowSt is not the downward transition (S2466: No), that is, when it is the upward transition, the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2471. When the TempNowSt is decreasing (S2466: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 controls to increase the brightness value by 2 each time the DMD temperature decreases by 5° C. in S2467. For example, when the brightness value of the LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) is set to 0% to 100%, this brightness value is set for each DMD temperature at a predetermined adjustment unit temperature (for example, every 5° C. decrease). Is increased by 2% (or increased by 2% of the initial luminance).

Next, in step S2468, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature. If TempNow is not lower than or equal to the reference operating temperature (S2468: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When TempNow is equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature (S2468: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2469 whether or not the state equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature is maintained for a stable time or longer. The reference operating temperature is set to 25° C. in this example, but another temperature can be selected.

When the state below the reference operating temperature is not maintained for a stable time or longer (S2469: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When the state below the reference operating temperature is maintained for a stable time or longer (S2469: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets the brightness value to 100 (S2470), and then ends the brightness adjustment process. Note that in this example, the stabilization time is set to 1 minute, but other periods can be selected. Setting the brightness value to 100 means returning the brightness value to the initial brightness.

In S2471, the sub CPU determines whether or not TempNow is equal to or higher than the reference operating temperature. If TempNow is not equal to or higher than the reference operating temperature (S2471: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the brightness adjustment process. When TempNow is equal to or higher than the reference operation temperature (S2471: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 lowers the brightness value by 2 in step S2472 for each predetermined adjustment unit temperature (for example, every 2.5° C. increase) of the DMD temperature. Control is performed, and then the brightness adjustment processing ends.

If the reference operating temperature is 25° C. and the luminance value at 25° C. is 100, the luminance value is changed from 25° C. to 27.5° C. by the luminance adjusting process. Will be 98. That is, when the DMD temperature increases by 2.5° C., the brightness value is controlled to decrease by 2.

Although the three LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) are provided in the present embodiment, the LED brightness of these LEDs may be controlled to be uniformly adjusted, or may be adjusted individually. Further, when the LED brightness is individually adjusted, for example, different reference operating temperatures, a decrease range of the brightness value when the DMD temperature rises and an adjustment unit temperature, an increase range of the brightness value when the DMD temperature decreases and an adjustment unit temperature, and a stabilization time. May be set for each LED light source.

Also, in this example, the adjustment range (decrease range, increase range) of the brightness value is the same “2” both when the DMD temperature rises and when the DMD temperature rises. The adjustment range can be set differently.

With such a configuration, when the DMD temperature rises, the brightness value is quickly lowered for quick response, while when the DMD temperature falls, in order to carefully check the rise again or the rapid temperature change. Since the control is performed so as to slowly increase the brightness value, it is possible to safely project a high-quality image having a high image visual effect.

(Warning, etc. due to temperature rise of DMD (Modification 5))
Another modification of the function of issuing a warning based on the temperature rise of the DMD 3333 described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 227 will be described. In this modification, when the DMD temperature of the previous time is other than 0° C. and the DMD temperature of this time is 0° C., and thereafter, when the DMD temperature is not updated for a predetermined period, the warning screen is displayed.

Here, the above processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 239 and 240. This process is a modification of the projector temperature warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 221, and since some of the processes are the same as the processes of FIG. 221, the same reference numerals are given to these processes and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 increments the transmission cycle counter by 1 in S2491. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2492 whether the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more.

If the transmission cycle counter is not equal to or greater than 250 (S2492: No), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to the process of S2511 of FIG. When the transmission cycle counter is 250 or more (S2492: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2493.

Next, in step S2493, the sub CPU 3201 sets a status request for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d indicating the temperature near the DMD 3333. A value indicating the temperature (DMD temperature) detected by the temperature sensor 3341d is set as the status value. By such a status request, the DMD temperature is transmitted from the projector device 3300.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 clears the transmission cycle counter (S2494). By handling the transmission cycle counter in this way, the sub CPU 3201 can make a status request every second.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to S2511 in FIG. 240, and determines there whether TempNow is 0° C. or not. When TempNow is not 0° C. (S2511: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2265 similar to that shown in FIG. 221, and determines whether TempNow is 64° C. or higher. If TempNow is 0° C. (S2511: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2512 whether TempOld1 is not 0° C.

When TempOld1 is 0° C. (S2512: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2265. If TempOld1 is not 0° C. (S2512: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2513 whether TempNow is updated for 1 second or longer. If TempNow is not updated for 1 second or longer (S2513: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 proceeds to S2266 similar to that shown in FIG. 221, and sets to display the warning screen (2). When TempNow is updated within 1 second (S2513: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to S2265.

In this example, it is determined whether or not TempNow is updated for a period (1 second) that is an interval for acquiring the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 3341d, which means that TempNow is 0°C. And that TempOld1 is other than 0° C. indicates whether or not it is resolved at the timing when TempNow is acquired next. For example, as in the projector temperature warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 221, if TempNow does not change, the process ends without doing anything (see S2267). Therefore, even if TempNow continues with an abnormal value, This cannot be detected. In this modification, such a situation can be effectively grasped and a warning screen can be displayed.

Further, a reference period other than 1 second may be provided in order to determine that the statuses of TempNow and TempOld1 are not updated for a certain period of time.

In the projector control board 3310 of the projector device 3300, when transmitting the DMD temperature to the sub control board 3200, it is determined whether the DMD temperature is negative, and if the DMD temperature is negative, the DMD temperature is negative. It can be configured to correct the DMD temperature to 0°C.

With this configuration, when the DMD temperature is obtained by the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200, if the DMD temperature is negative, it can be understood that it is an influence of noise or the like, and the negative DMD temperature is obtained. Is acquired as the number of occurrences of noise and the like, and more detailed error information can be obtained.

With such a configuration, when the DMD temperature of the previous time is other than 0° C. and the DMD temperature of this time is 0° C., and thereafter, when the DMD temperature is not updated for a predetermined period, a warning screen is displayed and an error occurs As a result, it is possible to safely project a high-quality image having a high image visual effect.

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the DMD temperature is negative and correct the DMD temperature to 0° C. if the DMD temperature is negative. The correction mode is merely an example, and when the detected DMD temperature is negative, the correction may be performed to a value other than 0° C., which is higher than the detected temperature. For example, when the DMD temperature is −20° C., it is possible to set the detection temperature to −10° C. or 20° C. which is higher than that temperature.

Further, although various processing/functions regarding the warning by the DMD temperature information and the like have been described so far in the present embodiment, similar processing/functions are detected near the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B). It can also be applied to the temperature (LED temperature). It is also possible to provide a temperature sensor near the exhaust fans (3342a, 3342b) and apply the above-mentioned processing/functions to the temperature detected by these.

(Intake fan rotation speed error control)
As described above, the gaming machine 3001 according to the second embodiment includes the intake fan 3210 in the projector cover 3101 and further includes the pulse sensor 3211 for detecting the rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the intake fan 3210. (See FIG. 171). As shown in FIG. 177, intake fan 3210 cools projector device 3300 by taking in external air from intake port 3103b of projector cover 3101 and sending the air to projector device 3300.

In the present embodiment, it is monitored whether or not the intake fan 3210 is operating normally, and if there is a problem, a warning screen is displayed to inform that the inspection is required.

FIG. 241 shows a warning screen displayed by an instruction from the sub control board 3200. FIG. 241(a) shows a warning screen (3) displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 when the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 satisfies the condition J described later. There is. This warning screen (3) can be displayed for 3 minutes, for example.

FIG. 241(b) shows a warning screen (4) displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 when the rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 satisfies a condition K described later. There is. This warning screen (4) can be displayed until the game machine 3001 is cut off, for example.

FIG. 242 shows conditions relating to the display of the warning screen and the like. The condition J is (J-1) that the FAN rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 is acquired every one second from the start, and the average calculated from the FAN rotation speeds for 5 seconds from the beginning obtained in this way is the specified value. When it is 1 or less, the warning screen (3) is set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

In this example, the warning screen (3) is displayed for 3 minutes. Further, the prescribed value 1 is a rotation speed (rotation speed) obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210. For example, when the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 is 12000 rpm, the default value 1 is 9000 rpm.

Condition K is a warning screen (4) when the FAN rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 first (for example, at the first second) after starting (K-1) is a specified value 2 or less, The display is set to be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091 or the sub liquid crystal display device 3023. Further, the brightness of the projected image of the projector device 3300 is set to 0.

In this example, the warning screen (4) is displayed until the game machine 3001 is cut off. Further, the prescribed value 2 is a rotation speed (rotation speed) obtained by subtracting 60% from the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210. For example, when the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 is 12000 rpm, the default value 2 is 4800 rpm.

Further, when the condition K is satisfied, the energization of the intake fan 3210 can be stopped.

Next, the intake fan warning screen determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 243. This process can be executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds by the sub device task (see FIG. 73) of the sub control board 3200. Further, since it is determined whether or not the warning screen is displayed when the gaming machine 3001 is activated, it is possible to end the execution at a predetermined timing after the gaming machine 3001 is activated.

First, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200 increments the acquisition cycle counter by 1 in S2531. Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2532 whether the acquisition cycle counter is 250 or more.

When the acquisition cycle counter is not equal to or greater than 250 (S2532: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of S2535. When the acquisition cycle counter is 250 or more (S2532: Yes), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the processing of the next S2533.

Next, in step S2533, the sub CPU 3201 acquires the rotation speed (FAN rotation speed) of the intake fan 3210 from the pulse sensor 3211. As described above, regarding the acquisition of the DMD temperature, the sub CPU 3201 communicates with the projector device 3300 by the status request to acquire the DMD temperature, but the pulse sensor 3211 is connected to the sub control board 3200. Therefore (see FIG. 171), the FAN rotation speed can be directly acquired from the pulse sensor 3211 here.

Next, the sub CPU3201 clears the acquisition cycle counter (S2534). With such handling of the acquisition cycle counter, the sub CPU 3201 can acquire the FAN rotation speed every one second.

Next, in S2535, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not the FAN rotation speed in the first cycle (that is, the first second at the time of startup) is equal to or less than the specified number 2. When the FAN rotation number in the first cycle is not equal to or less than the specified number 2 (S2535: No), the sub CPU3201 proceeds to the process of S2538. When the FAN rotation speed in the first cycle is equal to or less than the specified number 2 (S2535: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 sets to display the warning screen (4) on the front screen mechanism 3091, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, or the like in S2536. To do. This determination corresponds to the condition K described above.

The warning screen (4) can be displayed on various display means such as the front screen mechanism 3091 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, but may be displayed on any one of these display means, or two or more. You may make it display on. Note that the warning screen (4) is displayed until the gaming machine 3001 is powered off (power off).

Next, the sub CPU 3201 sets the projection brightness to 0 (S2537). This processing is, for example, an instruction to set the brightness of each of the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) to 0. When the brightness of the LED light source is set to 0% to 100%, the brightness is set to 0%. To be set. The brightness setting for such an LED light source is instructed to the projector device 3300 by a projector setting changing process as shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, for example. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the intake fan warning screen determination process.

At this time, the sub CPU 3201 can also control so that the projection brightness is not 0 but a value smaller than the current setting.

Next, in step S2538, the sub CPU 3201 determines whether or not five FAN rotation speeds have been acquired since the startup. When the FAN rotation number for 5 times has not been acquired (S2538: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the intake fan warning screen determination process. When the FAN rotation speed for 5 times is acquired (S2538: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 calculates the average of the FAN rotation speed for 5 times in S2539.

Next, the sub CPU 3201 determines in S2540 whether or not the average of five FAN rotation speeds is less than or equal to the specified number 1. If the average of the five FAN rotation speeds is not equal to or less than the specified number 1 (S2540: No), the sub CPU 3201 ends the intake fan warning screen determination process. When the average of five FAN rotations is less than or equal to the specified number 1 (S2540: Yes), the sub CPU 3201 displays the warning screen (3) on the front screen mechanism 3091, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, or the like in S2541. To set. This determination corresponds to the condition J described above. After that, the sub CPU 3201 ends the intake fan warning screen determination process.

The warning screen (3) can be displayed on various display means including the front screen mechanism 3091 and the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, but may be displayed on any one of these display means, or two or more. You may make it display on. The warning screen (3) is displayed for 3 minutes.

It should be noted that although the FAN rotation speed for five times is acquired here, it is also possible to acquire a plurality of FAN rotation speeds and obtain the average of the FAN rotation speeds by these FAN rotation speeds. Further, the representative value for evaluating the FAN rotation speed can be determined not by the average of the FAN rotation speed but by other indexes such as the median value and the mode.

Further, in this example, the default value 1 and the default value 2 are set based on the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210, but the default values can be set using various other criteria.

In the determination of the condition K described above, the sub CPU 3201 compares the FAN rotation speed acquired in the first cycle with the default value 2 to determine whether or not the intake fan 3210 has an abnormality. The FAN rotation speed is not the FAN rotation speed when the game is being played by the player, for example, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 3001, and the FAN rotation when the game machine 3001 is started up. Is a number.

However, the FAN rotational speed at the time of startup does not mean the rotational speed at which the intake fan 3210 has not yet reached the stable rotation state, such as when the intake fan 3210 starts up. In this example, after the gaming machine 3001 is started, the intake fan warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 243 is started, and when the acquisition cycle counter reaches 250 (that is, after one second has elapsed since the gaming machine 3001 was started (more Strictly speaking, after 1 second has elapsed from the start of the intake fan warning screen determination process)), the acquired rotation speed is used as the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup.

The rotation speed at such timing is acquired because it is assumed that the intake fan 3210 has reached a stable rotation state immediately after startup at that time. Such timing may be adjusted to other timing based on the model of the intake fan 3210, the number of years elapsed, and the like.

Further, in order to acquire the FAN rotation speed in the stable rotation state at the time of startup, for example, the FAN rotation speed is acquired several times (that is, for several seconds), and the difference in the FAN rotation speed thus acquired becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. In this case, the FAN rotation speed at the time of startup can be used as the FAN rotation speed. At this time, the intake fan warning screen determination process can be executed at intervals shorter than 1 second.

In the present embodiment, when the warning screen (3) and the warning screen (4) are displayed, the number of times of display can be counted up and stored. At this time, the number of times the warning screen (3) is displayed and the number of times the warning screen (4) is displayed can be added together or stored individually.

The number of times of display thus grasped can be converted into a two-dimensional code and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like. For example, the person in charge of operation/maintenance of the gaming machine 3001 displays a hole menu or error screen related to operation/maintenance on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 by performing a predetermined special operation on the gaming machine 3001, and there, When an instruction is given to display the two-dimensional code, the two-dimensional code including the data of the number of times of displaying the warning screen is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023.

The person in charge of operation and maintenance can grasp the number of times of displaying the warning screen related to the intake fan 3210 of the gaming machine 3001 by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like and performing a predetermined decoding process.

According to the present embodiment configured as described above, at the time of startup, the intake fan warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 243 is executed to display the warning screen when an abnormality of the intake fan is detected, while the projector is displayed. The device 3300 detects an abnormality in the LED temperature or the DMD temperature by the projector self-diagnosis processing (see FIG. 181, etc.), and performs forced shutdown or reset as necessary (see FIG. 180).

Furthermore, in order to detect an abnormality of the intake fan 3210 in the game machine 3001 in which the player is playing, the intake fan warning screen determination process is performed to determine the rotation speed abnormality based on the specified value 1 or the specified value 2. Alternatively, the rotation speed abnormality can be determined based on other criteria, and a warning screen as shown in FIG. 241 can be displayed on the front screen mechanism 3091, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023, or the like.

However, at this time, in order not to notify the player of the rotation speed abnormality of the intake fan 3210, it is possible to control not to display the warning screen during the game. For example, even after a predetermined period (at startup (1 second after startup) or 5 seconds after startup) for determining whether to display the warning screen (3) or the warning screen (4), Control not to start displaying these warning screens.

After that, due to the abnormal rotation speed of the intake fan 3210, the temperature near the LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) and the DMD 3333 in the projector device 3300 rises, which causes the projector device 3300 to shut down. (That is, the operation of the projector device 3300 during operation is stopped separately from the gaming machine 3001). After that, when the projector device 3300 in the stopped operation is activated in response to the activation of the gaming machine 3001 (that is, is restored from the power failure), and still satisfies the condition J or the condition K, the front screen mechanism 3091. A warning screen regarding abnormal rotation speed of the intake fan 3210 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3023 or the like. With this configuration, even if the fan rotation speed increases for some reason during the game, the player is not immediately made aware of it, and the player does not recognize the projector device 3300 while the projector device 3300 is stopped. When the game hall manager operates the game machine 3001 by turning off and returning the game machine 3001, the player who is playing the game cannot immediately recognize it, and the game hall manager can recognize that there is a fan error. It will be possible.

Further, the warning screen display after the power is restored as described above (that is, the warning screen is not displayed after the predetermined period for determining the display of the warning screen has elapsed, and the warning screen after the power is restored is displayed. The display method of displaying) can be adopted only for either the warning screen (3) or the warning screen (4). For example, in a situation where both the condition J and the condition K are satisfied, the warning screen (4) is displayed immediately after the predetermined period for determination (in this example, 1 second after activation) has elapsed, After that, when it is determined that the condition J is satisfied, the warning screen (4) is maintained and the warning screen (3) has a predetermined period for determination (5 seconds after startup in this example). It is not displayed even after a lapse of time, and is displayed when the condition J is still satisfied after the power failure of the gaming machine 3001 is restored. The intake fan warning screen determination process shown in FIG. 243 is designed to display either the warning screen (3) or the warning screen (4). In this case, the warning screen (3) and the warning screen (3) are displayed. Both of the screens (4) can be displayed. In that case, it is desirable that the warning screen (3) and the warning screen (4) are notified by different image modes or different notification means.

(Applying to game machines)
In the second embodiment, the projector device 3300 is applied to the gaming machines 3001 and 3001′, the projector device 4300 is applied to the gaming machine 4001, and the projector devices 4300a and 4300b are applied to the gaming machine 4001′. The device 5300 is applied to the gaming machine 5001, and the projector devices 6300a and 6300b are applied to the gaming machine 6001. These have been described. However, the projector device according to the second embodiment is used for a gaming machine as shown below. It can also be applied to a device.

FIG. 244 shows various devices used for a game system of a game arcade such as a so-called pachinko parlor. In this example, a game display device 7001, a game machine 7002, a game medium lending device 7003, and a server device 7004. Are connected as shown in FIG.

The game display device 7001 displays various game information as a projected image by the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment, for example, and is installed so as to be located above each game machine 7002, for example. .. As the game information, the number of game media acquired (the number of acquired games or the number of balls acquired), the number of various games, the game history, etc. are displayed in graphs and numerical values. In addition, the game information also includes effect images and the like related to the game.

The game display device 7001 is provided with a plurality of buttons for a player to operate. The game display device 7001 is connected to the game machine 7002, the game medium lending device 7003, and the server device 7004, and various game information is based on an input signal, a received signal, or an operation by a player. Is displayed on a screen (projected portion) 7110 described later. The gaming display device 7001 may be installed in so-called gaming island units.

The game display device 7001 includes the projector device 3300 described above as an electrical or optical component, a control unit 7400 for controlling the projector device 3300, and the like. The control unit 7400 corresponds to the sub-control board 3200 of the gaming machine 3001 described above, and controls the projector device 3300 and communication control between the gaming machine 7002, the game medium lending device 7003, and the server device 7004. To do. Further, when the operation of the button of the game display device 7001 is detected by the sensor, the control unit 7400 controls the display of the screen 7110 or the like according to the operation. The gaming display device 7001 may include the above-mentioned buttons on a touch panel, and the control unit 7400 may detect an operation on the touch panel.

The game display device 7001 includes an interface unit for communicating with the game machine 7002, the game medium lending device 7003, and the server device 7004, although not particularly shown. The interface section and an external connection terminal board (to be described later) of the gaming machine 7002 are connected by a contact input method, and one-way communication from the gaming machine 7002 to the gaming display device 7001 is possible. The interface unit and the game medium lending device 7003 are connected by a contact output system, for example, by a harness, and bidirectional communication is possible. Further, the interface unit and the server device 7004 are connected to each other by, for example, a wired LAN method using a coaxial cable and a contact output method using a harness, and bidirectional communication is possible. The connection method is not limited to these methods. For example, a wireless LAN method may be used for each connection, or an optical communication method using an optical cable may be used. Further, a combination of these methods may be used.

In FIG. 244, a gaming machine 7002 is shown, and these are, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 7002a and a pachi-slot gaming machine 7002b. These gaming machines 7002 correspond to the gaming machines 3001 and the like described above.

Further, FIG. 244 shows a game medium lending device 7003. In this example, as the game medium lending device 7003, a game ball lending device 7003a installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 7002a and a medal lending device 7003b installed adjacent to the pachi-slot gaming machine 7002b are shown. ..

The game medium lending device 7003 is connected to the server device 7004 via, for example, a switching hub or a controller (not shown). When a player inserts a card, the game medium lending device 7003 uses the server device to obtain identification information (hereinafter simply referred to as “identification information”) such as a card ID or a member ID added to the IC chip or the like of the card. Send to 7004. The server device 7004 transmits the player's ball information stored in association with the received identification information to the game medium lending device 7003. Then, when there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 7004 updates the ball holding information, and the game medium lending device 7003 drives the payout device to execute the game medium payout control. When a player inserts a bill, the balance information corresponding to the amount of the bill (inserted amount) is transmitted to the server device 7004. When there is a payout instruction from the player, the server device 7004 updates the balance information, and the game medium lending device 7003 similarly executes the game medium payout control.

In addition, when the game medium is loaded into each unit counting device 7005 (not shown) by the player's operation or directly from the game machine 7002, each game device lending device 7003 is loaded. The number of played game media is counted, and the counting result is transmitted to the server device 7004 as the player's counting ball information, and the server apparatus 7004 associates the received counting ball information with the identification information added to the card. Remember. If the card is not inserted, the counting ball information received in association with the identification information previously added to the counting card stored in the game medium lending device 7003 is stored.

Note that, here, the server device 7004 manages the player's ball information and the remaining amount information, but the game medium lending device 7003 may manage these information. Further, not only the identification information may be added to the card, but also a storage area may be provided, the storage area may store the information, and the information may be managed. Then, the update of these pieces of information may be performed by the server device 7004 or the game medium lending device 7003. Further, the game ball lending device 7003 or the server device 7004 may manage the ball holding information, and the balance information may be directly stored in the storage area of the card.

FIG. 244 further shows a server device 7004. The server device 7004 is used as a so-called hall computer, and is connected to the game display device 7001 and also to the game medium lending device 7003. The server device 7004 uses the game result management information to be managed (for example, payout history information including the past several days, fraud detection information, etc.) and information about the game store (for example, new machine information, empty machine information, etc.) It is transmitted to the display device 7001.

Further, a POS terminal 7006 (not shown) arranged at a prize exchange counter or the like is connected to the server device 7004. The POS terminal 7006 acquires the player's counting ball information managed by the server device 7004, and manages exchange with a general prize or a special prize designated by the player according to the value corresponding to the counting ball information. Control. The counting ball information is updated according to the value consumed by the free gift exchange, and the updated counting ball information is transmitted to the server device 7004 and stored in association with the player.

The projector device 3300 and the like according to the second embodiment can be used to project an image in such a gaming device. Here, the game device includes, for example, the above-mentioned game display device 7001, a display device such as a data display device, and a signage, a game medium lending device 7003, a server device (hall computer) 7004, a unit counting device 7005, Various devices are included, such as POS terminal 7006. Note that, in these gaming devices, as in the gaming display device 7001, as the gaming information, the number of gaming media acquired (the number of coins or the number of balls acquired), the number of various games, the game history, the effect images regarding the game, and the like. It can be projected on the screen by the projector device 3300 or the like. Such an image (content) of the game information for display is determined by, for example, the control unit 7400 of the game display device 7001 or the like.

Next, an example in which the projector device 3300 according to the second embodiment is applied to the above-mentioned gaming display device 7001 will be described more specifically.

FIG. 245 shows a cross section of the game display device 7001. As shown in FIG. 245, in the game display device 7001, the entire front surface of the screen unit 7100 is composed of a concave screen 7110, and the entire front surface side of the screen 7110 becomes a concave display surface 7101 having a gentle slope. ing. The gaming display device 7001 does not have a light emitting surface or buttons.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245, an LED substrate 7060 and a reflection plate 7061 are provided outside the rear surface 7010d of the housing 7010, which is the rear surface side of the reflector 7200. A plurality of LEDs 7060A are mounted on the LED substrate 7060 so as to be annularly positioned with respect to the back surface 7010d, and the LEDs 7060A are arranged so that light can be emitted toward the reflection plate 7061. The light of the LED 7060A is reflected by the reflection plate 7061 to illuminate the periphery of the game display device 7001 and the peripheral portion of the screen 7110 from behind.

In addition, the game display device 7001 can display a stereoscopic image with depth because the screen 7110 is formed in a concave shape. This can further enhance the visual effect and the decorative effect.

Further, the light ray α emitted from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the reflector 7200, then passes through the incident surface 7111 of the screen 7110, and reaches the upper end portion of the display surface 7101. The light beam β emitted from the projector device 3300 is reflected by the reflector 7200, then passes through the incident surface 7111 of the screen 7110, and reaches the lower end portion of the display surface 7101.

As a result, a projected image showing various game information is displayed between the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the display surface 7101 of the screen 7110. In addition, at the left and right sides of the projected image and at the respective end portions of the display surface 7101 (the above-mentioned peripheral portion of the screen 7110), the light of the LED 7060A is reflected by the reflection plate 7061, so that the game state or the like is achieved. The corresponding lighting and blinking is performed.

In this way, the game display device 7001 is configured to include a so-called rear projector screen in which an image projected from the projector device 3300 is displayed on the display surface 7101 through the incident surface 7111 of the screen 7110. However, the configuration is not limited to this.

Note that the projector device 3300 is provided with a projector cover around the same as in the case of the gaming machine 3001, but the illustration is omitted in FIG. 245.

FIG. 246 is an exploded perspective view of the game display device 7001. As shown in FIG. 246, the base body G101 has a flat plate-shaped back surface portion G101a and a bottom surface portion G101b, and constitutes a back surface wall and a bottom surface wall of the housing G10, respectively. The projector device 3300 is mounted on the bottom surface portion G101b so as to be placed thereon. The projector device 3300 is represented by hatching in FIG. 246. Further, the reflector 7200 is arranged along the inner wall of the back surface portion G101a.

The projector housing G102 is mounted on the bottom surface portion G101b so as to cover the projector device 3300, and thus houses the projector device 3300 in the internal space. The upper part of the internal space is open so that the image light emitted from the projector device 3300 can reach the reflector 7200 arranged on the back surface portion G101a. The screen unit 7100 is attached so as to cover the reflector 7200, and is configured to irradiate the screen 7110 with the image light reflected by the reflector 7200.

Similar to the gaming machine 3001, a projector cover 7300 is arranged around the projector device 3300, and external air is sent to the projector device 3300 to exhaust heat. More specifically, an intake fan 7310 is arranged on the right side inside the projector cover 7300, and external air is taken into the inside of the projector cover 7300 from an intake port 7320b provided on the front right side of the projector cover 7300. (Arrow Z1). The air thus taken in is sent toward the ventilation port 3404b of the projector device 3300. After that, the air taken in from the ventilation port 3404b of the projector device 3300 passes through the inside of the projector device 3300 (arrow Z2) and is discharged to the ventilation port 3404a on the opposite side, and is exhausted to the outside from the exhaust port 7320a of the projector cover 7300. (Arrow Z3).

Such a U-shaped air flow path formed by the projector cover 7300 and the projector device 3300 is a U-shaped air flow formed by the projector cover 3101 and the projector device 3300 with respect to the gaming machine 3001 described above. It is similar to the road. Further, similarly to the gaming machine 3001, a pulse sensor 7311 that transmits a pulse signal corresponding to the rotation speed of the intake fan 7310 to the control unit 7400 as a rotation speed detection signal is provided.

The projector housing G102 is provided with a ventilation port 7330b for taking in air from the outside and a ventilation port 7330a for discharging the air to the outside at positions corresponding to the intake port 7320b and the exhaust port 7320a of the projector cover 7330, respectively. ..

The control unit 7400 is arranged below the projector device 3300 in this example. The control unit 7400 includes the functions of the sub-control board 3200 described above with reference to FIGS. 215 to 243 (that is, a warning due to a temperature rise of the DMD, a warning due to a temperature rise of the DMD, etc. (Modifications 1 to 5), And the rotation speed error control of the intake fan).

It should be noted that the game display device 7001 determines the image data depending on the case where the screen unit 7100 is replaced by another screen unit, the presence/absence position of the reflector 7200, the installation position/posture of the projector device 3300, and the like. It is possible to store setting information that determines which projection method is used (for example, in which rotation direction the image is projected). Such setting information can be prepared, for example, at the manufacturing stage or installation stage of the gaming display device 7001, or can be set from another device connected to the gaming display device 7001.

Further, the gaming display device 7001 can display video on the other gaming display device by transmitting the video data to the other gaming display device connected (as a slave terminal) by the master-slave method. At this time, the setting information described above may be transmitted at the same time to change the projection method in another game display device. Here, one game display device 7001 that functions as a master terminal can connect a plurality of game display devices as slave terminals, and each of the game display devices that are slave terminals is the projector device described above. 3300 may be included. Further, the gaming display device 7001 can be configured to be connected to the master terminal as a slave terminal.

Further, in the game device including the game display device 7001, a projector device such as the projector device 3300 can be selectively installed at a plurality of positions as shown in FIGS. 205 and 207, for example. In addition, a plurality of projector devices can be simultaneously installed at the positions shown in FIGS. 208, 212, and 213. At this time, each projector device can project an image in various rotation directions according to the installation position and the installation posture.

Although the first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above with reference to the drawings, these are merely examples, and the technical idea of the present invention can be realized by various other configurations. Further, the gaming machines and processes shown in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, respectively, and their modified examples can be appropriately combined and implemented as long as there is no contradiction in terms of configuration and processing.

It should be noted that the gaming machine and the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention basically have the following characteristics and operational effects, which are disclosed as supplementary notes.

[Appendix A]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [A-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) including a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image,
The projection device is
A plurality of vents (for example, vents (3404a, 3404b)),
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
An air flow path from one of the plurality of vents to another vent (for example, an air flow path P4 from the vent 3404b to the vent 3404a as shown in FIG. 177);
A first temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c)) for detecting a temperature near the first optical element;
In the air flow path, at least a second temperature detecting unit (for example, a temperature sensor 3341d) provided downstream of the second optical element,
A temperature change unit (for example, 0.25° C.) that is a unit for changing the temperature detected by the second temperature detecting unit is a temperature change unit for the temperature detected by the first temperature detecting unit (for example, 1° C.). ) Is smaller than the game machine.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game machine has the first optical element and the second optical element that reflects the light emitted from the first optical element, and Second temperature detecting means provided downstream of the second optical element, wherein the temperature near the second optical element is downstream of the second optical element in the air flow path. Since it is detected by, it is possible to appropriately grasp the temperature of the second optical element, and thereby it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

Further, since the second temperature detecting means is configured to detect the temperature change more finely than the first temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature near the first optical element, the temperature near the second optical element can be more accurately detected. It can be grasped with high accuracy.

Further, since the first optical element can emit light, it is necessary to provide the first temperature detecting means in the vicinity of the first optical element, but the second optical element emits light from the first optical element. Since the configuration is such that the reflected light is reflected, even if the second temperature detecting means is not installed in the vicinity of the second optical element, the second temperature detecting means is provided in the vicinity of the second optical element to provide a certain level of safety. On the other hand, on the other hand, the second temperature detecting means handles the temperature change finely, so that the safety of the second optical element can be enhanced.

Further, since the position of the first temperature detecting means with respect to the first optical element and the position of the second temperature detecting means with respect to the second optical element can be arranged with different design concepts, the design of the projection apparatus can be improved. Easy to change.

The invention [A-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device comprising a projection device having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image,
The projection device is
Multiple vents,
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
An air flow path from one vent to the other vent in the plurality of vents,
First temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element,
In the air flow path, at least a second temperature detecting means provided downstream of the second optical element,
A game device characterized in that a temperature change unit, which is a unit for changing the temperature detected by the second temperature detecting unit, is smaller than a temperature change unit of the temperature detected by the first temperature detecting unit (for example, a unit). , Game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game device has the first optical element and the second optical element that reflects the light emitted from the first optical element, A second temperature detecting means provided downstream of the second optical element, wherein the temperature in the vicinity of the second optical element is downstream of the second optical element in the air flow path. Since it is detected by the means, it is possible to appropriately grasp the temperature related to the second optical element, and thereby it is possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image. ..

Further, since the second temperature detecting means is configured to detect the temperature change more finely than the first temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature near the first optical element, the temperature near the second optical element can be more accurately detected. It can be grasped with high accuracy.

Further, since the first optical element can emit light, it is necessary to provide the first temperature detecting means in the vicinity of the first optical element, but the second optical element emits light from the first optical element. Since the configuration is such that the reflected light is reflected, even if the second temperature detecting means is not installed in the vicinity of the second optical element, the second temperature detecting means is provided in the vicinity of the second optical element to provide a certain level of safety. On the other hand, on the other hand, the second temperature detecting means handles the temperature change finely, so that the safety of the second optical element can be enhanced.

Further, since the position of the first temperature detecting means with respect to the first optical element and the position of the second temperature detecting means with respect to the second optical element can be arranged with different design concepts, the design of the projection apparatus can be improved. Easy to change.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix B]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [B-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300),
An external control unit (for example, a sub-control board 3200) which is a control unit provided outside the projection device,
The projection device is
A plurality of vents (for example, vents (3404a, 3404b)),
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
An air flow path from one of the plurality of vents to another vent (for example, an air flow path P4 from the vent 3404b to the vent 3404a as shown in FIG. 177);
A temperature detecting means (for example, a temperature sensor 3341d) provided near the second optical element in the air flow path,
An operation stopping means (for example, rotation stop of FAN4, FAN5 according to the DMD temperature, and DLP, which stops the operation of the projection apparatus in operation according to at least the temperature (for example, the DMD temperature) detected by the temperature detecting means. At least a control circuit 3313, LED light sources (3331R, 3331G, 3331B), and a projector control board 3310 for instructing forced shutdown such as driving stop of the DMD 3333),
The external control means is a reference temperature (for example, a shutdown temperature) that is a temperature at which the operation of the projection apparatus is stopped by the operation stopping means, and a setting of whether or not the operation stopping means is enabled. It is possible to set at least availability (for example, shutdown control executability information indicating whether to perform forced shutdown control),
A game machine (for example, a game machine 3001), wherein the projection device initializes the reference temperature set for the projection device and the validity of the projection device when energized.

With such a structure of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game machine has the first optical element and the second optical element, and the light emitted from the first optical element is the second optical element. It has a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the second optical element, which is reflected by the optical element, and projects according to the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means provided in the air flow path. Control means for stopping the operation of the apparatus during operation, which is a temperature at which the operation of the projection apparatus is stopped, and whether or not the operation stopping means for stopping the operation of the projection apparatus is valid The reference temperature can be set so that the reflection of light is not affected according to the change in the outside air temperature.

Also, when the power is turned on, the reference temperature set for the projection device and the validity setting are initialized, and it is possible to make settings according to daily environmental changes, so high-quality images can be safely displayed. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be projected on.

The invention [B-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image;
An external control means that is a control means provided outside the projection device;
The projection device is
Multiple vents,
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
An air flow path from one vent to the other vent in the plurality of vents,
Temperature detecting means provided in the vicinity of the second optical element in the air flow path,
At least operation stop means for stopping the operation of the projection device in operation according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection means,
The external control means has at least a reference temperature, which is a temperature at which the operation of the projection apparatus is stopped by the operation stopping means, and whether or not the operation stopping means is set to be valid or invalid. Is configurable,
The projection device initializes the reference temperature set for the projection device and the validity of the projection device when energized (for example, a game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game device has the first optical element and the second optical element, and the light emitted from the first optical element is the second optical element. Which has a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature in the vicinity of the second optical element, and is reflected by the optical element of It is possible to stop the operation of the projection apparatus during operation, and control the reference temperature that is the temperature at which the operation of the projection apparatus is stopped, and whether or not the operation stopping means for stopping the operation of the projection apparatus is valid. Since it can be set by the means, the reference temperature can be set so that the reflection of light is not affected according to the change in the outside air temperature.

Also, when the power is turned on, the reference temperature set for the projection device and the validity setting are initialized, and it is possible to make settings according to daily environmental changes, so high-quality images can be safely displayed. It is possible to provide a game device that can be projected onto the screen.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix C]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [C-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming machine including a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image,
The projection device is
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
At least a temperature detecting unit (for example, a temperature sensor 3341d) that detects a temperature related to the second optical element,
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of storing the highest temperature (for example, in the EEPROM 3312 of the projector control board 3310) among the temperatures detected by the temperature detecting means during operation of the gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 3001) ..

With such a structure of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game machine has the first optical element and the second optical element, and the light emitted from the first optical element is the second optical element. It has a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature of the second optical element, which is reflected by the optical element, and can store the highest temperature among the temperatures detected by the operating temperature detecting means. Therefore, by inferring the environment in which the projection device was installed from the stored temperature, for example, when recycling the projection device, whether or not to recycle the projection device, and the position where the temperature detection means is provided. It is possible to judge whether or not to replace the adjacent parts based on the stored temperature.

The invention [C-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [C-1].
It is possible to store the operating time that the gaming machine has been operated,
The operating time is configured not to be reset.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the projection device is recycled, it is stored whether the projection device is recycled or whether a component adjacent to the position where the temperature detecting means is provided is replaced. It is possible to make a judgment based on the operating time and temperature that are running.

The invention [C-3] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device comprising a projection device having a plurality of optical elements for projecting an image,
The projection device is
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
At least a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature of the second optical element,
A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001) capable of storing the highest temperature among the temperatures detected by the temperature detecting means while the gaming device is in operation.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the projection device provided in the game device has the first optical element and the second optical element, and the light emitted from the first optical element is the second optical element. Which has a temperature detecting means for detecting the temperature of the second optical element, and is capable of storing the highest temperature among the temperatures detected by the operating temperature detecting means. Therefore, the environment in which the projection device was installed is inferred from the stored temperature. For example, when the projection device is recycled, whether the projection device is recycled or not, and the position where the temperature detection means is provided. It is possible to determine whether or not to replace a component that is close to, based on the stored temperature.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix D]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, in recent game machines equipped with a projector, it is often necessary to perform projection in a limited space, and it is necessary to change the installation position of the projector and the projection method according to the configuration of the game machine. Therefore, a gaming machine that can easily change the installation position and the projection direction of a projection device such as a projector is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed. ..
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [D-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device for projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300),
An external control unit (for example, a sub-control board 3200) which is a control unit provided outside the projection device,
The projection device is
An image rotation unit (for example, a control LSI 3311) capable of rotating the image used in the effect determined by the external control unit in the vertical direction and/or the horizontal direction,
A projection means (for example, an optical mechanism 3330) for projecting the rotated image,
The image rotation unit can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the external control unit, and rotates the image by combining the vertical direction and the horizontal direction (for example, forward rotation, vertical rotation). , A left-right rotation, a vertical rotation + a left-right rotation), which is characterized in that it can be rotated (for example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, since the rotation direction can be specified from the external control means that performs control related to the effect, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game machine, the rotation of the image of the projection device The direction can be easily changed, and the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position or the projection direction) can be easily changed according to the configuration of the game machine.

The invention [D-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device for projecting an image,
An external control means (for example, a control unit 7400) which is a control means provided outside the projection device,
The projection device is
An image rotation unit capable of rotating the image determined by the external control unit in the vertical direction and/or the horizontal direction,
A projection means for projecting the rotated image,
The image rotation means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the external control means, and can rotate the image by combining the up-down direction and the left-right direction. Characteristic gaming device (for example, gaming display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, since the rotation direction can be specified from the external control means for determining the image, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game device, the rotation of the image of the projection device is performed. The direction can be easily changed, and the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position or the projection direction) can be easily changed according to the configuration of the gaming device.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position or the projection direction) can be easily changed.

[Appendix E]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [E-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device for projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300),
A cover member (for example, a projector cover 3101) arranged so as to surround the projection device,
The projection device is
A main body having an opening (for example, an optical case main body 3418a),
A closing part (for example, an optical case top 3418b) that closes the opening,
An air flow path from one vent to another in the plurality of vents (for example, an air flow path P4 from the vent 3404b to the vent 3404a as shown in FIG. 177);
An optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) or DMD3333) which is provided in the main body and is capable of emitting light,
The cover member has a first opening (for example, an intake port 3103b) and a second opening (for example, an exhaust port 3103a),
Inside the cover member, a first space (for example, the space P5 shown in FIG. 177) is formed communicating with the first opening, while a second space (communicating from the second opening is formed. For example, a space P6) shown in FIG. 177 is formed,
The fluid that has passed through the first space is configured to pass through the air flow path and flow down to the second space, and the concave structure of the main body portion prevents the fluid from reaching the optical element. A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) characterized in that (for example, a concave portion 3418g) and a convex structure of the closing portion (for example, a convex portion 3418h) are configured to engage with each other.

With such a configuration of the present invention, in the contact surface between the main body portion and the closing portion of the optical case, the structure of the main body portion side is concave and the convex portion of the closing portion is engaged with the concave portion, so that the gaming machine It is difficult for a fluid (for example, smoke) flowing in from the outside of the housing to enter the inside of the optical case, and it is difficult for the optical element (and the image projection function realized by the optical element) to be affected by smoke or the like.

The invention [E-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [E-1].
An elastic member (for example, a member 3418i) is arranged between the concave structure and the convex structure when the concave structure and the convex structure are engaged with each other.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the concave structure and the convex structure of the optical case are engaged with each other, the elastic member is arranged between them, so that the degree of sealing between the main body portion and the closing portion of the optical case is further improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the contact between the main body portion and the closing portion of the optical case and to absorb the vibration of both.

The invention [E-3] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device for projecting an image,
A cover member arranged so as to surround the projection device,
The projection device is
A main body having an opening,
A closure for closing the opening,
An air flow path from one vent to another vent in the plurality of vents,
An optical element that is provided in the main body and is capable of emitting light,
The cover member has a first opening and a second opening,
Inside the cover member, a first space is formed in communication with the first opening, while a second space is formed in communication with the second opening,
The fluid that has passed through the first space is configured to pass through the air flow path and flow down to the second space, and the concave structure of the main body portion prevents the fluid from reaching the optical element. And a convex structure of the closing portion are configured to be engaged with each other, and a game device (for example, a game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, in the contact surface between the main body portion and the closing portion of the optical case, the structure of the main body portion side is recessed, and the convex portion of the closing portion is engaged with the recessed portion, so A fluid (for example, smoke) that flows in from the outside of the housing of the apparatus is unlikely to enter the inside of the optical case, and smoke or the like is unlikely to affect the optical element (and the image projection function realized by the optical element).
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix F]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [F-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device for projecting an image (for example, a projector device 3300),
A projection device cover member (for example, a projector cover 3101) provided outside the projection device and on the game machine side,
The projection device is
It is stored in the main body (for example, the case 3402),
An air flow path from one vent hole to another vent hole of a plurality of vent holes provided in the main body (for example, an air flow path P4 from the vent hole 3404b to the vent hole 3404a as shown in FIG. 177). )When,
An optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B) or DMD3333),
A lens member (for example, a lens of the lens unit 3332) through which the light emitted from the optical element passes,
A filter member (for example, a filter 3414) that is provided in front of the lens member and that makes it difficult for at least dust to pass therethrough;
A lens cover member (for example, a lens cover 3413) that fixes the filter member to the front of the lens member,
The projection device cover member has a first opening (for example, an intake port 3103b) and a second opening (for example, an exhaust port 3103a),
Inside the projection device cover member, a first space (for example, a space P5 shown in FIG. 177) is formed in communication with the first opening, while a second space is formed in communication with the second opening. A space (for example, the space P6 shown in FIG. 177) is formed,
The fluid that has passed through the first space is configured to pass through the air flow path and flow down to the second space,
The filter member is exposed to the outside of the main body through an opening (for example, an opening 3420) provided in the main body, and is arranged outside the main body.
At least a part of the lens cover member is arranged inside the main body, and the gaming machine is characterized.

With such a configuration of the present invention, since the lens cover member that holds the filter member is provided in front of the lens member, the influence of the fluid (dust or dust such as dust) inside the main body portion on the lens is minimized. can do. In addition, since a part of the lens cover member is arranged inside the main body, it is possible to minimize the influence on the lens cover from the outside of the main body portion (touch by hand, etc.). Furthermore, since the filter member is located outside the main body through the opening provided in the main body, the influence of fluid inside the main body is reduced, and high-quality images with high visual effects can be safely projected. However, it is possible to realize space saving.

The invention [F-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [F-1].
A part of the main body that covers the lens cover member when viewed from the outside of the main body protrudes forward (for example, the lens cover 3413 is stored in the protrusion 3421 of the lower case 3402b). Is configured as follows.

With such a configuration of the present invention, a part of the main body part that hides the lens cover member when viewed from the outside of the main body part is configured to project forward, so that a part of the main body part is covered by the lens cover member. Is a cushion against a shock from the front of the lens member, and as a result, the lens member is protected and the safety of the lens member is improved.

The invention [F-3] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device for projecting an image,
A projection device cover member provided outside the projection device and on the game device side,
The projection device is
It is stored in the main body,
An air flow path from one ventilation hole to another ventilation hole in the plurality of ventilation holes provided in the main body portion,
An optical element capable of irradiating light,
A lens member through which the light emitted from the optical element passes,
A filter member provided in front of the lens member, which makes it difficult for at least dust to pass through;
A lens cover member for fixing the filter member to the front of the lens member,
A first opening and a second opening are formed in the projection device cover member,
Inside the projection device cover member, a first space is formed in communication with the first opening, while a second space is formed in communication with the second opening.
The fluid that has passed through the first space is configured to pass through the air flow path and flow down to the second space,
The filter member is exposed to the outside of the main body portion through an opening provided in the main body portion, and is arranged outside the main body portion,
At least a part of the lens cover member is arranged inside the main body, and a gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, since the lens cover member that holds the filter member is provided in front of the lens member, the influence of the fluid (dust or dust such as dust) inside the main body portion on the lens is minimized. can do. In addition, since a part of the lens cover member is arranged inside the main body, it is possible to minimize the influence on the lens cover from the outside of the main body portion (touch by hand, etc.). Furthermore, since the filter member is located outside the main body through the opening provided in the main body, the influence of fluid inside the main body is reduced, and high-quality images with high visual effects can be safely projected. However, it is possible to realize space saving.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix G]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [G-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) including a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) for projecting an image,
The projection device is
An optical element capable of irradiating light (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)),
At least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c)) provided in the vicinity of the optical element,
At least a first temperature, which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detection means, a second temperature, which is the past temperature detected by the temperature detection means, and a temperature of a predetermined ratio of the first temperature. An abnormality of the optical element can be detected from a reference temperature (for example, a temperature increased by x% from the first temperature)
When the value that is the comparison result of the first temperature and the second temperature is larger than the magnitude of the value that is the reference temperature (for example, the first temperature-the second temperature>the first temperature* x%), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred near the optical element.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the value that is the comparison result of the current temperature and the past temperature is larger than the value of the reference temperature that is obtained from the current temperature, an abnormality occurs in the optical element. Since it is possible to determine that the temperature has risen near the optical element, the gaming machine sets the optical element for each gaming machine according to the regions where the climate is warm and regions where the cold is severe. It is possible to use it in various environments by always making judgments based on the current temperature, and to project safely even if the operating time of the gaming machine becomes long under such environment. You can

The invention [G-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device having a projection device for projecting an image,
The projection device is
An optical element capable of irradiating light,
At least a temperature detecting means provided in the vicinity of the optical element,
At least a first temperature, which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detection means, a second temperature, which is the past temperature detected by the temperature detection means, and a temperature of a predetermined ratio of the first temperature. It is possible to detect an abnormality of the optical element from the reference temperature which is,
If the value that is the comparison result of the first temperature and the second temperature is larger than the magnitude of the value that is the reference temperature, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred near the optical element. Characteristic gaming device (for example, gaming display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the value that is the comparison result of the current temperature and the past temperature is larger than the value of the reference temperature that is obtained from the current temperature, an abnormality occurs in the optical element. Since it is possible to determine that the temperature has increased (the temperature near the optical element has risen), the gaming device can set the optical element for gaming depending on the region where the climate is warm and the region where the cold is severe. It is not necessary to do it for each device, but it can be used in various environments by always making judgments based on the current temperature, and even if the operating time of the gaming device becomes long under such environment, it is safe Can be projected.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix H]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [H-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) including a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having an optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) for projecting an image,
The projection device is
At least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c)) provided in the vicinity of the optical element,
A first value is obtained from the first temperature which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means and the second temperature which is the past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means,
A value obtained from a reference change amount that is an upper limit of the change amount of the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, which is predetermined, and the first temperature and a correction value stored in advance, and the first temperature The second value is calculated from the permissible change amount in which the magnitude of the value decreases as
A gaming machine characterized in that an abnormality relating to the optical element can be detected by comparing the first value and the second value.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the first value obtained from the first temperature, which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and the second temperature, which is the past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and A value obtained from the reference change amount, which is the upper limit of the change amount of the temperature detected by the predetermined temperature detecting means, the first temperature, and the correction value stored in advance, and is a value obtained according to the rise of the first temperature. Since the abnormality can be detected by comparing with the second value obtained from the allowable change amount in which the magnitude of the value becomes smaller, the upper limit of the change amount in temperature can be made smaller as the current temperature rises. By controlling in this way, it becomes possible to accurately detect the wear of the parts of the image projection device which increases in accordance with the rise in temperature, and it is possible to provide a game machine capable of safely performing projection.

The invention [H-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device comprising a projection device having an optical element for projecting an image,
The projection device is
At least a temperature detecting means provided in the vicinity of the optical element,
A first value is obtained from the first temperature which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means and the second temperature which is the past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means,
A value obtained from a reference change amount that is an upper limit of the change amount of the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, which is predetermined, and the first temperature and a correction value stored in advance, and the first temperature The second value is calculated from the permissible change amount in which the magnitude of the value decreases as
A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001), wherein an abnormality relating to the optical element can be detected by comparing the first value and the second value.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the first value obtained from the first temperature, which is the current temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and the second temperature, which is the past temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and A value obtained from the reference change amount, which is the upper limit of the change amount of the temperature detected by the predetermined temperature detecting means, the first temperature, and the correction value stored in advance, and is a value obtained according to the rise of the first temperature. Since the abnormality can be detected by comparing with the second value obtained from the allowable change amount in which the magnitude of the value becomes smaller, the upper limit of the change amount in temperature can be made smaller as the current temperature rises. By controlling in this manner, it becomes possible to accurately detect the wear of the parts of the image projection device that increases in accordance with the rise in temperature, and it is possible to provide a gaming device that can perform projection safely.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix I]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [I-1] of the present invention has the following configurations.
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) including a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) having an optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) for projecting an image,
The projection device is
Ventilation means for performing ventilation (for example, an exhaust fan 3342),
And a rotation speed detection means (for example, a pulse sensor 3343) for detecting the rotation speed of the ventilation means,
It is a rotation speed for detecting an abnormality relating to the ventilation means from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means (for example, the rotation speed at the time of startup) within a predetermined period after the projection device is started. The reference speed can be set,
A gaming machine characterized in that an abnormality relating to the ventilation means can be detected from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means after the reference rotation speed is set and the reference rotation speed.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the reference rotation speed, which is the rotation speed for detecting an abnormality regarding the ventilation means, from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means within a predetermined period after the projection apparatus is activated. It is possible to set, and it is possible to detect an abnormality related to the ventilation means from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means and the reference rotation speed. By detecting the abnormality of the ventilation means according to the situation of the ventilation means due to the individual difference or the individual difference, the timing of the error notification of the projection device (the time from the start of the operation of the projection device until the error notification) is alleviated. It is possible to project safely even if the operating time of the gaming machine becomes long while reducing the exchange of various ventilation means.

The invention [I-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device comprising a projection device having an optical element for projecting an image,
The projection device is
Ventilation means for ventilation,
At least a rotation speed detection means for detecting the rotation speed of the ventilation means,
Within a predetermined period after the projection device is activated, from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means, it is possible to set a reference rotation speed that is a rotation speed for detecting an abnormality relating to the ventilation means,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to detect an abnormality relating to the ventilation means from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means after the reference rotation speed is set, and the reference rotation speed (for example, A game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the reference rotation speed, which is the rotation speed for detecting an abnormality regarding the ventilation means, from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means within a predetermined period after the projection apparatus is activated. It is possible to set, and it is possible to detect an abnormality related to the ventilation means from the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means and the reference rotation speed. By detecting the abnormality of the ventilation means according to the situation of the ventilation means due to the individual difference or the individual difference, the timing of the error notification of the projection device (the time from the start of the operation of the projection device until the error notification) is alleviated. It is possible to safely project even if the operating time of the gaming device becomes long while reducing the exchange of various ventilation means.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix J]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, in recent game machines equipped with a projector, it is often necessary to perform projection in a limited space, and it is necessary to change the installation position of the projector and the projection method according to the configuration of the game machine. Therefore, a gaming machine that can easily change the installation position and the projection direction of a projection device such as a projector is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed. ..
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [J-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A projection device (for example, projector device 4300) for projecting an image is provided at a plurality of positions (for example, position D of projector device 4300 shown in FIG. A gaming machine (eg, gaming machine 4001) that can be installed in E),
The projection device is
An image rotation unit (for example, control of the projector device 4300) capable of rotating the image used in the effect determined by the control unit in the vertical direction and/or the horizontal direction (for example, the rotation direction shown in FIG. 189). LSI4311 etc.),
The image rotation means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the control means, and can change the designation from the control means even when the installation position of the projection device is changed. The game machine capable of projecting an image on the same basis as the image before changing the installation position of the projection device.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game machine, it is possible to easily change the rotation direction of the image of the projection device. It is possible to easily change the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position or the projection direction).

The invention [J-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device that includes control means for controlling game information (for example, the number of game media acquired, effect images, etc.) and is capable of installing projection devices for projecting images at a plurality of positions,
The projection device is
An image rotation unit capable of rotating the image determined by the control unit in the vertical direction and/or the horizontal direction,
The image rotation means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the control means, and can change the designation from the control means even when the installation position of the projection device is changed. A game device (for example, a game display device 7001) capable of projecting an image on the same basis as the image before changing the installation position of the projection device.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the gaming device, it is possible to easily change the rotation direction of the image of the projection device, and thus the configuration of the gaming device. It is possible to easily change the configuration (for example, the installation position or the projection direction) of the projection device according to the above.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position or the projection direction) can be easily changed.

[Appendix K]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, in recent game machines equipped with a projector, it is often necessary to perform projection in a limited space, and it is necessary to change the installation position of the projector and the projection method according to the configuration of the game machine. Therefore, a gaming machine that can easily change the installation position and the projection direction of a projection device such as a projector is desired.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position and the projection direction) can be easily changed. ..
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [K-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A game machine (for example, a game machine) that includes a control unit (for example, a sub-control board 4200′) that performs control related to rendering and that includes a plurality of projection devices for projecting an image (for example, the projector devices 4300a and 4300b illustrated in FIG. 208). Machine 4001'),
The plurality of projection devices are
The image rotation means (for example, the projector device 4300' of the projector device 4300' that can rotate the image used for the effect determined by the control means in the vertical direction and/or the horizontal direction (for example, the rotation direction shown in FIG. 189). Control LSI4311'),
The image rotation means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the control means,
The control means is
For one projection device of the plurality of projection devices, specify the rotation direction of the image used in the rendering, and for other projection devices of the plurality of projection devices, rotate the image related to the rendering. It is possible to specify a direction, and a rotation direction specified for one projection device of the plurality of projection devices and a rotation direction specified for another projection device of the plurality of projection devices. Is a game machine characterized in that different rotation directions can be designated.

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the game machine, it is possible to easily change the rotation direction of the image of the projection device. Thus, the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position or the projection direction) can be easily changed.

The invention [K-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device comprising a plurality of projection devices for projecting an image, the device including control means for controlling game information (for example, the number of game media acquired, effect images, etc.),
The plurality of projection devices are
An image rotation unit capable of rotating the image determined by the control unit in the vertical direction and/or the horizontal direction,
The image rotation means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the control means,
The control means is
The rotation direction of the image is specified for one of the plurality of projection devices, and the rotation direction of the image related to the image is specified for the other projection device of the plurality of projection devices. It is possible that the rotation direction specified for one of the plurality of projection devices and the rotation direction specified for another of the plurality of projection devices are different from each other. A game device characterized by being able to specify a direction (for example, a game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, even if the installation position of the projection device is changed according to the gaming device, it is possible to easily change the rotation direction of the image of the projection device, and thus the configuration of the gaming device. The configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position or the projection direction) can be easily changed according to the above.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine in which the configuration of the projection device (for example, the installation position or the projection direction) can be easily changed.

[Appendix L]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, in a recent game machine equipped with a projector, it is difficult to change the projection position of the image by the projector according to the performance because the projection must be performed in a limited space, and the performance is unexpected. Even when the projection target is moved so as to have the above, the range in which the projection target can move is limited to the projection range of the projector.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of performing various effects with a simple configuration.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [L-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 6001) that includes a control unit (for example, a sub-control board 6200) that performs control related to an effect, and includes a projection device (for example, projector devices 6300a and 6300b) for projecting an image. ,
The projection device is
An image rotation unit (for example, control of the projector device 6300) capable of rotating the image used for the effect determined by the control unit in the vertical direction and/or the horizontal direction (for example, the rotation direction shown in FIG. 189). LSI6311 etc.),
The image rotation means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the control means,
The control means is
In the case where the direction of rotation with respect to the image used in the rendering can be designated for the projection device and the position of the reflecting member (for example, the mirror mechanism 3105) that reflects the light from the projection device is displaced in the rendering, A game machine characterized in that a rotation direction of an image can be designated to the projection device according to a displacement of the reflection member.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when a projected image that is normally projected without using a reflecting member is reflected from an image projected according to the performance, the reflected image is a mirror image. Since it becomes a copy state, it is necessary to add rotation to the original image, and by controlling the rotation of such an image with the projection device and the control means, the projection range by the projection device can be adjusted by a simple method. It is possible to expand and provide various performances.

The invention [L-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device comprising a control device for controlling game information (for example, the number of game media acquired, effect images, etc.) and a projection device for projecting images.
The projection device is
An image rotation unit capable of rotating the image determined by the control unit in the vertical direction and/or the horizontal direction,
The image rotation means can determine the rotation direction of the image according to the designation from the control means,
The control means is
The direction of rotation with respect to the image can be designated for the projection device, and when the position of the reflection member that reflects the light from the projection device is displaced in relation to the image, depending on the displacement of the reflection member. A game device (for example, a game display device 7001) characterized in that a rotation direction of an image can be designated to the projection device.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the image projected according to the predetermined image display is reflected by the projection device that normally projects without using the reflecting member, the image is reflected. Since the image becomes a mirror image, it is necessary to add rotation to the original image, and the control for rotating such an image is performed by the projection device and the control means by the projection device by a simple method. It is possible to widen the projection range and provide various game information.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of performing various effects with a simple configuration.

[Appendix M]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [M-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device (for example, a temperature detection unit (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element) (for example, , Projector device 3300),
A temperature storage unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 and the SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at every predetermined timing (for example, every one second) and cumulatively stores the temperature.
The result of comparison between the detected temperature (eg, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and a first reference temperature (eg, 64° C. set as the expected shutdown temperature), or In response to a predetermined notification (for example, an error notification) from the projection device, a warning screen determination unit (for example, the sub-control board 3200) for determining whether to display the first warning screen (for example, the warning screen (2)). And a sub CPU 3201),
When the warning screen determination unit determines not to display the first warning screen, the comparison result between the detected temperature and the second reference temperature (for example, 50° C. set as the warning temperature), and the detected temperature It is determined whether or not to display a second warning screen (for example, warning screen (1)) different from the first warning screen in accordance with a change in (for example, TempNowSt that represents a change in TempNow and TempOld1). A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is in a situation where the projection device provided in the gaming machine is shut down based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, or other warning should be issued. It is determined whether there is a situation, and a different warning screen is displayed depending on the situation. Therefore, the displayed warning screen allows you to accurately grasp the situation of the gaming machine, which enables high-quality images to be displayed. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of safely projecting.

The invention [M-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [M-1].
First display means (for example, front screen mechanism 3091 or the like) which is a main display means for performing display according to the progress of the game,
Second display means (for example, sub liquid crystal display device 3023) which is a sub display means different from the first display means,
A display control unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200),
The display control means is configured to display the first warning screen on the first display means and the second warning screen on the second display means based on the determination by the warning screen determination means. It

With such a configuration of the present invention, the first warning screen is displayed on the first display means and the second warning screen is displayed on the second display means, so that the projection device is shut down and displayed on the second display means. Even if it becomes impossible, the content of the warning is displayed on the first display means, whereby a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image can be provided.

The invention [M-3] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [M-1] or the invention [M-2].
The warning screen determination unit is a third reference temperature lower than the detected temperature and the second reference temperature lower than the first reference temperature (for example, 49° C. set as a stable temperature). Whether to hide the second warning screen or maintain the display state or the non-display state of the second warning screen in accordance with at least one of the result of comparison with and the change in the detected temperature. It is configured to determine whether or not.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the second warning screen is hidden, the display state, or the non-display state is maintained in accordance with the comparison result between the detected temperature and the second reference temperature or the change in the detected temperature. Since the second warning screen is effectively displayed only when the projection device is abnormal, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [M-4] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element;
A temperature storage unit that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at each predetermined timing and that stores the temperature cumulatively;
A warning that determines whether or not to display the first warning screen according to the result of comparison between the detected temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and the first reference temperature or a predetermined notification from the projection device. Screen determining means,
When the warning screen determination unit determines not to display the first warning screen, the warning screen determination unit determines whether to display the first warning screen according to the comparison result between the detected temperature and the second reference temperature and the change in the detected temperature. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001) characterized by determining whether or not to display a different second warning screen.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the first warning screen is displayed on the first display means and the second warning screen is displayed on the second display means, so that the projection device is shut down and displayed on the second display means. Even if it becomes impossible, the content of the warning is displayed on the first display means, whereby it becomes possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix N]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [N-1] of the present invention has the following configurations.
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device (for example, a temperature detection unit (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element) (for example, , Projector device 3300),
A temperature storage unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 and the SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at every predetermined timing (for example, every one second) and cumulatively stores the temperature.
The detected temperature (for example, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and a reference temperature (for example, 64° C. set as an expected shutdown temperature, 50° C. set as a warning temperature, A warning screen (for example, a warning screen (1) or a warning screen (1) is displayed according to a comparison result with a stable temperature set at 49° C. and a change in the detected temperature (for example, TempNowSt indicating a change in TempNow and TempOld1). 2)) is displayed or a warning screen determination unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) for determining whether to display the displayed warning screen is provided.
The warning screen determination means stores the current detected temperature as the reference temperature (for example, 50° C.) after the previously detected temperature satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 0° C. or 0° C. or less). Even if the temperature of the warning screen is displayed according to the comparison result (for example, 50° C. or higher), the warning screen is not displayed based on the detected temperature this time. Machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the display or non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and the detected temperature is a temperature such as 0° C., Since the display state or the non-display state of the warning screen is maintained, it is possible to prevent the inappropriate warning screen from being displayed based on the detected temperature that is abnormal data due to the influence of noise, etc. It becomes possible to provide a game machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [N-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [N-1].
The warning screen further includes a warning screen display count counting unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) that cumulatively counts the number of transitions from the non-display state to the display state as the number of warning screen displays.
The warning screen display count counting unit controls the data representing the warning screen display count to be coded (for example, coded into a two-dimensional code) and displayed on the display unit (for example, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023). Is configured as follows.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the number of times the warning screen is displayed is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine in a coded state. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the warning screen by photographing and decoding the code of the display means. It is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of grasping the number of times of display and capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [N-3] of the present invention has the following configurations.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element;
A temperature storage unit that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at each predetermined timing and that stores the temperature cumulatively;
Depending on the comparison result between the detected temperature and the reference temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means, and the change in the detected temperature, a warning screen is displayed or the displayed warning screen is hidden. A warning screen determination means for determining whether to
The warning screen determination means may store the detected temperature of this time after the detected temperature of the previous time satisfies a predetermined condition, even if the detected temperature of the present time is a temperature at which the warning screen is displayed according to the result of comparison with the reference temperature. A gaming device (for example, a gaming display device 7001) that does not display the warning screen based on the detected temperature this time.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the display or non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and the detected temperature is a temperature such as 0° C., Since the display state or the non-display state of the warning screen is maintained, it is possible to prevent the inappropriate warning screen from being displayed based on the detected temperature that is abnormal data due to the influence of noise, etc. It is possible to provide a game device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix O]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) in place of a liquid crystal display device for displaying a game image or the like (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [O-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
Intake means (for example, an intake fan 3210) capable of intake of outside air,
A game machine provided with a rotation speed detection means (for example, a pulse sensor 3211) for detecting the rotation speed of the intake means,
A warning screen (for example, a warning screen) based on the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detecting means within a predetermined period (for example, at startup (1 second after startup) or 5 seconds after startup) after the gaming machine is started up. A warning screen determination means (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) for determining whether to display the screen (3) or the warning screen (4) is further provided,
The warning screen determination means may include a first rotation speed based on the detected rotation speed (for example, an average of a total of five FAN rotation speeds acquired every one second from the start) and a first reference value (for example, intake air). It is determined whether or not to display the first warning screen (for example, the warning screen (3)) according to the comparison result of the specified value 1) which is the rotation speed obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotation speed of the fan 3210 for use, A second rotation speed based on the detected rotation speed (for example, FAN rotation speed at startup) and a second reference value (for example, a specified value that is a rotation speed obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotation speed of the intake fan 3210). According to the comparison result of 2), it is determined whether or not to display a second warning screen (for example, warning screen (4)) different from the first warning screen,
The first rotation speed and the second rotation speed are based on the rotation speeds detected in different periods (for example, 5 seconds after starting and 1 second after starting),
A game machine (for example, a game machine 3001), wherein the first warning screen and the second warning screen are displayed in different display periods (for example, 3 minutes and a period until power failure).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is determined whether or not to display the corresponding warning screens based on different criteria based on the rotation speed of the intake means detected by the rotation speed detection means. Accordingly, a corresponding appropriate warning screen is displayed, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

Further, according to the configuration of the present invention, the abnormality determination is performed on the intake means by different evaluation criteria, and the display period of the warning screen displayed in accordance with this is set to be different. It is possible to display a warning screen in accordance with the degree of influence, and thereby to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [O-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [O-1].
Furthermore, a projection device (for example, projector device 3300) having an optical element (for example, LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B), DMD3333) for projecting an image is provided,
The air intake means can send external air toward the projection device,
When the warning screen determination means determines to display the second warning screen, which is a more serious warning screen than the first warning screen, it changes the brightness of the image projected by the projection device (for example, a projector). The brightness of the device 3300 is set to 0).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when a serious error is detected in the intake device, the brightness of the projection device is controlled to be small. Therefore, heat generated in the projection device is reduced in preparation for a decrease in the cooling function of the intake device. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is effectively suppressed and that can safely project a high-quality image.

The invention [O-3] of the present invention has the following constitution.
Intake means (for example, an intake fan 7310) capable of intake of outside air,
A rotation speed detecting means (for example, a pulse sensor 7311) for detecting the rotation speed of the suction means,
Based on the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means within a predetermined period after the gaming device is activated, further comprises a warning screen determination means for determining whether to display a warning screen,
The warning screen determination means determines whether to display a first warning screen according to a comparison result of the first rotation speed based on the detected rotation speed and a first reference value, and the detected rotation speed. It is determined whether or not to display a second warning screen different from the first warning screen according to the comparison result of the second rotation speed and the second reference value based on
The first rotation speed and the second rotation speed are based on the rotation speeds detected in different periods,
The game device (for example, the game display device 7001), wherein the first warning screen and the second warning screen are displayed in different display periods.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is determined whether or not to display the corresponding warning screens based on different criteria based on the rotation speed of the intake means detected by the rotation speed detection means. Accordingly, a corresponding appropriate warning screen is displayed, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

Further, according to the configuration of the present invention, the abnormality determination is performed on the intake means by different evaluation criteria, and the display period of the warning screen displayed in accordance with this is set to be different. It is possible to display a warning screen according to the degree of influence, and thereby to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix P]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) instead of a liquid crystal display device that displays a video image for a game (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [P-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device (for example, a temperature detection unit (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element) (for example, , Projector device 3300),
A temperature storage unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 and the SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at every predetermined timing (for example, every one second) and cumulatively stores the temperature.
The detection result (eg, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) that is cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and a first reference temperature (eg, 50° C. set as a warning temperature), and the detection result. It is determined whether or not to display a warning screen (for example, warning screen (2)) according to a change in temperature (for example, a rising transition in TempNowSt that represents a change in TempNow and TempOld1) (for example, condition A, condition B). ) A warning screen determination means (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200),
The warning screen determination means compares the detected temperature with a second reference temperature lower than the first reference temperature (for example, 49° C. set as a stable temperature), and changes in the detected temperature (for example, TempNow). It is determined whether or not to hide the warning screen according to at least one of the downward transition in TempNowSt that represents the change in TempOld1 and the number of consecutive downward transitions (for example, condition C, condition D). A gaming machine characterized by (for example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the display or non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature and the change in the detected temperature in the projection device provided in the gaming machine, and therefore it is appropriate according to the temperature condition of the projection device. A warning screen is displayed or hidden at various timings, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting high-quality images.

The invention [P-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [P-1].
The warning screen determination means detects the current detection temperature below the second reference temperature and detects the current detection temperature when the previous detection temperature is equal to or higher than the first reference temperature and the warning screen is displayed. When the temperature is lower than the previously detected temperature, the warning screen is determined not to be displayed (condition C).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the detected temperature and the change in the detected temperature are in a more stable direction, the warning screen is determined not to be displayed. The warning screen is hidden at various timings, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting high-quality images.

The invention [P-3] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [P-2].
Even if the detected temperature at this time is equal to or higher than the first reference temperature, the warning screen determination means determines that the detected temperature continuously drops at a timing within a predetermined period (for example, the detected temperature is detected three times in a row). If the change is a downward transition), the warning screen is determined not to be displayed (condition D).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the change in the detected temperature is continuously falling for a predetermined number of times, it is determined to hide the warning screen regardless of the detected temperature. Accordingly, the warning screen is hidden at an appropriate timing, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [P-4] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element;
A temperature storage unit that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at each predetermined timing and that stores the temperature cumulatively;
Warning screen determination means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen according to the comparison result of the detected temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means and the first reference temperature, and the change in the detected temperature. ,,
Whether the warning screen determination unit hides the warning screen according to at least one of a comparison result between the detected temperature and a second reference temperature lower than the first reference temperature and/or a change in the detected temperature. A game device (for example, a game display device 7001) characterized by determining whether or not.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the display/non-display of the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature and the change in the detected temperature in the projection device provided in the game device, and accordingly, depending on the temperature condition of the projection device. A warning screen is displayed or hidden at an appropriate timing, which makes it possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix Q]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) in place of a liquid crystal display device for displaying a game image or the like (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [Q-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) including a projection device (for example, a projector device 3300) that projects an image,
Intake means (for example, an intake fan 3210) capable of intake of outside air,
A rotation speed detection means (for example, a pulse sensor 3211) for detecting the rotation speed of the intake means,
The rotational speed detected by the rotational speed detecting means and a reference value (for example, an intake fan 3210) within a predetermined period (for example, at startup (1 second after startup) or 5 seconds after startup) after the gaming machine is started up. Warning value based on the result of comparison with the specified value 1 which is the rotational speed obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotational speed of, and the specified value 2) which is the rotational speed obtained by subtracting 25% from the rated rotational speed of the intake fan 3210. A warning screen determination unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) for determining whether or not to display a screen (for example, the warning screen (3) or the warning screen (4)),
The projection device is
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
Temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensors (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element,
At least, an operation stopping unit (for example, a control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310) that stops the operation of the projection device in operation according to the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit, separately from the game machine. Characteristic gaming machine.

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is determined whether or not to display the warning screen regarding the intake means based on the rotation speed of the intake means detected by the rotation speed detection means. Based on the detected temperature detected by, the operation of the projection device during operation is stopped separately from the gaming machine, so it is effective to deal with the abnormal state in both the projection device and the intake means for cooling it. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [Q-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [Q-1].
The air intake means can send external air toward the projection device,
The projection device can be activated according to the activation of the gaming machine while the operation is stopped,
The warning screen is controlled so that the display is not started after the lapse of the predetermined period, and after the operation of the projection apparatus is stopped by the operation stopping unit (for example, when a reset request is made, After the reset is performed), when the stopped operation is restarted in response to the activation of the gaming machine, and the rotation speed is the rotation speed for displaying the warning screen even after the operation is restarted, the display is displayed. Is configured to be controlled.

With such a configuration of the present invention, a warning screen (for example, at least one of the warning screen (3) and the warning screen (4)) indicating the abnormality of the intake means is displayed during the game of the player (after the lapse of a predetermined period). Without displaying, the warning screen is displayed when the projection device recovers from the power failure (that is, resumes operation when the gaming machine is started), so that the player can concentrate on the game without seeing the warning screen. The warning screen is displayed after the projection device is shut down due to the abnormality of the intake means, and thus it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image. Becomes

The invention [Q-3] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [Q-1].
The warning screen includes a first warning screen (for example, warning screen (3)) and a second warning screen (for example, warning screen (4)) different from the first warning screen,
The warning screen determination means determines whether to display the first warning screen and whether to display the second warning screen according to different criteria,
The cumulative display count of the first warning screen and the cumulative display count of the second warning screen are configured to be summed and grasped.

With such a configuration of the present invention, since the cumulative display count of the first warning screen and the cumulative display count of the second warning screen are summed and grasped, it is possible to grasp the abnormal state of the gaming machine as a whole. Thus, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [Q-4] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A gaming device including a projection device for projecting an image,
Intake means (for example, an intake fan 7310) capable of intake of outside air,
A rotation speed detection means (for example, a pulse sensor 7311) for detecting the rotation speed of the intake means,
Warning screen determination means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen based on the result of comparison between the rotation speed detected by the rotation speed detection means and a reference value within a predetermined period after the gaming device is activated. And,
The projection device is
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
Temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element,
A game device (for example, a game device) characterized in that it has at least an operation stopping device for stopping the operation of the projection device in operation in accordance with the temperature detected by the temperature detecting device, separately from the game device. Display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, it is determined whether or not to display the warning screen regarding the intake means based on the rotation speed of the intake means detected by the rotation speed detection means. Based on the detected temperature detected by, the operation of the projection device during operation is stopped separately from the gaming device, so that both the projection device and the intake means for cooling it can respond to the abnormal state. This is effectively performed, and thereby, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix R]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) in place of a liquid crystal display device for displaying a game image or the like (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [R-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device (for example, a temperature detection unit (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element) (for example, , Projector device 3300),
A temperature storage unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 and the SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at every predetermined timing (for example, every one second) and cumulatively stores the temperature.
When the detected temperature rises with time, the luminance of the image projected by the projection device (for example, the luminance of the LED light source 3331R) is set to be gradually reduced according to the rise of the detected temperature, When the detected temperature decreases with the passage of time, a brightness adjusting unit (for example, a sub-control board 3200) that sets the brightness of the image projected by the projection device to increase stepwise according to the decrease in the detected temperature. A sub-CPU 3201), and a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the brightness of the projection device is set to decrease as the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means increases, and the brightness of the projection device increases as the detected temperature decreases. Since it is set as described above, abnormal heat generation of the projection device is effectively suppressed, and thereby, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [R-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [R-1].
The brightness adjusting means,
When the detected temperature rises with time, or when the detected temperature becomes equal to or higher than the first reference temperature (for example, 50° C. set as the specified temperature (1)), the brightness is changed from the initial brightness to a smaller value. However, when the detected temperature is equal to or higher than the second reference temperature which is higher than the first reference temperature (for example, the brightness is set to 50% of 1/2) (for example, 64° C. set as the specified temperature (2)). ) To further reduce the brightness (for example, to set the brightness to 0%),
After that, when the detected temperature decreases with the passage of time, the detected temperature is equal to or lower than the third reference temperature (for example, the specified temperature (2)−the correction temperature (5° C.) of 59° C.) lower than the second reference temperature. If it becomes, the brightness is changed to be large (for example, the brightness is changed from 0% to 50%), and the detected temperature is lower than the first reference temperature. )-If the temperature becomes equal to or lower than the correction temperature (5° C., 45° C.), the brightness is changed to be further increased (for example, the brightness is changed from 50% to 100%),
When the detected temperature becomes equal to or lower than the fourth reference temperature, the brightness is returned to the initial brightness as a result of the change (for example, the brightness of 100% is changed to 50%->0%->50). %->100%).

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means rises, the brightness of the projection device is set to be small based on the first reference temperature and the second reference temperature, and when the detected temperature falls, Since the brightness of the projection device is set to be high based on the third reference temperature lower than the second reference temperature and the fourth reference temperature lower than the first reference temperature, the detected temperature frequently fluctuates near each reference temperature. Even in such a case, it is possible to effectively prevent the brightness of the projection device from being frequently changed accordingly, and to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image. Is possible.

The invention [R-3] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [R-1].
A brightness lowering temperature (for example, a specified temperature (1) or a specified temperature (2)) that serves as a reference for determining the brightness by the brightness adjusting unit, and a brightness rising temperature that serves as a reference for determining the brightness to be returned to the original level. (For example, specified temperature (1)-corrected temperature or specified temperature (2)-corrected temperature) is different,
The brightness increase temperature is configured to be a temperature obtained by subtracting a predetermined correction value from the brightness decrease temperature.

With such a configuration of the present invention, a temperature serving as a reference for setting the brightness of the projection device to be small when the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection means rises, and a reference for setting the brightness of the projection device to be large when the detection temperature falls. Therefore, even if the detected temperature frequently fluctuates near each reference temperature, it is effectively suppressed that the brightness of the projection device is frequently changed in accordance with this, and the temperature once drops. To provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image by providing a condition that the temperature is lower than the lowered temperature in order to restore the original brightness (initial brightness) to the original brightness. Is possible.

The invention [R-4] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element;
A temperature storage unit that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at each predetermined timing and that stores the temperature cumulatively;
When the detected temperature rises with time, the brightness of the image projected by the projection device is set to decrease stepwise in accordance with the rise of the detected temperature, and the detected temperature falls with time. And a brightness adjusting means for setting the brightness of the image projected by the projection device to increase stepwise in accordance with the decrease in the detected temperature, and a game device (for example, a game device). Display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the brightness of the projection device is set to decrease as the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means increases, and the brightness of the projection device increases as the detected temperature decreases. Since it is set as described above, abnormal heat generation of the projection device is effectively suppressed, and thereby, it becomes possible to provide a gaming device capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix S]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) in place of a liquid crystal display device for displaying a game image or the like (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [S-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device (for example, a temperature detection unit (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element) (for example, , Projector device 3300),
A temperature storage unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 and the SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at every predetermined timing (for example, every one second) and cumulatively stores the temperature.
A warning for determining whether or not to display a warning screen (for example, warning screen (1)) based on the detected temperatures (for example, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) that are cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means. A screen determination unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200),
The warning screen determination means,
When the change in the detected temperature (for example, TempOld1-TempNow) this time is equal to or higher than the first reference value (for example, 10° C.), it is determined not to perform the determination,
When the previous change in the detected temperature (for example, TempOld2-TempOld1) is equal to or more than the first reference value, the change in the detected temperature this time is equal to or more than the second reference value that is a value equal to or less than the first reference value ( For example, if it is 3° C.), it is determined not to perform the determination based on the detected temperature,
If the previous change in the detected temperature is equal to or more than the first reference value, and the change in the detected temperature this time is less than a second reference value that is a value equal to or less than the first reference value, the detected temperature is set to the detected temperature. A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001) characterized in that the determination is made based on the determination.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the detected temperature of the previous time largely fluctuates, the warning screen display determination is not performed and the display state and the non-display state of the warning screen are maintained as they are, and then the detected temperature change of this time. If it is not so large (it can be judged that the detected temperature that changed a lot last time is the correct temperature change), the warning screen display judgment is made, and then the change of the detected temperature changes a lot this time. When the detected temperature is judged to be an incorrect temperature transition), the warning screen display is not judged and the warning screen display state and the non-display state are maintained as they are. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image without being affected by a large temporary fluctuation.

The invention [S-2] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element;
A temperature storage unit that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at each predetermined timing and that stores the temperature cumulatively;
A warning screen determination unit that determines whether or not to display a warning screen based on the detected temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage unit,
The warning screen determination means,
When the change in the detected temperature this time is greater than or equal to the first reference value, it is determined not to perform the determination,
If the previous change in the detected temperature is equal to or more than the first reference value, and the change in the detected temperature this time is equal to or more than the second reference value that is a value equal to or less than the first reference value, the detected temperature is set to the detected temperature. Decide not to perform the judgment based on
If the previous change in the detected temperature is equal to or more than the first reference value, and the change in the detected temperature this time is less than a second reference value that is a value equal to or less than the first reference value, the detected temperature is set to the detected temperature. A game device (for example, a game display device 7001) characterized in that the determination is made based on the determination.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the detected temperature of the previous time largely fluctuates, the warning screen display determination is not performed and the display state and the non-display state of the warning screen are maintained as they are, and then the detected temperature change of this time. If it is not so large (it can be judged that the detected temperature that changed a lot last time is the correct temperature change), the warning screen display judgment is made, and then the change of the detected temperature changes a lot this time. When the detected temperature is judged to be an incorrect temperature transition), the warning screen display is not judged and the warning screen display state and the non-display state are maintained as they are. This makes it possible to provide a gaming device that can safely project a high-quality image without being affected by large temporary fluctuations.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix T]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) in place of a liquid crystal display device for displaying a game image or the like (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [T-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device (for example, a temperature detection unit (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element) (for example, , Projector device 3300),
A temperature storage unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 and the SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at every predetermined timing (for example, every one second) and cumulatively stores the temperature.
A warning for determining whether or not to display a warning screen (for example, warning screen (1)) based on the detected temperatures (for example, TempNow, TempOld1, TempOld2, TempOld3) that are cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means. Screen determination means (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200),
A warning screen display count counting unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) that cumulatively counts the warning screen display count when the warning screen transits from the non-display state to the display state,
The warning screen display count counting means includes a predetermined transition including a transition to a display state of a warning screen based on a difference between at least the present detected temperature and the previous detected temperature by a predetermined value (for example, 15° C.) or more. A game machine (for example, a game machine 3001) characterized in that when the non-counting condition is satisfied, the number of times the warning screen is displayed is controlled so as not to be cumulatively counted.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when displaying or hiding the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting unit, the number of times the warning screen is displayed under a predetermined condition is not counted. Therefore, the number of accurate (substantial) temperature errors can be grasped, and by this, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [T-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [T-1].
The warning screen display count counting unit controls the data representing the warning screen display count to be coded (for example, coded into a two-dimensional code) and displayed on the display unit (for example, the sub liquid crystal display device 3023). Is configured as follows.

With such a configuration of the present invention, the number of times the warning screen is displayed is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine in a coded state. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the warning screen by photographing and decoding the code of the display means. It is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of grasping the number of times of display and capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [T-3] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element;
A temperature storage unit that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at each predetermined timing and that stores the temperature cumulatively;
Based on the detected temperature cumulatively stored in the temperature storage means, a warning screen determination means for determining whether to display a warning screen,
A warning screen display number counting means for cumulatively counting the number of times the warning screen has been changed from the non-display state to the display state,
The warning screen display count counting means satisfies at least a predetermined non-counting condition including a transition to a display state of a warning screen based on a difference between the detected temperature of this time and the detected temperature of the previous time by a predetermined value or more. The game device (for example, the game display device 7001) is characterized in that the number of times the warning screen is displayed is controlled not to be cumulatively counted.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when displaying or hiding the warning screen is determined based on the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting unit, the number of times the warning screen is displayed under a predetermined condition is not counted. Therefore, the number of accurate (substantial) temperature errors can be grasped, and by this, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix U]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) in place of a liquid crystal display device for displaying a game image or the like (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [U-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device (for example, a projector) including at least a temperature detecting means (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c)) for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element. Device 3300),
A temperature storage unit (for example, the sub CPU 3201 and the SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200) that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at every predetermined timing (for example, every one second) and cumulatively stores the temperature.
When the detected temperature rises with the passage of time, and when the detected temperature becomes equal to or higher than a reference operating temperature (for example, 25° C.), the detected temperature is set to a first temperature (for example, an adjustment unit temperature). Every 2.5° C.), the brightness of the image projected by the projection device is reduced by a first predetermined value (for example, 2%), and the detected temperature decreases with time. Then, when the detected temperature becomes equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature, the detected temperature is decreased to a second temperature higher than the first temperature (for example, 5° C. set as the adjustment unit temperature). For each time, the brightness adjusting means (for example, sub-control) for controlling to increase the brightness of the image projected by the projection device by a second predetermined value (for example, 2% which is the same as the first predetermined value, or other value). A sub-CPU 3201) of the board 3200, and a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the brightness of the projection device is changed according to the change in the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and when the detected temperature rises, for example, the brightness increases by 2° C. every 2° C. %, the brightness is changed so that, for example, when the detection temperature is decreased, the brightness is increased by 2% every 5° C. decrease. Therefore, the brightness is changed more when the detection temperature is decreased than when it is decreased. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image by performing a gradual response to the brightness when the detected temperature rises and a careful response to the brightness when the detected temperature falls. It will be possible.

The invention [U-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [U-1].
In the case where the detected temperature decreases with time, and the detected temperature is equal to or lower than the reference operating temperature for a certain period of time (for example, 1 minute), the brightness adjusting unit operates the projection device. It is configured to restore the brightness of the projected image to the initial brightness.

With such a configuration of the present invention, when the temperature lower than the reference operating temperature is maintained for a certain time when the detected temperature falls, the brightness is returned to the initial brightness, so that the detected temperature rises again or the temperature changes rapidly. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image.

The invention [U-3] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element;
A temperature storage unit that acquires the detected temperature detected by the temperature detection unit at each predetermined timing and that stores the temperature cumulatively;
An image projected by the projection device every time when the detected temperature rises with time and when the detected temperature is equal to or higher than a reference operating temperature, the detected temperature rises by a first temperature. When the detected temperature falls below the reference operating temperature when the detected temperature decreases with time and the detected temperature decreases below the reference operating temperature. And a brightness adjusting means for controlling the brightness of the image projected by the projection device to increase by a second predetermined value each time the second temperature is lowered to a larger extent. For example, a game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the brightness of the projection device is changed according to the change in the detected temperature detected by the temperature detecting means, and when the detected temperature rises, for example, the brightness increases by 2° C. every 2° C. %, the brightness is changed so that, for example, when the detection temperature is decreased, the brightness is decreased by 2% every 5° C. decrease. Therefore, the brightness is changed more when the detection temperature is decreased than when the detection temperature is increased. (EN) Provided is a game device that can be projected gently and can project a high-quality image safely by urgently responding to the luminance when the detected temperature rises and carefully responding to the luminance when the detected temperature falls. Is possible.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

[Appendix V]
[Background Art]

Some conventional game machines use a projector (projection device) in place of a liquid crystal display device for displaying a game image or the like (see Patent Documents 1 and 2). In such a gaming machine, an image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen.
[Prior Art Document]
[Patent Document]

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-6-35066 [Patent Document 2] JP-A-2009-240459 [Summary of the Invention]
[Problems to be Solved by the Invention]

However, the operating time of the game machine is often long, and it is required to continue safely projecting high-quality images with high visual effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.
[Means for solving the problem]

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine and gaming device.

The invention [V-1] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element (for example, an LED light source (3331R, 3331G, 3331B)) capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element (for example, DMD3333) capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device (for example, a temperature detection unit (for example, temperature sensor (3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d)) for detecting the temperature near the first optical element or the temperature near the second optical element) (for example, , Projector device 3300),
The detected temperature based on the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit is received from the projection device at every predetermined timing (for example, every one second), and when the detected temperature is negative, the detected temperature is 0° C. If the detected temperature changes over time, the detected temperature before the change is set as the previous temperature (for example, TempOld1), and the detected temperature after the change is cumulatively stored as the current temperature (for example, TempNow). Storage means (for example, the sub CPU 3201 and SRAM 401 of the sub control board 3200),
When the previous temperature is other than 0° C. and the current temperature becomes 0° C. for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second which is the reception timing of the detected temperature), a warning screen (for example, warning screen (1) ) And a warning screen determination means (for example, the sub CPU 3201 of the sub control board 3200) for determining to display), and a gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine 3001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the current temperature and the previous temperature are updated only when the detected temperature changes, and the abnormal condition in which the previous temperature is other than 0° C. and the current temperature is 0° C. continues for a predetermined period. In this case, a warning screen is displayed, so that it is possible to know that the detected temperature of 0° C. has been continuously transmitted from the projection device, thereby providing a gaming machine that can safely project high-quality images. It becomes possible to do.

The invention [V-2] of the present invention has the following constitution in the invention [V-1].
The projection device is
When the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit is negative, the temperature management unit (for example, the control LSI 3311 of the projector control board 3310) that transmits the detected temperature as 0° C. is configured.

With such a configuration of the present invention, since the detected temperature is corrected in the projection device, when a negative detection temperature is received by the temperature storage means of the gaming machine, for example, the projection device and the sub-control It is thought that the noise between the boards is the cause, and it is possible to reliably grasp the number of times such noise has occurred, which makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can safely project high-quality images. Becomes

The invention [V-3] of the present invention has the following constitution.
A first optical element capable of irradiating light,
A second optical element capable of reflecting the light emitted from the first optical element;
A projection device having at least a temperature detecting means for detecting a temperature near the first optical element or a temperature near the second optical element;
The detected temperature based on the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit is received from the projection device at every predetermined timing, and when the detected temperature is negative, the detected temperature is set to 0° C. When changing with the passage of time, the detected temperature before the change is the previous temperature, the temperature storage means for cumulatively storing the detected temperature after the change as the current temperature,
A warning screen determination means that determines to display a warning screen when the previous temperature is other than 0° C. and the situation where the current temperature is 0° C. continues for a predetermined period. A device (for example, a game display device 7001).

With such a configuration of the present invention, the current temperature and the previous temperature are updated only when the detected temperature changes, and the abnormal condition in which the previous temperature is other than 0° C. and the current temperature is 0° C. continues for a predetermined period. In this case, the warning screen is displayed, so that it is possible to know that the detected temperature of 0° C. has been continuously transmitted from the projection device, and as a result, a gaming device capable of safely projecting high-quality images can be provided. It becomes possible to provide.
[Effect of the invention]

According to the present invention, there are provided a gaming machine and a gaming machine capable of safely projecting a high-quality image having a high visual effect.

1 Gaming Machine G Cabinet G4 Top Wall A Display Unit B1 Projector Cover B12 Top Wall B2, X, X', X" Projector Device B20 Power Supply Circuit B21 Lens Unit B22, X22 Case B23 Projector Control Board B25 Temperature Sensor B25a First Temperature Sensor B25b Second temperature sensor B26a Intake temperature sensor B26b Exhaust temperature sensors B27a to B27c Pulse sensor 210 Projection lens 230 Control LSI
240R, 240G, 240B LED light source 241 DMD
242 Focus mechanism 242A Rack member 242B Lead screw 242C Focus motor 243R, 243G, 243B, 243D, 243Xa, 243Xc Heat sink 244A, 244B Intake fan 245 Exhaust fan 400 Sub CPU
401 SRAM
700 MCU
710 Multi-output scaler LSI
2430, 2431 Heat sinks D1 to D4 Reflecting portion E11a Projection surface (movable projection surface)
F1a Projection surface (movable projection surface)
E2 Front screen drive mechanism F2 Reel screen drive mechanism MS Main control board SS Sub control board SK Scaler board RD Reel drive board DS Door relay board FC1 First optical fiber cable FC2 Second optical fiber cable DD19 Sub liquid crystal display device DD19T Touch panel 3001, 3001' , 4001, 4001', 5001, 6001 Gaming machine 3100, 5100 Irradiation unit 3101, 7330 Projector cover 3200, 4200, 4200', 5200, 6200 Sub control board 3210, 7310 Intake fan 3211, 7311 Pulse sensor 3300, 4300, 4300a , 4300b, 6300a, 6300b Projector device 3310, 4310, 4310', 6310 Projector control board 3330, 4330, 4330', 6330 Optical mechanism 3331R, 3331G, 3331B LED light source 3332 Lens unit 3333 DMD
3341a, 3341b, 3341c, 3341d, 3341e Temperature sensors 3342a, 3342b Exhaust fans 3343a, 3343b Pulse sensor 7001 Gaming display device 7400 Control unit

Claims (1)

A game machine comprising a projection device capable of projecting an image and a control means for controlling an effect,
The projection device is
Temperature detection means for detecting the temperature of a predetermined location,
Transmitting means for transmitting error information, which is information indicating an abnormality, to the control means when the temperature detected by the temperature detecting means is equal to or higher than a first temperature or a second temperature higher than the first temperature; Equipped with
When the temperature detected by the temperature detection unit receives error information when the temperature is the second temperature, the control unit makes a response to the error information to the projection device,
The projection device further comprises operation stopping means for stopping an operation in operation when receiving a response to the error information.
The game machine characterized in that the operation stopping means stops the operation in operation when a predetermined time elapses without a response to the error information from the control means after the transmitting means transmits the error information.

Images